OK   THK 

University  of  California. 

Received             ^z)  ^^^^          •  ^^9%..- 
Accession  No.  y I/- 6' JZ  ^    .    Class  No.  ^iM"^ 

Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/essentialsoflatiOOblacrich 


THE 


ESSENTIALS 

LATIN   GEAMMAK. 


BY 

F.  A.   BLACKBURN. 


Nobis  prima  sit  virtus  perspicuitas,  propria  verba,  rectus  ordo ;  . . .  nihil 
neque  desit  neque  superfluat. —  Quint.  Inst.  viii.  2,  22. 


BOSTON: 

PUBLISHED   BY   GINN,   HEATH,    &   CO. 

1883. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1883,  by 

F.  A.  BLACKBURN, 
in  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


J.  S.  CusHiNG  &  Co.,  Printers,  Boston. 


PEEFACE 


THIS  book  is  the  outgrowth  of  several  years'  experience  in  teach- 
ing Latin  to  beginners.  Portions  of  it  were  ch-awn  up  some 
years  ago  for  the  use  of  my  own  classes ;  the  success  that  has  followed 
the  use  of  them  has  led  to  the  completion  of  the  lacking  portions  and 
the  publication  of  the  whole. 

The  objects  kept  in  view  in  compiling  the  book  were  two:  without 
omitting  essentials,  to  make  a  book  small  enough  to  be  mastered  by  a 
beginner,  and  to  arrange  the  principles  of  grammar  contained  in  it  as 
systematically  as  possible,  thus  making  them  easy  to  learn  and  easy  to 
keep.  The  first  object  I  have  ift-ie^  ft)  l^cure  by  studied  conciseness 
of  statement  and  by  the  omission  of  all  that  Latin  has  in  common 
with  English,  e.g.,  definitions  of  the  parts  of  speech,  kinds  of  sen- 
tences, subject,  object,  etc. ;  rules  for  the  use  of  adverbs,  conjunctions, 
and  the  like.  The  object  of  these  omissions,  however,  was  not  brevity 
alone,  but  rather  simplicity.  I  have  assumed  that  the  book  will  be 
put  into  the  hands  of  pupils  who  have  already  studied  English  Gram- 
mar, and  I  believe  that  loss  of  time  is  only  a  part  of  the  harm  of 
requiring  a  pupil  to  relearn  a  grammatical  definition  or  principle 
couched  in  new  words.  The  book  will  not  be  found  suitable,  there- 
fore, for  pupils  who  have  not  mastered  the  elements  of  grammar, 
unless  the  teacher  shall  supplement  it  with  the  needed  definitions. 

The  second  point  aimed  at  is  partly  a  matter  of  grammatical  sys- 
tem, partly  of  typography.  Whether  my  classification  of  the  facts 
and  principles  of  the  Latin  tongue  is  any  help  to  the  pupil  in  learning 
them  and  keeping  them,  is  a  question  for  the  teacher  who  may  use  the 


PREFACE. 


book.  The  avraugeinent  of  these  facts  and  principles  on  the  J^age, 
however,  will  commend  itself,  I  hope,  to  all.  The  coarser  print  con- 
tains those  portions  of  the  grammar  of  the  language,  which,  in  my 
judgment,  should  be  absolutely  mastered;  the  smallest  amount  to 
which  memorizing  can  be  limited.  The  notes  contain  illustrations, 
explanations,  and  those  limitations  of  grammatical  principles  which 
are  the  outgrowth  of  usage,  and  which  should  be  gradually  learned  by 
daily  reference  in  the  course  of  reading  a  Latin  author.  ^Much  that 
is  in  the  notes  should  be  memorized ;  how  much,  is  a  question  left  to 
the  judgment  of  the  teacher,  and  the  answer  will  depend  on  circum- 
stances :  the  amount  of  time  at  the  disposal  of  the  class,  the  age  and 
character  of  the  pupils,  the  requirements  of  the  college  they  have  in 
view,  etc.  The  duplicate  numbering  serves  to  connect  the  notes  to 
the  statements  they  illustrate  or  explain,  and  is  simple  enough,  I  hope, 
to  save  the  vexation  and  loss  of  time  incurred  in  trying  to  find  a 
reference  in  a  book  systematically  sub-divided  and  classified.  The 
numbering  answers  the  same  purpose  as  paging :  convenience  of  refer- 
ence. A  bracketed  reference  refers  to  a  note  ;  such  a  reference,  given 
orally,  may  be  called  simply  "  note,'"  e.g.  [142]  may  be  read  "  note  142." 
It  is  not  claimed,  of  course,  that  so  small  a  book  contains  a  com- 
plete exposition  of  the  principles  of  the  Latin  tongue,  or  a  complete 
history  of  the  growth  of  the  forms  and  usage  of  Latin  speech,  and  the 
book  is  not  intended  for  those  who  pursue  the  study  of  the  language 
so  far.  Such  should  provide  themselves  with  larger  and  fuller  trea- 
tises. It  is  intended  for  that  class  of  pupils  who  study  Latin  in  school 
and  college  for  the  training  it  gives  in  clearness  of  thought  and  ex- 
actness of  speech,  but  whose  tastes  or  plans  of  life  and  work  do  not 
lead  them  to  the  higher  and  more  attractive  study  of  the  life  and 
growth  of  the  language.  I  have,  therefore,  omitted  discussions  of  the 
origin  and  growth  of  forms  and  idioms,  or  of  the  development  of 
syntactical  usages,  as  well  as  all  illustrations  drawn  from  comparative 
grammar.  I  have  tried  to  include,  however,  all  the  grammatical  in- 
formation needed  for  a  high  school  or  for  the  early  years  of  a  college ; 


PREFACE. 


to  the  point,  in  fact,  where  the  better  colleges  now  give  the  pupil  the 
option  of  continuing  classical  studies,  or  substituting  other  branches 
more  to  his  taste.  I  have  tried,  moreover,  to  so  arrange  the  facts  and 
usages  of  Latin  speech,  that  the  pupil  who  carries  his  studies  beyond 
the  limit  of  the  book,  shall  not  be  obliged  to  nnlearn,  but  only  to  sup- 
plement, what  he  has  already  mastered. 

It  is  proper  to  add  that  I  put  forth  no  claim  to  original  research, 
my  object  being  to  make  a  school-book.  If  the  plan  and  arrangement 
do  not  justify  its  publication,  there  is  nothing  else  in  it  to  do  so.  I 
have  not  tried,  moreover,  in  seeking  for  the  best  and  clearest  arrange- 
ment, to  avoid  what  has  been  already  used  by  others.  I  have  freely 
taken  from  every  source,  whatever,  in  the  way  of  expression  or  classi- 
fication, seemed  good  for  my  purpose.  The  teacher  who  is  familiar 
with  the  various  Latin  grammars  issued  within  the  last  twenty  years, 
will  find  much  taken  directly  from  them ;  more  than  I  can  acknowl- 
edge in  detail.  On  questions  of  fact  and  usage,  I  have  depended 
almost  entirely  on  Roby's  Latin  Grammar,  and  have  drawn  freely  on 
his  citations  from  Latin  authors,  for  illustrative  examples.  His  full 
collections  of  illustrative  words  and  sentences  have  saved  a  great 
amount  of  labor  that  would  have  been  needed  to  find  appropriate 
illustrations. 

I  shall  be  grateful  for  criticism  from  any  source,  especially  for  cor- 
rections or  suggestions  from  teachers  who  may  have  occasion  to  test 
the  value  of  the  book  by  actual  use  with  classes. 

F.  A.  BLACKBURN. 

San  Francisco,  Cal.,  Feb.  17,  1883. 


OONTEITTS 


PART    I.  — SOUNDS. 

Alphabet  and  Pronunciation 1-13 

Alphabet ^ 

Vowels,  their  sounds 2 

Open  and  close  vowels ^ 

Diphthongs ■* 

Sounds  of  diphthongs ^ 

Sounds  of  the  consonants ^H 

Classification  of  consonants 1^ 

Double  consonant  x 1^ 

Quantity  and  Accent 14r-20 

Long  syllables 14, 15 

Short  syllables     . 16,17 

Common  syllables ^° 

Accent ♦  1^»2^ 


PART  II.  —  FORMS. 

Inflection 21-26 

Inflection 21,22 

Inflection  of  nouns 23 

Inflection  of  adjectives 24 

Inflection  of  pronouns 25 

Inflection  of  verbs 26 

Stem  and  Suffixes;   Theme  and  Endings         .        .        •  27-29 

Stem  and  sufl^es 27 

Theme  and  endings 28, 29 


CONTENTS. 


Gender 30-40 

Three  genders 30 

Natural  and  grammatical  gender        .....  31 

Naturally  masculine  nouns 32,  33 

Naturally  feminine  nouns 34-36 

Naturally  neuter  nouns 37,  38 

Naturally  common  nouns 39, 40 

Person,  Number  and  Case 41-49 

Person  and  number 41 

Cases 42 

Nominative  case 43 

Genitive  case 44 

Dative  case 45 

Accusative  case       .         .         .         , 46 

Vocative  case 47 

Ablative  and  locative  cases 48 

Direct  and  oblique  cases 49 

The  Declensions     .        .        . 50-63 

Six  forms  of  declension 60 

Two  groups 51 

Open-vowel  declensions 61 

Close-vowel  and  consonant  declensions 51 

The  a-declension 62-56 

Theme  and  stem 52 

Endings 53,54 

Locative  of  a-stems 65 

Gender  of  a-stems 66 

The  e-declension 57-60 

Theme  and  stem          .       ' 57 

Endings 58 

Gender  of  e-stems 59, 60 

The  o-deelension 61-69 

Theme  and  stem •        .  61 

Endings 62,63 

Vocative  of  o-stems 64 

Locative  of  o-stems 65 

Stems  in  -6ro 66 

Stems  in  -io 67 

deus,  its  irregularities 68 

Gender  of  o-stems 69 


CONTENTS. 


Adjective  stems  in  -a  and  -o 70-72 

Declension  of  ar  and  o-stem  adjectives 70 

Irregular  adjectives 71 

duo  and  ambo 72 

The  Consonant-declension 73-90 

Theme  and  stem 73 

Endings 74,75 

Weakening  of  stem-vowel 76 

Locative  of  consonant-stems 77 

Loss  of  ending  in  semi-vowel  stems 78 

Loss  of  n  in  nominative  singular 79 

Stems  in -6r .  80 

L*regularitie8 81 

Gender  of  consonant-stems 82-90 

Adjectives  with  Stems  in  a  Consonant        ....       91-93 

Declension  of  consonant-stem  adjectives        ....  91 

Adjectives  comprised 92, 93 

The  i-declension 94-105 

Theme  and  stem 94 

Classes  of  i-stems 95-98 

Endings 99-101 

Stems  in  -gri 102 

Gender  of  i-stems 103-105 

Adjectives  with  Stems  in  -* 106-108 

Declension  of  i-stem  adjectives 106 

Adjectives  comprised      ....."..         107, 108 

The  ««-declension 109-113 

Theme  and  stem 109 

Endings 110,111 

Monosyllabic  u-stems 112 

Gender  of  u-stems 113 

Irregular  Declension 114-117 

Numeral  Adjectives •        •        •  US 

Comparison  of  Adjectives    ..'....       119-123 

Suffixes  of  comparison 119, 120 

Stems  in -6r, -6ro, -6ri, -m 121 

Compounds  of  -dicus,  -ficus,  -volus        ....  122 

Comparison  by  the  use  of  magis,  maxlme  ....        123 


CONTENTS. 


Forms  of  Pronouns 124-141 

The  personal  pronouns    .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         124 

Declension  of  the  personal  pronouns  ....  125 

Possessive  pronouns 126 

Demonstrative  pronouns 127, 128 

Declension  of  is,  ea,  id 129 

Declension  of  iste,  ista,  istud 130 

Declension  of  ille,  ilia,  iUud 131 

Declension  of  ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum 132 

Declension  of  Mc,  haec,  hoc 133, 134 

Strengthened  forms  of  ille  and  iste 135 

Declension  of  idem,  eadem,  idem        ....         136, 137 
Declension  of  the  relative  pronoun,  qvi,  qvae,  qvod        .  138 

Declension  of  the  interrogative  pronoun,  qvis,  qvae,  qvid   .         139 
Declension  of  the  indefinite  pronoun,  qvi  or  qvis      .         .  140 

Declension  of  the  indefinite  compounds  of  qvi  or  qvis  141 

Forms  of  the  Verb 142-154 

Tenses  and  moods  of  the  finite  verb        ....  142-147 

Non-finite  verb-forms 148-152 

Passive  verb-forms 153 

Deponent  verbs 154 

Verb-stems 155-169 

Forms  of  verb-stems 155 

Simple  stem ;  present  stem ;  perfect  stem       ....         156 

Formation  of  present  stem 157-162 

Formation  of  perfect  stem 163-167 

Principal  parts  of  the  verb 168, 169 

Verbal  Suffixes 170-190 

Two  elements  of  verb-suflixes 170 

Mood-and-tense  signs 171-177 

Tense-base 178 

Suffixes  of  finite  verb-forms    ; 179-182 

Suffixes  of  non-finite  verb-forms 183-187 

Endings  of  perfect  active  indicative  and  infinitive         .  188-190 

The  Conjugations 191-214 

Five  conjugations 191 

Theme  of  the  incomplete  tenses 192 

Inflection  of  the  incomplete  tenses 193 

Endings  of  the  incomplete  tenses ;  a-stems        .        .        .  194, 195 

Endings  of  the  incomplete  tenses ;  e-stcms     .        .        .  196, 197 


CONTENTS. 


Endings  of  the  incomplete  tenses ;  consonant  and  u-steras      198,  199 

Two  forms  of  inflection  of  i-stems 200 

Endings  of  the  incomplete  tenses  ;  short  i-stems        .         .     201,  202 
Endings  of  the  incomplete  tenses ;  long  i-stems     .         .  203, 204 

Theme  of  the  complete  tenses 205 

Endings  of  the  complete  tenses 206 

Formation  of  the  complete  tenses ;  passive  voice       .         .  207 

Theme  of  simple  stem  forms 208 

Endings  of  simple  stem  forms 200 

Periphrastic  forms  made  from  the  participles         .        .         210-214 

Irregular  Verb-forms         .         . 215-229 

Loss  of  V  in  perfect  stem .  215 

Loss  of  imperative  ending  in  die,  due,  fac       .        .        .  216 

Specially  irregular  verbs 217-220 

sum,  esse,  f  ui 221 

Compounds  of  sum 222 

edo,  edere,  edi,  esum 223 

fero,  ferre,  tuli,  latum 224 

volo,  velle,  volui ;  nolo,  nolle,  nolui;  malo,  malle,  malui  225 

do,  dare,  dedi,  datum 226 

eo,  ire,  ivi,  itum 227 

Qveo,  qvire,  qvivi,  qvitumj   neqveo,  neqvire,  neqvivi, 

neqvitum 228 

fio,  fieri 229 

Impersonal  and  Defective  Verbs 230-235 


PART  III.  —  WORD-FORMATION. 

Roots  and  Stems 236-238 

Boots 236 

Stems 237,238 

Formation  of  Nouns 239-241 

Nouns  from  nouns 239 

Nouns  from  adjectives 240 

Nouns  from  verbs 241 

Formation  of  Adjectives 242-244 

Adjectives  from  nouns    . 242 

Adjectives  from  adjectives 243 

Adjectives  from  verbs 244 


xii  CONTENTS. 


Formation  of  Verbs 24&-24:7 

Verbs  from  nouns  and  adjectives    .....         245, 246 
Verbs  from  verbs         ........  247 

Formation  of  Adverbs 248,  249 

Case  forms  used  as  adverbs 248 

Adverbs  from  nouns,  adjectives  and  verbs     ....        249 

Formation  of  Prepositions,  Conjunctions  and  Interjections 

250,  251 
Composition 252 


PART  IV.  —  SYNTAX. 

Person,  Number,  Voice,  Concord 253-257 

Person,  number  and  voice 253 

Agreement  of  the  appositive 254 

Agreement  of  the  adjective 255 

Agreement  of  the  pronoun 256 

Agreement  of  the  finite  verb 257 

Use  of  the  Cases 258-308 

Nominative 258-260 

Vocative 261 

Accusative 262-268 

Dative 269-272 

Locative       . 273,274 

Genitive 275-291 

Ablative 292-308 

Use  of  the  Tenses 309-312 

General  use 309 

Perfect  definite  and  indefinite 310 

Primary  and  secondary  tenses 311 

Sequence  of  tenses 312 

Use  of  the  Moods 313-333 

Indicative  of  statement 313 

Indicative  of  question 314 

Imperative  of  command 316 

Subjunctive  of  doubtful  statement 316 

Subjunctive  of  doubtful  question 317 

Subjunctive  of  doubtful  command 318-321 


CONTENTS. 


Subjunctive 
Subjunctive 
Subjunctive 
Subjunctive 
Subjunctive 
Subjunctive 
Subjunctive 
Subjunctive 
Subjunctive 
Subjunctive 
Subjunctive 
Subjunctive 


of  dependent  statement 
of  dependent  question     . 
of  dependent  command 
in  purpose  clauses  . 
in  result  clauses  . 
in  conditions  impliedly  false 
in  causal  clauses 
in  concessive  clauses 
in  temporal  clauses     . 
in  future  conditions 
in  general  conditions  . 
by  attraction   . 


Use  of  the  Non-finite  Verb-forms 

The  infinitive 

Uses  of  the  infinitive       .        .        .        . 

The  participles 

Uses  of  the  participles     .        . 
Peculiar  force  of  the  passive  participles 

The  gerund 

The  gerundive 

The  supine 


322 
323 
324 
325 
326 
327 
328 
329 
330 
331 
332 
333 

334-352 

334 

336-342 

343 

344-34G 

347 

348 

349 

350-352 


PART  v.  — THE    LA-WS    OF    LATIN   VERSE. 

Quantity 353-397 

Latin  versification 353 

General  rules  of  quantity 354 

Special  rules  of  quantity 355 

Tendencies  affecting  quantity    .      ' 356-363 

Quantity  of  stem-vowels  and  suflSxes  of  nouns       .        .         364-373 

,  Quantity  of  stem-vowels  and  sufiixes  of  pronouns      .         .     374-379 

Quantity  of  nominative  singular  of  consonant-stems      .  380-384 

Quantity  of  verb-forms 385-394 

Quantity  of  uninflected  monosyllables 395 

Quantity  of  uninflected  polysyllables         ....     396,  397 

Versification 398-421 

Long  and  short  syllables 398 

Feet 399 

Fundamental  feet 400-404 


CONTENTS. 


Substitute  feet 405 

Dipodies 406 

Verses  and  their  names   . 407, 408 

Most  common  kinds  of  verse      > 409 

Dactylic  hexameter         .......  410, 411 

Dactylic  pentameter 412, 413 

Iambic  and  trochaic  verse 414-416 

Laws  of  the  structure  of  Latin  verse          ....  417-421 

Supplement  to  Syntax 

A.  Negative  particles 422-425 

B.  Interrogative  particles 426-434 

C.  Use  of  the  pronouns 435-445 

D.  Forms  of  conditional  sentences 446-456 

E.  Reported  speech 457-478 

F.  Order  of  words  and  clauses 479-486 

G.  Dates 487-497 

Appendix.  — List  of  Verbs 498 

Index  of  Topics 499 

Index  of  Words 500 


ESSENTIALS  OF  LATIN  GEAMMAE. 


UNIVERSITY 


PART  L— SOUNDS. 


1.    Alphabet   and    Pronunciation. 

The  Latin  alphabet  has  no  w ;  otherwise  it  is  like 
the  English. 

The  vowels  are  a,  e,  i,  o,  u.  They  are  sounded, 
when  long,  like  the  same  vowels  in  the  English  words, 
father^  they^  pique^  ore^  rude.  When  short,  they  have 
the  same  sound,  but  more  shortly  uttered ;  nearly  like 
the  same  vowels  in  half^  them,  pick,  obey,  full. 


[1]  K  is  found  in  Old  Latin,  but  is  rare  in  the  later  language,  being 
replaced  by  c.  Q  is  used  for  c  before  v.  I  was  used  for  both  i  and  j, 
and  II  for  both  u  and  v;  but  they  are  often  distinguished  in  modern 
print,  except  that  a  is  used  for  v  after  q,  g,  and  s.  (For  the  sake  of 
exactness,  they  are  distinguished  in  this  book,  j  and  v  being  always  con- 
sonants, i  and  u  vowels.) 

Y  and  z  are,  strictly  speaking,  not  Latin  letters,  but  were  bt)rrowed 
from  the  Greek.     They  are  found  only  in  Greek  words. 

[2]  Long  vowels  are  marked  a,  e,  i,  o,  5  ;  short,  S,  6, 1,  d,  ii.  Some- 
times in  manuscripts  and  inscriptions  long  vowels  are  indicated  by  writing 
them  double.     For  long  i,  ei  is  written  in  such  cases  (not  ii). 

EUPHONIC    CFIANGES   OF    VOWELS. 

(a)  Before  final  consonants,  except  s,  long  vowels  are  often  shortened. 

{h)  Before  ns  and  nf  short  vowels  are  lengthened. 

(c)  The  short  vowels  are  often  "weakened,"  sometimes  from  a  shifting 
of  the  accent,  often  without  any  apparent  reason.  The  tendency  in  vowel- 
weakening  is  from  "  open  "  to  "  close."  (See  8.)  Thus  a  weakens  to  o  and  u, 
or  to  e  and  1;  o  weakens  to  u,  e  to  i.    Less  often  o  weakens  to  e,  u  to  i. 

{d)  The  same  weakening  sometimes  takes  place  in  long  vowels  and 
diphthongs,  but  rarely. 

(e)  This  tendency  is  checked  and  modified  by  various  causes,  a  common 
one  being  the  character  of  the  following  sound.  Thus  the  open  vowels 
(see  3)  are  favorites  before  two  consonants,  the  close  ones  before  single 
mutes ;  the  open  vowels  before  liquids  and  spirants,  the  close  ones  before 
nasals  and  s. 


PART  L  — SOUNDS. 


7 

8 

9 

10 

11 


A,  e,  o,  are  open  vowels  ;  i,  ii,  close  vowels. 
The  diphthongs  are  made  up  of  an  open  vowel- 
sound,   followed   by  a   close    one.      Each   sound   is 
uttered,  but  the  two   are  run  into  one  syllable  in 
pronunciation. 

The  diphthongs  are  ae,  6e,  ei,  au,  eii.  Ae  is 
sounded  like  English  «^  (=  yes)\  oe  like  oi  in  toil; 
au  like  ou  in  loud;  ei  as  in  eight;  eii  as  iw  feud. 

The  consonants  are  sounded  as  in  English,  except 
that 

C  and  g  are  always  "  hard,"  as  in  cave^  give, 
J  sounds  like  y  in  young. 
T  sounds  like  t  in  tongue. 
S  sounds  like  s  in  sin. 
V  sounds  like  w  in  tvin. 


[3]  So  named  from  the  fact  that  tlie  organs  of  speech  are  more  open, 
or  less  open  in  uttering  tliem.  A  is  more  open  than  e  or  o ;  the  latter  are, 
therefore,  sometimes  called  "  medial "  vowels. 

[4J  In  Old  Latin  is  found  the  complete  scliedule  of  diphthongs,  ai,  ei,  ol, 
au,  eu,  ou.  In  the  later  language  ai  becomes  ae;  ei  usually  becomes  C 
or  i;  oi  becomes  oe;  on  becomes  u.  In  some  cases  this  weakening  ten- 
dency has  gone  still  further,  weakening  ae  and  oe  also  to  e  and  u.  The 
simple  vowels  wliich  thus  replace  tlie  older  diplithongs  then  become  subject 
to  the  same  weakening  tendency  as  single  vowels. 

[6]  H  is  sounded  as  in  English,  but  seems  to  have  originally  had  a 
stronger  sound,  as  it  stands  in  place  of  an  older  guttural  nmte.  Before 
s  and  t  it  changes  or  reverts  to  c. 

M  and  s  in  Old  Latin  seem  to  have  been  but  slightly  sounded,  and,  when 
final,  are  often  dropped. 

Y  and  z  of  Greek  words  are  generally  sounded  as  in  English,  but  it 
is  supposed  that  y  had  the  sound  of  French  u. 

The  compounds  eh,  tli,  ph,  are  also  found  in  Greek  words.  It  is 
customary  to  sound  them  as  in  English  chasm,  thin,  phase,  although  it  is 
believed  that  the  Romans  sounded  tliem  in  such  a  way  as  to  give  each 
letter  its  own  sound ;  i.e.,  as  c,  t,  and  p,  followed  by  an  h-sound. 


ALPHABET  AND   PRONUNCIATION. 


The  consonants  are  classified  as  follows : 


Mutes. 

Semi-vowels. 

Breathed. 

Voiced. 

Nasal, 

Liquid. 

Spirant. 

Sibilant. 

Guttural    .     .     . 

h 

Linguo-palatal    . 

c(k,q) 

s 

11 

i 

Linguo-dental     . 

t 

d 

n 

1,  r 

S 

Labio-dental  .     . 

f 

Labial  .... 

P 

b 

m 

V 

X  (called  a  double  consonant)  is  a  short  way  of 
writing  es. 


12 


13 


[12]  The  name  "voiced"  is  given  to  those  sounds,  the  utterance  of 
which  is  attended  by  a  vibration  of  tlie  vocal  chords,  thus  making  "  voice  " ; 
the  others,  consisting  of  mere  expulsion  of  breath,  are  called  "  breathed." 
Of  the  semi-vowels,  f  and  s  are  breathed ;  the  others  are  voice-letters,  as 
are  also  all  the  vowels.  The  names  "  guttural,"  etc.,  refer  to  the  organs 
used  in  uttering  the  sounds. 

Qv  and  gv  are  treated  as  single  consonants  by  the  Latins,  like  single 
c  and  g.    In  many  words  the  spelling  varies  between  qv  and  c. 

EUPHONIC  CHANGES  OF  CONSONANTS. 

(a)  The  sounds  of  j  and  v  are  so  much  like  those  of  i  and  u  that  they 
are  not  only  represented  by  the  same  letters,  but,  in  poetry,  are  sometimes 
interchanged.  Thus  abiete  becomes  abjete ;  Gajus  becomes  Gains ;  cui 
becomes  cv^i ;  silv^ae  becomes  siluae,  etc.  V  regularly  becomes  u  when 
brought  before  a  consonant;  sometimes  qv  becomes  cu,  but  usually  c. 

(6)  Doubled  consonants  at  the  end  of  a  word  are  not  found  in  Latin, 
but  one  is  dropped.  Often,  also,  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  one  consonant 
is  written  where  the  derivation  or  formation  would  require  two. 

(e)  Between  two  vowels  s  usually  changes  to  r,  and  h  and  v  are  often 
dropped.  J  sometimes  drops  before  i,  and  s  sometimes  changes  to  r  in 
other  positions  than  between  vowels. 

Consonant  sounds  are  often  modified  when  brought  together  in  inflec- 
tion or  word-formation.  Usually  the  preceding  sound  adapts  itself  more 
or  less  fully  to  the  following.     Thus  : 

{d)  Before  s,  t  and  d  become  s.  [ss  thus  formed  is  often  changed  to  s. 
See  (6)  above.] 


PAKT  L  — SOUNDS. 


14 
15 


2.    Quantity  and  Accent. 

A  syllable  is  long 

(«)  When  it  contains  a  long  vowel  or  a  diphthong. 
(5)  When  its  vowel,  naturally  short,  is  followed 
by  two  consonants. 


(e)  Before  a  liquid,  n  is  often  changed  to  that  liquid. 

{/)  In  tlie  prepositions  ab,  ad,  ob,  sub,  com,  in,  tliis  tendency  goes 
much  further,  and  the  final  sound  of  these  words  is  assimilated  to  various 
sounds.  (Assimilation  of  a  preceding  to  a  following  sound  also  occurs  in 
many  other  cases,  which  cannot  be  enumerated  or  classified  in  an  elemen- 
tary work.) 

In  cases  (d),  (e),  and  (/),  there  is  entire  assimilation  of  the  preceding 
sound  to  the  following  one.  In  the  following,  partial  assimilation  takes 
place. 

(g)  Before  a  breath-consonant,  the  voice-mutes  change  to  the  corre- 
sponding breath-mutes.  But  assimilation  often  takes  place,  especially  of 
the  final  mutes  of  prepositions,  and  dt  and  tt  often  change  to  st,  ss,  or  s. 
G,  h,  gv,  and  qv  change  to  c  before  a  following  s,  and  make  x,  i.e.,  cs. 
Bs  is  generally  written,  but  is  always  pronounced  as  ps. 

{h)  Before  a  mute  the  nasals  become  of  the  same  character  as  the  mute, 
m  before  labials,  n  before  palatals  and  dentals.  (N  lias  two  sounds,  as  in 
English  ;  that  of  a  palatal  nasal  (Eng.  shic/)  before  palatal  mutes,  and  that 
of  a  dental  nasal  (Eng.  sin)  elsewhere.)  M  before  s  is  changed  to  n  or 
assimilated,  but  in  some  cases  a  parasitical  p  is  inserted  between  m  and  s ; 
e.fj.,  hicmps  (for  hlems),  suinpsi  (for  sunisi),  etc. 

(i)  In  combinations  of  consonants  difficult  to  utter,  one  is  often  dropped. 

(The  changes  given  here  are  not  always  made  in  writing,  and  it  is  not 
easy  to  decide  how  fully  they  were  made  in  speaking.  Perhaps  it  would 
be  the  wisest  course  for  a  beginner  to  pronounce  the  words  as  he  finds 
them  written.) 

[14J  Whether  any  particular  vcvel  is  long  or  short,  must  often  be 
learned  by  consulting  a  lexicon,  but  vowels  formed  by  contraction  are 
long. 

[16]  A  mute  or  f  foUowed  by  1  or  r  does  not  make  a  long  syllable,  but 
a  common  one.  See  18.  X  and  Greek  z  are  two  consonants,  and  qv, 
gv  are  single  consonants.  See  [12].  To  make  a  long  syllable,  one  of  the 
consonants  must  be  in  the  same  word  with  the  preceding  short  vowel ;  a 


QUANTITY  AND  ACCENT. 

5 

A  syllable  is  short 

(a)  When  it  contains  a  short  vowel. 

16 

(5)  When  its  vowel,  naturally  long,  is  followed  by 

17 

another  vowel. 

A  syllable  is  common 

p.e.,  long  or  short  at  the  option  of  the  writer] 

(a)  When  its  vowel,  naturally  short,  is  followed 

18 

by  a  mute  or  f  with  1  or  r. 

final  short  rowel  seldom  makes  a  long  syllable  with  two  consonants  of  the 
following  word.  Ch,  th,  ph  also  are  single  consonants  in  Greek,  and  do 
not  make  a  long  syllable,  though  two  consonants  are  used  in  Latin  to 
represent  them. 

[17]  An  interposed  h  has  no  effect,  and  the  rule  applies  to  diphthongs  as 
Avell  as  to  single  vowels.  But  in  a  few  cases  a  vowel  remains  long  or  com- 
mon, though  followed  by  another  vowel ;  viz. :  — 

(a)  The  genitive  singular  endings,  ai,  ei,  lus,  and  the  dative  singular 
pronoun  ei. 

{h)  The  syllable  f  i  in  the  verb  fio,  except  before  -er. 

(c)  Proper  names  in  -aliis,  -eius  [poetical  forms  for  -ajus,  -ejtls.  See 
fl2]  (a)J. 

(rf)  eheu,  dius,  DianS,  ohe,  Rhea. 

(e)  Many  Greek  words,  which  usually  keep  their  own  quantity. 

[18]  The  following  combinations  occur :  pr,  br,  cr,  gr,  tr,  dr,  fr ;  pi, 
cl,  f  1.  But  both  consonants  must  be  in  the  same  word  with  the  preceding 
vowel ;  in  different  words  (or  in  different  parts  of  a  compound)  they  make 
a  long  syllable.  In  Greek  words,  a  mute  followed  by  a  nasal  may  make  a 
sliort  syllable  with  a  preceding  short  vowel. 

(The  vowels  of  15,  17,  and  18  are  often  called  long,  short,  or  common 
hy  position.  The  expression,  though  convenient,  is  inexact  as  regards  long 
and  common  syllables ;  for  the  syllable,  not  the  vowel,  is  long  or  common. 
Such  vowels  should  have  their  short  sound ;  but  a  long  vowel  before  two 
consonants  {e.g.,  before  ns  or  nf)  should,  of  course,  have  its  long  sound. 
In  many  cases,  however,  tliere  is  little  or  no  evidence  to  show  the  natural 
quantity  of  the  vowel ;  but  the  pupil  is  more  likely  to  be  right  in  sounding 
it  short.) 


6 

PART  L  — SOUNDS. 

The  accent  in  Latin  is 

19 

(a)  In  words  of  two  syllables,  on  tlie  first  syllable. 

20 

(^)  In  words  of  more  than  two  syllables,  on  the 

penult^  if  that  syllable  is  long;    otherwise, 

on  the  antepenult. 

[19]  The  rules  for  the  accent  of  Latin  words  are  given  by  the  Latin 
grammarians,  who  add  also  the  following  statements  :  — 

(a)  Prepositions,  when  standing  directly  before  their  nouns,  or  before 
an  adjective  or  genitive  limiting  their  nouns,  have  no  accent,  but  are  pro- 
nounced as  one  word  with  the  following.  In  other  positions  they  are 
accented,  with  the  exception  of  cum  when  it  is  attached  enclitically  to 
the  ablative  of  pronoun  forms. 

(/;)  The  enclitic  particles  -ne,  -ve,  -ce,  -met,  -pte,  -dum  (also  -qve 
when  it  means  and,  and  cum,  inde  and  qvando  when  attached  to  a  pre- 
ceding word)  have  no  accent,  but  cause  the  accent  to  fall  on  the  last 
syllable  of  the  word  to  which  they  are  attached;  e.(j.,it6iq\e,  and  thus; 
exinde,  thenceforth  ;  ^cqvando,  man^dum,  etc. 

(c)  The  accent  may  stand  on  the  last  syllable,  or  on  a  short  penult,  if  a 
syllable  has  been  lost ;  e.^.,  viden  (for  videsne),  illic  (for  illice),  nostrds 
(for  nostrdtis),  Vergili  (for  Vergilii),  etc. 

It  is  customary  also,  in  words  of  several  syllables,  to  put  a  secondary 
accent  on  the  second  or  third  syllable  before  the  accented  syllable. 

[20j  Penult,  last  syllable  but  one ;  antepenult,  last  but  two. 


PART   IL  — FORMS. 


Inflection. 


Inflection  is  a  change  in  the  form  of  a  word  to 
denote  some  modification  of  its  meaning  or  to  show 
its  relation  to  other  words.  Nouns,  adjectives,  pro- 
nouns and  verbs  are  inflected  in  Latin. 

Inflection  in  Latin,  as  in  English,  consists  either  in 
a  change  in  the  vowel  of  the  word  or  in  the  addition 
of  syllables;  far  more  often  the  latter.  Sometimes 
both  methods  are  used. 

Nouns  have  inflections  to  denote  number  and  case. 

Adjectives  have  inflections  to  denote  gender^  num- 
ber and  case. 

Pronouns,  when  used  substantively,  have  the  in- 
flections of  nouns ;  when  used  adjectively,  those  of 
adjectives. 

Verbs  have  inflections  to  denote  tense,  mood,  person, 
number  and  voice. 

Stem  and  Suffixes;   Theme  and  Endings. 

Inflection,  in  Latin,  usually  consists  in  adding 
certain  syllables  to  the  ground-form  or  basis  of  the 
inflected  word.  This  ground-form  or  basis  is  called 
a  stem,  and  the  added  syllables  are  called  suffixes. 


21 


22 


23 

24 

25 


26 


27 


1 21]  £".(/.,  servus,  slave;  servi,  slave's ;  pastor,  shepherd;  pastores, 
sheplierds ;  ama-s,  love-st ;  aina-t,  love-s  ;  ama-vit,  love-d ;  etc. 

The  inflection  of  nouns,  adjectives  and  pronouns  is  often  called  declen- 
sion ;  that  of  verbs,  conjugation. 


PAKT  IL  — FORMS. 


When  the  stem  ends  in  a  vowel  and  the  suffix 
begins  with  a  yowel,  the  resulting  contraction  often 
obscures  both  stem-ending  and  suffix.  For  conven- 
ience of  memorizing  we  therefore  divide  inflected 
words  not  onlj  into  stem  and  suffix  but  also  into 
theme  and  ending. 

The  theme  is  that  part  of  the  word  which  remains 
unchanged  in  inflection.  The  endings  are  the  letters 
or  syllables  added  to  the  theme  to  make  the  various 
forms  of  the  word. 

Forms  of  Nouns  and  Adjectives. 

GENDER. 

There  are  three  genders :  masculine.,  feminine^  neuter. 

Gender,  in  Latin,  is  fixed  either  by  the  meaning  or 
by  the  form.  When  fixed  by  the  meaning,  it  is  called 
natural  gender ;  by  the  form,  grammatical. 

Rules  of  natural  gender :  — 

^  .   f  Names  of  male  beings  ) 

(«)  i  XT-  t    '  A  ,  •      f  are  masculine. 

[^  ^ames  of  rivers  and  mountains  ) 

C  Names  oi  female  beings  "^ 

(Jj)  }  Names  of  trees  and  plants  |-  are  feminine. 

(^  Names  of  countries,  toions  and  islands  ) 

J  Indeclinable  nouns  ") 

^  ^  \  Phrases  or  clauses  used  as  nouns  j  ' 

J  Names  that  may  be  used  of  either  sex  ] 

\  Some  names  oi  beasts,  birds,  Jishcs  and  insects  J 


[29]  The  theme  is  always  the  same  as  the  stem  witli  its  final  vowel 
removed,  and  the  endings  consequently  contain  tlie  final  vowel  of  the  stem 
and  the  sutfixes,  both  often  obscured  by  contraction.  If  the  stem  ends  in 
a  consonant,  tlie  stem  and  theme  are  the  same,  and  the  endings  are  the 
simple  suffixes. 

[31]  The  rules  of  grammatical  gender  will  be  given  with  the  various 
declensions. 


FORMS  OF  NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES. 


PERSON,     NUMBER,    AND     CASE. 

In  person  and  number  the  Latin  is  like  the  English. 

There  are  five  cases  in  common  use ;  viz. :  nom- 
inative, genitive,  dative,  accusative,  ablative.  Two 
other  cases,  a  locative  and  a  vocative,  are  found  in 
a  few  w^ords. 

The  nominative  corresponds  to  the  English  nom- 
inative, being  the  case  of  the  subject. 

The  genitive  corresponds  to  the  English  possessive. 

The  dative  corresponds  to  the  English  indirect 
objective. 

The  accusative  corresponds  to  the  English  direct 
objective. 

The  vocative  corresponds  to  the  English  nominative 
in  direct  address. 

The  ablative  and  locative  have  no  corresponding 
cases  in  English. 


41 

42 


43 

44 
45 

46 

47 

48 


[33]  Hadria,  the  Adriatic,  is  masculine,  like  names  of  rivers. 

The  gender  of  rivers,  trees,  countries,  etc.,  is  the  result  of  the  simplicity 
of  primitive  thought  and  conception,  which  gave  life  and  feeling  to  inani- 
mate objec-ts.  In  many  of  these,  however,  the  gender  is  fixed  by  the  form, 
and  they  come  under  the  rules  of  grammatical  gender.  In  most  words, 
also,  there  is  no  contradiction  of  form  and  meaning. 

[37]  Strictly  speaking,  the  neuters  of  37  and  38  fix  their  gender  neither 
by  meaning  nor  by  form,  but  they  are  put  here  for  convenience.  Words 
quoted  only  for  their  form,  without  regard  to  meaning,  come  under  the 
head  of  indeclinable  nouns;  e.r/.,  pater  dixi,  7  said  "pater";  pater  est 
dissyllabum,  "pater"  is  dissi/llabic. 

[39]  Common;  i.e.,  sometimes  masculine,  sometimes /ewmme. 

[40]  But  in  most  of  these  sex  is  not  thought  of,  and  they  are  either 
masculine  or  take  grammatical  gender. 

Words  borrowed  from  the  Greek  keep  the  gender  they  have  in  that 
language. 


10  PART  IL  — FORMS. 


49 


50 


51 


The  nominative  and  vocative  are  sometimes  called 
direct  cases,  the  others  oblique.  The  oblique  cases 
are  often  rendered  into  English  by  prepositions.  The 
genitive  is  most  often  rendered  by  of;  the  dative,  by 
to  or  for ;  the  locative,  by  at  or  in ;  the  ablative,  by 
from^  hy^  in  or  with. 

The  Declensions. 

Nouns  and  adjectives  are  inflected  by  adding  to 
the  stem  the  proper  case-suffixes.  As  these  suffixes 
differ  in  certain  cases  and  are  often  obscured  in  form 
by  contraction  with  the  final  vowel  of  the  stem,  we 
have  six  forms  of  declension,  as  the  stem  ends  in  a 
consonant  or  in  one  of  the  vowels,  a,  e,  i,  o,  u. 

These  six  forms  fall  naturally  into  two  groups ;  viz. : 

A.  Stems  in  an  open  vowel  (a,  e,  o). 

B.  Stems  in  a  consonant  or  a  close  vowel  (i,  n). 


[49]  The  details  of  the  use  of  the  cases  must  be  learned  from  the 
Syntax.  Only  enough  is  given  here  to  enable  the  pupil  to  master 
elementary  exercises. 

[51]  These  groups  are  distinguished  by  different  case-suflixes  in  certain 
cases;  most  clearly  in  the  genitive,  where  A  has  sg.  -i,  pi.  -rdm; 
B,  sg.  -Is,  pi.  -ttni. 

Nouns  and  adjectives  are  usually  classified  into  declensions  according 
to  the  ending  of  the  genitive  singular;  and  lexicons  give,  therefore,  not  the 
stem,  but  the  nominative  and  genitive  singular.  That  the  pupil  may  be 
able  to  refer  each  Avord  to  its  proper  declension,  the  usual  method  of 
classification  is  here  added. 

First  Declension,  gen.  sg.  ending  -ae  =  a-stems. 
Second        "  "      "        "       -i     =  o-stems. 

Third  "  "      "         "       -Is  =  consonant  and  1-stems. 

Fourth         "  "      "        "       -us  =  u-stems. 

Fifth  "  "      "        "       -ei  =  e-stems. 

The  ending  of  the  genitive  singular,  therefore,  distinguishes  all  vowel- 
stems  except  those  in  -1.     Rules  for  distinguishing  i-stems  from  consonant- 


THE  DECLENSIONS.  11 


THE    yt-I>ECI.ENSION.        STEMS    ENDING  IN   -A. 

The  theme  of  any  a-stem  may  be  found  by  dropping 
the  ending  of  tlie  genitive  singular,  -ae.  The  stem 
is  found  by  adding  a  to  the  theme. 

The  final  a  of  the  stem  combines  with  the  case- 
suffixes  to  make  the  following  case-endings,  by  adding 
which  to  the  theme  any  a-stem  may  be  declined :  — 

Sg.lii.    -S      P/.  N.    -ae        E.g.,  mens  ^      meiisae 
G.    -ae  G.    -arttm  mensae     mensarttm 

D.    -ae  D.    -Is  mensae     mens  Is 

Ac.  -Sm  Ac.  -as  mens  Sm   mens  Ss 

Ab.  -a  Ab.  -Is  mens  a      mens  Is 

The  locative  singular  of  a-stems  has  the  ending  -ae. 
The  gender  of  a-stems  is  feminine. 


52 


53 


54 


55 
56 


stems,  by  the  forms  of  the  nominative  and  genitive  singular,  will  be  found 
under  the  i-declension. 

[54]  The  uncontracted  ending  -ai  is  sometimes  found  in  the  genitive 
singular ;  also  -um  for  arum  in  the  genitive  plural. 

Familia,  in  combination  with  pater,  mater,  lilius,  or  filia,  sometimes 
has  the  ending  -as  in  the  genitive  singular.  The  same  ending  is  found  in 
a  few  other  words  in  old  Latin. 

Dea  and  filia  usually  form  the  dative  and  ablative  plural  with  the  end- 
ing -abtts ;  a  few  others  rarely. 

In  poetry,  words  borrowed  from  the  Greek  often  keep  Greek  endings  in 
the  singular.  The  following  are  found  :  nom.  -e,  -as,  -es ;  gen.  -es ;  ace. 
-an,  -en;  abl.  -e.    But  the  regular  Latin  endings  are  common. 

Various  old  endings  are  found  in  inscriptions  and  old  Latin  ;  viz. :  gen. 
sg.  -aes  ;  dat.  sg.  -ai  (diphthong'?) ;  abl.  sg.  -ad  (the  original  abl.  ending) ; 
nom.  pi.  -as;  dat.  and  abl.  pi.  -eis  (another  spelling  of  -is.  See  [2]).  In 
a  few  instances  stems  in  -ia  contract  -iis  in  the  dat.  and  abl.  pi.  to  -is. 

[56]  The  rules  of  grammatical  gender  given  with  the  declensions  apply 
only  to  such  nouns  as  do  not  come  under  the  rules  of  natural  gender, 
32-40. 


12  PART  IL  — FORMS. 


THE    JE7-DECI.ENSION.        STEMS    IN    -E. 

The  theme  of  any  eastern  may  be  found  by  dropping 
the  genitive  singular  ending,  -ei.  The  stem  is  found 
by  adding  e  to  the  theme. 

The  case-endings  are  :  — 

%N.    -gs  P/.  N.    -es  E.g.,  dies  dies 

G.    -ei  G.    -eriim  diei  dieriim 

D.    -ei  D.    -ebiis  die!  diebiis 

Ac.  -gm  Ac.  -es  di  gm  di  es 

Ab. -g  Ab. -gbiis  die  diebiis 

Stems  in  -e  are  feminine, 

But  dies  is  usually  masc. ;  meridies,  always  so. 

THE    O-DECLENSION.        STEMS    IN    -O. 

The  theme  of  any  o-stem  may  be  found  by  dropping 
the  genitive  singular  ending,  -i.  The  stem  is  found 
by  adding  o  to  the  theme. 

The  case-endings  are ;  — 

FOR   MASCULINES. 


%N.    -tts 

PI 

N.    -1 

E.g. 

,  hort  tls 

horti 

G.    -I 

G.    -oriim 

horti 

liortorfim 

D.    -6 

D.      -18 

liort  6 

hort  IS 

Ac.  -ttm 

Ac.  -6a 

hort  tlm 

hort  OS 

Ab.-o 

Ab.  -Is 

hort  6 

liort  Is 

[58]  Tlie  ending  of  the  genitive  and  dative  singidar  is  commonly  -6i 
when  tlie  theme  ends  in  a  consonant ;  viz. :  in  fides,  plebes,  res,  spes. 

Old  or  unusual  endings  are  found  ;  viz. :  gen.  sg.  -es,  -e,  -i ;  dat.  sg.  -e, 
-i.  Stems  in  -c  lack  tlie  plural  except  dies  and  res,  and  a  few  found  in  the 
nom.  and  ace.  pi. ;  viz. :  acies,  effigies,  facics,  scries,  species,  spes ; 
with  eluvics  (nom.)  and  glacies  (ace).  Other  forms  are  cited  by  gram- 
marians, but  not  found  in  literature. 

A  locative  die  is  found  in  old  Latin,  and  in  certain  (so-called)  adverbs 
of  time :  postridie,  pridie^  etc. 


THE  DECLENSIONS.  13 


FOR    NEUTERS. 

Sg.  N".    -iim 

PI 

N. 

-a 

E.g. 

,  don  iim 

donS 

G.    -I 

G. 

-ortim 

doni 

don  oriim 

D.    -6 

D. 

-Is 

don  6 

don  is 

Ac.  -um 

Ac. 

-a 

don  iim 

donS 

Ab.-o 

Ab. 

-IS 

don  6 

don  Is 

Masculine  o-stems  have  a  vocative  singular  with 
the  ending  -e. 

The  locative  singular  of  o-stems  has  the  ending  -I. 

Most  masculine  stems  in  -ero  drop  the  endings  of 
the  nominative  and  vocative  singular,  and  many  of 
them  syncopate  e  in  all  the  other  cases. 

Stems  in  -io  contract  -ie  of  the  vocative  singular 
to  i,  often  also  -ii  of  the  genitive  singular  to  i. 

Dens  has  no  vocative   singular.      In  the  plural, 


63 


64 

65 
66 


67 
68 


[62]  The  older  endings  -6s,  -6m,  are  sometimes  found  for  -iis,  -iim, 
especially  after  v ;  also  -um  (or,  after  v,  -cm)  for  -orum. 

Old  endings,  found  in  inscriptions,  etc.,  are  gen.  sg.  oe  C ),  -ei  (see  [2]) ; 
dat.  sg.  -oi;  abl.  sg.  -od;  nom.  pi.  -es,  -e,  -oe;  also  -ei  (see  [2]) ;  dat.  and 
abl.  pi.  -oes,  -obus  (in  duo  and  ambo,  see  [72]). 

Nouns  borrowed  from  the  Greek  sometimes  keep  Greek  endings.  The 
following  are  found :  nom.  sg.  masc.  -6s ;  neut.  -on ;  gen.  sg.  -o ;  ace.  sg. 
-on,  -6  ;  nom.  pi.  masc.  -oe  ;  gen.  pi.  -on.  Many  Greek  words  are  confused 
in  their  forms,  taking,  in  certain  authors,  or  in  certain  cases,  the  endings  of 
o-stems  ;  at  other  times,  or  in  other  cases,  the  endings  of  consonant-stems. 

[66]  Thus  (from  the  stem  puero)  puer,  pueri,  puero,  etc.;  (from  the 
stem  agero)  ager,  agri,  agro,  etc.  Vir  (stem  viro)  drops  the  nom.  and 
voc.  sg.  endings.  In  old  Latin,  however,  these  endings  are  sometimes 
kept. 

[67]  The  voc.  sg.  of  Tullius,  for  example,  is  TuUi.  Tlie  accent  in 
these  shortened  forms  remains  unchanged;  e.g.,  Domiti  (gen.  or  voc); 
imperi  (gen.).  See  [19],  (c).  Other  cases  of  stems  in  -io  sometimes  con- 
tract ii  to  i.  Stems  in  -ajo,  -ejo,  when  j  changes  to  i  [see  [12]  (a)],  suffer 
a  similar  contraction. 

[68]  Some  editors  print  dii  and  diis  also. 


14 


PART  IL  — FORMS. 


69 

70 

71 
72 


Jjesides  the  regular  forms,  it  has  also  nominative  cli, 
dative  and  ablative  dis. 

Stems  in  -o  with  nominative  singular  ending  -iim 
are  neuter ;  others  are  masculine. 

ADJECTIVE-STEMS    IN    -A    AND    -O. 

Adjective-stems  in  -a  and  -o  are  declined  like 
noun-stems  of  like  form.  (The  feminine  is  an 
a-stem;   the  masculine  and  neuter,  o-stems.) 

A  few  adjectives  have  in  all  genders  -liis  for  geni- 
tive singular  ending,  and  -i  for  dative  singular. 

Duo  and  ambo  have  special  irregularities. 


[69]  But  carb&sus,  humus,  and  vannus  are  feminine ;  alvus  and 
colus  usually  so.     Domus  (see  [115])  is  feminine.  i 

For  pel&gus,  virus,  vulgus,  neuter,  see  [115]. 

[70]  Adjective  stems  in  -lo  are  regular,  and  are  not  shortened  in  tlie 
genitive  and  vocative  singular. 

[71]  Viz.,  alius,  nullus,  solus,  totus,  ullus,  unus,  alter,  uter,  neu- 
ter.   In  poetry  -Ms  is  found,  and,  rarely,  the  regular  endings. 

Alius  has  an  ending  -tid  for  -Om  in  the  neut.  sg.  nom.  and  ace,  and 
contracts  -iius  of  the  gen.  sg.  to  -ifis.  (An  older  stem  all  is  found  in  com- 
pounds and  derivatives,  and  in  the  rare  forms  of  the  nom.  sg.  alls,  alid. 
See  under  the  I-declension,  94  ff . ) 

Satur  drops  the  nom.  sg.  raasc.  ending  (like  stems  in  -€ro). 

EXAMPLES    FOR    PRACTICE. 


alttts 

alta 

altflm 

totfls 

iota 

totOm 

altl 

altae 

alti 

totius 

totius 

totius 

alto 

altae 

alto 

toti 

toti 

toti 

altQm 

altam 

altam 

totam 

totam 

totttm 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

ten6r 

tengra 

tengrflm 

alter 

altera 

altdrttm 

tenCri 

tenCrae 

ten6ri 

alteriQs 

alteritis 

alteritis 

tenfiro 

tenerae 

tenCro 

altCrl 

alteri 

alteri 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

THE  DECLENSIONS. 


15 


THE   CONSONANT-DECLENSION.       STEMS   IN  A 

CONSONANT. 

The  theme  of 

any  consonant-stem  may  be  found 

73 

by  dropping  the 

genitive  singular  endin 

g,  -is.     The 

stem  is  the  same 

as  the  theme. 

The  case-endings  are  ;  — 

FOR    MASCULINES    AND    FEMININES. 

Sg.^.    -s     PL 

N.    -es          E.g.,  dux  (=  dnc 

s)  duces 

G.    -is 

G.    -tim                 due  is 

ductim 

D.    -1 

D.    -ibiis               duel 

due  ibiis 

74 

Ac.  -gm 

Ac.  -es                   due  gm 

duces 

Ab.-g 

Ab.  -ibiis               due  g 

FOR   NEUTERS. 

due  ibiis 

%K    —    PL 

K    -a            E.g.,  caput 

capit  a 

G.    -is 

G.    -iim                 capit  is 

caj)iti1m 

D.    -I 

D.    -ibiis               capit  i 

capit  ibiis 

75 

Ac. — 

Ac.  -S                     capiit 

capit  a 

Ab.-g 

Ab. -ibiis               capit  g 

capit  ibiis 

atSr  atra  atriira 

atri  atrae  atri 

atro  atrae  atro 
etc.           etc.  etc. 

[72]  duo  duae  duo 

duo  rum  duarum  duorum 

duobus  duabtis  duobtig 

duds,  duo  duas  duo 

duobtis  duabtis  duobiis 


fit^r  iitra  utrtim 

utrius  utrias  utriiis 

utrl  utri  utri 
etc.               etc.  etc. 

ambo  ambae  ambo 

amborum     ambarum  amboriim 
etc.               etc.  etc. 


[74] 


EXAMPLES    FOR    PRACTICE. 

[("i)>  (/)>  («)j  and  (c)  show  the  gender.] 


princeps  (c) 

constil  (h?) 

hiems  (/)  [78] 

gQnus  (n) 

m61  (n)  [12]  (6) 

principis 

consults 

hiCmis 

generis 

mellis 

principi 

consuli 

hiemi 

generi 

melli 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

milgs  (m) 

actor  (w<) 

leo(;n)79 

corpfis  (n) 

far  (n)  [12]  (6) 

militis 

actdris 

leonis 

corporis 

f arris 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

16  PART  II.  — FORMS. 


76 


77 
78 

79 


The  last  vowel  of  the  nominative  singular  is  often 
weakened  in  other  cases  when  a  syllable  is  added. 
See  [2]  ((?).  But  in  s-stems  the  stronger  vowel  is 
retained  before  r,  though  weakened  before  s  in  the 
nominative  singular. 

The  locative  singular  of  consonant-stems  ends  in  -i. 

Masculine  and  feminine  semivowel-stems  drop  the 
ending  of  the  nominative  singular. 

Final  n  of  a  stem  falls  after  o  in  the  nominative 
singular. 


pecas  {/) 

6bttr  {n) 

homo  (c)  79 

mos  (m) 

peciidis 

eboris 

homlnis 

morls 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

silex  {c) 

aggCr  (m) 

nomt^n  («) 

tellus  (/) 

silicis 

aggerls 

nomtnis 

telluris  - 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

rex  (m) 

pat6r(«i)80 

caro  (/)  [115] 

aequor  (n) 

regis 

patris 

carnis 

aequorls 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

In  Greek  words  the  Greek  endings  are  sometimes  kept.  The  following 
are  found;  viz.:  gen.  sg. -6s ;  dat.  sg. -I;  ace.  sg. -ft ;  nom.pl.  -gs;  gen. 
pi. -on;  dat.  pi.  -si;  ace.  pi. -fts ;  nom.  and  ace.  pi.  neut.  -e  (contracted 
from  -6ft).  Greek  stems  in  -ftt  sometimes  take  a  dat.  and  abl.  pi.  ending 
-is  like  o-stems,  though  this  is  not  a  Greek  ending  in  consonant-stems. 
See  (62]. 

Old  case-endings  of  consonant-stems  are  gen.  sg.  -us,  -es ;  dat.  sg.  ^e ; 
abl.  sg.  -ed,  -id,  -i ;  dat.  and  abl.  pi.  -ebus. 

[76]  S-stems  (except  vas,  see  [115])  regularly  become  r-stcms  when  a 
case-suflBx  is  added.  See  [12]  (c).  Sometimes  the  final  s  of  the  nom.  and 
ace.  sg.  becomes  r,  thus  making  them  r-stems  throughout.  This  change 
seems  to  have  taken  place  in  jecur  and  robur,  which  show  the  weaker 
vowel  in  the  nominative,  though  the  stronger  6  appears  in  the  other  cases ; 
and  perhaps  ebur  and  femur,  which  show  the  same  peculiarity,  may  be 
explained  in  the  same  way. 

[78]  Except  hiein  (the  only  stem  in  -m),  nom.  hiems  [or  hiemps. 
See  [12]  (/i)]. 

[79]  Not  always,  however,  in  nouns  borrowed  from  the  Greek. 


THE  DECLENSIONS.  17 


A  few  stems  in  -er  syncopate  e,  except  in  the  nom- 
inative singular.     (Compare  stems  in  -ero,  66.) 

A  few  cases  occur  where  consonant-stems  take  the 
endings  of  i-stems.  Such  forms  are  irregular,  a  result 
of  the  confusion  caused  by  the  close  likeness  of  the 
two  declensions. 

Most  mute-stems  are  feminine, 

T^    ,  { stems  in  -ic  with  nom.  in  -ex )  , . 

But<  ^  ,,         ,,       ^    [  are  masculme. 

(         "        -it  "  "      -es  ) 

Stems  in  -on  are  masculine. 

But  abstracts  in  -ion  are  feminine. 
Stems  in  -in  with  nominative  in  -o  are  feminine. 
Stems  in  -in  with  nominative  in  -en  are  neuter. 
Stems  in  -1  are  masculine. 
Stems  in  -r  and  -s  are  neuter, 

But  stems  in  -or  and  -os  are  masculine. 


80 
81 

82 
83 

84 
85 
86 
87 
88 
89 
90 


[80]  Viz. :  pater,  mater,  frater,  accipiter. 

[81]  Viz. :  an  abl.  sg  ending  -i,  or  gen.  pi.  -ium.  The  latter  is  not 
unusual  in  stems  in  -tat,  which  seem  to  have  once  heen  i-stems» 

The  following  exceptions  to  the  rules  of  gender  are  added  for  complete- 
ness, the  more  usual  words  being  printed  in  larger  type.  Hiems  (the 
only  stem  in  -m)  is  feminine. 

[82]  grex,  paries,  pes,  calix,  fornix,  are  masculine. 

lapis,  adeps,  forceps,  larix,  varix,  are  common. 

caput,  cor,  are  neuter. 
[83]  silex,  cortex,  forfex,  imbrex,  obex,  rumex,  are  common. 
[86]  ordo,  cardo,  turbo,  are  masculine. 

cupido,  margo,  are  common. 
[87]  pecten  is  masculine;   (sangvis,  see  [115],  is  masculine). 
[88]  fel  and  mel  are  neuter  (also  sal  sometimes  in  singular). 
[89]  agger,  career,  asser,  later,  vesper,  vomer,  are  masculine. 

arbos,  tellus,  are  feminine;    cinis,  pulvis,  common;    cuciimis, 
masculine. 
[90]  OS  is  neuter. 


18 


PART  IL— FORMS. 


91 


92 
93 


CONSOXANT-STEM    ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives  with  consonant-stems  are  declined  like 
noun-stems  of  like  form,  but  most  of  them  take  -i  as 
well  as  -e  for  the  ablative  singular  ending,  —  a  result 
of  their  likeness  to  i-stems.     They  comprise  :  — 

(a)  Adjectives  in  the  comparative  degree. 

(5)  Imparisyllabic  adjectives  with  themes  ending 
in  a  short  syllable. 


[92]  Comparatives  are  thus  declined :  — 


.  and  r.            N. 

PL 

M.  and  F.             N. 

Sg.  N.      PI. 

M.  and  F.           N. 

altiur        altitts 

altiores       altiora 

plus 

plures        plura 

altioris 

altiorum 

(pluris) 

plurium 

altiori 

altioribus 

pluribus 

altiorcm    altius 

altiores       altiora 

plus 

plures        plura 

altiore(I) 

altioribus 

(plure) 

pluribus 

Plus  is  defective  in  the  sg.,  and  the  forms  pluris  and  plure  are  rare. 
In  the  gen.  pi.  it  takes  the  ending  -ium  of  i-stems.  Its  compound  com- 
plures  (only  plural)  has  in  old  Latin  complur-ia  as  well  as  the  regular 
coinplura. 

[93]  Parisyllabic,  having  the  same  number  of  syllables  in  all  cases  of 
the  singular.  Those  a-  and  o-stem  adjectives  which  have  become  impari- 
syllabic by  the  loss  of  the  nominative  singular  ending  (i.e.,  stems  in  6po 
and  satur)  are,  of  course,  not  included. 

The  adjectives  included  in  {h)  are  few,  and  their  meanings  usually  cause 
them  to  be  used  only  of  persons.  They  have  no  separate  form  in  the 
singular  for  the  neuter  gender,  but  when  necessary  use  the  raasc.  and  fern, 
form  of  the  nom.  as  nom.  and  ace.  neuter  sg.  They  are  declined  as 
follows  :  — 


Sg.  M.  and  f.    n.  PI.  m.  and  p.       N. 

divds  divites   [divita] 

divltis  divitum 

diviti  divitibus 

divitem  dives    divites  [divita] 
divite  divitibus 

As  exceptions  to  (6),  must  be 
celer,  which  drop  the  nom.  sg. 


Sg.  M.  and  f.  n.     PI.  M.  and  F.        N. 

pauper  pauperes  paupera 

pauperis  pauperum 

pauperi  pauperibus 

pauperem  pauper  pauperes  paupera 
paupere  pauperibus 

set  down  a  few  i-stems ;  viz. :  par  and 
ending  (see   [102]);  also  licbes,  teres, 


THE  DECLENSIONS. 


19 


THE    T-DECLENSION. 


STEMS    IN    I. 


The  theme  of  any  i-stem  may  be  found  by  dropping 
the  genitive  singular  ending,  -is.  The  stem  is  found 
by  adding  i  to  the  theme. 

The  following  classes  contain  all  the  i-stems  in 
common  use  ;  viz. :  — 


94 


95 


praecox,  and  compounds  of  -plex  (except  supplex).  See  [108].  A  few 
adjective  compounds  of  noun-stems  have  themes  ending  in  a  long  syllable, 
but  are  declined,  of  course,  like  the  nouns  from  which  they  are  made ;  e.g., 
discolor,  discoloris,  etc.  Only  a  few  forms  of  such  are  found,  and  it 
has  not  seemed  necessary  to  add  a  third  class  to  contain  them. 

[94]  I-stems  have  become  much  confused  with  consonant-stems  through 
their  close  likeness  in  declension,  and  have  been  changed  into  consonant- 
stems  in  certain  cases  by  the  loss  of  i.  They  cannot,  therefore,  be  distin- 
guished by  the  ending  of  the  gen.  sg.  as  other  vowel-stems  can,  since  the 
i  is  always  lost  in  that  case. 

A  comparison  of  i-stera  nouns  with  more  primitive  forms  in  Latin  or 
kindred  languages,  shows  that  the  i  has  arisen  in  many  cases  from  an  older 
a,  e,  o,  or  u,  by  weakening.  Some  i-stems  show  the  older  e  in  certain 
cases.  In  other  words,  the  i  is  not  found  in  kindred  words  in  other  lan- 
guages, and  seems  to  be  added  in  Latin. 

The  i  is  kept  or  lost  as  follows :  — 

In  Class  I.,  kept  in  nom.  sg.  (sometimes  as  e)  ;  also  in  some  words  in 
ace.  and  abl.  sg. ;  lost  in  gen.  sg.,  and  usually  in  abl.  sg.  The  form  of 
the  dat.  sg.  would  be  the  same  whether  i  be  kept  or  lost,  and  the  ace. 
sg.  ending  -em  may  be  considered  an  older  form  for  -Im  (like  -es  for  -Is  in 
the  nom.  sg.),  or  a  consonant-stem  ending  after  i  is  lost. 

In  Class  II.,  kept  in  the  abl.  sg. ;  also  in  a  few  words  (as  e)  in  the 
nom.  and  ace.  sg. ;  lost  in  gen.  sg.,  usually  in  nom.  and  ace.  sg.  The 
dative  may  be  either,  as  in  Class  I. 

In  Class  III.,  lost  throughout  the  singular. 

In  the  plural  of  all  three  classes,  i  may  be  kept  throughout ;  but  it  is 
usually  lost  in  the  nom.  and  often  in  the  ace.  of  masc.  and  fem.  nouns. 

Occasionally,  however,  i  is  kept  in  cases  where  it  is  usually  lost,  or  lost 
in  cases  where  it  is  usually  kept.  Tliis  occurs  more  often  in  poetry  for 
metrical  convenience. 


20 


PART  IL  — FORMS. 


96 
97 
98 


99 


I.  Parisyllabic  nouns  in  -es  and  -is. 
II.  Neuters  in  -e,  and  neuters  with  themes  in  -al  or  -ar. 
III.  Nouns  with  themes  ending  in  an  impure  mute. 
These,  however,  are  i-stems  only  in  the  plural, 
having  lost  i  in  the  singular. 

The  case-endings  of  i-stems  of  Class  I.  (masculine 
and  feminine)  are  :  — 


E.i 


Sg.  N. 

-es       -is 

PL  N.    -gs  (-is) 

G. 

-is        -is 

G.    -iiim 

D. 

-1          -i 

D.    -ibtis 

Ac. 

-Sm     -im,  -gm 

Ac.  -IS,  -gs 

Ab. 

-g         -1,  -S 

Ab.  -ibiia 

X.    nub  es 

nub  gs 

turrls 

turrgs 

G.    nub  is 

nub  iiim 

turris 

turriiim 

D.    nubi 

nub  ibiis 

turri 

turribtts 

Ac.  nubgm 

nub  IS  (es) 

turrim  (gm) 

turris  (gs) 

Ab.  nub  S 

nubibiis 

turri (g) 

turribiis 

[96]  Of  Class  I.,  canis  and  juvenis  lose  1  and  become  consonant-stems 
in  the  plural ;  socles  and  vates  usually ;  occasionally,  also,  a  few  others. 

[98]  Impure  mute ;  i.e.,  a  mute  preceded  by  a  consonant.  Of  course 
nouns  of  this  kind  are  not  included  if  the  gen.  sg.  ending  shows  them  to 
be  a-,  0-,  or  u-stems. 

Cor,  though  an  i-stem  in  compounds,  loses  i  in  the  plural  also,  and 
becomes  a  consonant-stem  throughout.  Many  other  monosyllables,  espe- 
cially those  with  a  long  stem-syllable,  give  evidence  of  having  once  been 
i-stems,  and  though  the  i  is  usually  lost,  it  sometimes  appears,  especially 
in  the  abl.  sg.  or  gen.  pi.  The  Latin  writers  and  grammarians  were  evi- 
dently uncertain  as  to  the  proper  form  in  these  words.  All  such  words 
are  put  by  the  classification  here  given  in  the  consonant  declension,  when- 
the  preponderance  of  evidence  places  them ;  but  a  list  is  subjoined,  con- 
taining those  words  in  which  a  pupil  may  occasionally  meet  with  i-stem 
forms ;  viz. :  — 

cos,  dos,  faex,  fraus,  glis,  lis,  lux,  mas,  mus,  pax.  -^ 

as,  nix,  plebs,  scrobs,  trabs,  liavc  a  greater  claim  to  be  classed  as 
i-stems ;  the  older  forms,  assis,  ningvls,  plebcs,  scrobis,  trabes,  show 
tluit  they  once  belonged  to  Class  I. 


THE  DECLENSIONS. 


21 


The  case-endings  of  i-stems  of  Class  II.  (neut.)  are  : 


B.< 


Sg.  N. 

-g  or  — 

P/.  K    -ia 

G. 

-IS 

G.    -ium 

D. 

-1 

D.    -ibtts 

Ac. 

-g  or  — 

Ac.  -ia 

Ab 

-1(e) 

Ab.  -ibus 

1^. 

mar  S 

juariS 

animtil 

animal  ia 

G. 

maris 

maritim 

animal  is 

animal  ill m 

D. 

mari 

maribiis 

animal  1 

aninuilibtis 

Ac. 

marS 

maria 

animal 

animal  ia 

Ab 

marl 

maribtis 

animal! 

animal  ibiis 

I-stems  of  Class  III.  have  in  the  plural  the  same 
endings  as  those  of  Classes  I.  and  II.,  but  the  endings 
of  consonant-stems  in  the  singular.     (See  74  and  75.) 


100 


101 


[99]  As  ace.  sg.  ending,  -im  is  found  in 

Arariin,  Ligerim,  puppim,  sitim,  TibCrim,  vim. 

amussim,  burim,  cucumim,  praesepim  (?),  ravim,  tussim. 
As  ace.  sg.  ending,  both  -im  and  -em  are  found  in 

febrim,  messim,  navim,  turrim  (or  febrem,  etc.). 
cravim,  cratim,  lentim,  pel  vim,  restim,  sementim,  securim  (or 
cravem,  etc.). 
As  abl.  sg.  ending,  -i  is  found  in 
siti,  vi. 

Aprili,  cucumi,  Qvintili,  ravi,  rumi,  securi,  Sextlli,  tussi. 
As  abl.  sg.  ending,  both  -i  and  -e  are  found  in 

aedili;  amni,  angui,  Arfiri,  avi,  civi,  classi,  colli,  febri, 
fini,  igni,  imbri,  Ligeri,  navi,  orbi,  puppi,  turri  (or 
aidile,  amne,  etc.). 
axi,    corbi,    fusti,    pelvi,    posti,    sodali,    strigili,    ungvi    (or 
axe,  etc.). 
The  nom.  pi.  ending  -is  (or  -eis,  see  [2])  is  rare;  in  the  ace.  pi.,  modern 
editions  usually  give  one  ending  in  all  words  to  the  exclusion  of  the  other. 
Which  one  is  given  is  a  matter  of  indifference  as  a  question  of  grammar. 

[100]  The  abl.  sg.  ending  -6  is  rare,  except  in  names  of  towns. 

[101]  In  Class  III.,  only  partim  shows  the  i  kept  in  the  ace.  sg.,  and 
parti,  lacti,  sorti,  in  the  abl.  sg.     As  an  adverb,  the  form  partim  is 


22  PART  II.  — FORMS. 


102 


103 

104 
105 


106 


A  few  stems  in  -eri  drop  the  ending  of  the  nomina- 
tive singular,  and  syncopate  e  in  all  other  cases. 
(Compare  stems  in  -ero,  66,  and  -er,  80.) 

I-stems  of  Class  I.  with  themes  in  n  or  s  are 
masculine  ;  other  i-stems  of  Class  I.  are  feminine. 

I-stems  of  Class  II.  are  neuter. 

In  Class  III.  polysyllables  are  masculine;  mono- 
syllables are  feminine. 

ADJECTIVES    WITH     STEMS     IN    I. 

Adjectives  with  i-stems  are  declined  like  noun- 
stems  of  like  form,  but  those  of  Class  I.  have  only  -i, 
the  regular  ending,  in  the  ablative  singular  ;  those  of 
Class  III.  have  both  -i  and  -e. 


common  ;  the  other  forms  are  very  rare,  the  i  being  regularly  lost  in  the 
singular  of  Class  III. 

[102]  Viz. :  imber,  linter,  uter,  venter,  and  a  few  adjectives  in  the 
masculine.  Arar,  Liger,  and  the  adjective  par  drop  the  nom.  sg.  ending 
(also  celer  in  tlie  masculine),  but  do  not  syncopate. 

[103]  The  exceptions  in  Class  I.  are  :  — 

(Theme  in  a  mute)     orbis  ;  fascis,  ungvis  ;  antes,  fustis,  postis,  sentis, 
vectis ;  masculine. 
corbis,  scrobis,  torqvis ;  common. 
(Theme  in  a  liquid)    collis,  imber;    caulis,  follis,  buris,  torris,  uter, 
venter ;  masculine. 
callis,  linter ;  common. 
(Theme  in  a  nasal)     finis,  clunis  ;  common  ;  cucftmis,  masculine. 
(Theme  in  -s)  classis,  messis,  tussis  ;  feminine. 

[105]  The  exceptions  in  Class  III.  are :  — 

dens,  fons,  nions,  pons  ;  masculine;  cohors,  feminine  ;  lac, 
neuter. 

[106]  Adjective-stems  in  -gri  (except  celer)  generally  syncopate  €  in 
all  forms,  except  in  the  nom.  sg.  masc,  and  drop  the  ending  of  that  case, 
thus  gaining  different  forms  for  masc.  and  fem.  nom.  sg.     This  differen- 


THE  DECLENSIONS. 

23 

To  Classes  I.  and  II.  belong 

Parisyllabic  adjectives  in  -is  (m.  and  F.),  -e  (n.). 

107 

To  Class  III.  belong 

Imparisyllabic  adjectives,  with  themes  ending  in 

108 

a  long  syllable. 

tiation  of  form  is  not  strictly  observed,  however ;  acer,  for  example,  is 
fern,  as  well  as  masc.  in  old  Latin,  ^nd  acris  masc.  as  well  Sisfem. 

There  is,  in  general,  a  stronger  tendency  toward  i-stem  forms  in  the 
adjective  than  in  the  noun.  This  is  shown  not  only  in  i-stem  adjectives, 
which  retain  the  1  more  often  than  nouns,  but  also  in  consonant-stem 
adjectives,  which  often  take  i  as  the  ending  of  the  abl.  sg.  In  spite  of  this 
tendency,  however,  the  ace.  sg.  of  adjectives  has  regularly  the  consonant- 
stem  ending  -6m. 

[108]  To  Class  III.  belong  also  the  numeral  multiplicatives  in  -plex 
[e.g.,  duplex,  tioo-fold ;  qvintQplex,  ^ye^/b/c/ ;  etc.),  and  the  adjectives 
hebes,  teres,  par,  praecox.  See  [93].  The  comparative  plus  is  peculiar. 
See  [92]. 

Adjectives  of  Class  III.  have  no  separate  form  for  the  neuter  singular, 
but  use  the  nom.  masc.  as  nom.  and  ace.  sg.  neut.  To  this  class  belong 
tribal  names  in  -ates  and  -ites,  and  a  few  other  words  of  like  formation, 
generally  found  only  in  the  plural,  and  used  substantively  [e.g.,  Arpi- 
nates,  optiinates,  etc.),  and  verbal  derivatives  in  -trix  (commonly  used 
as  feminine  nouns  of  agency)  when  used  as  adjectives  [e.g.,  victrlx). 

Adjectives  with  i-stems  are  declined  as  follows  :  — 


M.  and  F.      N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M.  and  F.      N. 

M.  and  F.         N. 

levis         16ve 

ac6r 

acris 

acrS 

par 

amans 

levis 

acris 

acris 

acris 

pSris 

amantis 

lev! 

acri 

acri 

acri 

pari 

amanti 

Iev6m       levS 

acrem 

acrem 

acre 

parem      par 

amantem     amans 

lev! 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

pari(e) 

amante(i) 

leves         levia 

celer 

c616ris 

celere 

pares       paria 

amantes       amantia 

levitim 

celgris 

celeris 

celeris 

parium 

amantium 

levibus 

celeri 

celeri 

celeri 

paribus 

amantibus 

levis  (es)  levia 

celerem  celerem  celere 

paris(es)  paria 

amantes(is)  amantia 

levibus 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

paribus 

amantibus 

A  few  compounds  of  consonant  noun-stems  have  themes  ending  in  a 
long  syllable,  but  are  consonant-stems  of  course,  and  may  be  regarded  as 
exceptions.  See  [93].  Adjectives  in  the  comparative  degree  are  also 
consonant-stems.     See  [92]  and  [93]. 


24 


PART  IL— rOIlMS. 


THE    tr-DECLENSION.        STEMS    IX 

-TT. 

109 

The  theme  of  any  u-stem  may  be  found 

by  dropping 

the  genitive  singular  ending,  -us.    The  stem  is  found 

by  adding  -u  to  the  theme. 

The  case-endings  are  :  — 

FOR    MASCULINES. 

%  N.    -tis       PL  X.    -us               E.g.,  cuiTiis 

currus 

G.    -us              G.    -uilm                    ciirrus 

curr  uum 

110 

D.    -ui(u)        D.    -tibiis, ibiis         cuirui 

cnrr  ibtis 

Ac.  -tlm             Ac.  -tls                        currtim 

curr  us 

Ab. -u                Ab. -tlbtis,  ibtls         curru 

ciirribtls 

FOR    NEUTERS. 

Sg.  N.    -u         PL  N.    -uX             E.g.,  cornu 

cornuS 

G.    -us               G.    -uiim                    corn  us 

corn  utlm 

HI 

D.    -u                 D.    -iibiis, -ibiis        cornu 

corn  ibiis 

Ac.  -u                Ac.  -uS                       cornu 

corn  uS. 

Ab. -u                Ab. -tibiis, -ibtls       cornu 

cornibtis 

[110]  The  gen.  sg.  sometimes  has  the  uncontracted  ending  -uls,  the 
gen.  pi.  (rarely)  the  contracted  ending  -um. 

The  contracted  ending  -Q  of  the  dat.  sg.  is  regular  in  neuters ;  rare  in 
masculines. 

The  fuller  ending  -tibfis  of  the  dat.  and  abl.  pi.  is  found  in  acus,  areas, 
partus,  trlbus  ;  usually  in  artus,  lacas,  spceus  ;  sometimes  in  portus, 
veru. 

An  ending  -i  occiu's  a  few  times  in  the  gen.  sg.,  apparently  from  con- 
fusion with  o-stems  from  the  same  root.  O-stem  forms  occur  occasionally 
in  other  cases  also,  and  many  names  of  plants  and  trees  are  confused  in 
their  inflection,  having  both  o-stem  and  u-stem  forms. 

Old  forms  in  inscriptions,  etc.,  show  tlie  ending  of  gen.  sg.  -uos.  For 
-u  and  -us,  -uu  and  -uus  are  sometimes  written  to  sliow  the  lengtli  of  the 
u.    See  [2]. 

A  locative  domui  occurs  rarely ;  no  other  u-stems  form  a  locative. 


IRREGULAR  DECLENSION.  25 


Monosyllabic  stems  in  -u  retain  the  suffixes  un- 
contracted  with  the  stem-vowel,  and  are  therefore 
declined  like  consonant-stems. 

U-stems  with  nominative  singular  ending  -us  are 
masculine  ;  the  others  are  neuter. 

Irregular  Declension. 

Nouns  and  adjectives  are  irregular  in  declension  — 
(jci)  From  the  retention  of  old  endings. 
(5)  From  variation  of  the  stem. 


112 


113 


114 
115 


[112]  Viz. :  grus,  sus,  and  lues  (when  it  drops  i)  ;  with  the  irregular 
stems  bu,  Ju.    But  sus  has  snbus  and  stibus  as  well  as  suibus. 

The  stems  bu  and  Ju  stand  for  the  older  diphthongal  stems,  bou-,  Jou-. 
The  diphthong  changes  u  to  v  before  a  vowel  (see  [12]  (a)),  and  passes 
into  o  or  u  before  a  consonant.     The  forms  are  :  — 

bos  boves  Jiipiter  (Juppiter) 

bovis  bovum,  boum  (see  [12]  (c))     Jovis 

bovi  bobus,   bubus  Jovi 

boveni  boves  Joveni 

bove  bobus,   biibus  Jove 

The  nom.  Jupiter  (old  form  Jupater)  is  a  compound  of  pater.  Some- 
times the  second  part  is  declined  Jupit^ris,  etc. 

[113]  Domus,  idus,  manus,  tribus,  colus,  qvinqvatrus,  and  porticus 
are  feminine. 

Acus,  arcus,  penus,  and  specus  are  common. 

[114]  The  irregularities  under  («)  have  been  already  mentioned  with 
the  endings  of  the  various  declensions. 

[115]  The  following  are  irregular  from  variation  of  stem  :  — 

balneum  (st.  balneo-) ;  pi.  usually  balneae,  etc.  (st.  balnea-). 

caro  (st.  caron-)  ;    all  other  cases  from  a  syncopated  stem  carn- 

(carnis,  carni,  etc.). 

domus  (st.  domu-) ;  a  stem  domo-  is  found  also  in  all  cases  except 
the  nom.,  dat.,  and  abl.  pi.,  and  is  more  common  in  the 
loc.  and  abl.  sg.,  where  the  u-stem  forms  are  old. 

eptilum      (st.  epulo-) ;  pi.  epulae,  etc.  (st.  epula-). 


PART  IL  — FORMS. 


116 
117 


(c)  From  variation  of  gender, 
(c?)  From  lack  of  certain  cases. 


fames        (st.  fame-) ;  but  gen.  sg.  usuall}^  famis  (st.  fam-). 

femur        (st.  femor-)  ;   except  in  nom.  and  ace.  sg.,  a  stem  femin-  is 

equally  common. 
iter  (st.  iter-)  ;  except  in  nom.  and  ace.  sg.,  a  stem  itingr-  is  used. 

jugerum  (st.  jugero-)  ;  pi.  jugera,  etc.  (st.  juger-). 
jecur         (st.  jecor-)  ;   except  in  nom.  and  ace.  sg.,  a  stem  jocingr-  or 

jocinor-  is  equally  common. 
pelagus    (st.  pelSgus-) ;  only  nom.  and  ace.  sg.  and  nom.  and  ace.  pi.  in 
Greek  form  pelSge  (contracted  from  pelage^) ;  other  cases 
from  a  stem  pelSgo-. 
sangvis     (st.  sangvi-j ;  only  nom.  sg.    Other  forms  from  a  stem  sangvln-. 
senex         (st.  senec-)  ;  only  nom.  sg.     Other  forms  from  a  stem  sen-, 
supellex   (st.  supellect-) ;  only  nom.  sg.    Other  forms  from  a  stem  supel- 

lectm-. 
virus  (st.  virus-) ;  only  nom.  and  ace.  sg.  Other  forms  from  a  stem  viro-. 

vas  (st.  vas-) ;  pi.  vasa,  etc.  (st.  vaso-).     In  this  noun  s  does  not 

suffer  the  usual  change  to  r. 
vesper       (st.  vespero-) ;  but  abl.  sg.  vespgre  (st.  vespgr-). 
vulgus      (st.  vulgus-)  ;  only  nom.  and  ace.  sg.     All  other  forms  from  a 

raasc.  stem  vulgo-,  which  is  found  also  in  nom.  and  ace.  sg. 
vis  (st.  vi-)  ;  pi.  vires,  etc.  (st.  viri-). 

The  only  adjectives  irregular  from  variation  of  stem  (except  senex 
above,  which  is  usually  used  as  a  noun)  are  the  adjective  compounds  of 
capat,  which  form  the  nom.  sg.  from  a  syncopated  stem ;  e.g.,  praeceps 
(st.  praecept-) ;  but  other  cases  from  a  stem  praeciplt- ;  praecipltis,  etc. 
[116]  Nouns  in  which  variation  of  stem  has  caused  variation  of  gender 
are  included  in  [Ho].  Aside  from  such,  variation  of  gender  causes  irreg- 
ularity of  declension  in  the  following  :  — 

caelum      (st.  caelo-),  neut. ;  pi.  (foimd  only  once),  caelos,  raasc. 
carbSsus  (st.  carbaso-),  fem. ;  pi.  neut.  carbftsa,  etc. 
frenum      (st.  freno-),  neut.;  pi.  neut.  frena,  etc.,  or  masc.  freni,  etc. 
jocus  (st.  joco-),  masc. ;  pi.  neut.  joca,  etc.,  or  masc.  joci,  etc. 

locus  (st.  loco-),  masc. ;  pi.  neut.  loca,  etc.,  or  masc.  loci,  etc. 

rastrum     (st.  rastro-),  neut. ;  pi.  neut.  rastra,  etc.,  or  masc.  rastri,  etc. 

[117]  Nouns  that  lack  some  of  their  forms  are  called  defective.  There 
are  many  such  in  Latin,  some  of  which  lack  the  plural  or  tlie  singular  on 
account  of  their  meaning  ;  in  others,  the  lack  of  certain  forms  seems  to  be 


NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES. 


27 


Numeral  Adjectives. 

The  cardinal  numerals,  from  one  to  ten,  with 
ceiitiim  and  mille,  are  primitive  words;  the  others 
are  formed  from  these.      Unvis,  duo,  tres,  and  the 


118 


purely  accidental.     A  few  neuters  have  only  the  nom.  and  ace.  sg.,  and 
are  called  mdeclinable. 

It  has  not  seemed  necessary  to  add  any  list  of  defective  nouns.  Such  a 
list  would  be  of  no  practical  value  to  the  learner,  and  would  be  a  very 
large  one  if  it  should  contain  all  the  nouns,  except  those  all  of  whose 
forms  are  found  in  Latin  writers.  The  lexicon  must  be  consulted  for  such 
information. 

[118]  For  the  declension  of  unus,  see  71 ;  of  duo,  [72].  Tres  is  a 
regular  i-stem.  3Iille  is  a  regular  i-stem,  but  is  indeclinable  in  the  singular. 
The  hundreds  are  regular  a-  and  o-stems.  All  cardinals  except  unus,  of 
course,  lack  the  singular,  as  do  all  the  distributives.     See  the  list  below. 

The  combination  of  units,  tens  and  hundreds  to  form  the  intermediate 
numbers  is  made  as  in  English. 

A  list  of  numeral  adjectives  is  added  for  reference.  The  corresponding 
numeral  adverbs  are  also  given :  — 

Cardikals.  Ordinals. 

1  unus,  -a,  -um,  | 


one ; 

2  duo,    -ae, 
two ; 

3  tres,  tria 

4  qvattuor 

5  qvinqve 

6  sex 

7  septem 

8  octo 

9  novem 

10  decem 

11  undecim 

12  duodScim 

13  tredecira 

14  qvattuordfieim 

15  qvindgcim 

16  scd&im 

17  septemdeeim 

18  octodgeim 

19  novemd^cim 


primus,  -a,  -xmxyftrst 


-o,  I  alter,  -a,  -um 
)  secundus,  -a,  -um 
tertius,  -a,  -um 
qvartus,  -a,  -um 
qvintus,  etc. 
sextus 
Septimus 
octavus 
nonus 
deeimus 
undecTmiis 
duodecimus 
tertius  decimus 
qvartus  decimus 
etc. 


Distributives. 
f  singflli,  -ae,  -a,  ) 
\  one  hy  one;  ] 
(  bini,  -ae,  -a,  i 
I      two  hy  tioo ;  ] 

terni  or  trini,  etc. 

qvaterni 

qvini 

seni 

septeni 

octoni 

noveni 

deni 

undent 

duodeni 

terni  deni 

qvaterni  deni 
etc. 


Numeral  Ad  vs. 
semel,  once. 


etc. 


bis,  twice. 

ter,  thrice. 
qvater,/o?<r  times. 
qvinqviens, 
sexiens 
septiens 
octiens 
noviens 
deciens 
undeciens 
duodeciens 
terdeciens 
qvaterdeciens 
qvindeciens 
etc. 


28 


PART  IL  — FORMS. 


hundreds  except  centum,  are  declined ;  also  niille, 
when  used  as  a  noun.  The  other  cardinals  are 
indeclinable. 


Cardinals. 

Ordinals. 

DisTRiBurn-Es 

Numeral  Advs. 

20  viginti 

vicensimus 

viceni 

viciens 

21  viginti  unus  or 

primus  et  vicensimus  or 

viceni  singuli 

semel  et  viciens 

unus  et  viginti 

unus  et  vicensimus 

22  viginti  duo  or 

etc. 

viceni  bini 

bis  et  viciens 

duo  et  viginti 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

30  triginta 

tricenstmus 

triceni 

triciens 

40  qvadraginta 

qvadragensimus 

qvadrageni 

qvadragiens 

50  qvinqvaginta 

qviuqvagensimus 

qvinqvageni 

qvinqvagiens 

60  sexaginta 

sexagensiraus 

sexageni 

sexagiens 

70  septuaginta 

septuagenstmus 

septuageni 

septuagiens 

80  octoginta 

octogensTmus 

octogeui 

octogiens 

90  nonaginta 

nonagensimus 

nonageni 

nonagiens 

100  centum 

centensimus 

centeni 

centiens 

101  centum  et  unus 

centensimus  primus 

centeni  singal 

centiens  semel 

200  ducenti,-ae,-a 

ducentensimus 

duceni 

ducentiens 

300  trecenti 

treceutensTmus 

treceni 

trecentiens 

400  qvadringenti 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

500  qvingenti 

600  sescenti 

700  septingenti 

800  octingenti 

900  nongenti 

1000  mille 

2000  duo  millia 

3000  tria  millia 

etc. 

For  18,  19,  28,  29,  etc.,  substractive  forms  (duodevlginti,  undetriginta, 
etc.)  are  more  common  than  the  regular  forms.  So  also,  duodeviiicensl- 
nius,  duodeviceni,  etc. 

In  the  later  language,  the  endings  -ensimus  and  -lens  drop  n  and 
become  .-esiimis,  -les. 

The  distributives,  besides  their  regular  meaning,  two  hi/  two,  in  tiros,  etc., 
are  also  used  with  nouns  plural  in  form  but  singular  in  meaning.  Thus 
castra,  forts,  is  the  Latin  word  for  a  camp.  Biua  castra  means  two 
camps  (lit. /oris  b;i  ticos,  two  sets  of  forts).  They  are  also  used  in  expressing 
multiplication ;  e.g.,  bis  dena  viginti  sunt,  twice  ten  is  twenty. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES.  29 


Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

The  stem  of  the  comparative  degree  is  formed  by 
adding  -ios  to  the  theme  of  the  positive.  This  suffix 
becomes  -ius  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  singu- 
lar neuter;  -ior  elsewhere.  (For  the  declension  of 
the  comparative,  see  [92].) 

The  stem  of  the  superlative  is  formed  by  adding 
-issimo-,  -issima-  to  the  theme  of  the  positive. 

Stems  in  -er-,  -ero-,  -erl-,  add  -rimo-  to  the  theme 
for  the  superlative,  and  a  few  in  -ili-  add  -limo-. 

Compounds  of  -cliciis,  -ficus,  and  -volus  add  the 
suffixes  of  comparison  to  a  theme  in  -dicent-,  -ficent-, 
-volent-. 

Many  adjectives  are  not  compared.  If  a  compara- 
tive or  superlative  of  such  is  needed,  it  is  formed  by 
prefixing  magis  (more)  ;  maxime  (most). 


119 


120 
121 
122 

123 


[119]  Comparison  is  not  inflection,  but  derivation ;  but  is  placed  here 
for  convenience. 

[121]  These  stems,  if  syncopated  in  the  positive,  are  also  syncopated  in 
the  comi^arative,  but  not  in  the  superlative.  Maturus  sometimes  adds 
-rImo-  for  the  superlative. 

Those  which  add  -llino  are  facilis,  difflcilis,  similis,  dissimilis, 
gracilis,  humilis. 

[122]  The  themes  in  -nt  are  participles  in  formation. 

[123]  The  following  have  special  irregularities  :  — 

infSrus      inferior  infimus,  imus 

postSrus  posterior  postremiis,  posttimus 

sut>erus     superior  supreinus,  summiis 

citerior  citiinus 

interior  intlmus 

prior  primus 

propior  proximus 

ulterior  viltimus 

vetus  veterrimus 

Many  adjectives  lack  the  comparative  or  superlative.  The  lacking 
superlative  of  senex  is  supplied  by  the  phrase  maxlmus  natu ;  that  of 
juvgnls  by  minimus  natu. 


bonus 

melior 

opttmus 

malus 

pejor 

pesstmus 

magnus 

major 

maximus 

luultus 

plus  (neut.)  plvirimus 

parvus 

minor 

minimus 

senex 

senior 

juvSnis 

junior 

exterus 

exterior 

extremus, 
or  extimus 

30  PAET  IL— FORMS. 


124 


125 


126 


Forms  of  Pronouns. 

The  personal  pronouns  are  eg-o,  tu,  sui.  They  are 
peculiar  in  declension,  partly  from  variation  of  stem, 
partly  from  the  retention  of  older  endings  lost  in  the 
ordinary  noun-declension. 

They  are  thus  declined :  — 

EGO  (St.  egon-,  me-,  no). 

Sg.  K    gg6  PL  iios 

G.  (mei)  (nostriim,  nostri) 

D.    mihl,  mi  nobis 

Ac.  me  nos 

Ab.  me  nobis 


TU  (St.  te-,  VO-), 

SUI  (St. 

se-). 

Sg.  K    tu            PL  vos 

Sff 

.  —           PL  — 

G.  (till)     (vestrtim,  vestri) 

(BUI) 

(sui) 

D.    tibi                vobis 

sib! 

sib! 

Ac.  te                   vos 

se,  sesS 

se.  sese 

Ab.  tS                   vobis 

8S,  bSsS 

se.  sese 

The  possessive  pronouns  metis,  tutks,  suiis,  noster, 
vester,  are  derived  from  the  personal  pronouns. 
They  are  regular  a-  and  o-stem  adjectives,  except 
that  iiieus  forms  its  vocative  singular  masculine,  mi, 
from  an  older  form  inius. 


[125]  Sui  is  often  called  the  reflexive  pronoun,  because  it  refers  to  the 
subject  of  the  sentence.  For  a  personal  pronoun  not  referring  to  the  sub- 
ject, a  demonstrative  (is,  ille,  iste)  is  used. 

The  gen.  sg.  of  ego  and  tu  was  mis,  tis.  These  forms  were  lost,  and 
tlic  gen.  forms  of  all  the  personal  pronouns  in  both  numbers  are  borrowed 
from  the  possessives. 

The  personal  pronouns  are  sometimes  emphasized  by  appending  -met, 
-te,  or  -ptc.  So  also,  at  times,  the  possessives :  egomet,  nosniet,  tute, 
suiptc,  suopte,  etc. 

Med,  ted,  scd,  are  old  forms  for  nic,  te,  se  (ace.  and  abl.).  The 
doubled  form  sese  is  common ;  tote  for  tc  occurs  in  old  Latin ;  also  vos- 
trum  for  vcstruin,  and  slbc  or  sibei  for  sibl. 


FORMS  OF  PRONOUNS.  31 


The  demonstrative  pronouns  have  the  declension 
of  adjectives,  but  take  the  pronominal  suffix  -d  in 
the  nominative  and  accusative  singular  neuter,  and 
the  pronominal  endings  -ms,  -i,  in  the  genitive  and 
dative  singular  of  all  genders.  Certain  cases  of  some 
of  them  are  regularly  emphasized  by  appending  a 
demonstrative  or  intensive  syllable  (i,  ce  or  c). 

The  demonstratives  are  is,  iste,  ille,  ipse,  hie. 
Idem. 

Is  (stem  i-,  usually  lengthened  to  io-,  eo-)  is  thus 
declined :  — 

Sg.  N.    is  eS  id  PL  N.    ei,  ii  eae  eS 

G.    ejiis  ejiis  ejtis  G.    eoriiin  earttm  eortim 

D.    ei  ei  ei  D.    eis,  iis  eis,  iis  eis,  iis 

Ac.  eiim  eSin  id  Ac.  eos  eas  ea 

Ab.  eo  ea  eo  Ab.  eis,  iis  eis,  iis  eis,  iis 


127 


128 
129 


[127]  A  few  instances  are  found  of  the  regular  adj.  endings  in  the  gen. 
and  dat.  sg. 

The  forms  strengthened  by  -i  are  those  which  end  in  -ft ;  viz. :  nom.  sg. 
fern.,  and  nom.  and  ace.  pi.  neut.  ft  +  i  contracts  to  ae.  This  strengthen- 
ing is  found  in  hie ;  sometimes  in  ille  and  iste.  (It  occurs  also  in  the 
relative  pronoun.     See  138.) 

Ce  is  used  to  strengthen  all  the  cases,  but  drops  e  except  after  s.  It  is 
used  in  hie ;  sometimes  in  ille  and  iste.  In  the  older  language  various 
forms  occur  with  an  appended  -ce  or  -c. 

[128]  A  demonstrative  stem,  so-,  sa-,  is  said  to  have  been  used  by 
Ennius  in  the  forms  sum,  sam,  sas. 

For  ille  an  older  spelling,  oUe,  is  found  in  poetry. 

[129]  From  the  stem  i-  are  formed  is,  id;  also  the  old  forms  em  (or 
im)  =  eum,  and  ibus  =  eis.  The  rest  is  formed  from  the  longer  stem. 
Ei  and  eis  are  sometimes  contracted  into  monosyllables  ;  eae  (dat.  sg.  fem.) 
and  eabus  (abl.  pi.  fem.)  are  found  in  Cato,  and  inscriptions  show  various 
forms  with  ei  written  for  i  (according  to  [2]),  and  the  nom.  pi.  forms 
eis,  eeis,  ieis. 


32 


PART  IL— FORMS. 


130 


131 
132 

133 
134 


Iste  (stem  isto-)  is  tlms  .declined :  — 


%N.   istg 
G.    istiiis 
D.    isti 
Ac.  istiim 
Ab.  isto 


ista 

istiiis 

isti 

istSm 

ista 


istiid 

istiiis 

isti 

istiid 

isto 


PL  isti 
istoriim 
istis 
istos 
istis 


istae 

istariim 

istis 

istas 

istis 


ista 

istoriim 

istis 

ista 

istis 


lUe  is  declined  like  iste. 

Ipse  is  declined  like  iste,  but  lias  ipsum  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative  neuter  singular. 

Hic  (stem  hi-  or  ho-)  is  strengthened  by  both  -1 
and  -ce,  but  the  latter  is  not  usual  except  in  certain 
cases. 

The  usual  forms  are  :  — 


Sg.^.    hic  haeo  hoc 

G.    hiijiis  hiijiis  hiijiis 

1).    huic  huic  huic 

Ac.  huno  banc  hoc 

Ab.  hoc  h5c  hoc 


PI.  hi 

hae 

haec 

hortim 

hariim 

horiim 

his 

his 

his 

hos 

has 

haec 

his 

his 

his 

[130]  A  nom.  sg.  masc.  istOs  is  found  once. 

[132]  For  ipse,  ipsfis  is  found.  Ipse  is  compounded  of  is  and  -pse, 
and  a  few  forms  occur  in  which  the  first  part  is  declined  wliile  tlio  second 
remains  unchanged ;  viz. :  e&pse,  eumpse,  eampse,  eopse,  eapsc. 

[133]  The  stem  hi-  is  found  in  hic,  and  in  tlie  old  forms  hisce  (=  hi) 
and  hibus  (^  his).    Huic  is  often  monosyllabic  (hvic). 

[134]  Other  forms  of  hic,  chiefly  old  or  poetical,  are :  — 


Sg.  N. 

hice 

hoce 

PI 

.  N. 

hisce 

haec 

halce 

a. 

(  hoiusce 

hoiusce 

hoiusce 

G. 

horunce 
horuiic 

harunce 

1  hujusce 

hujusce 

hujusce 

ha rune 

r>. 

hoice 

lioice 

hoice 

D. 

(  hibus 
1  hisce 

hibus 
hisce 

hibus 
hisce 

Ac. 

hance 

Ac. 

hosce 

hasce 

haice 

Ab. 

hSce 

Ab 

(hibus 
i  hisce 

hibus 
hisce 

hibus 
hisce 

rOEMS  OF  PRONOUNS. 


lUe  and  iste  are  sometimes  strengthened  by  -i  and 
-ce  in  the  same  way  as  hie. 

Idem  is  formed  by  ap^Dending  -clem  to  the  various 
forms  of  is.     The  forms  is  and  id  drop  -s  and  -d. 

Idem  is  thus  declined  :  — 

Sg.  N.    idem       eadem     idem    PI.  eidem         eaedem      eadem 
G.    ejusdem  ejusdem  ejusdem    eorundem  earundem  eorundem 
D.    eidem      eidem      eidem        eisdem       eisdem       eisdem 
Ac.  eundem  eandem  idem         eosdem      easdem      eadem 
Ab.eodem     eadem     eodem       eisdem       eisdem       eisdem 

The  relative  pronoun  (stem  qvi-  or  qvo-)  has  the 
strengthening  -i.    See  [127].     It  is  thus  declined:  — 


aS^t.N.    qvi 

qvae 

qvod 

PI 

.qvi 

qvae 

qvae 

G.    ciijus 

CUJUS 

CUJUS 

qvoriim 

qvarum 

qvorum 

D.    cui 

cui 

cui 

qvibus 

qvibus 

qvibus 

Ac.  qvem 

qvam 

qvod 

qvos 

qvas 

qvae 

Ab.  qvo 

qva 

qvo 

qvibus 

qvibus 

qvibus 

The  same  pronoun  is  also  used  as  an  interrogative 
pronoun,  but  when  used  substantively  has  qvis,  qvid 
in  the  nominative  singular  for  qvi,  qvod. 


135 
136 
137 


138 


139 


[135]  The  forms  thus  produced  are  : 

— 

Sg.N.    mic 

iUaec          moc,  illuc 

PZ.N. 

illic 

illaec 

illaec 

G.    illiusce 

iUiusce      iUiusce 

a. 

D.    iUic 

niic             illic 

D. 

illisce 

iUisce 

iUisce 

Ac.  iUunc 

iUaiic         iUoc,  muc 

Ac. 

illosce 

illasce 

iUaec 

Ab.  illoc 

iUac            illoc 

Ab 

illisce 

illisce 

misce 

So  also  istic,  istaec,  istoc,  etc. 

[138]  From  the  stem  qvi-  is  formed  also  an  abl.  sg.  qvi,  and  the  old 
nom.  pi.  qves.  From  the  stem  qvo-  is  formed  also  a  dat.  .and  abl.  pi. 
qvis.     For  cujus,  cui,  an  older  spelling,  qvojus,  qvoi  (or  qvojei),  is 

found.     Cui  is  often  monosyllabic  (cvi). 

[139]  A  few  cases  of  qvi,  qvod  used  substantively  occur,  and  qvis, 
qvid,  are  not  rarely  used  adjectivcly;    qvis  and  qvem  are  sometimes 


34  PART  II.  — FORMS. 


140 


141 


142 
143 

144 


The  same  pronoun  is '  also  used  as  an  indefinite 
pronoun.  When  so  used,  it  has  the  same  forms  as 
when  used  interrogatively,  but  usually  does  not  take 
the  strengthening  -i. 

Various  indefinite  pronouns  compounded  of  quis 
or  qvi  occur,  all  of  which  have  the  same  declension ; 
but  those  in  which  qvis  or  qvi  forms  the  second  part 
usually  do  not  take  the  strengthening  -i. 

Forms  of  the  Verb. 

The  Latin  verb  has  the  following  forms :  — 

(a)  Three  tenses  for  incomplete  action :  present^ 

imperfect^  future. 
(6)  Three  tenses  for  completed  action :    perfect^ 
pluperfect^  future  perfect. 


feminine.     Qvlnain  or  qvlsnam  is  a  more  emphatic  interrogative ;  it  has 
the  same  forms,  with  -nam  appended. 

From  the  stem  qvo-  is  formed  a  possessive  interrogative,  cujus,  a,  urn 
{=  whose).  It  is  antiquated,  and  only  a  few  forms  occur;  viz.:  cujft, 
cujum,  cujam,  eiija,  cujae. 

[140]  Qvi  or  qvis  is  indefinite  after  si,  nisi,  ne,  num,  rarely  elsewhere. 

[141]  A  list  is  added  for  reference :  — 

allqvi  or  allqvis  aUqva  aMqvod  or  alXqvid  some,  any-. 

ecqvi  or  ecqvis  ecqva,  ecqvae   ecqvod  or  ecqvid  any? 

qvidam  qvaedam  qvoddani  a,  a  certain. 

qvicunqve  qvaecunqve       qvodciinqve  whatever. 

qvilXbet  qvaellbet  qvodltbet  which  you  like,  any. 

qvivis  qvaevis  qvodvis  which  you  wiU,  any. 

^,         ,    .  (  whichever  you  will, 

So  qvivisciinque,  etc.  < 

qvisqvis  (once  qviqvi).     Only  a  few  forms  are  found.  whosoever. 

qvisqvam  qvidqvam,  qvicqvani  any  at  all. 

qvispiam  qvaepiaui  qvidpiam  any. 

qvisqve  qvaeqve  qvodqve  or  qvidqve  every. 

So  unusqvisqve,  etc.  every  single  one. 

It  should  be  noticed  that  ecqvis,  being  at  the  same  time  interrogative 
and  indefinite,  forms  ccqvft  and  ecqvae,  without  the  i  and  with  it. 


FORMS  OF  THE  VERB.  35 


The  present  tense  has  three  moods  ;  indleative^  sub- 
junctive^ imperative. 

The  hnperfect,  perfect,  and  pluperfect  have  two 
moods :  indicative,  subjunctive. 

The  future  and  future  perfect  have  one  mood : 
indicative. 

These  forms  are  often  called,  collectively,  the 
''^finite  verb.''  Beside  these,  certain  derivative  noun- 
and  adjective-forms  are  usually  treated  in  connection 
with  the  verb  ;  viz. :  — 

(«)  Three  verbal  nouns  called  infinitives. 

(5)  A  verbal  noun  called  the  gerund. 

((?)  A  verbal  noun  called  the  supine. 

(c?)  Four  verbal  adjectives  called  participles. 

Of  the  finite  verb  only  the  incomplete  tenses  form 
a  passive  voice.  For  the  passive  of  the  complete 
tenses  the  Latin,  like  the  English,  uses  the  verb  "5e" 
with  a  passive  participle. 

The  passivie  voice  of  the  incomplete  tenses  was 
originally  reflexive  in  its  formation  and  meaning,  and 


145 
146 
147 

148 


149 
150 
151 
152 

153 


154 


[149]  Viz, :  a  present  active  infinitive,  a  present  passive  infinitive,  a 
perfect  active  infinitive.     The  infinitives  are  indeclinable  nouns. 

[150]  The  gerund  is  a  neuter  o-stera  used  only  in  the  oblique  cases  of 
the  singular. 

[151]  The  supine  is  a  u-stem  used  only  in  the  ace.  and  abl.  sg. 

[152]  Viz. :  a  present  active  participle,  a  present  passive  participle,  a 
future  active  participle,  and  a  perfect  passive  participle.  The  first  is  an 
i-stem  of  Class  III. ;  the  others  are  regular  a-  and  o-stems. 

[154]  The  name  "deponent"  was  given  to  these  verbs  by  the  old  gram- 
marians, because  they  were  supposed  to  have  "laid  off"  their  active  form. 
In  many  of  them  the  reflexive  force  can  be  seen;  e.g.,  friior,  I  enjoy 
{myself) ;  xescor,  I  eat  {feed  myself) ;  cingor,  /  bind  on  {myself),  etc.    That 


36  PART  II.  — FORMS. 


155 


156 


157 


the  reflexive  use  still  remains  in  some  verbs ;  e.g.^ 
vertor,  I  turn  [my self  \  Many  verbs  thus  used  have 
lost  the  active  form  entirely,  and  use  only  the  pas- 
sive. They  are  usually  translated  into  English  by 
active  forms,  and  are  called  "  deponent "  verbs. 

Verb-Stems. 

Verb-stems,  like  noun-stems,  may  end  in  a,  e,  i,  o,  u, 
or  a  consonant.  Of  stems  in  -o  only  a  few  forms  are 
found. 

In  most  verbs  two  or  three  forms  of  the  stem  are 
found,  —  the  verb-stem  proper  (simple  stem'),  a  modi- 
fication of  it  used  in  the  incomplete  tenses  (present 
stem),  and  another  modification  of  it  used  in  the 
complete  tenses  (perfect  stem). 

In  many  verbs  the  present  stem  is  the  same  as  the 


they  are  not  true  passives,  is  shown  by  tlie  fact  that  many  of  them  are 
transitive  and  govern  a  direct  object.  In  many  of  them'  it  is  not  easy  to 
see  tlie  reflexive  meaning,  possibly  because  the  original  meaning  is  not 
known,  and  they  are  apparently  equivalent  to  active  forms. 

Deponent  verbs  form  the  gerund,  supine,  and  participles  of  the  active 
as  well  as  the  passive  voice,  and  their  passive  participles  are  sometimes 
passive  in  meaning.  In  the  tenses  for  completed  action,  though  these  are 
not  reflexive  in  formation,  the  meaning  follows  that  of  the  incomplete 
tenses,  and  these  forms  also  are  usually  rendered  into  English  by  the 
active  voice. 

[155]  Open  vowel-stems,  as  in  nouns,  differ  in  certain  points  from  close 
vowel  and  consonant-stems,  but  the  division  is  not  suflficiently  marked  to 
make  the  grouping  of  any  importance. 

The  only  o-stems  are  no-sc-o  (and  its  compounds),  f6-rem,  etc.  (imp. 
subj.)  and  f6-re  (pres.  inf.),  and  a  few  participles  which  have  become 
adjectives  in  use. 

[157]  The  modifications  mentioned  here,  especially  twsalizin(j,'dre  some- 
times by  analogy  carried  also  into  the  perfect-stem  or  simple-stem  forms. 


VERB-STEMS 

37 

simple  stem.     When  not  so,  it  is  formed  from  the 

simple  stem, — 

(a)  By  reduplication. 

158 

(b)  By  lengthening  the  stem-vowel. 

159 

(c)  By  adding  or  inserting  a  nasal. 

160 

(c?)  By  adding  -sc,  -esc,  or  -isc. 

161 

(e)  By  adding  -a,  -e,  or  -i. 

162 

The  perfect  stem  is  rarely  like  the  simple  stem. 

163 

Usually  it  is  formed  from  the  simple  stem,  — 

[158]  Reduplication  consists  in  repeating  before  the  stem  its  initial 
consonant-sound  with  the  following  voAvel,  often  with  a  weakening  of  the 
latter.  Stems  ending  in  a  vowel  lose  the  final  vowel  when  reduplicated, 
and  become  consonant-stems. 

Reduplication  is  found  in  the  present  stem  in  four  cases ;  viz.  :  bib-o 
(ba-),  gign-o  (for  gigffn-o,  gSn-),  ser-o  (for  ses-o,  sa-),  and  sist-o  (sta-). 
Sisto  is  peculiar  in  repeating  only  the  initial  s  and  the  vowel  (not  st). 

[159]  E.g.,  duc-o  (diic-),  dic-o  (die-). 

[160]  E.g.,  sin-o  (si-),  pung-o  (pttg),  find-o  (fid-). 

[161]  E.g.,  ac-esc-o  (ac-),  no-sc-o  (no-),  revlv-isc-o  (reviv-).  When 
sc  is  added  after  a  consonant,  there  is  usually  some  obscurity  of  formation 
from  euphonic  loss. 

Verbs  which  form  the  present  stem  in  this  way  usually  mean  to  become 
(so  and  so),  to  begin  to  be  (so  and  so).  They  are  often  called,  therefore, 
inceptive  or  inchoative  verbs. 

[162]  A  few  present  stems  end  in  11,  which  seems  to  have  arisen  from 
li;  viz.:  cell-o,  pell-o,  toll-o,  also  sall-o  or  salio  [to  salt).  But  sali-o 
[to  leap)  and  sepeli-o  do  not  change. 

[163]  Possibly  all  cases  of  likeness  of  form  between  the  perfect  stem 
and  the  simple  stem  are  the  result  of  loss.  Stems  in  a  close  vowel  often 
drop  the  v  of  the  perfect  stem  ;  those  in  -u  show  the  v  only  in  old  Latin. 
Others  have  lost'  a  reduplication  syllable,  and  possibly  the  stem-vowel  is 
lengthened  in  others,  where  the  syllable  is  long  by  position,  and  the  real 
q^uantity  of  the  vowel  therefore  not  clear. 


38  PART  II.  — FORMS. 


168 


169 


(a)  By  reduplication. 

(5)  By  lengthening  the  stem-vowel. 

(c)  By  adding  -s. 

(c?)  By  adding  -u  or  -v. 

principal  parts  "  of  a  verb  are  :  — 

'The  pres.  ind.  act.,  1st sg. ) 

The  pres.  inf.  act.  J  ^'^^"^  '^^^'  the;.r...n^  stem. 

CTiVE  <  rpj^g  i^QTi.  ind.  act.,  1st  sg.,  which  shows  the  perfect  stem. 
.  The  supine,  which  shows  the  simple  stem. 

iThepres.  ind.  pass.,  1st  sg.) 
The  pres.  inf.  pass.  j  which  show  the  j.m..n^  stem. 

The  perf .  pass,  participle,  which  shows  the  simple  stem. 


[164]  In  tlie  perfect  stem  S  is  regularly  weakened  to  e  in  the  reduplica- 
tion syllable,  and  to  6  or  I  in  the  stem  syllable.  Bib-i  (ba-)  seems  to 
owe  its  form  to  the  present  bib-o  ;  possibly  stlt-i  has  been  affected  in  the 
same  way  by  sist-o. 

The  stems  which  begin  with  two  consonants  (scid-,  sta-,  spond-)  drop 
the  initial  s  of  the  stem,  after  the  reduplication  syllable  (making  sci-cid-i, 
ste-t-i,  spo-pond-i).  For  the  loss  of  the  final  vowel  of  ba-,  da-,  and  sta- 
in bib-i,  ded-i,  stet  i  or  stit-i,  see  [158]. 

The  reduplication  of  the  perfect  stem  is  usually  dropped  Mhen  the  verb 
is  compounded  with  a  preposition.     A  few  stems  only  retain  it. 

[165]  E.rj.  leg-i  (l€g-) ;  pav-i  (pftv-) .  The  stem-vowel  ft  becomes  e  when 
lengtlioned  to  form  the  perfect  stem,  except  when  followed  by  v  (viz. :  in 
cav-i,fav-i,  lav-i,  pav-i)  or  b  (in  scab-i).  Thus,  eg-i  (ftg-),  peg-i  (pftg-),etc. 

[167]  U  is  added  after  consonants,  v  after  vowels,  and  the  preceding 
vowel  is  regularly  made  long  before  the  added  -v. 

[168]  E.g.,  am-o,  ama-re,  amav-i,  aina-tum,  passive,  am-or,  ama-ri, 
ama-tus.  These  are  the  forms  usually  given  in  grammars  and  lexicons, 
and  are  based  on  a  classification  of  verbs  according  to  the  ending  of  the 
pres.  inf.  as  follows  :  — 

First  conjugation ;  inf.  endings  -ar6,  -ari,  =  a-stems. 

Second        "  "  "        -erg,  -eri,  =  e-stems. 

Third  "  "  "        -6r6,  -i,       =  cons,  ii-  and  short  l-stems. 

Fourth         "  "  "        -ir6,  -iri,    =  long  i-stems. 

In  most  verbs  the  pres.  inf.  would  be  enough  to  identify  the  present 
stem,  but  short  i-steras  lose  the  i  and  become  consonant-stems  in  this  form. 
The  pres.  ind.  is  therefore  added  to  identify  such. 


VERBAL   SUFFIXES.  39 


Verbal  Suffixes. 

The  suffixes  of  the  finite  verb  contain  two  ele- 
ments, one  of  which  shows  the  mood  and  tense 
(mood-and-tense  sign'),  the  other  the  person  and 
number  (^person-and-number  suffix): 

The  mood-and-tense  signs  are  added  to  the  stem  as 
follows :  — 

Pres.  ind.,  none;  pres.  imp.,  none;  pres  subj.,  i  in  a-stems, 

§.  elsewhere. 
Imp.  ind.,  §ba  or  eba;   imp.  subj.,  6rg. 
Fut.  ind.,  Sb  in  open  vowel-stems,  a  and  e  elsewhere. 
Perf.  ind.  (es  or  is?    See  188)  ;   perf.  subj.,  SrL 
Plup.  ind.,  Sra;  plup.  subj.,  isse. 
Fut.  perf.  ind.,  Sr. 


170 

171 

172 

173 
174 
175 
176 
177 


[170]  The  names  "  tense-and-mood  sign,"  "  person-and-number  suflix," 
are  used  for  convenience,  without  implying  any  theory  of  their  origin, 
simply  because  they  show  to  the  eye  or  ear  the  tense  and  mood,  person 
and  number,  and,  incidentally,  the  voice  of  the  verb.  Grammarians  are 
agreed  that  the  suffixes  of  person  and  number  are  stunted  forms  of  per- 
sonal pronouns ;  and  most  of  the  signs  of  tense  and  mood  are  generally 
thought  to  be  derived  from  the  verbs  "be"  (stems  -es,  -fu)  and  "go" 
(stem  -I). 

[171]  Mood-and-tense  signs  are  added,  of  course,  to  the  present  stem  in 
the  incomplete  tenses,  and  to  the  perfect  stem  in  the  complete  tenses. 

[172]  In  the  pres.  subj.  i  contracts  with  a  preceding  a  to  e. 

[173]  The  imp.  ind.  sign  is  -eba  after  a  consonant  or  u,  and  almost 
ahvays  after  i.  6ba  is  used  after  open  vowels,  also  in  old  Latin  after  i, 
but  in  both  gba  and  eb  the  initial  vowel  is  always  absorbed.    (See  [178]). 

[174]  The  fut.  ind,  sign  a  is  found  in  the  first  sg. ;  e  in  the  other 
forms.  In  old  Latin,  stems  in  i  sometimes  form  the  future  with  the 
sign  6b. 

[175]  The  perf.  subj.  sign  is  often  -6rl,  a  result  of  confusion  with  the 
fut.  perf.  ind.  which  closely  resembles  it  in  form  and  use. 


40  PART  II.— FORMS 


178 


179 
180 


By  adding  the  tense-and-mood  signs  to  the  stem, 
there  is  formed  a  stem  or  base  for  each  tense.  To 
this  tense-base  are  added  the  suffixes  of  person  and 
number,  as  follows  :  — 

Indicative  and  subjunctive. 

Act.    1.  -dm  2.  -is'      3.  -rt         1.  -rmtls    2.  -itla      3.  -wnt 
Pass.  1.  -or     2.  -eiris    3.  -itiir      1.  -tmHi    2.  -tmini  3.  -unttlr 


[178]  The  initial  short  vowel  of  the  mood-and-tense  signs  is  regularly 
absorbed  by  a  preceding  open  vowel;  e.g.,  aina-bam  {=  ama-eba-m), 
mone-re-m  (=  moue-ere-m),  etc.  A  preceding  i  either  absorbs  it,  e.g., 
audi-re-m  (st.  audi-),  or  drops  before  it,  leavmg  a  consonant-stem,  e.g., 
cap-^re-m  (st.  capi-).  The  signs  6ba,  eb,  gre-,  therefore,  appear  in 
the  forms  ba,  b,  re  after  stems  ending  in  a,  e,  or  1.  In  the  complete 
tenses  the  stem  ends  in  a,  e,  or  i  only  when  v  is  dropped.  In  such  cases 
the  initial  vowel  of  the  sign  is  regularly  absorbed  by  a  or  e,  very  rarely 
by  i.  See  [215].  The  long  vowels  a,  e,  i  are  not  absorbed,  but  i  contracts 
with  a  preceding  a  to  e,  as  stated  in  [172].  The  loss  of  6  of  the  imp.  subj. 
sign  is  a  characteristic  of  certain  irregular  verbs.     (See  [220]). 

The  suffixes  appear  in  the  form  given  here  after  u  or  a  consonant. 
After  a,  e,  i,  the  initial  vowel  of  the  suffix  is  absorbed,  making  the  preced- 
ing a,  e,  or  1  long.  But  o  remains  unabsorbed  after  stem-vowels,  and 
itself  absorbs  the  preceding  a ;  and  u  remains  unabsorbed  after  the  stem- 
vowel  i. 

The  initial  vowel  of  the  person-and-number  suffixes,  strictly  speaking, 
is  not  a  part  of  them.  Its  origin  is  a  matter  of  dispute ;  some  regard  it  as 
a  simple  insertion  to  attach  the  suffixes  to  the  tense  base  {connecting 
vowel) ;  others  as  an  addition  to  the  stem  to  fit  it  for  the  reception  of  the 
suffixes  [modal  vowel  or  thematic  vowel).  Its  omission  is  one  peculiarity  of 
certain  irregular  verbs.     (See  [220]). 

[179]  m  of  -^m  falls  when  0  is  unabsorbed.  -um  for  -dra  is  found  in 
sum.     -umus,  an  older  form  of  -imus,  is  found  in  stinius,  qvaestlnius, 

volfiuius.  -int  for  -unt  is  found  in  the  fut.  perf.,  evidently  by  confusion 
with  the  perf.  subj.  -is,  -imOs,  -itis,  due,  no  doubt,  to  the  same  cause, 
are  not  unusual  in  the  fut.  perf.  for  -?s,  -fniQs,  -itls. 

[180]  -^r6  for  ^rls  is  not  unusual  in  poetry  ;  rare  in  prose. 


VERBAL   SUFFIXES.  41 


Imperative. 

Act.      2.  -e,  -ito         3.  -ito  2.  -itg,  -itotg    3.  -wnto 

Pass.     2.  -erg,  -itSr    3.  -itSr        2.  -imini  3.  -wnt6r 

The  suffixes  of  the  non-finite  forms  are:  — 
(a)  From  the  present  stem. 

Act.    Pres.  inf.,  -erg ;  pres.  part.,  -enti ;  gerund,  -endo. 
Pass.  Pres.  inf.,  -eri;   pres.  part.,  -endo. 

(^)  From  the  perfect  stem. 

Act.    Perf.  inf.  (-sg  ?  see  below,  190). 

(c)  From  the  simple  stem. 

Act.    Put.  part.,  -turo-  (-suro-)  ;   supine,  -tu-  (-su-). 
Pass.  Perf.  part.,  -to-  (-so-). 

The  perfect  indicative  active  and  perfect  infinitive 
active  have  peculiar  endings  not  easily  resolved  into 
sign  and  suffix.     They  are  :  — 

Perf.  act.  ind.,  -i,  -isti,  -it ;    -imtls,  -istis,  -erunt. 

Perf.  act.  inf.,  -issg. 


181 
182 


183 
184 

185 

186 
187 

188 


189 
190 


[181]  The  imperative  forms  in  -to,  -tote,  -iito ;  -tor,  -ntor  are  some- 
times called  future  imperative.  They  are  antiquated  forms,  retained  in 
poetry  and  legal  phraseology,  rare  elsewhere. 

[183]  For  -endo,  -undo  is  found  ;  also  for  -enti,  -wnti  in  one  verb  (eo, 
-go"). 

[184]  For  -^ri,  -i  is  found  in  consonant  and  u-stems.  An  older  suffix 
-^rigr  (in  consonant  and  u-stems,  -ier),  is  found  in  old  Latin. 

[186]  -ituro-,  -itu-,  -ito-,  are  found  in  some  cases.  This  may  have  been 
the  form  after  vowel-stems,  the  i  disappearing  by  absorption,  -suro,  -su, 
-so,  are  euphonic  changes  of  -turo,  -tu,  -to,  used  after  certain  letters. 
(See  [209]). 

[188]  The  perf.  act.  ind.  and  inf.  seem  to  have  -is  or  -es  as  mood-and- 
tense  sign,  and  to  add  the  suffixes  directly  to  the  tense-base  without  the 
suffix-vowel.  But  some  forms  are  quite  irregular,  and  the  second  sg.  ind. 
shows  a  suffix  -ti,  not  found  elsewhere  in  the  Latin  verb. 

[189]  For  -erunt,  -ere  is  found,  also  rarely  -grunt. 


42  PART  II.  — FORMS. 


The  Conjugations. 

191 

There  are  five  forms  of  conjugation  for  the  incom- 

plete  tenses,   according   to    the    form    of   the    stem. 

They  are :  — 

1st.   Stems  in  -a. 

2d.    Stems  in  -e. 

3d.    Stems  in  a  consonant  or  in  -u. 

4th.  Stems  in  short  -i. 

5th.  Stems  in  long  -i. 

In   the  complete  tenses  there  is  but  one  form  for 

all  verbs. 

192 

The  theme  of  the  incomplete  tenses  is  found  by- 

dropping  the  ending  of  the  present  infinitive. 

JL93 

The  incomplete  tenses  are  inflected  by  adding  to 

the  theme  the  following  endings :  — 

[191]  The  final  u  of  verb-stems  does  not  contract  with  the  vowel  of  the 
suffix,  and  there  is  therefore  no  difference  between  ii-stems  and  consonants 
stems  in  their  inflection.  Comp.are  monosyllabic  noun  u-stems,  112.  These 
different  forms  of  inflection,  like  the  different  declensions,  are  simply 
variations  resulting  from  contraction  of  stem-ending  and  suffix-vowel. 
The  stems  in  short  -I  and  long  -i  are  so  called  for  convenience  of  distinc- 
tion, since  tlie  1  appears  as  short  in  one  and  long  in  the  other.  But  it 
seems  probable  that  the  final  vowel  of  all  verb-stems  is  properly  short, 
and  that  its  length  in  the  incomplete  tenses  is  the  result  of  absorbing  the 
suffix-vowel.  The  usual  arrangement  of  conjugations  (see  [108])  places 
short  I-stems  with  consonant  and  u-stems.  As  in  i-stem  nouns,  the  i  of 
these  verb-stems  is  lost  in  certain  forms,  leaving  a  consonant-stem. 

Only  one  form  of  conjugation  is  found  in  the  complete  tenses,  because 
the  perfect  stem  always  ends  in  u  or  a  consonant,  and  consequently  no 
variation  of  form  from  contraction  takes  place.  The  few  cases  in  which 
the  perfect  stem  is  made  to  end  in  a,  e,  or  i  by  the  loss  of  v  are  too  rare 
to  make  a  difference  of  conjugation. 


THE   CONJUGATIONS. 


43 


^-STEMS. 


1  . 

2. 
3 

PL 
1 
2 
3 

Present  Active. 

Present  Passive. 

Indie, 

Subj. 

Imper. 

Non- 
finite. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Imper. 

Non- 
finite. 

5 

as 
at 

amus 

atis 

ant 

em 

es 
et 

emiis 

etis 
ent 

a,  ato 
at5 

ate,at6te 
anto 

Inf. 
are 

Part, 
anti- 

Ger. 
ando- 

or 

aris 

atur 

Smur 
amini 
antur 

er 

eris 

etur 

emiir 
emini 
entiir 

are,at6r 
ator 

amini 
antor 

Inf. 
ari 

Part, 
ando- 

Imperf.  Active. 

Imperf.  Passive. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

1 

abam 

arem 

abar 

arer 

2 

abas 

ares 

abaris 

areris 

3 

abat 

aret 

abatur 

aretur 

PL 

1 

abamus 

aremus 

abamiir 

aremur 

2 

abatis 

aretis 

abamini 

aremini 

3 

abant 

arent 

abantiir 

arentur 

Fut.  Act. 

Fut.  Pas. 

Indie. 

Indie. 

abo 

abor 

abis 

aberis 

abit 

abitiir 

abimiis 

abimiir 

abitis 

abimini 

abunt 

abuntiir 

194 


195 


EXAMPLE    FOR    PRACTICE. 
Stem,  S.ina- ;  theme,  S^m-. 


[194]    Active 


[195] 


Passive 


Passive 


amo 

am  em 

am  are 

amaB 

ames 

am  a,  am  ato 

amans,  -ntis,  ete 

am  at 

amet 

am  ato 

am  andi,  etc. 

ete. 

ete. 

etc. 

amor 

am  er 

am  ari 

am  arts 

am  eris 

am  ar6, 

am  at6r           am  andfls,  a,  lim 

am  atiir 

am  ettir 

amatSr 

etc. 

etc. 

etc 

am  abam 

am  ar6m 

am  abo 

am  abas 

am  ares 

am  abIs 

am  abat 

am  argt 

am  abIt 

ete. 

etc. 

etc. 

am  abar 

am  arer 

am  abfir 

am  abaris 

am  areris 

am  aberis 

am  abatflr 

am  arettir 

amabltnr 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

44 


PART  II.  — FORMS. 


196 


197 


J?-STEMS. 


Sg. 

1 

2 

3 
PL 

1 

2 

3 

Present  Active. 

Present  Passive. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Imper. 

Non- 
finite. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Imper. 

Non- 
finite. 

ea 

es 
et 

emiis 

etis 

ent 

earn 
eas 

eat 

eamiis 

eatis 

eant 

e,  eto 

eta 

ete,et6te 
ento 

Inf. 
ere 

Part, 
enti- 

Ger. 
endo- 

eor 
eris 
etur 

emur 
emini 
entur 

ear 

earis 

eatiir 

eamiir 
eamini 
eantur 

ere,et6r 
etor 

emini 
entor 

Inf. 
eri 

Part, 
endo- 

Imperf. 

Active. 

Imperf.  Passive. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Sg. 

1 

ebam 

erem 

ebar 

erer 

2 

ebas 

eres 

ebaris 

ereris 

3 

ebat 

eret 

ebatiir 

eretiir 

PL 

1 

ebamiis 

eremus 

ebamur 

eremur 

2 

ebatis 

eretis 

ebamini 

eremini 

3 

ebant 

erent 

ebantiir 

erentiir 

Fut.Act. 

Put.  Pas. 

Indie. 

Indie. 

ebo 

ebor 

ebis 

eberis 

ebit 

ebitur 

ebimus 

ebimur 

ebitis 

ebimini 

ebunt 

ebuntur 

EXAMPLE  FOR  PRACTICE. 
Stem,  xn5ne-;    theme,  inAn-. 


[196]    Active  ^ 

Passive  -I 

[197]    Active  ■! 


Passive 


moneo 

mon  eam 

mon  er6 

nion  es 

mon  eas 

mone 

mon  Sto          mon  ens,  -ntis 

etc. 

mon6t 

mon  eat 

monettJ         monendi,  ete. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

nion  e5r 

mon  ear 

mon  eris 

mon  earls 

mon  erg,  mon 

etOr      monerl 

mon  ettlr 

mon  eattir 

mon 

etOr      moncndQs,  a, 

11m 

ete. 

ete. 

ete. 

mon  ebam 

mon  er6m 

mon  ebo 

mon  ebas 

mon  eres 

mon  ebIs 

mon  ebat 

mon  er6t 

mon  ebIt 

ete. 

etc. 

ete. 

mon  ebar 

mon  er6r 

mon  gbOr 

mon  ebaris 

mon  ereris 

mon  ebgrls 

mon  ebatQr 

mon  eretiir 

mon  ebltilr 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

THE  CONJUGATIONS. 


45 


CONSONANT-STEMS    AND     U-STEMS. 


Sg. 

1 

2 

3 
PL 

1 

2 

3 

Present  Active. 

Present  Passive. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Imper. 

Non- 
finite. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Imper. 

Non- 
finite. 

6 

is 
it 

imus 

itis 

unt 

am 

as 

at 

amiis 

atis 

ant 

e,  ito 
it5 

ite,  itote 
unto 

Inf. 
ere 

Part, 
enti- 

Ger. 
endo- 

or 

eris 

itur 

imur 
imini 
untur 

ar 

aris 

atur 

amur 
amini 
antur 

ere,  itor 
itor 

imini 
untor 

Inf. 
i 

Part. 
endo- 

Sg. 
1 

Imperf. 

Active. 

Imperf.  Passive. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

ebam 

erem 

ebar 

erer 

2 

ebas 

eres 

ebaris 

ereris 

3 

ebat 

eret 

ebatiir 

eretiir 

PL 
1 

ebamiis 

eremus 

ebamur 

eremiir 

2 

ebatis 

eretis 

ebamini 

eremini ' 

3 

ebant 

erent 

ebantiir 

erentur 

Fut.  Act. 

Fut.  Pas. 

Indie. 

Indie. 

am 
es 

et 

emus 

etis 

ent 

ar 

eris 

etiir 

emur 
emini 
entur 

198 


199 


EXAMPLE    FOR 

PRACTICE. 

Stem,  rSg- ;  theme,  rSg-. 

Active 

(r6g5 

regia 

(     etc. 

reg  am 

reg  as 

etc. 

reg  6,  reg  Ito 
etc. 

reg  grg 

reg  ens,  -ntis,  etc 

reg  endi,  etc. 

Passive 

(  reg  5r 
^reggrls 
(     etc. 

regar 
reg  aris 
etc. 

reggrg,  regttSr 
etc. 

regi 

regendtis,  a,  flm 

Active 

(reg  ebam 
Uegebas 
(     etc. 

reg6r6m 

reg  gres 

etc. 

reg  am 

reg  es 
etc. 

Passive 

(  reg  ebar 
{reg  ebaris 
(     etc. 

reg  6r6r 

reg  greris 

etc. 

regar 

reg  eris 

etc. 

[193] 


[199] 


Stems  in  -u  have  the  same  endings  as  consonant-stems,  the  vowel  being 
unabsorbed.     £-g-,  from  the  stem  tribu-  wo  have  — 

Active,  trlbuo,  etc.  tribu.ara,  etc.  tribue,  etc.       tribu  6r6,  tribu  ens,  tribu  end!. 

Passive.  tribuSr,  etc.  tribuar,  etc,  tribu 6rg,  etc.   tribul,  tribuendiis,  a,  tira. 

Active,  tribu  ebam,  etc.  tribu  grera,  etc.  tribu  am,  etc. 

Passive,  tribu  ebar,  etc.  tribu  grgr,  etc.  tribuar,  etc. 


PART  II.— FORMS. 


There  are  two  forms  of  inflection  of  verb-stems  in  -i. 
In  one,  i  is  short  and  falls  before  a  short  syllable,  leav- 
ing a  consonant-stem;  in  the  other,  i  absorbs  the 
vowel  of  a  following  short  syllable,  and  is  long.  In 
both,  i  stands  before  long  syllables. 

SHORT    JT-STEMS^ 


Sg. 

1 

2 

3 
PL 

1 

2 

3 

Present  Active. 

Present  Passive. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Iraper. 

Non- 
finite. 

Indie. 

Bubj. 

Imper. 

Non. 
finite. 

15 
is 
it 

imus 

itis 

iunt 

lam 
ias 
iat 

iamiis 

iatis 

iant 

e,  ito 
itg 

ite,it5te 
iunto 

Inf. 

ere 

Part, 
ienti- 

Ger. 
iendo- 

ior 

eris 

itiir 

imiir 
imini 
iuntiir 

iar 

iaris 

iatur 

iamur 

iamlni 
iantiir 

ere,  itor 
itor 

imini 
iuntor 

Inf. 

i 

Part, 
iendo- 

Imperf.  Active. 

Imperf.  Passive. 

Fut.Act. 

Fut.  Pas. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Indie. 

Indie. 

6g. 

1 

iebam 

erem 

iebar 

erer 

iam 

iar 

2 

iebas 

eres 

iebaris 

ereris 

ies 

ieris 

3 
PL 

1 

iebat 
iebamus 

eret 
eremus 

iebatiir 
iebamiir 

eretur 
eremur 

iet 
iemiis 

ietiir 
iemtir 

2 

iebatis 

eretis 

iebamini 

eremini 

ietis 

iemini 

3 

iebant 

erent 

iebantiir 

erentur 

ient 

ientiir 

[200]  The  1  before  the  long  vowel  remains,  though  the  vowel  be  short- 
ened before  final  m,  t,  r,  see  [12]  (a),  and  falls  in  the  pres.  inf.  pass,  where 
tlie  proper  ending  -€ri  has  been  shortened  to  -i. 


EXAMPLE    FOR    PRACTICE. 

{cJlp  io 
etc. 
{cap  i5r 
etc. 


Stem,  c&pY-  or  cSp-  (by  dropping  i) ;  tberae,  c&p-. 
cap  i^m 


cap  ias 

capiat 

etc. 

cap  6,  cap  Ito 
capItS 

etc. 

cap6r6 

cap  iens,  -ntis,  etc 

cap  iendl,  etc. 

cap  iar 
cap  iaris 
cap  iatiir 
etc. 

cap6r6,  eapItSr 
cap  It6r 
etc. 

cap  I 

cap  iendQs,  ft,  ttm 

THE   CONJUGATIONS. 


47 


LONG    J-STEMS. 


Sg. 

I 

2 

3 
PL 

1 

2 

3 

Present  Active. 

Present  Passive. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Imper. 

Non- 
finite. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Imper. 

Non- 
finite. 

io 

is 
it 

imus 

itis 

iunt 

iam 

las 

iat 

iamus 

iatis 

iant 

i,ito 

its 

ite,  it5te 
iunto 

Inf. 
ire 

Part, 
ienti- 

Ger. 
iendo- 

ior 
iris 
itiir 

imiir 
imini 
iuntiir 

iar 

iaris 

iatiir 

iamiir 
iamini 
iantiir 

ire,  itor 
itor 

iminr 
iuntor 

Inf. 
iri 

Part, 
iendo- 

Imperf. 

Active. 

Imperf.  Passive. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

1 

iebam 

irem 

iebar 

irer 

2 

iebas 

ires 

iebaris 

ireris 

3 
PL 

1 

iebat 
iebamiis 

iret 
iremus 

iebatur 
iebamiir 

iretur 
iremiii 

2 

iebatis 

iretis 

iebanuni 

iremini 

3 

iebant 

irent 

iebantiir 

irentur 

Fut.Act. 

Fut.  Pas. 

Indie. 

Indie. 

lam 

ies 
iet 

iemiis 

ietis 

lent 

iar 

ieris 

ietiir 

iemur 
iemini 
ientiir 

203 


204 


.  cap  iebam  cap6r6m 

[/&02j     Active    ]  cap  iebas  cap6res 

ete.  etc. 

cap  iebar  cap  6rgr 

Passive  \  cap  iebaris  capSrerls 

etc.  etc. 


cap  iam 
cap  ies 

etc. 
cap  iar 
cap  ieris 

etc. 


EXAMPLE  FOR  PRACTICE.     Stem,  audi- ;  theme,  aud- 


[203]    Active 


Passive 


[204]    Active 


Passive 


audio 
audls 
audit 

etc. 
aud  ior 
aud  Ma 
aud  Itiir 

ete. 

aud  iebam 
aud  iebas 
aud  iebat 

etc. 
aud  iebar 
aud  iebaris 
aud  iebattir 

etc. 


aud  iam 
aud  ias 
aud  iat 

etc. 
aud  iar 
aud  iaris 
aud  iattir 

etc. 

aud  Ir6m 
aud  Ires 
audlrgt 

ete. 
aud  IrSr 
aud  Ireris 
aud  Iretur 

etc. 


audi,  audlto 
aud  Ito 
etc. 

aud  Ire,  audltSr 
audltSr 
ete. 


aud  Ir6 

aud  iens,  -ntis,  etc. 

audiendl,  etc. 

aud  Irl 

aud  iendtls,  a,  flm 


aud  iam 
aud  ies 
aud  i6t 

etc. 
aud  iar 
aud  ieris 
audlettlr 

etc. 


48 


PART  II.  — FORMS. 


205 


206 


207 


The  theme  of  the  complete  tenses  is  found  by 
dropping  the  ending  of  the  perfect  indicative  active, 
first  person  singular. 

The  endings  are  the  same  for  all  verbs ;  viz. :  — 


Perfect  Active. 

Pluperfect  Active. 

Fut.Perf. 
Active. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Non-finite. 

Indie. 

Subj. 

Indie. 

Sg.  1 
2 
3 

PL  1 
2 
3 

1 

isti 

it 

imus 

istis 

erunt 

erim 

eris 

erit 

erimus 

eritis 

erint 

Inf. 
isse 

eram 

eras 

erat 

eramus 

eratis 

erant 

issem 

isses 

isset 

issemiis 

issetis 

issent 

er5 

eris 

erit 

erimus 

eritis 

erint 

The  lacking  complete  tenses  of  the  passive  voice 
are  supplied,  as  in  English,  by  the  perfect  passive 
participle  and  the  verb  "  be." 


[206]  The  theme  of  the  complete  tenses  ends  in  u  or  a  consonant,  and 
the  vowel  of  the  endings  therefore  remains  unabsorbed,  except  when 
brought  after  a  vowel  by  the  loss  of  v.    See  [215]. 


EXAMPLES   FOR   PRACTICE. 


Stem  fimSv- 

amavl 
amavisti 

ainavgrlm 
amavfirls 

amaviseS 

amav6ram 
amavgras 

amavissSm 
araavisses 

amavgro 
amavSria 

ete. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

'•     luSnu- 

mSnuT 

monu6rim 

monuissB 

raonu6r5m 

monuissgna 

monugro 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

"     rex- 

rexl 
etc. 

rex6rlm 
etc. 

rexissS 

rex6r.1ra 
etc. 

rexissgm 
etc. 

rexgro 
etc. 

"     trlbu- 

tribui 
etc. 

tribuSrlm 
etc. 

tribuissB 

tribugrara 
etc. 

trlbuiesgm 
etc. 

tribugrS 
etc. 

«     c5p- 

c5pl 
etc. 

cepgrim 
etc. 

eepissS 

cep6r5m 
etc. 

cepisagm 
ete. 

cepgrS 
etc. 

"     audlv- 

audlvl 
etc. 

audivBrlm 
ete. 

audivissS 
etc. 

audivSram 
etc. 

audiviasgm 
etc. 

audivSro 
etc. 

For  the  variation  between  i  and  I  in  the  perf.  subj.  and  fut.  perf.  ind. 
see  [175]  and  [179]. 


THE    CONJUGATIONS. 


49 


The  theme  of  the  verb-forms  from  the  simple  stem 
may  be  found  by  dropping  the  ending  of  the  supine 
or  of  the  perfect  passive  participle. 

The  endings  of  the   forms  from  the  simple  stem 


are :  — 


Futiire  Active 

Perf.  Pass. 

Participle. 

Participle. 

A-stems     .     .    . 

atu- 

aturo- 

ato- 

E-stems      .     .    . 

etu- 

eturo- 

eto- 

I-stems  .... 

itu- 

ituro- 

ito- 

0-stems      .     .     . 

otu- 

oturo- 

5to- 

U-stems     .     .     . 

utu- 

uturo- 

uto- 

tu-  (su-), 
or  itu- 

turo-  (sure-), 

to-  (so-), 

Consonant-stems 

or  Ituro- 

or  Ito- 

208 


209 


[209]  The  endings  -Itu-,  -Itfiro-,  -Ito-,  though  less  common  in  consonant- 
stems,  seem  to  be  the  usual  form  of  the  suffixes  in  vowel-stems,  —  the  long 
vowel  being  due  to  the  absorption  of  the  I  of  the  suffix.  In  a  few  cases, 
however,  vowel-stems  show  a  short  vowel  in  these  endings,  which  may  be 
explained  by  assuming  tliat  the  suffix  is  appended  directly  to  the  stem 
without  the  vowel,  as  in  most  consonant  stems.  These  cases  number  in 
all  twelve ;  viz. ;  dStus,  rfttus,  sStus,  status ;  cltus,  Itus,  lltus,  qvitus, 
situs;  -cliitus,  ftiturus,  rfltus. 

Su-,  suro-,  so-,  are  euplionic  changes  of  tu-,  turo-,  to-.  They  are 
used  after  stems  ending  in  a  dental-mute  (except  tend-,  which  has  forms 
with  both  t  and  s,  apparently  by  confusion  with  its  kindred  stem  tSn-) 
and  after  a  few  others,  especially  stems  ending  in  two  consonants  with 
which  an  added  t  could  not  easily  be  pronounced.  See  [12].  The  real 
form  of  the  stem  is  often  obscured  before  these  suffixes  by  euphonic 
change. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Stem  Sma- 

amatfira,  araatu 

amaturtts,  5,  ttm 

araattlB,  5,  flm 

'«     dele- 

deletum,  deletu 

deleturus,  a,  um 

deletus,  a,  um 

"     audi- 

auditum,  auditu 

audJturus,  a,  um 

audltUH,  a,  um 

"     no- 

notum,  notii 

noturus,  a,  um 

notus,  a,  um 

"     trlbu- 

tributum,  tribulu 

tribixturus,  a,  um 

tributus,  a,  um 

"     cSp- 

captum,  captu 

capturus,  a,  um 

captus,  a,  um 

"     hSb- 

haWtum,  haWtu 

habTturus,  a,  um 

habitus,  a,  um 

••     liid- 

lusum,  lusu 

lusurus,  a,  um 

ItisuB,  a,  urn 

50  PART  IL  — FORMS. 


210 
211 

212 

213 

214 


The  participles  with  the  verb  "be"  are  often  used 
as  in  English  with  the  force  of  finite  verb-forms. 

The  present  active  participle  is  thus  used  only 
when  it  has  become  an  adjective  or  noun  in  force 
and  meaning. 

The  future  active  participle  with  the  verb  "be" 
makes  the  "first"  or  "active"  periphrastic  conjuga- 
tion, and  expresses  an  intended  or  destined  action. 

The  present  passive  participle  with  the  verb  "  be  " 
makes  the  "second"  or  "passive"  periphrastic  con- 
jugation, and  expresses  duty  or  necessity. 

The  perfect  passive  participle  with  the  verb  "  be  " 
supplies  the  lacking  complete  tenses  of  the  passive 
voice. 


[210]    For  the  inflection  of  the  verb  "be,"  see  [221]. 
[212]   E.g., 

auditurus  sfim,  I  am  going  to  hear  ;  expect  to  hear ;  intend  to  hear,  etc. 
auditurUs  erSm,  Iivas  going  to  hear  ;  expected  to  hear ;  intended  to  hear,  etc. 
This  form  supplies  the  lacking  subjunctive  and  infinitive  of  the  future 
tense,  when  such  forms  are  needed  for  precision. 

[213]    audiendtts  sfim,  /  must  he  heard ;  ought  to  he  heard,  etc. 

audiendfis  SrSm,  I  had  to  he  heard ;  deserved  to  be  heard,  etc. 
[214] 


Perf.  pass.  ind. 

Smjlttis  siiiu 

Perf.  pass.  subj.  aiuatils  sXm 

?8 

"            8l8 

"         est 

sit 

amatl     siimiis 

amatl     sTmiis 

"         e8tX8 

sTtls 

"          sunt 

sint 

Plup.  pass.  ind. 

amatii8  gram 

Plup.  pass.  subj.  amattls  essSm 

eras 

esses 

erat 

essgt 

amatl     eramiSs 

amatl     essemiis 

eratls 

"         essetls 

"          erant 

"         essent 

Fut.  pf.  pass,  ind 

amatiis  ero 
eris 

erit 

Perf.  pass.  inf.    amatiis  essS 

"          erltis 

"         erunt 

IRREGULAR  VERB-FORMS.  51 


Irregular  Verb-Forms. 

The  V  used  to  form  tlie  perfect  stem  is  sometimes 
dropped  between  vowels.     See  [12]  (<?). 

Tlie  ending  of  the  imperative  active  second  singu- 
lar is  dropped  in  the  verbs  dico,  dtico,  facio,  thus 
making  die,  due,  fac. 


215 
216 


Instead  of  the  incomplete  tenses  of  sttm  the  complete  tenses  are  some- 
times used  to  make  the  perf.,  plup.  and  fut.  perf.  passive,  with  little  or 
no  difference  of  meaning ;  e.g.,  amatus  f ui  =  amatus  sum ;  amatus  fueram 
=  amatus  eram,  etc.  In  all  these  peripln-astic  conjugations  the  participle 
is  an  adjective  limiting  the  subject  of  the  verb  "be,"  and  takes  the  same 
gender,  number  and  case.     See  255. 

[215]  An  open  vowel  before  v  absorbs  the  following  vowel  after  v  falls ; 
a  close  vowel  does  so  rarely.  Thus  amavisti  becomes  ftinasti ;  flevistl 
becomes  flesti ;  noveram  becomes  iioraiii,  etc.  But  audiveram  be- 
comes aiidierani,  etc. 

A  similar  shortening  in  perfects  formed  with  -s  is  rarer,  —  scripsti  for 
scripsisti ;  dixe  for  dixisse,  etc. 

[216]  The  same  loss  of  the  imperative  ending  takes  place  also  in  the 
verbs  sum,  6do,  f6ro,  volo,  but  is  part  of  a  peculiar  irregularity.  (See 
220.)  In  old  Latin,  and  in  compounds  of  faeio,  the  regular  forms  are 
found. 

Other  irregularities  are  rarer,  and  belong  generally  to  the  older  language 
or  to  poetry.     A  list  is  gi^en  for  reference  :  — 

(a)  In  stems  in  -i  the  imperf.  and  fut.  ind.  are  sometimes  formed  with 
the  signs  6ba  and  eb ;  regularly  so  in  eo,  "go."     See  [227]. 

(6)  An  old  fut.  (or  fut.  perf.  ?)  formed  with  the  sign  -s  (or  -ss),  a  subj. 
with  the  sign  -si  (or  -ssi),  and  an  infin.  with  the  ending  -sere  (or  -ssere), 
are  found  in  old  writers. 

(c)  An  old  imper.  pass.  sg.  ending  -mlno  (corresponding  to  the  pi.  end- 
ing -mini)  is  also  found,  and  the  active  ending  -to  seems  sometimes  to 
have  a  passive  sense. 

(d)  For  the  suffix  -ere  =  -eris,  see  [180]. 

(e)  For  the  perf.  ind.  act.  ending  -erg  =  erunt,  see  [189]. 

(/)  For  the  ending  -undl,  etc.,  in  the  gerund,  and  -undus,  -a,  -um,  in 
the  pres.  pass,  part.,  see  [183]. 


52  PART  II.  — FORMS. 


217 


218 
219 

220 


221 


The  verbs  siini,  edo,  fero,  volo,  do,  eo,  queo,  fio, 

and  their  compounds,  have  special  irregularities  in 
the  incomplete  tenses,  chiefly  in :  — 
(a)  Variation  of  the  stem. 

(i)  Use  of  mood-and-tense  signs  unusual  in  stems 
of  like  form. 

(c)  Omission  of  the  initial  vowel  of  the  mood-and- 
tense  sign,  or  of  the  suffix.  This  occurs  in  sum, 
edo,  fero,  volo,"  which  omit  the  initial  vowel  of  the 
imperfect  subjunctive  sign,  and  the  initial  vowel  of 
the  suffix  in  the  following  forms  ;  viz. :  — 

Present  indicative,  2d  and  3d  sg.  and  2d  plural. 
Present  imperative,  2d  and  3d  sg.  and  2d  plural. 
Present  infinitive. 

Sum  (stem  es-)  omits  the  vowel,  uses  i  as  present 
subjunctive  sign,  loses  initial  e  in  certain  forms, 
and  retains  older  endings  not  found  in  the  usual 
conjugations. 


(g)  Aiideo,  fido,  gaiideo,  soleo,  liave  a  passive  form  in  the  complete 
tenses,  and  are  called  semi-deponenfs. 

{h)  Morior,  orior,  potior,  show  a  variation  between  long  i-stem  forms 
and  short  t-stem  forms. 

• 
[220]    The  omission  of  the  6  of  the  imperf.  subj.  sign  -6re  causes  it  to 
take  the  form  -se  in  sum  and  6do,  and  -le  in  volo.     Se  was,  no  doubt, 
the  original  form;  le  arises  by  assimilation  of  -r  to  tlie  preceding  -1.     The 
same  change  takes  place  in  the  pres.  infin. 


[221] 

Sfim, 

esse,  fui,  faturtts. 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

FlTTURE. 

siliu 

slm 

Sr»ni 

essSm 

8r« 

£8 

Sl8 

58,  esto             esse 

eras 

essSs 

eris 

est 

8lt 

esto 

er&t 

essSt 

erlt 

siimfis 

BTintiH 

[-sens] 

erSmus 

essSmus 

erf  m  us 

e8«8 

sTtts 

estg,  estotg 

erStis 

essStis 

eritiH 

sunt 

sint 

sunto 

erant 

essent 

eruut 

IREEGULAR   VERB-FORMS. 


53 


Compounds  of  sum  are  like  sum,  except  possum, 
which  contracts  in  certain  forms. 

Edo  (stem  ed-)  omits  the  vowel  (Avitli  consequent 
euphonic  change  of  d  to  s),  and  has  present  subjunc- 
tive sign  1.     It  has  also  the  regular  forms. 


222 


223 


Eor  sim,  sis,  etc.,  an  older  form  —  siein,  sies,  etc.  —  is  found.  The 
2d  sg.  pres.  ind.  es  st-ands  for  es-s  (see  [12]  (b)),  and  is  long  in  old  Latin  es, 
the  result  of  the  loss  of  the  suffix.  (See  362.)  The  pres.  part,  -sens  is 
found  only  in  the  compounds,  ab-sens  and  prae-sens. 

The  complete  tenses  are  formed  from  a  stem  fu-,  -vvhich  appears  as  the 
simple  stem  also  in  fii-tiirus.  Erom  this  stem  is  formed  a  pres.  subj. 
fuain,  etc.;  and  from  another  form  of  it,  fo-,  is  formed  an  imperf.  subj. 
forem,  etc.,  and  an  infin.  f6re.  F6re  has  a  future  sense,  as  have  also  the 
old  inceptive  forms  escit,  escunt  (=  es-sc-it,  es-sc-imt).  For  perfect  stem 
the  older  language  has  also  fuv-. 


[222] 

Possum,  possS,  potul. 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

possiiui 

possim. 

p5tSrS:in      possum 

pStgro 

potSs 

possis            possS 

p5tSras        posses 

poteris 

potest 

possit 

etc.            possSt 

poterit 

posstlmus       possimus 

etc. 

poterimiis 

potestis 

possitis 

poteritls 

possnnt 

possint 

poterunt 

Possiem,  etc.,  is  found  for  possim,  etc. ;  also  the  uncontracted  pot- 
essem  for  possem.  Possum  is  for  pot-sum  by  assifnilation  of  t,  which 
appears  in  its  proper  form  before  a  vowel.  The  imperative  and  the 
participle  are  w'anting. 

Prosum  is  like  sum,  but  the  preposition  p^o  keeps  its  original  form, 
prod,  before  those  forms  that  begin  with  a  vowel,  —  pro-sum,  prod-6s, 
prod-est,  pro-sumus,  etc. 

[223]    Edo,  edgre,  edi,  esum.     The  irregular  forms  are :  — 


Present. 

Imp.  Subj. 

— 

gdim 

essSin 

Ss 

gdis 

^8,  esto 

esses 

Pres.  Pass.  Ind. 

est 

etc. 

esto 

Infinitive. 
essS 

essgt 

etc. 

estiir 

estU 

este,  estote 

Imperf.  Pass.  Subj 

— . 

— 

essetiir 

Also  regular  6do,  -Is,  -It,  etc.,  like  rego.     See  [198]. 


54 


PART  II.  — FORMS. 


224 


225 


Fero  (stem  fer-)  omits  the  vowel,  and  retains  the 
original  present  passive  infinitive  suffix  -ri,  usually 
lost  in  consonant-stems. 

Volo  (stem  vol-)  omits  the  vowel,  has  present  sub- 
junctive sign  i,  and  varies  the  stem  to  vul,  vel,  vil. 
Its  compounds  nolo  and  nialo  have  the  same  irregu- 
larities, and  suffer  contraction  in  many  forms. 


[224] 

F6ro, 

ferre,  tiili,  latum. 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

FCTURE. 

fero 

ferSni 

Inf. 

ferebSni    ferrein 

feram 

fers 

feras 

f 5r,  ferto 

ferrg 

ferebas      ferres 

feres 

fert 

etc. 

ferto 

Part. 

etc.               etc. 

etc. 

ferfmus 

ferens 

fertis 

fertg,  fertote 

Ger. 

ferunt 

Feror, 

ferunto 
ferri,  latus. 

ferendi 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

ferSr 

fei-ar 

ferebXr        ferrgr 

ferSr 

ferrfs 

feraris 

ferrg,  fertSr 

Inf. 

ferebaris    fererfs 

fereris 

fertur 

etc. 

fertSr 

ferrl 

etc.                etc. 

etc. 

ferimur 

Part. 

ferfmXni 

ferfmXm 

ferendus 

feruntiir 

feruntSr 

For  perfect  stem  fgro  uses  ttil;  for  simple  stem,  la  (older  tla).  Both 
are  variations  of  a  stem  seen  also  in  tollo.  Ferimini  (ind.  and  imper.) 
retains  the  vowel,  but  the  2d  pi.  pass,  was  originally'  a  participial  forma- 
tion, not  a  finite  form. 


[225] 

V61o,  velle,  voliii. 

Present. 
vgMm 

Imperfect. 

Future 

v«i5 

Inf. 

v51ebSni    vellPm 

vSlSm 

vis 

v61Ts            (vel,  used  as  a 

veU6 

volebJls      velles 

voles 

vult 

vgUt              conjunction) 

Part. 

etc.             etc. 

etc. 

vSltimfis 

vellmiis 

vSlens 

vultls 

etc. 

Ger. 

vSlunt 

Nolo,  nolle,  nolui. 

volendi 

Present. 

Imperfect, 

Future 

nolo 

nonm 

Inf. 

noleb^ni     n<»ll6m 

[nolam] 

(nSvIs) 

nolis           noli,  nollto 

nolle 

noleb&s      nolles 

noles 

(nSvult) 

etc.                      nollto 

Part. 

etc.             etc. 

etc. 

noliinxiis 

nSlens 

[nevultis] 

uollte,  nolltote 

Ger. 

nolunt 

nolunto 

uolendi 

IKREGULAR  VERB-FORMS.  55 


Do  (stem  da-)  omits  the  vowel  of  the  suffix  in  the 
present  tense  and  the  vowel  of  the  moocl-ancl-tense 
sign  in  the  imperfect  and  future,  and  consequently 
has  short  a  throughout,  where  a-stems  usually  have 
long  a.  Most  of  its  compounds  lose  this  a,  and  thus 
become  consonant-stems. 

Eo  (stem  i-)  varies  the  stem  to  e  before  a  vowel 
(except  before  e  in  the  present  active  participle). 


226 


227 


Nevis, 

nevult,  are  old.     The  imperative  (except  3d  pi.)  is 

from  a  stem 

noU. 

Malo,  malle,  malui. 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

mSlo 

malim 

malebam    malleni 

[malam] 

mavis 

mails                                      Inf. 

malebas      maUes 

males 

mavult 

etc.          (Imperative           malle 

etc.               etc. 

malet 

nialuiniis 

wanting.)               Q-er. 

etc. 

mavultis 

malendi 

malunt 

Mavolo,  mavglim,  etc.  (uncontracted),  are  old.  The  bracketed  forms 
are  lacking. 

[226]  Do,  dSrg,  dSdi,  dStuni.  Its  inflection  is  like  that  of  amo, 
except  that  the  final  vowel  of  the  stem  is  everywhere  short.  (The  forms 
das,  da,  are  lengthened  by  a  general  tendency  to  lengthen  certain  syl- 
lables. See  360,  361.)  Only  the  form  do  has  the  suffix  vowel.  The 
quantity  of  the  stem-vowel  is  seen,  for  example,  in  dSmus,  dSbit,  dSbitur, 
d^bamus,  etc.  Another  form  of  the  same  stem,  du-,  gives  a  subjunctive 
duam,  duas,  etc. ;  or  duim^  duis,  etc. 

Do  remains  unchanged  in  circumdo,  pessumdo,  satisdo  and  ve- 
numdo.  These  are  not  full  compounds,  and  are  often  written  separately. 
In  the  future,  the  original  form  {e.g.,  red-drbo,  etc.)  is  sometimes  found 
in  the  consonant-stem  compounds. 

[227]    Eo,  ire,  ivi,  Itum. 
Present. 

eo           earn  Inf. 

Is             eas             T,  ito  Tre 

It            eSt                Tto  Part. 

imus      eamus  iens,  euntis,  etc. 

itis         eatis         ite,  itotS  Ger. 

eunt       eant                 eunto  iendi,  etc. 


Imperfect. 

Future. 

Tb^m        ir6m 

Ibo 

ibas         ires 

ibis 

etc.             etc. 

etc. 

56  PAET  II.  — FOEMS. 


228 
229 


230 


231 
232 


233 


and  forms  the  imperfect  and  future  indicative  with 
the  signs  eba  and  eb,  like  a-  and  e-stems. 

Qveo  (stem  qvl-)  and  its  conqoound  neqveo  are 
like  eo. 

FTo  (stem  fi-)  keeps  the  vowel  e  un absorbed  in  the 
present  infinitive  and  imperfect  subjunctive.  In  all 
other  forms  the  stem-vowel  is  long,  even  before  a 
vowel.     The  present  infinitive  is  passive  in  form. 

Impersonal  and  Defective  Verbs. 

Impersonal  verbs  are  such  as  do  not  take  a  personal 
subject.  They  are  found  only  in  the  third  person 
singular,  and  comprise  :  — 

(a)  Verbs  referring  to  the  state  of  the  weather. 

(?>)  A  few  verbs  expressing  feeling  or  emotion,  tlie 
object  of  which  denotes  the  person  who  experiences 
the  feeling. 

(c)  Verbs  which  take  a  clause  or  an  infinitive  as 
subject.     Many  of  these  are  also  used  personally. 


IMPEUFECT. 

Future 

flebSm      nSrgm 

nam 

nebSs        nSrSs 

flSs 

etc.               etc. 

etc. 

[228]    Qveo,  qvire,  qvivi,  qvltuiu.     So  neqveo,  iieqvire,  etc.    Only 
a  few  forms  are  in  use. 

[229]    Fio,  fieri,  [f actus]. 
Present. 
flo  fifiiu 

fls  fias        n 

nt  etc.  Infinitive. 

•  flmus  flSrl 

ntis  fitg 

fiunt 
Fio  is  passive  in  meaning,  and  is  used  as  the  passive  of  fScio,  which 
supplies  the  lacking  i)articiple  and  the  complete  tenses.      In  old  Latin 
figrgm,  etc.,  and  fifiri  occur. 

[231]  E.g.,  plait,  it  rains  ;  ningit,  it  siioivs,  etc. 

[232]  E.g.,  pudet  me,  {it  shames  me,  i.e.)  I  am  ashamed,  etc. 

[233]  E.g.,  inihi  ire  licet,  {to  go  is  permitted  to  me)  lam  permitted  to  go,  etc. 


IMPERSONAL  AXD  DEFECTIVE  VERBS.  57 


(fZ)  Many  intransitive  verbs,  which  may  be  used 
impersonally  in  the  passive. 

Some  verbs  are  defective  in  Latin.  Of  these  only 
ocli  and  iiiemini  need  special  mention.  They  lack 
the  incomplete  tenses,  and  the  complete  tenses  have 
the  time  of  the  incomplete. 


234 
235 


[234]  E.g.,  pugnatur,  {it  is  fought)  there  is  Jighting  gotng  on;  invidetur 
mihi,  {it  is  envied  toirard  me)  I  am  envied  ;  itur,  {it  is  gone)  peoj)Ie  go,  etc. 

[235]  The  forms  of  the  most  usual  defective  verbs  are  added  for 
reference :  — 

1.  ajo,  als,  alt,  ajunt.  Imperf.  ajebam  or  aibam,  etc.;  subj.  ajas, 
aj^t;  part,  ajens. 

2.  Imperat.  Sve,  ftveto,  Svete ;  inf.  Svere. 

3.  fatur.  Imperat.  fare ;  f ut.  fabor,  fabltur ;  inf.  fari ;  sup.  fatu ; 
part,  fans,  fandus,  fatus. 

4.  inqvam,  inqvis,  inqvit;  inqvlmus,  inqviunt.  Imperat.  inqve, 
inqvlto,  inqvite;  imperf.  inqviebat;  fut.  inqvies,  inqvigt;  perf. 
inqvii,  inqvisti,  inqvit. 

5.  memlni ;  tlie  complete  tenses,  and  an  imperat.  memento,  nicmen- 
tote.  In  compounds  the  incomplete  tenses  are  found ;  e.g.,  re-min-isc-or, 
etc. 

6.  odi;  only  the  complete  tenses  and  part,  osurus. 

7.  Subj.  ovet,  ovarct;  part,  ovans,  ovatus;  ger.  ovandi. 

8.  Imperat.  salve,  salvete ;  inf.  salvere  ;  fut.  salvebis. 

Many  verbs  lack  the  forms  from  the  simple  stem  or  those  from  the 
perfect  stem,  and  some  lack  both.  Impersonal  verbs  lack  all  forms  except 
the  third  personal  singular ;  and  intransitive  verbs,  except  in  the  use  men- 
tioned above  (234),  of  course  lack  the  passive  voice  altogether.  Such  are 
not  usually  called  defective,  however,  but  the  name  is  limited  to  those 
given  here. 


PART   III— "VSTORD-FORMATION. 


236 


237 


238 


Roots  and   Stems. 

A  root  is  a  simple  sound,  or  combination  of 
sounds,  used  in  language  to  convey  an  idea  without 
modification. 

Roots  are  sometimes  used  in  Latin  as  stems,  and 
the  suffixes  of  inflection  joined  to  them  directly. 
Usually,  however,  stems  are  formed  from  roots  by 
vowel -change,  or  by  the  addition  of  a  vowel, 
a,  e,  i,  o,  u ;    sometimes  by  both. 

Stems  formed  from  roots  in  either  of  these  three 


[237]  Many  verbs  with  consonant-stems,  and  a  few  with  stems  in  -a,  -e 
or  -i,  use  an  unmodified  root  as  a  stem.  Most  verbs  witli  vowel-stems, 
however,  use  a  primitive  stem,  or,  far  more  often,  a  derivative  stem  as  the 
verb-stem.  The  a,  e  or  i  added  to  form  the  present  stem  is,  of  course,  no 
part  of  the  verb-stem,  but  only  a  modification  used  in  the  incomplete 
tenses.  The  final  a,  e  or  1  of  the  present  stem  belongs  to  the  verb-stem 
only  when  it  shows  itself  also  in  the  perfect  stem  and  in  the  simple  stem. 

Very  few  nouns  and  no  adjectives  have  roots  as  stems. 

[238]  Final  vowels  of  stems  (except  u  sometimes)  are  dropped  before 
sufl&xes  beginning  with  a  vowel,  and  are  often  weakened  (and  sometimes 
dropped)  before  those  that  begin  with  a  consonant.  Before  some  of  the 
latter,  however,  the  vowel  is  lengthened,  perhaps  by  the  absorption  of  an 
iititial  vowel,  which  generally  appears  when  they  are  appended  to  con- 
sonant-stems.   Compare  the  usage  in  tlie  case  of  the  v^erb-suffixes,  170-100. 

Initial  t  of  a  sufl&x  suffers  the  euphonic  change  to  s  after  certain  letters, 
as  in  the  supine  and  participles  of  the  verb. 


FORMATION  OF  NOUNS.  59 


ways  are  called  primitive  stems.  From  these,  deriva- 
tive stems  are  formed  by  adding  suffixes  of  derivation. 
Both  primitive  and  derivative  stems,  by  the  addition 
of  suffixes  of  inflection,  become  words  of  the  language, 
fitted  for  use  in  sentences. 


Formation  of   Nouns. 

Nouns  are  formed  from  other  nouns  with  a  variety 
of  suffixes  and  meanings. 

Nouns  formed  from  adjectives  express  the  quality 
or  condition  denoted  by  the  adjective. 


239 
240 


[239]    The  most  common  suffixes  are  these  :  — 

-atu  (=  Eng.  -ship),  name  of  office  or  condition  of  the  primitive. 
-eto,  -ario,  name  of  place  where  the  primitive  is  found. 
-tut  {=  Eng.  -hood),  name  of  condition  or  quality  of  the  primitive. 
-io,  name  of  condition  or  quality  of  the  primitive. 
-lo,  -la  (=  Eng.  -let),  diminutive  nomis. 
-ctilo,  -ciila  (=  Eng.  -let),  diminutive  nouns. 
Illustrations  are :  — 

consul-atus,  consulship ;  from  consul,  a  consul. 

qverc-etum,  oalc  forest ;  "      qvercus,  an  oak. 

vlr-tus,  manhood ;  "      vir,  a  man. 

minister-ium,  service ;  "      minister,  a  servant. 

vicu-lus,  hamlet ;  "      vicus,  a  village. 

casu-la,  cottage ;  "      casa,  a  house. 

&os-culnSf  Jloweret ;  "      flos,  a  flower. 

securi-cula,  hatchet ;  "      securis,  an  axe. 

[240]    The  more  usual  suffixes  are  -tat,  -tudin,  -la,  -tia  (=:  Eng.  -ness). 
Illustrations  are :  — 

superb-ia,  pride ;  from  superbus,  proud. 

soli-tudo,  loneliness;  "      solus,  alone. 

boni-tas,  goodness ;  "     bonus,  good. 

justi-tia,  justice ;  "     Justus,  just. 


60 


PART  III.  —  WORD-FOEMATIOX. 


241 


242 


Nouns  from  verbs  denote  the  doe7\  means,  result^ 
place^  instrument^  etc.,  of  the  action,  or  the  action 
itself. 


Formation   of  Adjectives. 

Adjectives  formed  from  nouns  are  usually  "posses- 
adjectives,  expressing  "possessed  of,"  "full  of," 


sive 


[241]    The  most  usual  suffixes  are  :  — 

-tor  (sor),  -trtc  (=  Eng.  -er,  -ster),  name  of  the  doer. 

-tu   (-su),   -tiira   (-sura),   -tion  (-sion),   -io,   -ion, 
-mento,  -culo,  name  of  the  act,  means,  result. 

-bttlo,  -tro,  name  of  the  i)lace,  means,  instrument. 
Illustrations  are :  — 


-or,   -mill, 


audi-tor,  hearer ; 
lii-sor,  player ; 
al-trix,  nourisher  ; 
ic-tus,  blow ; 
ara-tio,  ploughing ; 
eif  ug-iiiin,  escape ; 
suspic-io,  suspicion ; 
am-or,  loce ; 
certa-iiien,  fujh ; 
vesti-mentiiin,  clothing  ; 
specta-culimi,  spectacle 
sta-biilum,  stall; 
ara-truin,  plough ; 


from  andi-re,  to  hear. 

"  lud-ere,  to  play. 

"  al-ere,  to  nourish.    , 

"  ic-ere,  to  strike. 

"  ara-re,  to  plough. 

"  effiig-ere,  to  escape. 

"  suspic-ere,  to  suspect. 

"  aina-re,  to  love. 

"  certa-rc,  tofght. 

"  vesti-re,  to  clothe. 

"  specta-re,  to  view. 

"  sta-re,  to  stand. 

"  ara-re,  to  plough. 


[242]  Adjectives  thus  formed  correspond  to  English  derivative  adjec- 
tives in  -ish,  -y,  -ed,  -ful,  -en,  etc.  The  suffixes  used  to  form  them  are  very 
numerous ;  the  most  common  are  -ato,  -do,  -no,  -ano,  -ino,  -all,  -ili,  -ari, 
-ario,  -ati,  -eusi,  -oso,  -lento,  -co,  -io,  -eo,  -aceo. 

Illustrations  are :  — 


aur-atus,  gilded; 
luctu-osus,  sorroicful 
Roni-anus,  Roman ; 
aur-eus,  golden; 
ebur-nus,  ivory ; 
mort-alls,  mortal; 
etc. 


from  aiirum,  gold. 
"      Iiictus,  sorrow. 
"      Roma,  Rome. 
"      aiirum,  gold, 
"      ebur,  ivory. 
"     mors,  death. 
etc. 


FORMATION  OF   VERBS.  61 


"furnished  with,"  "made  of,"  "characterized  by," 
"  belonging  to,"  and  the  like. 

Adjectives  from  other  adjectives  are  derivative 
numerals,  comparatives  and  superlatives,  and  dim- 
inutives. 

Adjectives  from  verbs  are  the  regular  participles, 
adjectives  with  the  force  of  participles  (usually 
active),  and  adjectives  denoting  capability  (usually 
passive). 

Formation   of  Verbs. 

A  few  verbs  are  formed  from  noun-  or  adjective- 
stems  by  using  the  theme  of  the  noun  as  a  verb-stem. 


243 


244 


245 


[243]    For  the  ordinal  and  distributive  numerals,  with  their  suffixes,  see 
[118] ;  and  for  the  comparative  and  superlative  formations,  see  119  ff.   Dim- 
inutive adjectives  have  the  suffixes  -lo  and  -culo,  like  diminutive  nouns. 
E.g.,  albulus,  whitish,  from  albus,  white. 

forticulus,  holdish,  somewhat  hold,  from  fortis,  bold. 

[244]  For  the  regular  participles  and  their  endings  see  183-187.  Adjec- 
tives with  the  general  force  of  participles,  but  expressing  a  habit  rather 
than  a  single  act,  are  formed  with  the  suffixes  -uo,  -ivo,  -tivo,  -do, 
-bundo,  -cundo,  -aci,  etc.     Illustrations  are :  — 

contig-uus,  touching,  adjacent;  from  conting-ere,  to  touch. 

cad-ixus,  falling,  Jleeting ;  "      cad-eve,  to  fall. 

nomina-tivuSf  nominative ;  "      nomina-re,  ^o  name. 

erra-bundus,  wandering,  vagrant ;        "      erra-re,  to  wander. 
Adjectives  denoting  capability  are  formed  with  the  suffixes  -li,  -bili, 
-till  (-slli).     Illustrations  are  :  — 

frag-IIis,  breakable,  frail ;  from  frang-ere,  to  break. 

cred-ibilis,  credible;  "      cred-ere,  to  believe. 

fer-tiliSf  fertile,  capable  of  prodticing ;     "      fer-ref  to  produce. 

[245]  Thus,  from  flor  (theme  of  flos,  a  flower)  we  have  flor-ere,  to 
flower ;  from  arbor  (theme  of  arbos,  a  tree),  arbor-esc-ere,  to  become  a 
tree;  from  dulc  (theme  of  dulcis,  sweet),  dulc-esc-ere,  to  grow  sweet,  etc. 
That  the  e  of  the  present  stem  does  not  belong  to  the  verb-stem,  but  is  a 
formative  addition,  is  shown  by  the  form  of  the  perfect  stem,  when  one  exists 
{e.g.,  flor-ui).     But  most  of  these  verbs  have  only  the  incomplete  tenses. 


62  PART  III.  —  WORD-FORMATION. 


246 


247 


In  such  verbs  the  present  stem  is  formed  by  adding 
-e,  or  by  adding  -esc.  In  the  former  case  the  verb 
means  "to  be  [so-and-so]  ";  in  the  latter,  "to  become 
[so-and-so]." 

More  often  verb-stems  are  formed  from  noun-  or 
adjective-stems  by  adding  -a  or  -i  to  the  theme.  Verbs 
thus  formed  usually  mean  "to  make  [so-and-so]"; 
less  often,  "to  be  [so-and-so]." 

Verbs  formed  from  verbs  are  frequentatives,  in- 
tensives,  or  desideratives. 


[246J  Thus,  from  bellum,  war,  bellare,  to  war ;  from  aeqvus,  level, 
aeqvare,  to  level;  from  miles,  soldier,  inllitare,  to  he  a  soldier;  from 
tenuis,  thin,  tenuare,  to  make  thin ;  from  Insanus,  mad,  Insanlre,  to  be 
mad ;  from  finis,  end,  finire,  to  end,  etc. 

From  stems  in  u,  a-stem  verbs  are  formed  by  adding  a  to  the  stem,  not 
the  theme;  e.g.,  aestii-are  from  aestu-s.  But  1  is  added  to  the  theme  in 
u-stems,  as  in  others.     See  [238]. 

[247]  Frequentatives  denote  a  frequent  or  emphatic  action.  Tliey  are 
formed  witli  the  suffix  -ta.  Many  verbs  formed  in  this  way,  however,  have 
lost  the  frequentative  force.     Illustrations  are  :  — 

adven-tare,  to  come  ojlen  ;  from  adven-ire,  to  come. 

rog-itare,  to  ask  eagerly ;  "      rog-are,  to  ask. 

dic-tara,  to  say  frequently ;  "      dic-ere,  to  say. 

dlct-ltare,  to  say  frequently ;  "      diet-are,  to  say. 

Intensives  denote  an  eager  or  earnest  actimi.  They  are  few  in  number, 
and  are  formed  with  the  suffix  -ess  orrcssi,  the  latter  being  used  in  the 
complete  tenses  and  simple  stem  forms.     Illustrations  are  :  — 

fac-ess-ere,  to  do  eagerly ;  from  fac-ere,  to  do. 

cap-ess-ere,  to  take  eagerly,  to  seize ;        "      cap-ere,  to  take. 
Desideratives  denote  the  desire  to  do  an  action.     They  are  few  in  num- 
ber, and  are  formed  with  the  suffix  -tttri  (-siSri).    Illustrations  are :  — 
cena-turire,  to  wish  to  dine ;  from  cena-re,  to  dine. 

emp-turire,  to  wish  to  buy ;  "     eiu-ere,  to  buy. 

Desideratives  seem  to  be  formed  from  tlie  future  active  particix)le  by 
the  addition  of  1,  as  stated  in  246,  the  u  being  shortened,  probably  by  the 
change  of  accent. 


FORMATION   OF  ADVERBS,   ETC.  63 


Formation   of  Adverbs. 

Many  adverbs  are  case-forms  of  nouns  and  adjec- 
tives, often  with  obsolete  endings.  The  locative, 
accusative  and  ablative  are  most  frequent. 

Adverbs  of  manner  are  formed  from  adjectives 
and  verbs ;  adverbs  of  source  from  nouns ;  numeral 
adverbs  from  numeral  adjectives. 


Formation  of  Prepositions,  Conjunctions,  and 
Interjections. 

The  interjections  proper. are  primitive  sounds,  but 
various  nouns  are  used  interjectionallj  in  the  nom- 
inative, accusative  or  vocative.  So  also  are  curt 
phrases. 

The  prepositions  and  conjunctions  are  in  some 
cases  case-forms  or  phrases,  but  most  of  them  are 
not  easily  subjected  to  grammatical  analysis,  and  may 
conveniently  be  regarded  as  primitive  words. 


248 


249 


250 


251 


[249]  The  most  usual  suflixes  for  adverbs  of  manner  from  adjectives 
are  -e  and  -ter;  from  verbs,  -tim  (-sim).  Adverbs  of  source  are  formed 
from  nouns  with  the  suffix  -tfls.     Illustrations  are  :  — 

cert-e,  surely ;  from  certus,  sure. 

■  firmi-ter,  firmlij  ;  "      firmus,  Jirm. 

cau-tim,  cautiously ;  "      cav-ere,  to  he  cautious. 

f undi-tus,  from  the  bottom ;       "      fundus,  bottom. 

Adverbs  of  source  are  formed  from  adjectives  also,  and  even  from  pre- 
positions.    For  the  numeral  adverbs  (ending  -lens  or  -ies)  see  [118]. 

[251]  The  manner  of  formation  of  j)repositions  and  conjunctions  is  a 
subject  for  comparative  grammar,  and  cannot  be  fully  treated  in  an 
elementary  book. 


64  PART  III.  — WORD-FORMATION. 


252 


Composition. 

Words  are  also  formed  by  composition,  ix.^  by 
combining  two  or  more  stems  into  one.  The  suffixes 
of  inflection  or  derivation  are  then  added  to  the  last 
stem. 


[252]  The  first  stem  usually  modifies  the  second  with  the  force  of  an 
adverb,  an  adjective,  an  oblique  case,  or  a  direct  object ;  e.g., — 

in-iqvus,  unfair  (in,  aequus). 
centi-manus,  hundred-handed  (centum,  manus). 
capri-corniis,  goat-horned  (caper,  cornii). 
parti-ceps,  partaker  (pars,  capere). 
sangui-suga,  bloodsucker,  leech  (sanguis,  sugo). 
etc.  etc. 

A  few  words  are  often  written  as  compounds,  though  not  really  such ; 
e.g.,  res  publlca,  commonwealth ;  jus  jurandum,  oath ;  legis  lator, 
legislator,  etc.  The  custom  of  writing  them  as  single  words  has  caused 
them  to  be  looked  on  as  compounds,  and  they  are  sometimes  called 
"spurious  compounds."  Compare  in  Englisli  instead  (i.e.  in  stead),  per- 
chance, perhaps,  etc.,  where  two  words  have  grown  into  one. 


PART    IV.— SYNTAX. 


Person,    Number,    Voice,    Concord. 

The   modifications  of  person,  number  and  voice    253 
have  the  same  force  in  Latin  as  in  English.     Special 
rules  are  needed  only  for  concord,  for  the  use  of 
the  cases,  tenses  and  moods,  and  for  the  non-finite 
verb-forms. 


The  rules  of  concord  are :  — 

(a)  The  appositive  or  predicate  noun  agrees  in 
case  with  the  noun  it  limits. 

(6)  The  adjective  agrees  in  gender^  number  and 
case  with  the  noun  it  limits. 


254 
255 


[253J  Except  the  reflexive  use  of  the  passive  and  the  deponent  verbs. 
See  154. 

[254]  The  appositive  and  predicate  noun  are  usually  required  by  the 
sense  to  agree  in  number,  and  they  agree  in  gender  also,  when  possible. 

Most  nouns  lack  a  separate  form  for  the  locative  and  vocative.  Such 
nouns,  when  used  as  appositives  to  those  cases,  are  put  in  other  construc- 
tions to  express  the  same  idea;  with  the  locative,  in  the  ablative  (or 
ablative  with  a  preposition) ;  with  the  vocative,  in  the  nominative. 

[255]  An  adjective  may  limit  two  or  more  nouns.  In  this  case  the 
predicate  adjective  is  generally  plural  and  masculine  if  the  nouns  denote 
persons ;  neuter,  if  they  denote  things.  The  attributive  adjective,  limiting 
two  or  more  nouns,  generally  agrees  with  the  nearest. 

Two  or  more  ordinal  numerals  may  stand  in  the  singular  with  a  plural 
noun;  e.g.,  prima  et  qvarta  legiones,  the  first  and  fourth  legions. 


66  PART  IV.  — SYNTAX. 


256 
257 


(c)  Pronouns  agree  with  their  antecedents  in  gen- 
der, number  and  person. 

(c?)  The  finite  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in 
number  and  person. 


The  participles  used  to  make  the  "  periphrastic  "  verb-forms  sometimes 
agree  with  an-  appositive  or  predicate  noun  rather  than  the  subject,  when 
it  denotes  the  same  thing. 

The  locative  case  is  limited  by  no  adjectives  but  possessives  (except 
die  in  old  Latin).  A  nominative  used  in  direct  address  is  in  a  few  cases 
limited  by  an  adjective  in  the  vocative  form.  Nominatives  so  used  are 
usually  called  vocatives.     See  [261]. 

A  predicate  noun  or  adjective  after  an  infinitive  without  an  expressed 
subject  often  agrees  not  with  the  omitted  subject  but  with  the  same  word 
expressed  in  the  sentence  in  some  other  case ;  e.g.,  cupio  esse  bonus,  / 
wish  to  he  good ;  ixiihi  licet  esse  bono,  /  am  permitted  to  he  good.  (In  the 
former  of  these  sentences  bonus  agrees  with  ego,  expressed  in  the  ending 
of  the  verb  cupio;  in  the  latter,  bono  agrees  with  niihi.)  Vobis  uecesse 
est  fortibus  virls  esse,  you  must  be  hrave  men. 

[256]  The  rule  applies,  of  course,  only  to  substantive  pronouns,  and 
even  these  can  show  person  only  when  they  are  used  as  subjects  of  finite 
verbs,  whicli  show  by  their  ending  the  person  of  the  subject.  All  adjective 
pronouns  agree  as  adjectives.  A  few  cases  occur  in  poetry  of  an  agreement 
of  the  relative  pronoun  in  case  also  (attraction) ;  and  in  a  few  instances  the 
antecedent  takes  the  case  of  the  relative.  A  pronoun  sometimes  agrees 
with  an  appositive  or  predicate-noun  of  its  antecedent.  With  more  than 
one  antecedent,  pronouns  follow  the  usage  of  adjectives  in  gender  and 
number;  that  of  verbs  in  person.     See  [255]  and  [257]. 

[257]  With  two  or  more  subjects  taken  conjointly,  the  verb  is  plural. 
If  the  subjects  differ  in  person  the  verb  takes  the  first  person  in  prefer- 
ence to  the  second,  the  second  in  preference  to  the  third.  But  in  such  cases 
the  verb  often  agrees  with  the  nearest  subject,  especially  if  it  precedes  the 
subjects. 

Occasional  violations  of  the  rules  of  agreement  are  found,  the  most 
common  being  an  agreement  according  to  sense  rather  than  form.  Thus, 
a  feminine  or  neuter  collective  noun  may  take  a  plural  adjective  or  verb 
referring  to  the  implied  individuals;  two  subjects,  taken  together,  may 
take  a  singular  verb  if  they  express  a  single  idea,  etc.  , 


USE  OF  THE  CASES.  67 


Use  of  the  Cases. 

The  Nominative  is  used  — 

(a)  As  subject  of  a  finite  verb. 

258 

(b)  In  exclamations. 

259 

(c)  To  denote  the  person  or  thing  spoken  to. 

260 

The  Vocative  is  used  — 

(a)  To  denote  the  person  or  thing  spoken  to. 

261 

The  Accusative  is  used  — 

(a)  As  the  direct  object  of  an  action. 

262 

[258]    The  use  of  the  subject-nominative  is  the  same  as  in  English. 

[259]  The  exdamatonj  nominative  may  be  considered  the  subject  of  a 
verb  implied  in  the  connection.  It  is  usually  accompanied  by  the  interjec- 
tion en  or  ecce.  en  Priamus!  Zo,  [here  is)  Priam!  En  ego,  vester 
AscaniusI    Lo,  {it  is)  I,  your  Ascanius !      ecce  tuae  litterae  I    Now  your 

letter  (comes)  ! 

[260]  The  nominative  of  direct  address  is  the  regular  usage  in  the  plural 
number,  where  no  vocative  is  found,  but  is  rare  in  the  singular,  when  a 
separate  vocative  form  exists.  It  is  usual  to  call  nominatives  vocatives 
when  used  in  this  way,  if  no  separate  vocative  form  is  found,  audi  tu, 
populus  Albanus,  hear,  thou  Alban  nation,  proice  tela,  sangvis  mens, 
cast  aivay  thy  weapons,  my  son. 

[261]  faciam,  Laeli,  /  will  do  so,  LceUus.  The  vocative  is  the  simple 
stem  without  a  case-suffix.  A  vocative  form  is  found  in  the  singular  in 
a-stems,  masculine  o-stems  and  semivowel-stems.  In  others  the  nominative 
is  used  as  a  vocative,  and  is  usually  called  a  vocative  when  so  used.  An 
adjective  limiting  such  a  nominative  usually  takes  the  vocative  form,  if  it 
has  a  separate  form  for  that  case,  but  sometimes  the  nominative ;  e.g., 
sangvis  mens,  above  [260]. 

A  form  macte  is  called  a  vocative  by  some  grammarians,  an  adverb  by 
others.  It  is  used  as  a  simple  exclamation,  or  with  the  imperative  forms 
esto,  este,  as  an  exclamation  of  approval,  macte  I  good !  macte  vir- 
tute  esto !   bravo  ! 

[262]    omueiii  eqvitatuin  iiiittit,  he  sends  all  the  cavalry. 
A  special  kind  of  direct  object  is  the  cognate  accusative,  which  repeats 
the  meaning  of  the  verb  in  the  form  of  a  noun;  e.g.,  vitam  tutam  vivere. 


68  PART  IV.  — SYNTAX. 


263 
264 


(5)  As  subject  of  an  infinitive. 
((?)  In  exclamations. 


to  Jive  a  safe  life ;  servitutem  servire,  to  slave  slavery  (i.e.,  undergo).  This 
form  of  direct  object  follows  verbs  which  are  otherwise  intransitive. 

Many  verbs  are  transitive  in  Latin,  while  English  verbs  of  like  meaning 
are  intransitive.  In  such  cases  a  preposition  is  inserted  in  English ;  e.g., 
arma  cano,  /  sing  of  arms ;  petit  hostem,  he  aims  at  the  foe,  etc.  Other 
verbs,  properly  intransitive,  sometimes  take  a  direct  object  in  poetical  or 
figurative  language ;  e.g.,  ardebat  Alexin,  he  was  hot  for  (i.e.,  loved)  Alexis; 
redolere  antiqvitatem,  to  smell  of  antiquity ;  saltare  Cyclopa,  to  dance 
the  Cyclops;  resonant  Amaryllida  silvae,  the  groves  echo  {the  name  of) 
Amaryllis.  Many  verbs  also  are  made  transitive  by  being  compounded 
with  prepositions. 

In  a  few  cases  the  action  implied  in  a  noun  or  adjective  governs  a  direct 
object.  The  infinitives,  participles  and  gerund,  of  course,  retaining  their 
verbal  power,  govern  the  same  case  as  their  verbs. 

Factitive  verbs  (i.e.,  verbs  meaning  make,  appoint,  choose,  name,  etc.)  take 
two  objects,  as  in  English,  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing;  e.g.,  popu- 
lus  Romanus  Ciceronem  creavit  consulem,  the  Roman  nation  chose 
Cicero  consul. 

Doceo  (and  compounds),  celo  and  a  few  verbs  of  demanding  and  ques- 
tioning, sometimes  take  two  direct  objects,  —  one  denoting  the  person,  the 
other  the  thing;  e.g.,  non  te  celavi  sermoneni,  I  have  not  concealed  from 
you  the  remark;  te  hoc  rogo,  I  ask  you  this;  Caesar  Haeduos  fruinen- 
tum  flagitare,  Ccesar  kept  demanding  corn  from  the  Ilceduans.  In  the 
passive  voice  of  these  verbs  the  accusative  of  the  person  becomes  the  sub- 
ject, and  that  of  the  thing  remains.  In  many  cases  the  accusative  of  the 
thing  seems  to  be  an  accusative  of  specification,  or  to  approach  that  mean- 
ing, and  may  be  a  development  from  it.     See  [267]. 

[263]  This  use  is  a  development  of  (a),  the  subject  of  the  infinitive 
being  originally  the  object  of  the  leading  verb.  It  has  been  extended, 
however,  to  all  uses  of  the  infinitive  except  the  historical  infinitive,  which 
is  a  finite  verb-form  in  meaning.  See  [342].  cum  suos  interfici  viderent, 
when  they  saio  that  their  men  ivere  being  killed ;  necesse  est  legem  haberi, 
it  is  needful  that  the  law  be  kept ;  fama  erat  hostem  advenire,  there  was 
a  rumor  that  the  foe  was  coming. 

[264]  The  exclamatory  accusative  is  possibly  the  object  of  a  verb 
implied  in  the  connection,  but  in  most  cases  none  need  be  supplied  in 
translation.     An  interjection  often  accompanies  it.     heu,  me  mlserum ! 


USE   OF  THE   CASES.  69 


(c?)  To  denote  the  place  to  which  motion  proceeds. 
(6j)  To  denote  extent  of  time  or  space. 
(/)  With  verbs  or  adjectives  to  define  their  appli- 
cation. 

(^)  With  many  prepositions. 


265 
266 
267 

268 


Alas,  tinhappy  me!  hanc  audaciam,  the  impudence!  In  old  Latin  the 
accusatives  eum,  earn,  ilium,  illam,  etc.,  are  combined  with  the  preceding 
en  or  ecce  to  eccum,  eecam,  eccillam,  etc. 

[265]  Accusative  of  limit.  This  use  is  limited,  in  prose,  to  names  of 
towns  and  small  islands,  and  domum,  domes,  foras,  rus.  Hennam 
profecti  sunt,  they  went  to  Henna ;  ego  rus  ibo,  /  shall  go  to  the  countri/. 
Other  words  require  a  preposition,  except  a  few  phrases  with  co,  "  to  go," 
or  do,  "  to  give,"  in  which  the  freer  use  of  early  Latin  is  retained ;  e.g., 
pessum  ire,  to  go  to  ruin;  pessum  dare,  [to  send  to  ruin,  i.e.]  to  ruin; 
infitias  ire,  exseqvias  ire,  venum  ire,  venum  dare.  Here  belongs  also 
the  use  of  the  accusative  case  of  the  supine.     See  351. 

[266]  Accusative  of  extent,  paucos  dies  moratus,  having  waited  a 
few  days;    millia  passuum  tria  ab  eorum  castris  castra  ponit,  he 

pitches  a  camp  three  miles  from  their  camp.  Extent  of  time  or  space  is  some- 
times expressed  by  the  ablative.     See  302. 

[267]  Accusative  of  specif  cation.  This  use  is  rare  in  prose,  the  ablative 
being  the  usual  construction.  The  accusative  is  found,  however,  in  neuter 
pronouns,  id,  qvid,  etc.,  in  nihil ;  in  neuter  adjectives,  pauca,  multum, 
etc. ;  and  in  a  few  idiomatic  phrases.  It  is  usually  best  translated  by  an 
adverb  or  an  adverbial  phrase;  e.g.,  quid?  why?  maximam  partem, 
chief  y ;  id  temporis,  then ;  istuc  aetatis,  at  your  age,  etc.  In  the  phrases 
id  genus,  of  that  sort ;  virile  secus,  of  the  male  sex,  and  the  like,  this 
accusative  seems  to  qualify  a  noun,  and  is  nearly  equal  in  force  to  a  geni- 
tive or  ablative  of  description.  Under  this  head  come  many  so-called 
adverbs,  multum,  plus,  minus,  etc. 

With  cingor,  I  bind  on  {myself),  and  other  passive  forms  used  reflexively, 
an  accusative  is  found,  which  is  usually  referred  to  this  head.  It  is  better 
treated,  however,  as  direct  object,  since  the  verb  is  not  properly  passive. 
In  poetical  language  many  passive  participles  retain  a  direct  object  which 
may  be  explained  in  the  same  way. 

[268]  The  accusative  and  ablative  cases  follow  prepositions  in  Latin.  A 
list  of  those  that  take  the  ablative  is  given  in  308 ;  all  others  take  the  accusa- 
tive.    Prepositions  compounded  with  verbs  sometimes  retain  their  power  of 


70  PART  IV.  — SYNTAX. 


The  Dative  is  used  — 
269  (a)  As  indirect  object  of  an  action  or  feeling. 


governing  an  accusative.  If  the  verb  is  transitive,  it  will  then  take  two 
accusatives,  —  one  a  direct  object,  the  other  governed  by  the  preposition. 
This  use  is  rare,  except  with  trans,  populos  adit,  he  goes  to  (i.e.,  visits) 
the  tribes ;  milites  flunien  transportabat,  he  was  taking  his  troops  over  the 
river. 

Pridie,  the  day  before ;  postridie,  the  day  after ;  and  the  phrase  ante 
diem,  used  in  dates,  are  followed  by  an  accusative,  like  prepositions.  The 
construction  seems  to  be  elliptical. 

The  adjectives  propior,  proxiinus,  and  the  corresponding  adverbs 
propius,  proxime,  are  followed  by  an  accusative  like  their  positive  prope, 
which  is  both  adverb  and  preposition.  (Compare  the  similar  prepositional 
use  of  nearer,  nearest,  in  English.) 

[269]  The  dative  of  indirect  object  denotes  the  person  or  thing  to  or  for 
which,  or  for  ichose  advantage  anything  is  done  or  exists.  Various  prepositions 
are  used  to  express  the  idea  in  English,  to  and  for  most  often.  Sometimes 
the  English  indirect  objective  will  render  it.  Himilconi  respondit,  he 
answered  Ilimilco ;  niihi  licet  adire,  /  am  allowed  to  come  near  {it  is  allowed 
to  me) ;  hostibus  terrorein  augere,  to  increase  the  fright  of  the  enemy  {in- 
crease fright  for) ;  piignare  hostibus,  to  fight  with  (or  against)  the  foe. 

Sometimes,  in  poetry,  the  dative  of  the  indirect  object  is  found  with 
verbs  of  motion,  where  a  phrase  expressing  the  place  to  which  would  be  used 
in  prose ;  e.g.,  it  clamor  caelo,  the  outcry  goes  to  the  sky.  This  use  arises 
from  a  poetical  notion  or  conception,  the  rising  of  the  shout  being  thought 
of  not  simply  as  going  to  the  sky,  but  as  affecting  or  having  influence  on 
the  sky.  So  occasionally  other- verbs,  the  action  being  conceived  of  as 
done  to  the  person  or  thing,  though  another  construction  would  be  used 
in  prose;  e.g.,  laterl  abdidit  ensem,  buried  the  sword  in  his  side.  So 
especially  verbs  meaning  "  take  away." 

Many  verbs  are  intransitive  in  Latin,  though  verbs  of  like  meaning  are 
transitive  in  English,  and  the  indirect  object  with  such  becomes  a  direct 
object  in  translation.  The  most  common  are  verbs  meaning  help,  please, 
trust,  serve,  and  the  contrary ;  also  spare,  pardon,  envy,  command,  persuade, 
and  the  like.  If  pains  is  taken  to  translate  them  by  intransitive  expres- 
sions, the  dative  will  be  seen  to  have  its  proper  force,  non  Herculi 
nocere  voliiit,  she  did  not  wish  to  do  harm  to  Hercules  {=  injure),  mundiis 
deo  paret,  the  world  is  subject  to  {obeys)  a  god.  Transitive  verbs  with  the 
meanings  given  above  govern  an  accusative,  but  may  take  a  dative  also,  if 


USE  OF  THE   CASES.  71 


(5)  To  denote  the  possessor  or  apparent  agent. 
(c)  With  adjectives,  to  denote  that  to  which  the 
quality  or  feeling  is  directed, 
(c?)  To  denote  purpose  or  end. 


270 
271 

272 


the  meaning  permits ;  and  most  of  these  verbs  may  take  an  accusative  of 
the  thing,  especially  a  neuter  pronoun,  along  with  the  dative  of  the  person. 
Hoc  tibi  impero,  /  give  you  this  command  (command  this  to  you).  In  the 
case  of  some  of  these  verbs,  usage  is  unsettled,  and  they  take  either  a  direct 
or  an  indirect  object,  witli  little  or  no  difference  of  meaning. 

The  same  remarks  apply  also  to  many  verbs  compounded  with  the 
prepositions  ad,  ante,  con,  in,  inter,  ob,  post,  prae,  pro,  sub,  super, 
which  take  a  dative,  and  if  transitive  an  accusative  also. 

[270]  The  dative  of  possessor  is  simply  an  indirect  object,  denoting  the 
person  for  whom,  or  for  whose  advantage  or  disadvantage  something  exists. 
It  needs  mention  only  on  account  of  peculiarity  of  translation.  Gallis 
haec  consuetudo  est,  the  Gauls  have  this  custom  (lit.,  this  custom  exists  for  the 
Gauls).  The  same  is  true  of  the  dative  of  apparent  agent,  so  named  because 
translated  "  by."  It  is  found  regularly  with  the  present  passive  participle 
(rarely  with  the  perfect  passive  participle  or  a  verbal  adjective  in  -bilis), 
and  denotes  the  person  who  has  the  work  to  do.  multa  mihi  facienda 
sunt,  much  must  be  done  by  me,  I  have  much  to  do  (lit.,  the  doing-ofmuch  exists 
for  me).  In  poetry  we  sometimes  find  a  dative  of  the  real  agent,  or  one 
which  approaches  that  meaning. 

[271]  The,  dative  with  adjectives  is  also  an  indirect  object,  and  denotes 
that  toward  which  the  implied  feeling  is  exercised,  or  for  which  the  implied 
quality  exists.  The  adjectives  most  often  limited  by  a  dative  are  those 
kindred  in  meaning  to  the  verbs  that  govern  a  dative,  and  those  which 
mean  like,  ready,  friendly,  easy,  ft,  etc.  paucis  carior  fides  quam 
pecunia  fuit,  to  a  few,  truth  was  dearer  than  money ;  hoc  luctuosum  est 
parentibus,  this  is  sad  for  parents,  idem,  same,  sometimes  takes  a  dative 
(like  adjectives  of  likeness). 

In  a  few  cases,  a  noun  or  adverb,  derived  from  a  verb  or  adjective  which 
governs  a  dative,  takes  an  indirect  object  like  its  primitive,  conveni- 
enter  naturae,  in  agreement  ivith  nature.  Also,  rarely,  a  dative  is  found 
with  interjections,     vae  victis!  woe  to  the  vanquished !   vae  mihi!  ah  me! 

[272]  The  dative  of  purpose  is  most  frequent  with  the  verb  "  be."  It  is 
translated  as  a  predicate-noun  or  an  appositive  with  "as,"  less  often  by 
"for."     impedimento  id  fuit,  this  ivas  a  hindrance  {served  as  a  hindrance) ; 


72  PART  IV.  — SYNTAX. 


273 
274 


The  Locative  is  used  — 

{a)  To  denote  the  place  of  an  action. 
(h)  To  denote  price  or  value. 


virtas  non  datur  dono,  virtue  is  not  given  as  a  pi-esent ;  eqvitatum 
Caesari  auxilio  miserant,  they  had  sent  cavalry  as  a  help  to  Ccesar.  A 
second  dative  of  the  person  to  whom  the  action  is  of  interest  is  often  added, 
as  in  the  last  example.  This  use  of  the  dative  to  express  purpose  is  not 
common,  except  in  the  case  of  a  few  words.  A  few  have  become  equivalent 
to  adjectives,  —  frugi  bonae  =  honest,  usui  =  useful,  cordi  =  pleasing,  etc. 
In  operae  est,  it  is  worth  ichile,  it  is  not  clear  whether  operae  is  dative  or 
genitive,  operae  pretiuin  est  also  occurs,  and  tlie  shorter  expression 
may  be  derived  from  tlie  latter. 

On  the  border  between  the  dative  of  indirect  object  and  the  dative  of 
purpose  stands  its  occurrence  to  denote  the  use  to  which  a  thing  is  put; 
e.g.,  domicilio  locum  delegerunt,  they  chose  a  place  for  a  home;  receptui 
signum,  the  "retreat-call,"  signal  for  retreat;  esui  olivac,  eating-olives,  etc. 
This  use  of  the  dative  is  most  common  with  the  gerundive,  in  giving  the 
duties  of  an  officer  or  committee,  and  similar  expressions ;  e.g.,  decemviri 
legibus  scribendis,  a  committee  of  ten  to  compile  the  laws.  In  such  cases  it 
seems  to  limit  a  noun,  but  the  construction  is  probably  elliptical. 

[273]  A  separate  form  for  the  locative  is  found  in  Latin  only  in  the 
singular  of  some  names  of  towns  and  islands,  and  a  few  other  words,  domi, 
humi,  ruri  being  the  most  frequent.  (In  other  Avords,  and  in  the  plural, 
the  ablative  or  a  preposition  is  used  to  express  "place  where.")  cogitan- 
dum  tibi  erat  Romaene  et  domi  tuae,  an  Mitylenis  aut  Rliodi 
malles  vivere,  you  had  to  consider  whether  you  preferred  to  live  at  Rome 
and  at  your  oxen  home,  or  at  Mitylenoi  or  Rhodes.  A  locative  animi  occurs 
with  verbs  and  adjectives  of  feeling ;  e.g.,  aeger  animi,  sick  at  heart. 

In  old  Latin  a  locative  die  is  found  denoting  the  "  time  when " ;  e.g., 
qvinti  die,  on  the  fifth  day ;  die  crastini,   to-morrow,  etc. 

Several  adverbs  of  place  or  time  are  locatives ;  e.g.,  hie,  here ;  illic, 
there;  postridie  (=  posteri  die),  on  the  following  day ;  pridie,  on  the  day 
before ;  qvdtidie,  daily,  etc. 

In  the  case  of  plural  names  of  toAAms,  it  is  a  matter  of  indifference 
whether  the  case  used  to  denote  place  be  called  ablative  or  locative.  The 
form  is  the  same,  and  the  use  of  the  singular  shows  that  either  case  may 
be  used  in  this  sense. 

[274]  A  definite  amount  named  as  the  price  is  expressed  by  the  ablative. 
The  locative  is  found  in  indefinite  expressions  of  price  or  value;   e.g.. 


USE  OF  THE  CASES.  73 


The  genitive  was  originally  the  case  of  the  source 
or  (consequently)  the  cause.     This  idea  can  be  seen 
in  some  of  its  uses ;  in  others  the  idea  of  possession, 
developed  from  that  of  source,  is  more  prominent. 
The  Genitive  is  used  (as  the  case  of  source  or  cause)  — 

(a)  To  denote  the  crime 

1.  With  verbs  of  judicial  action, 

2.  With  adjectives  of  guilt  or  innocence. 

(5)  To  denote  the  person  or  thing  that  excites  the 
feeling 

1.  With  some  verbs  of  reminding^  remembering^ 

forgetting^  pitying, 

2.  With  miseret,  paeiiitet,  piget,  pudet,  taedet. 

3.  With  adjectives  of  like  meaning. 


275 


276 
277 
278 
279 

280 

281 
282 


magni  aestimare,  to  value  highhj ;   flocci  non  faciunt,  they  don't  care  a 

straw  for ;  est  mihi  tanti,  it  is  worth  m\j  while;  aeqvl  boni  facere, 

to  take  in  good  part,  etc.  In  homo  nihil!,  a  worthless  fellow,  and  the  like, 
the  locative  seems  to  limit  a  noun,  but  the  expression  is  perhaps  elliptical. 

The  locative  was  not  clear  to  the  Komans  themselves,  and  its  similarity 
of  form  caused  it  to  be  confused,  in  the  singular,  with  the  genitive,  and  in 
a  few  cases  genuine  genitives  were  used  with  the  force  of  locatives.  Thus, 
pluris  and  miuoris  occur  a  few  times  to  express  value ;  a  few  other  geni- 
tives occur  once  each,  mentis,  in  mind,  is  found  twice ;  it  seems  to  have 
been  formed  after  the  analogy  of  animi. 

[277]  i.e.,  verbs  of  accusing,  condemning,  acquitting,  etc.  ambitus 
accusare,  to  accuse  of  bribery. 

[278]  insons  culpae,  innocent  of  fault;  reus  avaritiae,  charged  with 
avarice. 

[280]  admoncbat  eum  egestatis,  he  reminded  him  of  his  poverty ; 
veteris  proverbii  memini,  /  remember  an  old  saw. 

[281]  eum  libidinis  infiimiaeqve  neqve  pudet  neqve  taedet,  he  is 
neither  ashamed  of  his  licentiousness  and  ill-repute  nor  sick  of  them.  With 
pudet  the  person  toward  whom  the  sense  of  shame  is  felt  is  occasionally 
treated  as  the  exciting  object. 

One  or  two  other  verbs  of  like  meaning  occasionally  occur  with  a  geni- 
tive,—  vereor,  to  feel  awe ;  fastidio,  to  feel  disgust. 

[282]  gloriae  memor,  mindful  of  glory  ;  lassus  militiae,  sick  of  warfare. 


74  PART  IV.  — SYNTAX. 


283 

((?)  To  denote  the  whole,  of  which  the  word  it 

Hmits  denotes  a  part. 

284 

{d)  To  describe  anything  by  denoting  its  qualities 

or  its  material. 

[283]  Partitive  genitive.  It- may  limit  nomis,  adjectives  or  adverbs,  if 
they  express  a  part,  pars  militum,  part  of  the  soldiers ;  ubinaiii  geni- 
tum  suinus?  xvhere  in  the  world  are  we?  [in  what  place  among  nations?) 
omnium  fluminum  maximum,  the  largest  of  all  rivers ;  genus  eorum 
unum,  07ie  class  of  them.  Here  belongs  the  genitive  in  various  idiomatic 
phrases;  e.g.,  id  temporis,  at  that  [point  o/]  time ;  qvid  novi?  what  news? 
id  loci,  that  spot,  etc.  As  partitive  genitives  the  personal  pronoun  forms 
nostrum,  vestrum  are  used,  not  nostri,  vestri.  ejus  is  a  partitive  geni- 
tive in  the  phrase  qvod  ejus,  =  "as  yhr  as"  (lit.  whatever  of  it),  qvod 
ejus  possis,  as  far  as  you  can.  In  older  Latin,  and  in  colloquial  style,  we 
find  phrases  like  scelus  viri,  a  villain ;  qvid  homiais  ?  what  sort  of  a 
fellow  ?  monstrum  hominis,  a  monster,  etc.,  which  come  under  the  head 
of  partitives,  as  do  also  the  phrases  compendi  facere,  to  save ;  lucri 
facere,  to  gain,  and  the  like. 

[284]  Descriptive  genitive,  res  magni  laboris,  a  task  of  great  tod  {very 
toilsome) ;  murus  pedum  sedeciin,  a  sixteen  foot  wall.  This  genitive,  when 
denoting  a  quality  of  the  Avord  it  limits,  regularly  has  an  adjective  with  it, 
as  in  the  examples  given,  (bidui,  tridui,  etc.,  have  an  adjective  com- 
pounded with  them.) 

The  descriptive  genitive,  when  used  to  denote  material,  does  not  require 
a  limiting  adjective.  This  use  is  rare  (an  adjective  is  generally  used  to 
denote  material),  and  in  many  cases  seems  to  approach  the  idea  of  a 
partitive  genitive.  Examples  are :  acervus  frumenti,  a  heap  of  grain  ; 
talentum  auri,  a  talent  of  gold. 

Other  constructions  occur  instead  of  the  genitive  in  all  its  uses  to  express 
source  or  cause.  Thus,  verbs  of  accusing,  etc.,  verbs  of  reminding,  etc., 
sometimes  take  a  phrase  with  a  preposition ;  verbs  of  remembering,  etc.,  a 
direct, object;  miseret,  etc.,  an  infinitive;  the  various  adjectives,  also,  arc 
used  with  prepositional  phrases  instead  of  the  genitive.  The  poets  and 
later  writers  use  the  genitive  more  freely  with  adjectives  to  express  cause; 
sometimes  also  to  express  specification,  where  an  ablative  or  locative  might 
be  expected. 

For  a  partitive  genitive  a  phrase  with  a  preposition  is  not  unusual, 
oftenest  with  de  or  ex. 


USE  OF  THE  CASES.  75 


The  Genitive  is  used  (as  a  possessive  case)  — 
(a)  To  denote  the  possessor. 
(5)  To  define  a  noun  more  closely, 
(c)  To  denote  the  subject  of  the  implied  action  or 

feeling. 
(tZ)  To  denote  the  object  of  the  implied  action  or 

feeling. 


285 
286 
287 

288 


The  idea  of  source  passes  into  that  of  separation,  and  in  a  few  cases  a 
genitive  is  found  in  poetry,  where  an  ablative  of  separation  would  be  the 
usual  construction.  Probably  the  habit  of  imitating  Greek  constructions 
(common  in  the  Augustan  poets)  is  the  cause  of  this  use. 

[285]  Possessive  genitive,  membra  hominis,  a  man's  limbs;  natura 
deorum,  the  nature  of  the  gods.  Used  with  any  noun  denoting  a  thing 
capable  of  possession  in  the  widest  sense ;  also  with  adjectives  used  sub- 
stantively; e.g.,  aeqvalis  ejus,  his  equal  in  age;  similis  Caesaris,  like 
Ciesar  {Ccesar's  like),  etc.  This  genitive  is  often  put  in  the  predicate,  and 
marh,  duty,  or  some  such  word  supplied  in  translation ;  e.g.,  est  hominis. 
His  a  man's  duty ;  hominis  est  errare,  it  is  characteristic  of  man  to  make 
mistakes. 

The  genitive  case  of  the  personal  pronouns  is  not  used,  in  prose,  as  a 
possessive.     The  possessive  pronouns  are  used  instead. 

A  possessive  genitive  is  found  with  ergo,  instar,  teuus,  pridle  and 
postridie,  which  were  originally  nouns,  but  have  sunk  to  prepositions  or 
adverbs. 

[286]  Appositive  genitive.  urbs  Romae,  {Rome's  city,  i.e.)  Rome; 
urbs  Buthroti,  the  city  of  Buthrotum.  This  is  properly  a  possessive  geni- 
tive.    It  is  rarely  found,  an  appositive  being  far  more  usual. 

[287]  Subjective  genitive,  deorum  factum,  a  deed  of  the  gods.  The 
word  it  limits  must  imply,  of  course,  an  action  or  feeling.  In  some  cases 
it  is  hard  to  draw  the  line  between  the  subjective  and  the  possessive  use 
of  the  genitive,  and  the  possessive  pronouns  are  used  for  it  as  for  a  posses- 
sive genitive. 

[288]  Objective  genitive.  usus  membrorum,  the  use  of  the  limbs; 
cura  rerum  alienarum,  the  care  of  others'  interests.  The  objective  geni- 
tive limits  nouns  and  adjectives  that  imply  an  action  or  feeling  which  may 
pass  over  to  an  object,     amans  sui,  fond  of  himself ;  capax  urbis  mag- 


76  PART  IV.— SYNTAX. 


289 
290 

291 


The  genitive  is  used,  further  — 
(a)  To  denote  price  or  penalty. 
(5)  With  a  few  verbs  and  adjectives  of  plenty  and 

want. 
(<?)  With  interest  and  refert. 


nae,  capahle-of-holding  a  large  city.     As  objective  genitives,  mei,  tiii,  sui, 
nostri,  vestri  are  used  (nostrum,  vestrum  very  rarely). 

A  phrase  with  a  preposition  (in,  erga,  etc.)  may  be  used  instead  of  the 
objective  genitive.  This  use  of  the  genitive,  like  that  of  the  subjective 
genitive,  is  a  development  of  the  idea  of  possession,  the  action  or  feeling, 
whether  done  to  one  or  by  one,  being  thought  of  as  something  belonging 
to  him. 

[289]  The  genitive  of  price  has  been  mentioned  [274] .  The  genitive 
of  penalty  is  found  in  capitis  dainnarc,  to  condemn  to  death,  and  similar 
expressions.  It  seems  to  have  arisen  from  confusion  with  the  genitive  of 
the  crime,  but  possibly  there  may  be  an  ellipsis  of  the  word  on  which 
the  genitive  depends,  the  expression  having  been  originally  a  legal  phrase. 
Penalty  is  usually  expressed  by  the  ablative. 

[290]  With  verbs  and  adjectives  of  Jilling,  fullness,  the  genitive  seems 
to  come  under  the  head  of  source  or  cause ;  but  an  ablative  of  means  is 
more  common.  "With  other  expressions  the  genitive  is  not  common,  except 
in  the  poets  and  later  writers,  who  seem,  in  many  cases,  to  use  it  in  imita- 
tion of  the  Greek,  to  express  not  only  want  or  lack;  but  often  also  separa- 
tion or  specijication,  ideas  which  are  regularly  expressed  by  the  ablative. 
The  verb  potior,  also,  which  usually  takes  an  ablative,  is  found  with  a 
genitive,  domus  erat  plena  ebriorum,  the  house  icasfull  of  drunken  men ; 
temeritatis  implere,  to  fill  with  rashness  ;  exercitationis  indiget,  needs 
practice. 

[291]  nullius  interest,  it  males  no  difference  to  any  one;  illorum 
refert,  it  concerns  them.  In  this  construction,  the  possessive  pronoun  forms 
mca,  tua,  sua,  nostra,  v^estra  are  used,  instead  of  the  genitive  of  a 
personal  pronoun.  The  origin  of  this  genitive  is  not  clear,  but  refert  is 
commonly  thought  to  stand  for  rem  fert ;  in  which  case  the  genitive  is 
possessive,  and  niea,  tua,  etc.,  stand  for  meani,  tuam,  etc.  The  genitive 
and  possessive  pronoun  with  interest  may  be  explained  as  haA'ing  arisen 
from  the  analogy  of  refert,  which  has  the  same  meaning,  and  naturally 
takes  the  same  construction. 


USE   OF  THE   CASES.  77 


The  ablative  in  Latin  has  taken  on  itself  the  func- 
tions of  four  different  cases,  the  meaning  and  force 
of  which  are  rudely  given  by  the  four  prepositions 
most  often  used  to  translate  it,  — from^  hy^  in,  with. 

1.  FROM  — The  Ablative  Proper. 

The  Ablative  Proper  is  used  — 

(^)  To    denote    the    place    from    which    motion 

proceeds. 
(5)   To  denote  separation,  source  and  origin. 


292 


293 
294 


[292]  The  classification  here  given  of  the  uses  of  the  ablative  is  not 
meant  to  be  absolute  or  scientific.  The  various  uses  shade  into  one 
another,  and  a  sharp  line  of  division  is,  in  many  cases,  impossible.  In 
doubtful  cases,  the  clue  offered  by  other  constructions  has  been  generally 
followed ;  thus  cause,  though  often  passing  insensibly  into  means,  has  been 
put  under  "  ablative  proper "  rather  than  "  instrumental,"  because  of  the 
frequent  use  of  a,  de  or  ex  to  express  cause ;  jmce,  though  in  many  cases 
"  instrumental,"  lias  been  put  under  "  locative  "  because  of  the  locative  of 
price,  etc.  But  analogy  fails  in  many  cases,  —  the  name  of  a  town  used  in 
dating  letters  is  found  not  only  in  the  ablative,  but  also  in  the  locative  and 
in  the  ablative  with  a.  Should  the  ablative  when  so  used  be  regarded  as 
"  place  where  "  or  "  place  from  which  "  ?  Some  of  these  doubtful  cases  are 
mentioned  in  the  notes ;  if  the  teacher  should  choose  to  transfer  any  usage 
from  one  head  to  another,  no  harm  will  come  of  it,  as  the  sole  object  of 
the  classification  is  to  render  it  easier  to  learn  and  keep  in  mind  the 
various  uses. 

[293]  This  use  is  generally  limited  in  prose  to  names  of  towns  and  small 
islands,  and  dome,  humo,  rure.  (Other  words  usually  take  a  preposition.) 
Corintho  f  ugit,  Jied  from  Corinth  ;  rure  hue  advenit,  came  hither  from 
the  country. 

[294]  hostem  raplnis  prohlbere,  to  keep  the  foe  from  plunder ;  Jove 
natus  et  Tjatona,  horn  of  Jove  and  Latona;  satus  terra,  sprung  from  earth. 
(A  preposition  is  often  used,  however,  to  express  separation  or  source.) 

Under  this  head  belongs  the  use  of  the  ablative  with  verbs  and  adjec- 
tives denoting  ivant  and  lack ;  e.g.,  vacuus  cura,  free  from  care ;  isto 
nomine  caruit,  it  lacked  that  name.  (The  genitive  is  also  thus  used; 
see  290.) 


78  PART  IV.  — SYNTAX. 


295 

(c)    To  denote  cause. 

296 

(c?)  To  denote  the  standard  of  comparison. 

8.  BY  — Tlie  Instrumental  Ablative. 

The  InstruiMENTAL  Ablative  is  used  — 

297 

(t?)  To  denote  the  means  or  instrument. 

[295]  The  ablative  of  cause  is  used  with  a  great  variety  of  expressions, 
and  rendered  into  English  by  various  prepositions,  auiini  vitio  id 
evenit,  that  came  about  from  a  fault  of  character.  So  with  gaudere,  to  re- 
joice  {in) ;    niti,  to  depend   {on) ;   confidere,   to  trust  {to) ;    coiitentus, 

satisfied  {with);  la,etus,  glad  {of ) ;  etc. 

[296]  This  ablative  is  translated  "  than."  nihil  est  viro  dignius  aeqvi- 
tate,  nothing  is  more  worthy  of  a  man  than  justice.  "Than  "  is  also  expressed 
by  qvam,  and  the  usage  of  Latin  speech  is  rouglily  the  following :  — 

(a)  When  the  standard  of  comparison  is  a  relative  pronoun,  the  abla- 
tive is  used. 

{h)  When  the  standard  of  comparison  is  subject,  or  an  attribute  of  the 
subject,  either  the  ablative  or  qvam  may  be  used. 

(c)  When  two  adjectives  are  compared,  qvam  is  used,  and  both  adjec- 
tives take  the  same  degree,  magis  disertus  qvam  sapiens,  more  learned 
than  ivise ;  verier  qvam  gratior,  more  true  than  popular. 

{d)  With  adverbs  the  ablative  is  (Jften  used  loosely  in  indefinite  com- 
parisons ;  e.g.,  dicto  citius,  sooner  than  said.    So  spe,  opinione,  justo,  etc. 

(e)  In  expressions  of  size,  number,  iveight,  etc.,  after  the  adverbs  plus, 
minus,  amplius,  longius,  either  the  ablative  or  qvam  may  be  used.  But 
qvam  is  often  omitted  in  such  constructions,  and  the  word  denoting  the 
standard  of  comparison  left  in  the  same  case  as  if  qvam  were  expressed ; 
e.g.,  plus  tria  millia,  more  than  three  thousand. 

(/)  In  cases  not  included  in  the  above  qvam  is  used  in  prose,  but  the 
ablative  is  more  freely  used  in  poetry.     So  too  with  alius,  other  {than). 

On  the  border  between  the  ablative  proper  and  the  instrumental  ablative 
stands  its  use  to  denote  the  material  of  which  a  thing  consists ;  e.g.,  animo 
constamus  et  corpore,  we  are  made  up  of  soul  and  body. 

Here,  too,  may  be  placed  the  use  of  the  ablative  with  facio,  fio  and 
sum  in  the  peculiar  idioms,  qvid  facias  .  .  .  ?  what  can  you  do  ivilh  .  .  .  f 
and  qvid  fiet  .  .  .  ?  what  will  become  of ...  ?  e.g.,  qvid  hoc  homine  faci- 
atis  ?  u'hat  could  you  do  with  this  fell oivf 

[297]    Ablative  of  means,     lacte  et  carne  vivunt  pellibusqve  sunt 


USE   OF  THE   CASES.  79 


(5)  To  denote  the  amount  of  difference. 

3.  IN  — The  liocative  Ablative. 

The  Locative  Ablative  is  used  — 

(a)  To  denote  the  place  where  an  action  takes  place. 


298 


299 


vestiti,  they  live  on  milk  and  Jiesh  and  are  clothed  with  skins ;  eum  corona 
donasti,  you  presented  him  tcith  a  croicn. 

fruor,  fungor,  potior,  utor,  vescor  are  limited  by  an  ablative  of 
means,  which  is  usually  translated  as  a  direct  object,  lacte,  caseo, 
carne  vescor,  I  eat  milk,  cheese,  flesh  (i.e.,  feed  myself  with) ;  Crassus 
aedilitate  functus  est,  Crassus  held  {busied  himself  with)  the  cedileship.  In 
regard  to  the  reflexive  use  of  these  deponents,  see  154.  (In  old  Latin  they 
sometimes  take  a  direct  object,  and  a  remnant  of  their  transitive  meaning 
is  seen  in  their  present  passive  participles,  which  are  used  with  esse  to 
make  the  "second  periphrastic  conjugation,"  like  those  of  other  transitive 
verbs,     potior  also  takes  a  genitive;  see  [290].) 

The  ablative  of  means  is  used  also  with  opus  and  usus ;  e.g.,  opus  est 
pecunia,  [there  is  a  ivork  \_to  be  done']  ivith  money,  i.e.)  there  is  need  of  money. 
In  this  construction,  instead  of  a  noun  denoting  action  we  sometimes  find 
the  perfect  passive  participle,  or  the  ablative  of  the  supine ;  e.g.,  opus  est 
properato,  there  is  need  of  haste;  opus  est  factu,  there  is  need  of  action. 

The  ablative  may  denote  the  road  or  route  by  which  one  goes.  Aurelia 
via  profectus  est,  he  tvent  by  the  Aurelian  way ;  flumine  adverso,  up  the 
river;  recto  litore,  straight  along  the  shore;  etc.  This  use  may  be  con- 
sidered either  instrumental  or  locative,  as  the  road  is  looked  on  as  a  means 
of  travel  or  a  place  of  travel. 

[298 j  Ablative  of  degree,  paulo  lougius  processit,  he  went  on  a  little 
farther ;  decern  annis  ante  Punicum  bellum,  ten  years  before  the  Punic 
war.  So  with  abesse,  distare,  etc.,  to  express  distance;  e.g.,  qvlnqve 
inilibus  ab  urbe  distat,  is  five  miles  from  the  city ;  a  litore  tridui  navi- 
gatione,  three  days'  sail  from  the  coast. 

qvo  .  .  .  eo  and  qvanto  .  .  .  tanto  occur  often  in  correlative  clauses, 
and  are  translated  by  the  . . .  the.  qvo  difflcilius,  eo  praeclarius,  the 
more  difficult,  the  more  glorious. 

[299]  Ablative  of  place.  This  use  is  generally  limited  in  prose  to  names 
of  towns  and  islands,  words  which  mean  "place"  (loco,  locis,  parte,  etc.), 
words  limited  by  totus  or  niedius,  and  a  few  phrases.  (Other  words 
usually  take  a  preposition.  For  the  locative  of  "place  where"  see  273.) 
Tamesis  uno  omnino  loco  transiri  potest,  the  Thames  can  be  crossed  in 


80  PART  IV.  — SYNTAX. 


300 
301 

302 
303 


304 


(^)  To  define  the  application  of  the  word  it  limits. 
(<?)  To  denote  the  time  when  or  within  which  an 
action  takes  place. 

(d)  To  denote  extent  of  time  or  space. 

(e)  To  denote  price  or  penalty. 

4.  WITH  — The  Comitative  Ablative. 

The  Comitative  Ablative  is  used  — 
(a)  To  denote  accompaniment. 


one  place  onlij ;  totis  trepidatur  castris,  there  is  a  panic  in  the  whole  camp. 
So  Carthagiue  Nova,  at  New  Carthage;  Trallibus,  at  Tralles ;  terra 
niariqve,.Z'3/  land  and  sea;  dextra,  on  the  right,  etc.  In  the  case  of  plural 
names  of  towns,  it  is  indifferent  whether  the  case  be  called  ablative  or 
locative. 

[300]  Ablative  of  specification.  Translated  in,  in  respect  to,  in  point  of, 
etc.  temporibus  errasti,  you  ivere  mistaken  in  the  date;  grandis  natu, 
advanced  in  life;  rex  nomine,  non  potentia,  king  in  name,  ^ot  in  power. 
Here  belongs  the  ordinary  use  of  the  supine  in  the  ablative ;  e.g.,  mirabile 
dictu,  strange  to  tell;  possibly  also  the  ablative  with  dignus  and  indig- 
nus;  e.g.,  indignus  est  vita,  he  is  unworthy  of  life.     But  see  [303]. 

[301]  Ablative  of  time,  tertia  vigilia  solvit,  he  set  sail  in  the  third  watch ; 
solis  occasu,  at  sunset ;  decern  diebiis  proxiniis,  irithin  the  7iext  ten  dags. 
Some  expressions  of  time  contain  at  the  same  time  a  suggestion  also  of 
cause,  means  or  specification ;  e.g.,  bello  civili  periit,  he  lost  his  life  in 
the  civil  war ;  duobus  his  proeliis,  in  these  two  battles,  etc. 

[302]  Ablative  of  extent,  pugnatum  est  horis  qvinqve,  the  fight  lasted 
five  hours.  An  accusative  is  more  often  used  to  express  extent  of  time  or 
space.     See  266. 

[303]  Ablative  of  price,  vendidit  hie  auro  patriam,  this  man  sold  his 
country  for  gold.  Ablative  of  penalty,  tertia  parte  agri  dainnati,  fined 
a  third  part  of  their  land;  morte  damnatus,  condemned  to  death.  With 
verbs  of  exchanging  either  what  is  given  or  what  is  received  may  be 
treated  as  the  price.  With  some  verbs  the  ablative  of  price  seems  to  be 
instrumental  rather  than  locative.  Price  is  also  expressed  by  the  locative, 
and  penalty  by  the  genitive.     See  274  and  289. 

An  ablative  is  used  witli  tlie  adjectives  dignus  and  indignus,  and  with 
the  verb  dignor,  which  seems  to  come  under  tlie  liead  of  jirico,  but  is  not 
quite  clear.  See  [300] .  haud  me  tali  dignor  honore,  /  do  not  think 
myself  worthy  of  such  honor. 


USE   OF   THE  CASES.  81 


(6)  To  describe  anything  by  expressing  its  quali- 
ties or  appearance. 
((?)  To  denote  manner  or  attendant  circumstances. 

The  ablative  is  used,  further  — 
(a)  As  the  case  absolute. 


305 
306 

307 


[304]  Ablative  of  accompaniment.  This  use  is  limited  in  prose  to  military 
expressions,  giving  the  troops  or  forces  with  which  a  movement  is  made. 
Caesar  subseqvebatur  omnibus  copiis,  Casar  followed  icith  all  his  troops. 
In  other  expressions  the  preposition  cum  is  used. 

[305]  Ablative  of  description.  In  this  use  the  ablative,  like  the  descrip- 
tive genitive,  requires  a  limiting  adjective  or  a  limiting  genitive,  pari 
acclivitate  collis,  a  hill  of  equal  steepness;  ore  rubicuudo  homo,  a  red- 
faced  fellow.  It  is  often  best  rendered  by  a  compound  adjective,  as  in  the 
last  example. 

[306]  The  ablative  of  manner  is  generally  limited  in  prose  to  words 
meaning  "manner"  (modo,  ratione,  etc.),  and  words  which  have  a  limiting 
adjective,  aeqvo  auimo  mori,  to  die  with  resignation  {an  even  mind) ;  id 
summo  studio  a  militlbus  administratur,  this  is  performed  by  the 
soldiers  with  the  greatest  zeal.  Other  words  take  regularly  the  preposition 
cum,  except  a  few  like  injuria,  unjustli/,  silentio,  silently,  which  have 
become  equivalent  to  adverbs  in  their  use ;  and  those  which  contain  also 
the  idea  of  cause  or  means ;  e.g.,  nox  cantu  aut  clamore  acta,  the  night 
was  spent  in  singing  and  shouting ;  pedibus  proeliari,  to  fight  on  foot ; 
versibus  scribere,  to  write  in  verse,  etc. 

The  ablative  of  attendant  circumstances  lies  between  the  ablative  of 
manner  and  the  ablative  absolute  (which  often  expresses  manner  or  circum- 
stance), and  cannot  be  separated  by  any  distinct  line  from  those  uses.  In 
foro  summa  Iiominum  frequentia  exscribo,  /  am  writing  in  the  forum 
with  a  great  crowd  [around  me).  So  in  various  phrases  :  injussu  Caesaris, 
without  Cmsar's  orders ;  pace  tua,  by  your  leave ;  tuo  periculo,  at  your 
own  risk,  etc.  Here  seem  to  belong  two  or  three  cases  of  the  gerundive 
(see  349),  which  are  often  regarded  as  ablative  absolute.  nuUis  officii 
praeceptis  tradendis,  without  giving  rules  of  duty ;  accusandis  Camillus 
dis  hominibusqve  senescebat,  Camillus  grew  old  accusing  gods  and  men. 

[307]  The  ablative  absolute  may  be  referred  to  either  division  of  the 
case,  according  to  the  modification  it  expresses.  It  denotes  most  often 
time,  cause,  means,  manner,  concession  or  an  accompanying  event,  and  should 


82  PART  IV.  — SYNTAX. 


308 


(^)  With  the  prepositions  a  (ab,  abs),  absqve,  de, 
coram,  palam,  cum,  ex  (e),  sine,  tenus,  pro 
and  prae ;  and  sometimes  with  in,  sub,  subter, 
super. 


be  translated  accordingly,  usually  by  a  modifying  clause,  but  in  the  last 
case  often  by  an  independent  clause,  the  proper  connective  (and,  but,  etc.) 
being  supplied.  Germani,  post  tergum  clamore  audito,  armis  objec- 
tis,  se  ex  castris  ejeceruiit,  the  Germans,  when  they  heard  the  outcry  in 
their  rear,  threic  away  their  arms  and  burst  out  of  the  camp.  (Here  clamore 
audito  denotes  time,  and  armis  objectis  an  accompanying  circumstance). 
nostri  omnes  incolumes,  perpaucis  vulneratis,  our  men  were  all  safe, 
though  a  few  were  wounded  (concession) ;  multis  telis  dejeetis,  defensores 
depellebant,  they  drove  off  the  defenders  by  throwing  many  missiles  (means). 

The  ablative  absolute  consists  regularly  of  a  noun  and  a  participle,  the 
former  being  subject,  the  latter  predicate  of  the  implied  statement.  For 
predicate,  however,  a  predicate-noun  or  adjective  is  often  used,  the  lacking 
participle  of  the  verb  sum  being  supplied  in  translation.  Rarely  a  clause 
or  an  infinitive  is  used  as  subject  of  the  participle. 

The  ablative  absolute  is  far  more  common  than  the  English  nominative 
absolute,  to  which  it  corresi)onds.  Only  seldom  can  the  latter  be  used  to 
translate  it ;  the  best  rendering  is  usually  by  a  modifying  clause.  The  lack 
of  a  perfect  active  participle  in  Latin  makes  the  construction  far  more 
frequent  than  it  would  otherwise  be,  and  an  English  participial  construc- 
tion is  often  a  good  translation,  if  the  voice  of  the  Latin  verb  be  changed; 
e.g.,  Caesar,  obsidibus  acceptis,  exereitumi  in  Beljovaeos  duxit, 
CcEsar,  having  received  hostages,  led  his  army,  etc. ;  convocato  consillOy 
eos  incusavit,  calling  a  council,  he  upbraided  them. 

A  few  cases  occur  of  the  ablative  absolute  joined  to  the  sentence  it 
limits  by  a  conjunction:  nisi  munitis  castris,  [unless  after  the  camp  had 
been  fortified)  unless  the  camp  had  been  (first)  fortified ;  qvasi  praeda  sibl 
advecta,  as  if  booty  had  been  brought  to  him  ;  tanqvam  non  transituris 
in  Asiam  Romanis,  as  if  the  Romans  were  not  going  to  cross  into  Asia. 

In  a  few  cases  the  participle  stands  alone  as  an  ablative  absolute,  its 
subject  being  omitted.  This  corresponds  to  the  impersonal  use  of  a  finite 
verb-form,  nihil  festinato,  nihil  pracparato,  without  haste,  and  without 
preparation ;  diu  certato,  afer  a  long  fight  (lit.  it  having  been  fought  long), 
like  diu  certatum  est,  [it  was  fought  long)  there  was  a  long  fight. 

[308j  The  ablative  with  prepositiotis  may  be  assigned  to  the  divisions 
of  the  case  as  follows :  — 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES.  83 


Use  of  the  Tenses. 

The  use  of  the  tenses  is,  in  general,  the  same  as 
in  English. 

The  perfect  indicative,  in  its  use,  is  either  definite 
or  indefinite.      The  perfect  definite   corresponds  to 


309 
310 


Ablative  proper :  a,  absqve,  de,  ex,  sine. 

Locative  ablative :  coram,  palain,  tenus,  pro,  prae,  in,  sub,  subter, 
super. 

Comitative  ablative :  cum. 

In  and  sub  take  the  ablative  with  expressions  implying  rest,  the  accusa- 
tive with  expressions  implying  motion.  Subter  and  super  usually  take  tlie 
accusative;  rarely  the  ablative,  except  super  when  it  means  "concerning." 

A  few  words,  commonly  advorbs,  are  sometimes  found  with  the  ablative 
like  prepositions;  such  are  procul,  simul,  clam. 

[309]  The  present  indicative  is  often  used,  as  in  English,  for  a  past 
tense  (imperfect  or  perfe(!t  indefinite).  In  this  use  it  is  called  "historical 
present."  After  the  conjunction  dum,  '■'while,"  the  present  is  often  used 
in  the  same  way,  though  a  past  tense  is  necessary  in  English. 

With  adverbs  meaning  ''long"  (jam,  diu,  etc.),  the  present  and  imper- 
fect, though  they  have  their  proper  force,  are  usually  rendered  into  English 
by  the  perfect  and  pluperfect,  jamdiu  machinaris,  you  have  long  been 
plotting  [and  are  plotting  yet) ;  diu  comparabam,  T  had  long  been  preparing 
[and  was  still  doing  so). 

The  imperfect  denotes  a  past  action  or  state  as  continuing,  repeated  or 
customary,  sometimes  as  attempted,  dicebat,  "he  said,"  "he  was  saying," 
"he  tised  to  say,"  or  even  "he  tried  to  say." 

The  future  indicative  is  sometimes  used,  as  in  English,  to  express  a 
command.  Compare  [815].  For  the  lacking  future  and  future  perfect 
•subjunctive,  the  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  commonly  used;  but 
when  it  is  necessary  to  avoid  ambiguity,  the  subjunctive  of  the  first  peri- 
phrastic conjugation  may  be  used. 

In  letters,  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  tenses  are  sometimes  found 
where  the  English  would  use  the  present  and  perfect;  the  time  of  the 
receipt  of  the  letter,  not  the  time  of  writing,  being  reckoned  from. 

Poets  sometimes  use  the  perfect  indefinite,  in  imitation  of  Greek,  to 
state  a  general  truth. 

[310]  The  perfect  subjunctive  is  usually  definite,  except  when  it  stands 
for  an  indefinite  perfect  indicative  which  has  been  changed  to  the  subjunc- 
tive in  a  dependent  statement,  by  322. 


84  PART  IV.  — SYNTAX. 


311 


312 


313 
314 


the  English  "present  perfect";  e.g.^  amavi,  I  have 
loved.  The  perfect  indefinite  corresponds  to  the 
English  "past";    e.g.^  amavi,  1  loved. 

The  present,  perfect  definite,  future  and  future 
perfect  are  primary  tenses;  the  imperfect,  perfect 
indefinite  and  pluperfect,  secondary. 

In  most  subordinate  clauses  the  subjunctive  takes 
a  primary  tense  (present  or  perfect)  when  the  verb 
on  which  it  depends  is  primary,  and  a  secondary 
tense  (imperfect  or  pluperfect)  when  the  verb  on 
which  it  depends  is  secondary.  This  usage  is  called 
sequence  of  tenses. 

Use  of  the  Moods. 

The  Indicative  is  used  —  , 

(rt)  To  make  a  statement  directly. 
(5)  To  ask  a  question  directly. 


[311]  The  P^nglish  "perfect  with  have"  is  usually  the  equivalent  of 
the  definite  perfect,  but  rarely  our  idiom  requires  "  have  "  as  a  translation 
of  the  indefinite  perfect. 

The  historical  present  is  sometimes  secondary,  following  meaning  rather 
than  form. 

[312]  The  rule  of  sequence  is  not  a  principle  of  grammar,  but  simply 
the  statement  of  a  somewhat  unsettled  usage.  It  is  subject  to  violation 
whenever  the  sense  requires ;  but  this  rarely  happens,  except  in  consecu- 
tive clauses,  and  conditions  impliedly  false.     See  326  and  327. 

[313]    The  use  of  the  indicative  is  the  same  as  in  English. 

[314]  Questions  answered  by  "yes"  or  "no"  are  not  marked,  as  in 
English,  by  the  order  of  the  words,  but  by  the  interrogative  particles  -ng 
and  iiiim.  -n6  is  appended  to  the  prominent  word  of  the  sentence  (usually 
the  first  word),  and  simply  sliows  that  the  sentence  is  a  question,  sen- 
tisne?  do  you  perceive  ?     Karely  -ii6  is  omitted. 

The  insertion  of  a  negative  word  shows,  as  in  English,  that  the  answer 
"yes"  is  expected.  In  such  a  case,  -n6  is  appended  to  the  negative  word. 
nonne  sentis  ?  do  you  not  perceive  f 


USE   OF  THE  MOODS.  85 


The  Imperative  is  used  — 

(a)  To  give  a  command  directly. 
The  Subjunctive  is  used  (in  independent  sentences)  ■ 

(a)  To  make  a  statement  doubtfully. 

(h)  To  ask  a  question  doubtfully. 


315 

316 
317 


num  shows  that  the  answer  "no"  is  expected,  num  sentls?  you  don't 
perceive,  do  you  ? 

Double  (or  alternative)  questions  take  utrum,  num  or  -n6  in  the  first 
clause,  and  an  or  -ne  in  the  second. 

Exclamatory  sentences  are  questions  in  form,  are  introduced  by  the 
same  interrogative  words,  and  take  the  same  construction. 

[315]  The  use  of  the  imperative  is  the  same  as  in  English,  but  a  pro- 
hibition is  seldom  expressed  by  the  simple  imperative.  Instead  of  it  we 
find  (a)  ne  with  the  perfect  subjunctive,  (b)  noli  (plural  nolite)  with  an 
infinitive,  (c)  cave  (plural  cavete)  with  the  present  subjunctive.  "Do  not 
speak"  would  be  ne  dlxeris,  noli  dicere,  or  cave  dlcas;  seldom  in 
prose,  ne  die. 

Rarely  a  future  indicative  is  used  in  a  command,  expectabis,  you 
will  wait. 

The  imperative  forms  in  -to,  -tote,  -nto,  -tor,  -ntor  (often  called 
future  imperative),  are  old  forms,  usually  found  only  in  legal  language 
(in  laws,  wills,  etc.),  and.  in  poetry. 

[316]  Potential  subjunctive.  It  corresponds  to  the  English  potential, 
and  should  be  translated  by  may,  might,  could,  would,  should,  etc.,  according 
to  the  sense  of  the  passage,  velim,  /  should  wish;  vellem,  I  coidd  wish; 
crederes,  you  would  think ;  nemo  Istud  coneedat,  no  one  woidd  admit  that. 
Doubtful  statements  are  most  common  with  a  conditional  clause  to  limit 
them,  and  usually  take  the  same  form  as  the  verb  of  the  condition.  Some- 
times they  are  used  where  a  conditional  or  concessive  clause  would  have 
the  same  force. 

The  potential  subjunctive  may  be  used  in  dependent  as  well  as  inde- 
pendent sentences,  where  the  indicative  would  make  a  positive  statement, 
while  the  writer  desires  a  doubtful  one.  This  is  especially  the  case  in 
relative  sentences,  which,  though  dependent  in  form,  are  often  practically 
equivalent  to  independent  statements. 

[317]  There  are  two  forms  of  questions  in  which  the  subjunctive  is 
found.  The  first  is  simply  the  potential  subjunctive  of  316,  when  the  state- 
ment is  changed  into  a  question  ;  e.g.,  crederesne  ?  would  you  think  ?     The 


PART  IV.  — SYNTAX. 


318 

(c)  To  give  a  command  doubtfully :  — 

319 

1.  In  exhortations. 

320 

2.  In  wishes. 

321 

3.  In  requests  or  mild  commands. 

other  use  is  the  dubitative  subjunctive.  It  is  found  in  doubtful  or  rhetori- 
cal questions ;  i.e.,  such  as  do  not  require  an  answer,  but  imply  in  them- 
selves a  negative  answer,  qvid  faciam ?  what  can  I  do?  qvid  facereni ? 
what  was  I  to  do?  qvis  dubitet ?  who  doubts ?  qvis  vellet ?  who  could 
ivish  ?  The  implied  answer  in  all  these  is  "  nothing,"  "  no  one."  So  qvies- 
cerem  et  paterer ?  was  I  to  keep  quiet  and  suffer?  [No.\  The  subjunctive 
in  such  questions  is  really  potential,  but  in  English  the  indicative  is  often 
used,  or  the  mood-verb  can,  while  the  subjunctive  of  310  is  more  often 
rendered  by  may,  might  or  ivould. 

[319]  Hortatorg  subjunctive.  Used  in  the  first  person  plural;  e.g., 
moriamur !  let  us  die  !     in  arma  ruamus !  let  us  rush  into  the  Jight ! 

[320]  Optative  subjunctive,  tibi  di  qvaecumqve  precaris  dent, 
mag  the  gods  give  you  all  the  blessings  gou  pray  for ;  moriar,  ni  puto, 
may  I  die,  if  I  don't  believe  .  .  .!  A  particle  of  wishing  (O,  iiti,  utinam, 
etc.)  often  accompanies  this  use  of  the  subjunctive.  (O  si  is  used  in  the 
same  way,  but  is  a  conditional  clause.)  The  secondary  tenses  imply  that 
the  wish  cannot  be  realized,  and  sometimes  approach  the  notion  of  a  past 
obligation,  utinam  viveret,  would  that  he  xcere  alive !  ne  poposcisses, 
you  ought  not  to  have  asked  (lit.,  would  that  you  had  not  asked). 

[321]  Jussive  subjunctive.  Common  in  the  third  person,  where  tlie  im- 
perative is  seldom  used,  but  rare  in  prose  in  the  second  person,  except  in 
prohibitions  (see  [315]),  and  when  the  subject  is  indefinite  (you  =  any  one). 
relinqvas,  leave  {=  one  may  leave),  lioc  amet,  hoc  spernat,  let  him 
choose  this  and  reject  that. 

This  subjunctive,  beside  the  uses  given,  often  occurs  where  other  con- 
structions are  common  in  Latin,  viz : 

With  inodo  or  tantiim,  "  only  "  as  the  equivalent  of  a  condition. 
With  lit,  ne,  qvamvis,  etc.,  "however  much,"  as  the  equivalent  of  a 
concessive  clause. 
E.g.,  multa  in  eo  admiranda  sunt,  eligere  modo  ourae  sit,  there  is 
much  in  him  that  is  admirable,  if  one  only  takes  pains  in  choosing  (lit.,  only  let 
it  be  your  care  to  choose) ;  velis  tantuinmodo,  if  only  you  wish  ;  qvamvis 
prudens  sis,  tamen  .  .  . ,  though  you  be  wise,  yet  .  .  .  (lit.,  be  as  wise  as  you 
will,  qvam  vis).  At  times,  this  subjunctive  is  so  used  without  the  adverbs 
mentioned;  e.g.,  roges,  you  may  ask  (i.e.,  if  you  ask,  or  though  you  ask). 


USE  OF  THE  MOODS.  87 


The  Subjunctive  is  used  (as  the  indirect  mood)  — 
(a)  In  the  subordinate  clauses  of  dependent  state- 
ments. 
(6)  In  dependent  questions. 


322 
323 


[322]  The  subjunctive  of  322,  323,  and  324,  is  a  substitute  for  the 
indicative  and  imperative  of  313,  314,  and  315,  when  direct  statements, 
questions  or  commands  are  reported  and  made  to  depend  on  verbs  of  say- 
ing or  thinking,  asking  or  answering,  commanding  or  forbidding. 

Direct  statements,  when  made  dependent  on  verbs  of  saging  or  thinking, 
change  the  indicative  of  the  principal  clauses  to  the  infinitive ;  that  of  the 
subordinate  clauses  to  the  subjunctive. 

The  potential  subjunctive,  in  principal  clauses,  becomes  the  infinitive  of 
the  active  periphrastic  conjugation. 

Occasionally  subordinate  clauses,  especially  relative  clauses,  take  the 
infinitive,  being  equivalent  to  principal  clauses  in  their  meaning.  A  few 
cases  occur  of  the  use  of  the  infinitive  by  a  sort  of  attraction,  even  in  con- 
ditional clauses  and  the  like. 

The  same  principle  often  causes  the  subjunctive  to  be  used  in  relative 
and  other  subordinate  clauses,  that  do  not  depend  on  verbs  of  saying  or 
thinking,  but  limit  a  sentence  whose  verb  implies  the  thought  or  statement 
of  another  person.  Paetus  libros,  qvos  frater  suus  reliqvisset,  mihi 
donavlt,  Paetus  gave  me  the  books  which  his  brother  [as  he  said)  had  left. 
Sometimes,  by  a  careless  construction,  the  verb  of  saying  is  inserted,  and 
put  in  the  subjunctive  instead  of  the  verb  of  the  sentence,  which  in  this 
case  depends  on  the  inserted  verb,  literas,  qvas  me  misisse  diceret, 
recitavit,  he  read  a  letter  which  he  said  I  had  written.  Causal  clauses  also 
take  the  subjunctive  on  this  principle,  when  the  cause  is  given  not  on  the 
authority  of  the  speaker  or  writer,  but  of  some  other  person,  and  show  the 
same  irregular  insertion  of  dico.     Compare  [328]. 

Subordinate  clauses  remain  in  the  indicative,  when  they  form  no  part  of 
the  reported  statements,  but  are  inserted  by  the  narrator  as  explanations. 
Occasionally,  also,  though  very  rarely  in  good  writers,  other  subordinate 
clauses  are  found  in  the  indicative. 

[323]  Direct  questions,  when  made  dependent  on  a  verb  of  asking  or 
answering,  change  their  verbs  to  the  subjunctive,  qvis  est  ?  who  is  he  ? 
(direct) ;  nescio  qvis  sit,  /  know  not  who  he  is  (indirect) ;  qvanto  res  sit 
in  periculo,  cognoscunt,  they  learn  in  how  great  danger  the  matter  is. 

In  old  Latin  dependent  questions  are  often  in  the  indicative. 

In  long  passages  of  a  formal,  reported  speech,  dependent  questions  are 


PAET  IV.— SYNTAX. 


324 
325 


((?)   In  dependent  commands. 
The  Subjunctive  is  used  (in  dependent  sentences) — 
(a)  In  final  clauses,  and  in  substantive  clauses  de- 
veloped from  them. 


sometimes  in  the  infinitive.  In  such  cases,  the  question  is  usually  equiva- 
lent to  a  statement,  and  not  asked  for  the  sake  of  an  answer.  See  470, 477. 
With  haud  scio  an,  nescio  an,  /  know  not  ichethei-,  the  verb  often 
remains  in  the  indicative,  these  phrases  having  become  practically  equiva- 
lent in  force  to  adverbs,  "perhaps,"  "pi'obahli/." 

[324]  Direct  commands,  when  made  dependent  on  verbs  of  commanding 
or  forhiddinfj,  change  their  verbs  to  the  subjunctive,  patribus  nuntia 
urbem  muniant,  tell  the  senate  to  fortify  the  citi/ ;  jures  postulo,  /  re- 
quire you  to  swear ;  Ariovistus  respondit,  cum  vellet,  congrederetur, 
Ariovistus  answered  [telling  him),  to  meet  him  when  he  pleased.  In  many 
cases,  however,  ut  or  ne  is  inserted  before  the  verb,  thus  making  a  pur- 
pose clause  (see  325) ;  and  after  jiibeo  and  veto,  less  often  after  other 
verbs,  the  verb  is  changed  to  the  infinitive,  becoming  an  object.    See  338. 

[325]  Final  clauses  denote  purpose.  In  Latin  they  are  relative  clauses, 
and  are  introduced  by  relative  pronouns  or  by  relative  adverbs,  legatos 
miserunt  qvi  dicerent,  they  sent  envoys  to  say  .  .  .  (lit.  who  should  say). 

Ut,  how,  is  the  most  common  to  introduce  a  purpose  clause.  Ne  is  the 
negative  of  ut,  and  is  used  like  a  conjunction  to  introduce  the  purpose 
clause,  ut  being  very  rarely  expressed  before  it.  ut  iter  faceret  Gena- 
bum  proficiscitur,  he  sets  out  to  go  to  Genabus;  postulavit  ne  qvem 
peditem  Caesar  adduceret,  he  demanded  that  Cresar  should  bring  along  no 
foot-soldier ;  veni  ut  te  hortarein,  /  came  to  encourage  you. 

Qvo  is  generally  used  instead  of  ut  when  the  purpose  clause  contains  a 
comparative,  qvo  minus  (often  written  as  one  word)  is  the  negative  of 
qvo,  and  is  found  after  verbs  of  hindering,  refusing,  etc.  qvo  fiat  facilius, 
that  it  may  be  done  the  more  easily ;  me  deterret  hiems  qvominus  earn, 
the  storm  prevents  me  from  going. 

Qvi  (an  old  abl.  =  qvo)  is  common  in  tlie  older  language,  qvin 
(=:  qvi  ne)  is  the  negative  of  qvi.  It  is  often  difficult  to  decide  whether 
clauses  with  qvin  and  qvominus  should  be  put  under  the  head  of  purpose 
or  result  clauses.     See  [326]. 

Ut  is  often  omitted  after  verbs  of  willingness  and  permission,  and  after 
die  and  fac ;  seldom  elsewhere,  fac  sis,  see  that  you  be  ... ;  die  veniat, 
tell  him  to  come ;  volo  facias,  /  wish  you  to  do  .  .  .;  licet  eas,  you  may  go 


USE  OF  THE  MOODS.  89 


(5)    In   consecutive    clauses,    and    in   substantive 
clauses  developed  from  them. 


326 


(lit.,  it  is  allowed  that  you  go),  licet  with  a  following  subjunctive  often 
expresses  a  concession,  licet  laudem  fortunam,  tainen  .  .  . ,  I  mai/ 
praise  fortune,  yet  .  .  .  {=  though  I  praise,  yet  .  .  .).  ne  is  omitted  after 
cave,  cavete.  cave  ignoscas,  do  not  pardon  (compare  [315]  (c)).  In 
many  cases  it  is  possible  that  these  subjunctives  might  be  classed  as 
dependent  commands ;  the  verbs  they  depend  on  nearly  all  express  consent 
or  command. 

The  purpose  clauses,  ut  ita  dicam,  "so  to  speak  ";  ne  longiini  sit,  "to 
be  brief,"  and  tlie  like,  are  used  parenthetically,  as  in  English.  The  same 
is  the  case  with  nedum,  "  much  less."  sumptus  sufterre  neqveo,  nedum 
possis,  /  cannot  stand  the  expense,  much  less  can  you. 

Purpose  clauses  easily  pass  into  substantive  clauses,  and  are  often  used 
in  Latin  where  subject  or  object  clauses  are  used  in  English,  especially 
after  verbs  denoting  an  exercise  of  the  will ;  e.g.,  wishing,  permitting,  com- 
manding, etc.  After  verbs  of  fearing  this  difference  of  idiom  compels  us 
to  translate  ne  by  "that,"  and  ut  by  "that  not."  tinieo  ne  veniat,  I  fear 
that  he  will  come ;  tinieo  ut  veniat,  I  fear  that  he  will  not  come. 

[326]  Consecutive  clauses  express  a  result.  They  are  relative  clauses 
in  Latin,  and  are  introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun,  or  by  the  relative 
adverbs  ut  or  qvin.  tantus  fuit  terror  ut  Volusenus  fidem  non 
faceret,  so  great  icas  the  panic  that  Volusenus  was  not  believed,  qvin,  "but 
that,"  is  used  after  general  negatives  and  after  verbs  of  hindering,  doubting, 
etc. ;  e.g.,  non  est  dubium  qvin,  there  is  no  doubt  that  .... 

Result  clauses  introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun  express  a  characteristic, 
or  a  result  of  the  nature  or  character  of  the  antecedent ;  e.g.,  non  sum 
ille  ferreus  qvi  non  movear,  /  am  not  so  callous  as  not  to  be  moved.  They  • 
are  most  common  after  indefinite  antecedents ;  e.g.,  sunt  qvi,  there  are 
(some)  who ;  qvis  est  qvi,  who  is  there  that . .  . ,  etc. ;  after  unus  and  solus ; 
and  after  general  negatives  nemo,  nullus,  nihil.  In  such  clauses,  qvin 
may  be  used  for  the  nominative  (rarely  accusative)  of  the  relative  pronoun 
and  a  negative ;  e.g.,  nemo  est  qvin  putet,  there  is  no  one  who  does  not  think. 

Relative  clauses  of  result  may  follow  the  adjectives  dignus,  indignns, 
idoneus,  aptus.  dignus  est  qvi  laudetur,  he  is  worthy  to  be  praised. 
Here  also  belong  the  restrictive  clause  qvod  sciam,  as  far  as  I  know,  and 
others  like  it. 

Consecutive  clauses,  like  final  clauses,  are  very  frequent  in  Latin  where 
the  English  uses  subject  or  object  clauses,  and  it  is  often  difficult  to  draw 


90  PART  XV.— SYNTAX. 


327 
328 


{c)   In  conditions  impliedly  false. 
The  Subjunctive  may  be  used,  further 
(cl)  In  causal  clauses. 


the  line  between  purpose  and  result.  Clauses  with  qvin,  in  particular, 
often  seem  to  be  final  rather  than  consecutive,  and  it  is  often  a  matter  of 
indifference  to  which  use  such  object-clauses  should  be  referred. 

Consecutive  clauses  easily  pass  into  subject  or  object-clauses,  and  occur 
with  a  great  variety  of  verbs.  As  subject  they  are  found  with  verbs  mean- 
ing "it  happens"  "it  remains"  etc.;  as  object  they  are  most  common  with 
verbs  meaning  "accomplish  "  "bring  it  about";  facio,  efflcio,  etc.  In  a  few 
cases  they  jjass  into  appositive  clauses. 

[327]  Conditions  impliedly  false  take  the  secondary  tenses,  —  the  im- 
perfect for  present  time,  the  pluperfect  for  past  time,  si  tu  hie  esses, 
if  you  were  in  my  place  (but  you  are  not) ;  si  adfuissem,  if  I  had  been  there 
(but  I  was  not).  Conditional  clauses  are  introduced  by  si,  if  and  its  com- 
pounds, or  by  a  relative  pronoun  or  adverb.  Sometimes  the  conjunction 
si  is  omitted,  as  in  English ;  e.g.,  fecisses,  had  you  done  {=  if  you,  had  done). 

The  primary  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  are  often  used  in  conditions 
though  the  supposed  case  may  be  false,  because  the  speaker  or  writer 
chooses  to  represent  it  as  possible ;  e.g.,  tu  si  hie  sis,  aliter  sentias,  if 
you  were  I,  you  icould  feel  differently  (more  strictly,  if  you  should  be  in  my 
case,  implying  that  such  a  thing  is  possible).  Such  are  really  future  con- 
ditions in  form,  and  come  under  331. 

Conjunctions  meaning  "as  if"  (ac  si,  qvasi,  qvamsi,  tanqvam  si, 
ut  si,  velut  si,  ceu,  also  tanqvam  and  velut  when  si  is  omitted)  are  used 
with  an  ellipsis  of  the  verb  on  wliich  the  condition  depends,  ac  si  scrip- 
sisses,  as  {would  be  the  case)  if  you  had  written;  velut  Iiaud  ulla  mora 
futura  esset,  as  if  there  xcere  to  be  no  delay.  Here  too  the  primary  tenses 
are  often  used,  though  the  connection  shows  that  the  supposed  case  is 
untrue ;  e.g.,  tanqvam  si  claudus  sim,  as  if  I  were  lame  (i.e.,  as  would  be 
the  case  if  T  should  be  lame) ;  jaeent  tanqvam  sine  animo  sint,  they  lie  as 
if  they  were  dead  (i.e.,  as  they  ivoidd  lie,  if  it  should  turn  out  that  they  are 
dead,    essent  would  imply  that  the  speaker  thinks  that  they  are  not  dead). 

[328]  Causal  clauses  after  a  relative  pronoun  or  cum  take  the  subjunc- 
tive regularly,  except  in  old  Latin  ;  after  qvoniam,  usually.  After  other 
causal  conjunctions  the  indicative  is  used  if  the  speaker  or  writer  gives  the 
cause  on  his  own  authority,  the  subjunctive  if  he  gives  it  as  the  aUegation 
of  some  one  else,  qvae  cum  ita  sint,  since  this  is  so;  Panaetius  laudat 
Africanum  qvod  fuerit  abstincns,  Pancetius  praises  Africanus  because  he 


USE  OF  THE  MOODS.  91 


(6)   In  concessive  clauses. 
(^)   In  temporal  clauses. 


329 
330 


ivas  {as  Pancetius  says)  temperate.  (Here  Panaetius  is  made  responsible  for 
the  statement  that  Af ricanus  was  temperate ;  qvod  fuit  would  make  the 
statement  the  writer's.)  The  relative  pronoun  introducing  a  causal  clause 
is  often  preceded  by  nt,  utpote,  qvippe,  and  the  verb  of  the  clause  is 
sometimes,  though  rarely,  in  the  indicative. 

[329]  Concessive  clauses  after  cum  are  regularly  in  the  subjunctive ; 
after  qvamqvam,  in  the  indicative.  Of  the  other  conjunctions  translated 
"though,"  the  compounds  of  si  (ac  si,  etsi,  etc.,  also  tanqvam,  velut, 
sicat,  where  si  is  omitted)  introduce  conditional  clauses,  and  have  the 
same  construction ;  qvainvis,  ut  and  ne  take  tlie  subjunctive  of  doubtful 
command  (see  [321]);  licet  is  a  verb,  and  is  followed  by  a  final  sub- 
junctive with  ut  omitted  (see  [325]). 

[330]  Temporal  clauses  referring  to  past  time  usually  take  the  indica- 
tive, except  after  cum,  which  takes  the  subjunctive  of  the  secondary 
tenses ;  and,  in  later  writers,  after  anteqvam  and  priusqvam. 

Temporal  clauses,  however,  in  many  cases  express  some  other  modifica- 
tion of  the  thought  than  simple  time,  and  are  therefore  followed  by  the 
subjunctive.     Thus :  — 

dum,  dum  modo  take  the  subjunctive  when  they  mean  not  simply 
"as  long  as,"  but  "if,"  "provided."  oderint  dum  metuant,  let  them  hate 
as  long  as  they  fear  (i.e.,  if  they  fear). 

dum,  donee,  quoad  take  the  subjunctive  when  they  imply  purpose. 
manebo,  dum  veniat,  /  shall  ivaitfor  him  to  come  {until  he  comes). 

ante  qvam  and  prius  qvam  take  the  subjunctive  of  purpose,  the 
clause  expressing  the  act  whose  occurrence  is  to  be  prevented  or  antici- 
pated, or,  less  often,  a  simple  purpose,  or  something  expected  and  counted 
on.  sic  omne  [opus]  prius  est  perfectum  qvam  intellegeretur  ab 
Afranio  castra  muniri,  thus  the  lohole  work  was  finished  before  Afranius 
knew  that  the  camp  was  being  fortified  (i.e.,  the  work  ivas  done  secretly,  that 
Afranius  might  not  know  before  it  was  done);  anteqvam  pronunticnt, 
vocem  sensim  excitant,  they  excite  the  voice  gradually,  before  they  declaim 
(i.e.,  with  the  purpose  or  expectation  of  afterwards  declaiming). 

The  subjunctive  is  used  in  the  same  way  with  expressions  that  mean 
"sooner  than,"  "rather  than,"  —  e.g.,  potius  qvam,  citius  qvam,  libentius 
qvam,  —  though  the  idea  of  time  has  disappeared,  depugna,  potius 
qvam  servias,  fight  it  out  rather  than  be  a  slave  (i.e.,  in  order  not  to  be  a 
slave).    But  ut  is  sometimes  inserted  after  qvam  in  such  clauses. 


92  PART  IV.  — SYNTAX. 


331 
332 
333 


334 


(d)  In  future  conditions. 

(e)  In  general  conditions. 

(/)  In  clauses  dependent  on  a  subjunctive. 

Use  of  the  Non-Finite  Verb-Forms. 

The  infinitive  is  a  verbal  noun,  originally  in  the 
dative  case.  It  has  become,  however,  in  Latin,  an 
indeclinable  noun,  and  may  replace  any  case  in  con- 
struction, but  is  restricted  to  certain  uses. 


Temporal  clauses  may  take  the  subjunctive  also,  if  they  have  the  same 
force  as  conditional  clauses  which  would  take  the  subjunctive. 

[331]  A  future  condition  is  one,  the  truth  or  falsity  of  which  will 
appear,  if  at  all,  in  the  future.  The  future  (or  future  perfect)  indicative 
may  be  used  in  such,  or  the  present  (or  perfect)  subjunctive.  The  latter 
has  much  the  same  force  as  in  a  doubtful  statement,  and  leaves  the  hypo- 
thesis doubtful.  It  corresponds  to  the  English  "should."  si  veiiiat,  i/he 
should  come;  si  probus  sit,  i/he  {should prove  to)  he  honest. 

A  relative  or  a  temporal  clause  sometimes  has  the  same  force  as  a 
future  condition,  and  takes  the  same  construction. 

[332]  General  conditions  are  such  as  refer  to  all  time,  and  limit  state- 
ments of  general  truths,  memoria  minuitur,  nisi  earn  exerceas,  the 
memory  weakens,  unless  one  exercises  it.  The  indicative  is  more  common  in 
such,  except  when  the  subject  is  an  indefinite  person,  as  in  the  quotation. 

In  later  writers  the  secondary  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  are  sometimes 
used  in  conditional  clauses  (and  in  relative  or  temporal  clauses  implying  a 
condition)  to  express  a  repeated  action,  ubi  dixisset,  whenever  he  had 
said  .  .  . ;  qvocunqve  se  intulisset,  wherever  he  went  .  .  .,  etc. 

[333]  Clauses  dependent  on  a  subjunctive  are  attracted  into  the  sub- 
junctive if  they  contain  an  essential  part  of  the  thought,  or  give  a  modifica- 
tion of  the  verb  they  limit,  which  could  not  be  omitted  without  an  essential 
change  of  the  idea.  Restrictive  clauses,  for  example,  become  subjunctive 
if  dependent  on  a  subjunctive,  while  those  which  are  simply  explanatory 
or  parenthetical  remain  in  tlie  indicative,  non  pugnabo  quominus 
utrum  velis  cligas,  /  shall  not  oppose  your  taking  ivhich  you  will.  Here  the 
speaker  gives  liis  opponent  the  privilege  of  taking  either  of  two  alterna- 
tives;  (vis  would  imply  that  the  opponent  had  in  some  way  shown  liis 


USE   OF   THE   NON-FINITE   VERB-FORMS. 


The  Infinitive  is  used  — 
(«)  As  an  indirect  object. 
(5)   To  express  purpose. 
(<?)   As  subject  of  a  verb, 
(t?)  As  object  of  a  verb. 


335 
336 
337 
338 


choice,  and  that  the  speaker  did  not  object  to  his  taking  that  one,  though 
he  might  not  consent  to  his  taking  the  other).  The  clause  utrum  velis  is 
essential  to  the  thought,  because  without  it  the  speaker  simply  allows  the 
taking  of  one  alternative ;  with  it,  he  allows  the  taking  of  either  one. 

In  many  cases,  however,  the  subjunctive  seems  to  be  simply  potential. 
See  31G.  Tims,  utrum  velis  above,  may  be  translated  "  whichever  you  may 
wish.'*  Whether  the  speaker  shall  use  the  indicative  or  tlio  subjunctive  in 
such  clauses  is  to  a  great  extent  a  matter  of  choice,  as  he  may  prefer  to 
make  the  statement  more  or  less  positive  in  form. 

[335]  The  infinitive  of  indirect  object  (also  called  complementary  infini- 
tive) follows  intransitive  verbs  which  require  a  second  action  of  the  same 
subject  to  make  their  sense  complete,  and  the  passive  voice  of  verbs  of 
saying  and  thinling,  when  they  have  a  personal  subject,  possum  videre, 
/  can  see  (lit.,  I  am  powerful  for  seeing) ;  Caesar  dicitur  advenlsse, 
Ccesar  is  said  to  have  arrived.  In  some  cases  it  is  difficult  to  draw  the  line 
between  the  infinitive  of  indirect  object  and  that  of  direct  object.  If  the 
verb  is  transitive,  the  infinitive  after  it  may  be  called  direct  object,  but 
unless  it  takes  a  direct  object  in  other  constructions,  the  infinitive  should 
be  called  indirect  object.  The  English  translation  is  no  guide  in  such  a 
case,  as  many  verbs  are  transitive  in  English,  while  verbs  of  the  same 
meaning  are  intransitive  in  Latin. 

[336]  This  use  is  rare  and  poetical.  It  corresponds  to  the  dative  of 
purpose. 

[337]  The  infinitive  of  subject  or  object  is  used  as  in  English,  but  is 
far  more  common,  being  especially  frequent  with  verbs  of  saying  or  thinl- 
ing. It  is  thus  used  either  with  or  without  an  expressed  subject,  errare 
est  humanum,  to  err  is  human ;  biennium  sibi  satis  esse  duxerunt, 
they  thought  that  two  years  was  enough  for  them.  For  this  infinitive  the  Eng- 
lish often  uses  a  subject  or  object  clause  with  "that"  as  in  the  example 
given. 

[338]  When  the  subject  of  an  object  infinitive  is  the  same  as  that  of 
the  verb  that  governs  it,  this  subject  (se)  is  sometimes  omitted,     quae 


94  PART  IV.  — SYNTAX. 


339 

(e)   As  an  appositive  or  predicate  noun. 

340 

(/)  To  limit  nouns  or  adjectives  as  genitive,  accusa- 

tive or  ablative. 

341 

(^)  In  exclamatory  phrases. 

342 

(K)  In  vivid  narration  as  a  substitute  for  the  in- 

dicative. 

iniperarentur,  facere  dixerunt,  thetj  said  that  they  were  doing  what  was 
ordered.  (But  se  facere  is  more  common.)  In  such  cases,  the  predicate 
noun  or  adjective  is  usually  attracted  into  the  nominative.     See  [255]. 

[339]  id.  niintiatum  est  eos  conari,  this  news  was  brought,  {namely) 
that  they  were  trying  ....  An  infinitive  is  frequent  in  apposition  with  hoc, 
id,  illiid,  etc.,  used  as  subject  or  object,  where  the  infinitive  itself  might 
stand  as  subject  or  object.  (Compare,  in  English,  "it  is  human  to  err," 
with  "to  err  is  human.")  As  a  predicate-noun,  the  infinitive  has  nothing 
peculiar,     vivere  est  cogitare,  living  is  thinking. 

[340]  Rare  and  chiefly  poetic,  teinpus  est  cogitare,  it  is  time  to 
think;  dignus  amari,  ivorthy  to  be  loved ;  parati  certare,  ready  to  Jight ; 
certiis  ire,  resolved  to  go.  The  gerund  or  a  derivative  noun  is  generally 
used  in  such  cases;  dignus  aniore,  parati  ad  eertandiim,  certiis 
eundi.  In  a  few  cases,  it  stands  with  a  participle  as  ablative  absolute, 
limiting  the  whole  statement.     See  [307]. 

Many  nouns  and  adjectives  with  the  verb  "be"  have  the  force  of  verbs 
of  saying  or  thinking,  and  take  an  infinitive  which  has  the  same  force  as 
an  object  infinitive.  Thus,  auctor  sum,  I  assert ;  sum  dolore  aff'ectus, 
7  am  sorry,  etc.  The  infinitive  after  such  seems  to  be  object  of  the  verbal 
notion  implied,  not  depending  directly  on  the  noun  or  adjective,  but  gov- 
erned by  the  verbal  force  of  the  phrase.  It  may  be  likened  to  the  use  of 
a  direct  object  of  a  noun  or  adjective.     See  [262]. 

[341]  The  exclamatory  infinitive  may  be  compared  with  the  nomina- 
tive and  accusative  in  exclamations.  See  259  and  264.  It  is  sometimes 
introduced  by  the  interrogative  particle  -ne.  hoc  iiou  videre !  not  to  see 
this  !     xnene  desistere !  that  I  should  cease  ! 

[342]  Called  historical  infinitive.  Occasionally  found  in  rapid  narra- 
tion as  a  substitute  for  the  present  or  imperfect  indicative,  and  takes  its 
subject  in  the  nominative.  Caesar  frumentum  flagitare  (=  flagitabat), 
C(Bsar  kept  demanding  the  corn. 


USE   OF   THE   NON-FINITE   VERB-FORMS.  95 


The  Participles  are  verbal  adjectives,  like  the 
English  participles.     They  are  used  — 

(a)  As  simple  adjectives,  to  limit  nouns. 

(J)  As  predicate  adjectives  with  sum,  to  make  the 
periphrastic  conjugations. 

(c)   With  the  force  of  clauses. 

The  passive  participles,  when  used  as  simple  adjec- 
tives to  limit  nouns,  often  express  a  complex  idea 


343 

344 
345 

346 
347 


[344J  furens  regina,  the  raging  queen ;  iirbs  mature  peritura,  a  city 
destined  soon  to  fall ;  fessl'milites,  wearied  soldiers;  hostis  timcndus,  a 
fearful  foe.  This  use  is  most  common  with  the  present  active  and  perfect 
passive  participles.  Some  participles  become  adjectives  altogether  in 
force  and  construction- 

The  passive  participles,  in  particular  the  present  passive,  when  used  as 
adjectives  often  hq,ve  the  force  of  the  English  verbal  adjectives  in  -able  ; 
e.g.,  acceptus,  acceptable ;  forma  expetenda,  desirable ;  sacra  non 
adeunda,  unapproachable;  vix  uumeranda,  a/mos^  innumerable. 

[345]  This  use  is  rare  with  the  present  active  participle  (where  it  makes 
a  form  equivalent  to  the  present  active  of  the  verb;  amans  est  =  amat). 

[346]  This  use  is  very  common  with  the  present  active  and  perfect 
passive  participles,  especially  in  the  construction  of  the  ablative  absolute, 
and  the  participle  is  predicate  of  the  equivalent  clause ;  the  word  it  limits, 
subject.  The  participle  thus  used  may  have  the  force  of  a  relative  clause, 
modifying  only  the  word  it  limits,  but  more  frequently  it  modifies  the 
whole  statement  and  is  equivalent  to  a  temporal,  causal,  concessive,  con- 
ditional, or  (rarely)  final  clause;  sometimes  to  an  independent  clause. 
his  rebus  nuueiatis,  when  this  teas  reported ;  progressus  in  Nitiobriges, 
after  he  had  advanced  .  .  .;  non  audent,  absente  imperatore,  egredi, 
they  dare  not  go  out,  because  the  general  is  away ;  Cadurcus,  in  Rutenos 
missus,  Cadurcus,  who  had  been  sent  .  .  .;  reluctante  natura,  if  nature 
opposes;  ut  hos  transductos  necaret,  fo  carry  them  over  and  kill  them. 
The  present  passive  participle  is  rarely  so  used,  however,  being  almost 
entirely  restricted  to  uses  (a)  and  {b);  and  the  future  active  participle  is 
not  common  in  this  use,  though  it  is  sometimes .  found  with  the  force  of  a 
final  clause,  especially  in  later  writers. 

[347]  ab  urbe  condita,  from  the  founding  of  the  city ;  vos  vitam 
ereptam  negligetis  ?   will  you  disregard  the  taking  of  life  ?     So  always  in 


PART   IV.  — SYNTAX. 


348 


which  is  best  rendered  into  English  by  a  verbal  or 
abstract  noun  containing  the  meaning  of  the  parti- 
ciple, and  an  object  or  limiting  phrase  containing  the 
meaning  of  the  noun. 

The  Gerund  is  a  verbal  noun  found  in  the  oblique 
cases  of  the  singular.  It  is  declmed  and  governed  as 
a  noun,  but  shows  its  verbal  force  in  the  fact  that  it 
is  limited  by  adverbs,  and  may  govern  an  object. 


the  gerundive  construction.  (See  [340].)  consilia  urbis  delendae, />/a«s 
for  destroying  the  city ;  Platouis  studiosus  audiendi,  desirous  of  hearing 
Plato.  So  ejecti  reges,  the  expulsion  of  the  kings;  natiis  Augustus,  ?//e 
birth  of  Augustus,  etc.  In  notum  furens  quid  femina  possit,  the  knowl- 
edge of  what  a  mad  looman  can  do,  the  participle  limits  a  clause. 

[348]  The  name  "  nominative  of  the  gerund  "  is  often  given  to  a  con- 
struction, which  most  grammarians  regard  as  an  impersonal  use  of  the 
passive  periplirastic  conjugation;  e.g.,  inihi  dormiendum  est,  /  must 
sleep.  This  construction  resembles  the  passive  periphrastic  conjugation  in 
conveying  tlie  notion  of  dut}'  or  propriety,  hut  is  sometimes  like  the 
gerund  in  being  active  and  taking  an  object ;  e.g.,  via  qvani  nobis  ingre- 
diendum  est,  the  road  we  must  go;  moncndum  te  est  inihi,  /  must  team 
you.  There  seems  to  be  no  doubt  that  the  gerund  is  a  specialized  use  of 
the  neuter  of  the  present  passive  participle,  at  a  period  when  the  meaning 
and  force  of  the  form  was  not  so  definite  as  later.  The  gerund  is  often 
passive  in  force,  —  e.g.,  in  res  difflcilis  ad  cxplicandum,  a  matter  hard 
to  he  explained,  —  and  the  passive  participle  is  sometimes  active,  e.g., 
placenda  dos  est,  the  dower  must  please.  The  "  nominative  of  the  gerund  " 
seems  to  lie  between  the  two. 

The  gerund  in  the  genitive  case,  in  a  few  instances,  becomes  so  fully  a 
noun  that  it  takes  an  objective  genitive  instead  of  an  object  accusative, 
and  takes  the  possessive  pronoun  adjective  modifiers  mel,  tui,  sui,  nostri, 
vestri,  instead  of  an  object ;  e.g.,  exeniplorum  eligendi  potestas,  a 
chance  to  select  examples ;  vestri  adhortandi  causa,  for  the  sake  of  your 
encouragement  (i.e.,  of  encouraging  you).  (In  cases  like  this,  however,  the 
genitives  mei,  vestri,  etc.,  may  be  considered  objective  genitives  like 
exemplorum  above.) 

The  gerund  is  limited  in  its  use  as  follows :  — 

In  the  genitive  it  may  be  a  possessive,  an  appositivc,  or  an  objective 
genitive.     In  the  dative  it  may  be  an  indirect  object,  or  may  limit  adjec- 


USE    OF   THE   XON-FINITE   VERB-FORMS.  97 


The  gerund  of  transitive  verbs  is  rare,  and  its  place 
is  usually  supplied  by  the  gerundive.  This  consists 
of  a  noun  and  the  present  passive  participle  in  agree- 
ment with  it  (the  two  words  expressing  the  complex 
idea  spoken  of  in  34T). 

The  Supine  is  a  verbal  noun,  found  only  in  the 
accusative  and  ablative  singular. 

The  accusative  of  the  supine  is  used  with  verbs  of 
motion  to  express  purpose. 


349 


350 
351 


tives.  In  the  accusative  it  may  follow  a  few  prepositions  (ad  most  often). 
In  the  ablative  it  may  denote  means  or  specification,  rarely  separation, 
manner  or  circumstance,  and  may  also  follow  prepositions  (in  most  often). 

[349]  The  name  gerundive  is  often  used  of  the  participle  only,  and  the 
noun  and  participle  taken  together  are  then  called  the  "  gerundive  con- 
struction.'' 

The  gerundive  is  less  restricted  in  its  use  than  the  gerund.  Besides  the 
uses  of  the  gerund  it  is  used  in  the  genitive  (with  causa  omitted?)  to 
express  purpose ;  in  the  dative  to  express  purpose,  see  [272] ;  in  the  accusa- 
tive as  direct  object ;  in  the  ablative  to  express  manner  or  the  standard  of 
comparison.   A  few  illustrations  of  both  gerund  and  gerundive  are  added :  — 

Genitive,  cupidus  te  videndi,  desirous  of  seeing  you ;  finem  facit 
dicendi,  he  makes  an  end  of  speaking ;  siii  muniendi  non  Galliae  im- 
pugnandae  causa,  for  the  sake  of  defending  himself,  not  of  attacking  Gaul. 

Dative,  scribendo  dat  operam,  he  gives  attention  to  writing  ;  rubeiis 
ferrum  non  est  habile  tundendo,  not  good  for  forging.  So  in  the  phrase 
non  esse  solvendo,  to  be  unable  to  pag,  and  the  like. 

Accusative,  non  vacuus  sum  ad  narrandum,  /  have  no  leisure  for 
story-telling ;  ad  eum  oppugnandum,  to  attack  him  ;  signum  collocan- 
dum  consules  locaverunt,  the  consuls  let  out  the  {job  of)  setting  up  the 
statue ;  aedem  habuit  tuendam,  he  had  the  care  of  the  temple. 

Ablative,  in  dando  munificus,  free  in  giving ;  alitur  vitium  te- 
gendo,  a  vice  is  nourished  by  hiding  it;  de  contemnenda  niorte,  concerning 
contempt  for  death;  de  liberis  educandis,  of  the  training  of  children.  So, 
often  in  the  titles  of  philosophical  treatises. 

[351]  venit  auxilium  postulatum,  he  came  to  ask  help.  This  is 
strictly  an  accusative  of  limit.     (See  265.) 

With  ire,  "go"  the  accusative  of  the  supine  make  a  construction  nearly 
the  same  in  force  as  the  future  tense ;  e.g.,  imusne  sessum?  {are  we  going 


PAET  IV.  —  SYNTAX. 


352 


The  ablative  of  the  supine  is  used  as  an  ablative 
of  specification.     (See  300.) 


to  sit?)  shall  we  take  a  seat?  By  putting  the  infinitive  ire  in  the  passive, 
a  form  is  obtained  to  supply  the  lacking  future  infinitive  passive;  e.g., 
putat  se  visum  iri,  he  thinks  he  will  be  seen. 

[352]  horribile  visu  I  fearful  to  see  !  mirabile  dictu !  strange  to  tell ! 
In  some  of  its  uses  the  ablative  of  the  supine  seems  to  approach  the 
meaning  of  a  dative,  and  may  be  so  called  if  one  prefers.  The  form  may 
be  in  either  pase. 

With  opus  the  ablative  of  the  supine  seems  to  come  under  the  head  of 
means  rather  than  specification.    See  [297]. 


PART    V. 
THE  LAWS   OF  VEESE  IN  LATIN. 


Quantity. 

Latin  versification  is  based  on  a  regular  succession 
of  long  and  short  syllables.  Quantity  is  therefore 
usually  treated  in  connection  with  versification. 

General  rules  of  quantity  are  such  as  apply  to  all 
syllables.     (They  have  been  given,  14-18.) 

Special  rules  of  quantity  are  such  as  apply  only  to 
particular  syllables.  In  Latin  we  have  special  rules 
of  quantity  for  final  vowels  of  stems  and  for  suffix- 
vowels. 

The  original  quantity  of  final  vowels  of  stems  and 
of  suffix-vowels  has  been  changed  in  many  instances 
by  certain  tendencies  affecting  final  syllables;  viz. :  — 


353 

354 
355 

356 


[353]  The  system  of  versification  described  here  was  borrowed  with 
slight  modifications  from  the  Greek  poets,  and  was  in  use  during  and  after 
the  classical  period.  An  older  system,  called  Saturnian,  is  found  in  frag- 
ments of  the  older  Latin,  in  epitaphs,  etc.,  but  is  not  found  in  literature. 

[354]  The  rules  for  syllables,  long  or  short  by  position,  do  not  always 
apply  in  the  comedies ;  syllables  are  treated  as  short  in  many  cases,  though 
their  vowels  are  followed  by  two  consonants.  This  is  especially  the  case 
before  final  -s,  which  had  but  a  slight  sound  in  old  Latin. 

In  older  Latin  also,  many  of  the  special  rules  of  quantity  whicli  follow 
are  not  applicable,  as  the  tendencies  spoken  of  had  not  taken  effect  so 
fully  as  later.  In  most  cases  the  difference  consists  in  the  use  of  a  vowel 
as  long  which  is  shortened  in  the  later  language.  In  a  few  cases  the  later 
poets  have  followed  the  older  quantity,  in  imitation  of  the  older  writers. 

[356]  These  are  called  tendencies,  and  not  rules,  because  tlicy  do  not 
act  systematically  but  affect  certain  words  and  leave  others  untouched. 


100  PART  v.  — THE  LAWS  OF  VERSE  IX  LATIN. 


357 
358 

359 
360 

361 
362 

363 


1.  A  tendency  to  shorten  final  open  vowels. 

2.  A  tendency  to  shorten  vowels  before  final  -m,  -r 

and  -t. 

3.  A  tendency  to  lengthen  final  close  vowels. 

4.  A   tendency   to   lengthen   open   vowels   before 

final  -s. 

5.  A  tendency  to  lengthen  accented  monosyllables. 

6.  A  tendency  to  lengthen  the  vowel  of  a  final  syl- 

lable if  an  inflectional  letter  has  been  dropped. 
These  tendencies  seem  to  be  allowed  freer  play,  or 
to  be  restricted  in  their  effect,  when  for  metrical  con- 
venience it  is  desirable  to  use  a  long  syllable  or  a 
short  one  instead  of  the  reverse. 


It  is  probable  that  some  old  law  of  accent  is  at  the  bottom  of  most  of 
them.  Their  influence  is  more  often  negative  than  positive,  i.e.,  they  act 
as  a  restraint  on  certain  syllables  that  would  otherwise  be  more  liable  to 
change. 

[360]  When  an  open  vowel  is  brought  before  final  -s  by  the  loss  of  t 
or  d,  the  tendency  to  lengthen  seldom  shows  itself. 

[361]  This  tendency  would  explain  das,  da,  vas,  pes,  grus,  sfis,  vis 
(from  volo),  vis  (noun),  various  particles,  and  perhaps  sal,  sol,  lar,  par, 
mas,  though  these  fall  also  under  No.  0.  But  it  is  diflScult  to  see  why  the 
neuters,  m61,  fgl,  Ss,  etc.,  should  be  left  short,  or  why  certain  unaccented 
prepositions  and  conjunctions  should  be  made  long;  e.g.,  why  the  preposi- 
tion ftb  should  be  short  while  the  same  preposition  a  should  be  long.  It  is 
clear  that  accent  does  not  explain  the  difference ;  and  we  may  regard  this 
tendency  as  doubtful,  or  greatly  restricted. 

[362]  The  inflectional  letters  most  often  lost  are  the  nominative  singu- 
lar suflix  -s  of  masculine  and  feminine  semivowel-stems,  and  the  suflix  -ni 
of  the  first  singular  active  of  verbs.  The  loss  of  a  stem-letter  does  not 
seem  to  affect  the  preceding  vowel,  vis  (—  vil-s)  seems  to  come  under 
No.  5. 

[363]  Thus  ftbles,  ftrles,  pftrles,  perhaps  to  prevent  the  concurrence 
of  so  many  short  syllables,  are  brought  under  the  influence  of  No.  4, 
though  usually  such  words  remain  unaffected.     See   [300J.    A  final  syl- 


QUANTITY.        ^  101 


The  special  rules  for  quantity  are  the  following:  — 

I.  In  open  vowel  noun-  and  adjective-stems 
The  vowel  after  the  theme  is  short  in  the  nom., 
ace.  and  voc.  sg. ;  long  elsewhere, 

Except  -es  in  the  nom.  sg.  of  e-stems.  (4) 

Except  -a  in  the  nom.  and  ace.  pi.  of  neuter 

o-stems.  (1) 

II.  In  close  vowel  noun-  and  adjective-stems 

The  vowel  after  the  theme  is  short  in  the  nom.  and 

ace.  sg.,  and  in  the  dat.  and  abl.  pi. ;  long  elsewhere, 

Except  -es  in  the  nom.  sg.  of  i-stems.  (4) 

Except  -u  in  the  nom.  and  ace.  sg.  of  neuter 

u-stems.  (3) 

III.  The  vowels  of  suffixes  of  nouns  and  adjectives, 
when  not  contracted  with  the  stem-vowel,  are  short, 
Except  -i  final  in  the  gen.  and  dat.  sg.  (3) 

Except  -es  in  the  nom.  and  ace.  pi.  (4) 

VI.  The  pronouns  in  general  follow  the  rules  of 
quantity  for  noun-  and  adjective-stems  of  like  form. 


364 
365 

366 
367 

368 

369 
370 

371 

372 
373 

374 


lable  may  be  subject  to  more  than  one  tendency,  acting  in  the  same  or 
in  contrary  directions ;  in  the  latter  case  a  common  syllable  is  sometimes 
the  result.  For  example,  o,  in  the  present  indicative  active  first  singular 
of  the  verb,  comes  under  6  and  1. 

[364]  The  numbers  following  the  exceptions  refer  to  the  tendencies 
that  explain  them. 

[365]  o  is  short  in  duo ;  sometimes  in  ambo.  These  rules,  I.  and  II., 
are  rules  for  final  stem- vowels,  but  the  expression  "vowel  after  the 
theme "  is  used,  because  the  stem-vowel  often  disappears  by  contraction 
with  the  vowel  of  the  suflix. 

[368]    I-stems,  when  they  lose  i  and  become  consonant-stems,  of  course 
come  under  rule  III. 
For  grus,  sus  and  vis,  see  [361].    Bos  is  contracted. 

[374]    O  of  ego  is  short;  qvi  (nom.)  is  long.     (5)= 


102  PART  v.  — THE  LAWS  OF  VERSE  IN  LATIN. 


In  the  forms  unlike  those  of  nouns  and  adjectives,  it 
should  be  noticed  that  we  find  the  vowel  after  the 
theme  long  in 

The  nom,  neuter  forms  in  -c,  (6) 

The  personal  pronouns,  except  the  dat.  sg.; 
and  common  in 

The  gen.  sg.  ending  -lus. 
We  find  the  suffix  vowel 

Common  in  the  dat.  sg.,  -bi,  -hi.  (3) 

Long  in  the  dat.  and  abl.  pi.,  -bis. 

V.  In  the  nominative  singular  of  consonant-stems 
the  quantity  of  the  last  syllable  of  the  stem  is  re- 
tained, except  in 

Nominatives  in  -o  from  stems  in  -on  and  -in.    (1,  6) 
Nominatives  in  -or  from  stems  in  or.  (2) 

arbos,  Ceres,  pubes  ;  abies,  aries,  paries,  pes.    (4) 
sal,  lar,  par ;  mas.  (5  or  6) 

VI.  In  the  verb  the  final  vowel  of  vowel-stems  is 
long 

Except  before  final  -m  or  -t.  (2) 

VII.  In  the  mood-and-tense  signs  the  initial  vowel 
before  -r  is  short  when  unabsorbed ;  the  other  vowels 
are  long 

Except  before  final  -m,  -r  and  -t.  (2) 


[378j  The  same  suffix  bi  is  found  in  ibi  and  ubi,  old  case-forms  of  is 
and  qvi. 

[385]  The  length  of  the  final  vowel  of  verb-stems  is  due  to  tlie  absorp- 
tion of  the  initial  vowel  of  the  sign  or  suffix.  It  is  short,  therefore,  in 
those  verb-forms  that  omit  this  vowel ;  viz.,  the  verb  do,  throughout  [ex- 
cept das,  da  (o)J  and  in  the  subjunctive  forem,  etc.,  infinitive  fdre,  and 
the  twelve  non-finite  stem-forms  given  in  [209]. 

In  the  imperative  active  second  singular,  the  stem-vowel  e  is  occasion- 
ally shortened  in  a  few  forms  that  are  often  used  interjectionallj ;  e.g., 
vidS,  see  I  tacS,  hush  !  cav6,  beware  ! 


VERSIFICATION.  103 


VIII.  The  vowels  of  verb-suffixes  are  short 

Except  final  -i.  (3) 

Except  -o  of  the  iiicL,  when  miabsorbed.  (1,  5) 
Except  -o  in  the  imper.  endings  -ito,  -itote,  -iiiito. 
Except  -u  in  the  fut.  act.  part,  ending  -turo. 

IX.  The  rednplication-prefix  is  short. 

X.  Uninflected  monosyllables  are  long,  if  they  end 
in  a  vowel ;  short,  if  they  end  in  a  consonant. 

XI.   In   nninflected   polysyllables   the    tendencies 
mentioned  above  have  fuller  effect,  and  become  rules. 
Except  final  -a. 

Versification. 

Syllables,  in  Latin  verse,  are  either  long  or  short, 
a  long  syllable  being  in  most  cases  the  equivalent  of 
two  short  ones. 


389 
390 
391 
392 
393 

394 
395 

396 
397 

398 


[387]  E  is  usually  long  in  the  perfect  active  ending  -erunt  (rarely 
-6runt) ;  1  is  short  in  the  perfect  active  ending  -Iinus.  The  occasional 
shortening  of  i  in  the  perfect  subjunctive  sign  is  due  to  confusion  with  the 
future  perfect  indicative.     See  [175]. 

[389]    For  i  in  the  future  perfect  active  suffixes,  see  [179]. 

[390]  The  final  i  of  -Imlni  is  properly  a  nominative  plural  ending  of 
an  old  participial  form,  and  therefore  long  by  rule  III. 

[395]  Cras  and  en  are  long;  also  non  (contracted).  Cur,  hie,  hue, 
qvin,  sic,  sin,  contain  old  case-forms. 

Qve,  ne,  v6,  e6,  pt6,  are  always  attached  to  other  words,  and  are 
therefore  not  monosyllabic  in  their  use.  Rg-  is  usually  short  (standing 
for  an  older  form  red-). 

[396]  Final  e  and  o  in  adverbs  from  o-stems  are  only  apparent  excep- 
tions ;  such  adverbs  are  old  case-forms.  But  a  few  of  these  are  shortened 
(by  1),  giving  beng,  mal6,  inferng,  supernS;  cito,  niodo,  ilico,  pro- 
fecto ;  rarely  other  words,     ohe  should,  perhaps,  be  two  words. 

[397]  Final  a  is  shortened  in  ejS,  ita,  putS,  quia  (an  old  accusative 
plural).    Note  as  an  exception  also  penSs. 


104 


PART  v.  — THE  LAWS  OF  VERSE  IN  LATIN. 


399 

400 

401 
402 
403 
404 
405 


A  foot  is  a  combination  of  two  or  more  syllables, 

used  as  the  element  of  a  verse. 

The   fundamental    feet    in   Latin   verse   are    the 

following :  — 

The  Dactyl     (one  long^  ttvo  shorty,  -i-  w  w 
The  Anapest  (two  short,  one  long'),  ^  w  -^ 
The  Trochee  (one  long,  07ie  short),  -l  w 
The  Iambus    (one  short,  one  long),  w  jl. 
By  substituting  a  long  syllable  for  the  two  short 

ones  in  the  dactyl  or  anapest  we  get  a  spondee, ; 

and  by  resolving  the  long  syllable  of  the  trochee  or 

iambus  into  two  short  ones,  we  get  a  tribrach,  www. 

These  are  not  used  as  the  fundamental  foot  of  a 

verse,  but   are   often   substituted  for   it,  and   may 

therefore  be  called  "substitute"  feet. 


[401]  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  dactyl  and  anapest,  being  equivalent 
to  four  short  syllables,  correspond  to  quadruple  time  in  music,  while  the 
trochee  and  iambus  correspond  in  like  manner  to  triple  time.  They  may 
be  represented  in  musical  notation  as  follows :  — 


Dactyl. 


Anapest. 


Spondee. 


^     ^^    ^^ 


Trochee 


Iambus 


Tribrach. 


0n^    ^^    ^PP 


The  accent  given  above  shows  the  metrical  stress.  Substitute  feet  take 
the  metrical  accent  of  the  feet  they  replace,  and  when  a  long  syllable  is 
resolved  into  two  short  ones,  the  metrical  stress  falls  on  the  first  of  the 
two  short. 

In   lyric  and  dramatic  writers  are  found  other  feet  also ;    viz. :    the 

Pyrrhic,  ^j  w  ;  the  Bacchius,  w ;  the  Crctic, w •     By  combining 

the  fundamental  feet  and  their  substitutes  are  formed  various  com- 
pound feet ;  e.g.,  Diiambus,  w w ',  Bitrochee, w w  ;  Dispondee, 


;  Choriambus, w  w  __ ;  Greater  Ionic, 

Ionic,  \^  \y ;  etc. 


Lesser 


VERSIFICATION  105 


The  trochee  and  iambus  are  not  used  singly  to 
form  verses,  but  in  pairs,  called  dipodies. 

A  verse  is  a  set  of  feet  or  dipodies,  recurring 
regularly,  and  forming  a  "line"  of  poetry. 

Verses  are  named  from  their  fundamental  foot,  and 
from  the  number  of  feet  or  dipodies  they  contain. 

The  most  common  kinds  of  verse  are  the  follow- 
ing :  — 

(a)  Dactjdic  Hexameter,  —  six  dactyls  or  equiva- 
lent spondees.     Its  scale  is 

v^w      \y  \y     Kj  KJ      WW      WW      )^ 

( ) 

The  spondee  is  regular  in  tlie  sixth  foot,  but  rare 
in  the  fifth. 

(5)  Dactylic  Pentameter, — two  parts,  each  of  two 
dactyls  and  a  half.     Its  scale  is 

WW WW        I         WW       WW        }i:^ 

The  spondee  is  allowed  in  the  first  part,  not  in  the 
second. 


406 
407 
408 
409 
410 

411 
412 

413 


[408]   Dactylic,  trochaic,  iambic,  etc.,  from  the  kind  of  foot ;  monometer, 
dimeter,  trimeter,  etc.,  from  the  number  of  feet  or  dipodies. 

[410]    The  caesura  (see  420)  usually  falls  in  the  third  foot;  less  often 
in  the  fourth,  or  second. 

[411]    A  trochee  often  replaces  the  final  spondee.     See  419. 

[412]  The  dactylic  pentameter  is  tlie  same  as  the  hexameter,  with  the 
loss  of  the  second  half  of  the  third  and  sixth  feet.  This  loss  is  analogous 
to  a  rest  in  music.  The  pentameter  is  not  used  alone,  but  alternately  with 
the  hexameter  to  form  the  "  elegiac  couplet."  The  following  verses  give 
illustrations  of  this  use,  and  show  the  character  of  each  kind  of  verse :  — 
ille  Sgo  qvi  fiiSrim,  ||  tSn6rorum  lusor  amorum, 

qvem  16gis,  ut  noris,  ||  accipe  postfiritas. 

Sulmo  mihi  patria  est,  ||  gSlidis  uberrimus  imdis, 

milia  qvi  novies  |]  distat  ab  urbS  dSc6m. 


106  PART  v.  — THE  LAWS  OF  VEESE  IN  LATIN. 


414 
415 

416 

417 
418 

419 


Iambic  and  trochaic  verses  are  composed  of  di- 
podies,  and  verses  of  various  length  occur,  either 
complete  or  catalectic  (z.e.,  lacking  the  last  syllable). 

The  first  foot  of  any  iambic  dipody,  and  the  second 
foot  of  any  trochaic  dipody  may  be  replaced  by  a 
spondee,  or,  rarely,  by  the  equivalent  of  an  iambus, 
trochee  or  spondee. 

In  comedy  the  spondee,  and  the  equivalents  of  the 
spondee,  the  trochee,  or  the  iambus  may  stand  in  any 
foot  except  the  last. 

In  order  to  understand  the  structure  of  Latin 
verse,  the  following  facts  of  usage  must  be  noted ;  — 

(a)  A  final  vowel,  or  final  -in  with  the  foregoing 
vowel,  is  regularly  dropped  when  the  next  word 
begins  with  a  vowel  or  h. 

(5)  The  last  syllable  of  a  verse  may  be  either  long 
or  short  at  the  option  of  the  writer. 


edittis  hinc  Cgo  sum,  ||  nee  non  ut  tempord,  noris, 

cum  ceeidit  fato  ||  consul  titerqvC  pari: 
81  qv!d  Id  est,  usqve  a  proavis  ||  vdtfts  ordlnts  heres, 
non  modo  fortunae  ||  mun6r6  factfis  6qu6s. 
(For  the  loss  of  a  final  vowel  in  verse  before  an  initial  vowel,  see  418.) 

[414]  The  most  common  iambic  verse  is  the  trimeter,  consisting  of 
three  dipodies;  the  most  common  trochaic  verse  is  the  tetrameter  cata- 
lectic; four  dipodies,  but  lacking  the  last  syllable.  The  caesura  of  the 
former  occurs  in  the  second  dipody,  usually  in  the  first  foot ;  the  latter  is 
divided  uniformly  by  a  diaeresis  after  the  second  dipody. 

[416]  Various  kinds  of  verses,  besides  those  mentioned  here,  are  found 
in  the  lyric  poets,  and  the  editions  of  their  writings  generally  contain 
schedules  of  the  metres  used.  It  has  not  seemed  necessary,  therefore,  to 
insert  any  description  of  them  here. 

[418]  Called  elision.   It  occurs  very  rarely  at  the  end  of  a  verse.   Rarely, 
also,  a  vowel  remains  unelided  within  a  verse.    Such  cases  are  called  hiatus. 
[419]   I.e.,  a  short  syllable  may  be  used  though  the  meter  calls  for  a 
long  one,  and  vice  versa. 


VERSIFICATION.  107 


(c)  Long  verses  are  regularly  divided  into  two 
nearly  equal  parts  by  a  metrical  pause,  which  usually 
coincides  with  a  pause  in  the  sense.  This  pause  is 
called  ccesura  when  it  occurs  within  a  foot,  and 
diceresis  when  it  falls  between  feet. 

(6?)  Metrical  irregularities  occur  at  times,  as  in 
English  poetry.  A  short  syllable  is  found  now  and 
then  where  the  metre  calls  for  a  long  one,  or  a  long 
one  where  the  metre  requires  a  short  one.  Two 
syllables  are  sometimes  run  into  one.  Such  irregu- 
larities are  very  rare  in  good  poets. 


420 


421 


[420]  A  ccesura  occurs  whenever  a  foot  is  divided  between  two  words, 
but  the  name  is  usually  given  only  to  the  chief  ccesura  as  here.  The 
dactylic  pentameter  gives  a  good  illustration  of  diaeresis. 


SUPPLEMENT    TO    SYNTAX. 


[A  few  peculiarities  of  usage,  belonging  rather  to  the  lexicon,  or  to  a  manual 
of  Latin  composition,  than  to  a  grammar,  are  added  here  for  convenience  of 
reference.'] 


^22 
423 

424 

425 


426 
427 
428 
429 


430 
431 


A.    Negative  Particles. 

The  usual  negative  is  non. 

An  older  negative  is  baud.     It  survives  in  a  few  phrases. 

Ne  is  used  in  commands  and  in  final  sentences,  also  in 
ne  .  .  .  quidem,  not  even. 

ngqvg  (or  nee)  is  equivalent  to  et  non ;  nev6  (or  neu)  to 
et  ne.  I 

B.    Interrogative  Particles. 

Questions  answered  by  yes  or  no  are  not  indicated,  as  in 
English,  by  the  order  of  the  words,  but  by  the  use  of  the  inter- 
rogative particles  -ng  and  num. 

-n6  appended  to  the  prominent  word  of  the  sentence  shows 
that  it  is  a  question,  but  gives  no  indication  what  answer  is 
expected. 

The  insertion  of  a  negative  word  shows,  as  in  English,  that 
the  answer  yes  is  expected.  In  such  cases  -nS  is  appended  to 
the  negative  as  the  prominent  word. 

num  shows  that  the  answer  no  is  expected. 

aderasne  ?  were  you  present  ?     dizitne  ?  did  he  speak  f 

nonne  aderas  ?  were  you  not  present  ?  nunqvamne  dicet  ? 
will  he  never  speak  ? 

num  aderas  ?  you  were  not  present^  were  you? 

The  interrogative  particle  is  sometimes  omitted. 

Questions  are  usually  answered  by  repeating  some  of  the 
words  of  the  question,  but  sometimes  non  is  used  for  no,  and 
etdam,  vero,  or  some  other  adverb  of  emphasis,  for  yes. 


USE   OF  THE   PRONOUNS.  109 

Alternative  or  double  questions  generally  take  titrum  or  -ne 
in  the  first  member,  and  an  in  the  second. 

utrum  aderas  an  aberas?  were  you  present  or  absent  f 

If  the  second  member  is  simply  a  negative,  " or  not"  it  is  ex- 
pressed by  an  non  or  necne. 

utrum  aderas  hecne  ?  icere  you  present  or  not  ? 

The  first  member  of  an  alternative  question  is  sometimes 
omitted,  and  an  seems  to  introduce  a  single  question.  In  such 
cases  the  question  expresses  some  surprise,  and  an  is  nearly 
equivalent  to  num. 

an  aderas  ?  [am  /  mistakeji  or]  xoere  you  present  ? 


C.    Use  of  the  Pronouns. 

The  use  of  the  pronouns  is,  in  general,  as  follows  :  — 

Ego  and  tu  are  used  as  in  English,  but  are  regularly  omitted 
in  the  nominative  case,  except  when  emphatic,  as  the  personal 
endings  of  the  verb  express  them. 

nos  is  sometimes  used  for  a  single  person  (=  ego)  ;  vos  is 
never  so  used  for  tu. 

sui  is  used  for  him,  her,  them,  their,  when  these  words  refer  to 
the  subject  of  the  clause  in  which  they  stand.  In  a  dependent 
clause  sui  refers  to  the  subject  of  the  principal  clause,  if  the 
subordinate  clause  expresses  the  purpose  or  thought  of  that 
subject.  (For  a  pronoun  of  the  third  person  not  referring  to 
the  subject,  a  demonstrative  is  used.     See  below.) 

se  and  suus  are  sometimes  used,  however,  referring  to  some 
other  word  than  the  subject,  if  no  ambiguity  is  caused  by 
doing  so. 

The  possessive  pronouns  are  used  as  in  English.  Suus,  like 
sui,  is  reflexive.  (For  a  third  person  possessive,  not  reflexive, 
the  genitive  of  a  demonstrative,  ejus,  illius,  etc.,  is  used.) 

Hie  means  this,  ille,  that;  iste,  that  (of  yours},  and  from  its 
frequent  use  in  addressing  an  opponent,  often  has  a  contemptu- 
ous meaning,  is  is  a  weaker  this  or  that,  and  is  the  usual  third 
personal  pronoun  not  reflexive.  As  antecedent  of  a  relative, 
is  qvi  means  ♦'  he  who,"  "  any  one  who ";  ille  qvi  means  "  that 
(man  yonder)  who." 


110  SUPPLEMENT  TO   SYNTAX. 


Ipse,  when  used  as  a  substantive,  is  an  emphatic  " he"  " lie 
himself.''  As  an  adjective,  it  emphasizes  the  word  it  limits; 
homo  ipse,  '■Hhe  man  himself  '^the  very  man";  ego  ipse,  "/ 
myself"  etc.  The  genitive  is  used  to  emphasize  the  possessive 
idea  of  the  possessive  pronouns ;  mea  ipsius  sententia,  my  own 
opinion. 

When  subject  and  object  are  the  same,  the  Latin  regularly 
emphasizes  the  former,  me  ipse  diligo,  /  love  myself  (not 
me  ipsum). 

The  relative  qvi  has  the  same  force  as  the  English  icho,  lohich, 
or  that,  but  is  used  more  freely,  often  where  the  English  uses  a 
separate  independent  statement,  so  that  qvi  has  the  same  force 
as  et  is,  et  ille,  or  is  autem,  ille  vero,  etc. 

The  indefinite  pronouns  in  general  mean  some,  any,  one,  etc. 
qvidam  means  "a  certain" ;  qvis  and  qvispiam,  '•'■  one,"  '■'■any 
one";  aliqvis,  "some  one."  qvivis  and  qvilibet  mean  "any 
one  you  please  ";  qvisqvam  and  ullus,  "  any  ichatever,"  and  are 
usually  used  in  negative  sentences,  so  that  with  the  negative 
they  mean  "  none  at  all." 

Many  other  words  are  used  to  express  the  indefinite  idea  of 
som£,  any,  a  few,  etc.  Their  force  and  meaning  must  be  learned 
from  the  lexicon  and  by  practice  in  reading  and  writing  the 
language. 

I>.    Forms  of  Conditional  Sentences. 

Conditional  clauses  are  regularly  introduced  by  si,  if,  or  a 
compound  of  si,  and  the  verb  of  such  a  clause  usually  takes  the 
mood  of  the  verb  on  which  it  depends.  The  dependent  condi- 
tion is  often  called  a  protasis,  the  conclusion  on  which  it  depends 
an  apodosis. 

There  are  three  well-marked  forms  of  conditional  sentences,  — 
(a)  with  the  indicative ;  (b)  with  a  primary  tense  of  the  sub- 
junctive ;  (c)  with  a  secondary  tense  of  the  subjunctive :  — 

(a)  The  indicative  in  conditions  has  its  usual  force  and  needs 
no  special  explanation.  It  regularly  limits  an  indicative,  but 
may  depend  on  an  imperative  or  a  sul)junctive  of  connnand.  It 
implies  nothing  as  to  the  truth  or  falsehood  of  the  supposed 
case. 


FORMS   OF   CONDITIONAL   SENTENCES.  Ill 


si  deus  es,  tribuere  mortalibus  beneficia  debes,  if  you  are 

a  god,  you  ought  to  give  henejits  to  men. 

sin  autem  homo  es,  semper  cogita  . . .  etc.,  hut  if  you  are  a 
man,  aliuays  consider . . .  etc. 

inteream,  si  novi!  may  I  perish  if  I  knovj ! 

(&)  The  primary  tenses  of  the  sulDJuiictive  denote  the  non- 
existence of  the  supposed  state,  but  imply  its  possibility,  and 
refer  therefore  to  the  future.  They  usually  limit  a  present  or 
perfect  potential  subjunctive,  but  are  also  used  to  limit  verbs 
whose  meaning  is  such  as  to  express  a  potential  or  hypothetical 
idea;  e.g.,  debeo,  possum,  volo,  etc.,  or  the  periphrastic  con- 
jugation forms.     See  331. 

si  negem,  mentiar,  if  I  should  deny  it,  I  should  lie. 

defendat  patrem,  si  arguatur,  he  would  defend  his  father,  if 
he  should  he  accused. 

(The  perfect  tense  is  rare,  and  differs  from  the  present  only 
in  laying  stress  on  the  completion  of  the  action.) 

(c)  The  secondary  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  express  the  non- 
reality  of  the  supposed  case,  and  refer  therefore  to  the  present 
or  past,  the  imperfect  being  used  for  present  time,  the  pluper- 
fect for  past.  They  regularly  limit  an  imperfect  or  pluperfect 
potential  subjunctive.     See  327. 

paoem  non  peterem  nisi  utilem  crederem,  I  should  not  ask 
for  peace,  if  I  did  not  think  it  advantageous. 

te  neoassem,  nisi  iratus  essem,  /  should  have  killed  you 
had  I  not  heen  angry. 


The  second  person  singular  of  the  present  and  imperfect 
subjunctive  is  used,  moreover,  in  a  general  condition,  to  limit 
a  present  or  imperfect  indicative  which  states  a  general 
truth.     See  332. 

mens  et  animus,  nisi  oleum  instilles  extingvuntur  senec- 
tute,  mind  and  soul  are  extinguished  hy  age,  unless  one  pours 
in  oil. 

si  attenderes  aorius,  strepitus  vinculorum  reddebatur,  if 
one  listened  more  attentively,  the  rattling  of  chains  was  heard. 


112  SUPPLEMENT   TO   SYNTAX. 

The  conditional  particle  si  is  sometimes  omitted.  The  verb 
is  then  usually  put  first,  as  in  English. 

roges  me,  nihil  respondeam,  sJwuld  you  ask  me,  I  should 
make  no  answer ;  dedisses,  had  you  given,  etc. 

So  absqve  te  esset,  loere  it  not  for  you,  and  like  expressions 
in  the  comic  poets. 

The  real  conclusion  is  often  omitted,  or  only  implied  in  an 
epithet  or  exclamation.  In  such  cases  a  conditfonal  subjunc- 
tive often  seems  to  limit  an  indicative,  but  the  sense  of  the 
passage  usually  suggests  the  proper  conclusion.  Here  belong 
expressions  of  wishing  Mdth  O  si  (see  320)  ;  clauses  expressing 
a  comparison  after  qvasi,  etc.  (see  [327]  ),  subjunctives  depend- 
ing on  debeo,  possum,  etc.  (see  449),  and  various  cases  where 
the  writer  prefers  to  put  a  direct  statement  in  place  of  a 
doubtful  one  suggested  by  the  form  of  the  thought. 

Relative  and  temporal  clauses  sometimes  imply  a  condition, 
and  take  the  same  construction  as  the  implied  condition  Avould 
take,  if  formally  expressed. 


E.     Reported  Speech. 

Reports  of  speeches  or  thoughts  of  others  may  be  made  by 
quoting  the  exact  words  uttered  or  thought,  or  ^^'ith  the  form 
changed  by  makmg  the  words  or  thoughts  dependent  on  some 
verb  of  saymg  or  thinking,  etc.  In  the  latter  case,  the  language 
is  called  "oratio  obliqua,'"  or  "indirect  discourse."  E.g.,  "//e 
said  that  he  had  made  a  mistake,"  is  indirect  discourse  corre- 
sponding to  the  du'ect  form  ("oratio  recta"),  "/  have  made  a 
mistake.''* 

AV^hen  the  words  of  a  speaker  or  writer  are  quoted  in  the  in- 
direct form,  the  following  changes  take  place :  — 

(a)  The  pronomis  will  change  in  person,  as  in  English, 
according  to  the  circumstances  and  requirements  of  the  sense 
(ordinarily  all  becoming  of  the  thu'd  person). 

Qj)  The  tenses  only  change  as  requu*ed  by  the  rule  of  se- 
quence, 312.  But  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  in 
a  condition  impliedly  false  remains  after  jDrimary  tenses,  to 
prevent  confusion  of  meaning  with   future  or  possible  coiidi- 


REPORTED   SPEECH. 


iia 


tions,  and  the  primary  tenses  are  often  retained  after  a  second- 
ary tense  for  vividness  or  exactness. 

(c)  When  indicatives  of  those  tenses  which  have  no  sub- 
junctive (viz.,  future  and  future  perfect')  are  changed  to  the 
subjunctive,  or  when  indicatives  of  those  tenses  that  have  no 
infinitive  (viz.,  imperfect,  pluperfect,  future,  and  future  perfect) 
are  changed  to  the  infinitive,  they  take  the  tense  nearest  them 
in  time.     Thus  the  — 

Future  ind.  becomes  pres.  subj.  (or  imperfect  by  sequence). 

Fut.  pf.  ind.         "        perf.  subj.  (or  phiperfect  by  sequence). 

Imperf.  ind.         "        perfect  infinitive. 

Plupf.  ind.  "        perfect  infinitive. 

Future  ind.         "        present  inf.  of  active  periphrastic  conj. 

Fut.  pf.  ind.         "        present  inf.  of  active  periphrastic  conj. 


(d)  The  moods  change  as  follows :  — 
In  principal  sentences, 

in  ind.  (313)  become  infinitive. 


Statements 

( in  sub.  (31G) 

'in  ind.  (314)  > 
1st  &  3d  pers.  ) 
in  ind.  (314)  7 
2d  person    ) 
.in  sub.  (317) 
(in  imp.  (315) 
\  in  sub.  (318) 
In  subordinate  sentences, 

All  verbs     5^^^^^^.) 
( in  sub.  ) 


Questions 


Commands 


(inf.  of  active  periph.  conj. 
\  (usually  perf.,  rarely  pres.) 

infinitive. 

subjunctive. 

subjunctive, 
subjunctive, 
subjunctive. 

subjunctive. 


As  the  first  periphrastic  conjugation  has  only  an  active  mean- 
ing, when  a  subj.  of  statement  is  passive,  it  is  expressed  in  the 
oratio  obliqua  by  futurum  fuisse  ut  (less  often  futurum  esse 
or  fore),  followed  by  a  passive  verb. 


(e)  Relative  clauses,  though  subordinate  in  form,  are  in  many 
cases  equivalent  to  principal  clauses,  and  statements  contained 
in  such  are  sometimes  treated  as  principal  statements  and  are 


114  SUPPLEMENT  TO   SYNTAX. 

put  in  the  infinitive  instead  of  the  subjunctive.  In  a  few 
cases  other  subordinate  clauses  are  treated  in  the  same  way,  if 
the  meaning  would  not  be  changed  by  making  them  inde- 
pendent in  the  direct  form.  The  same  principle  is  the  cause  of 
the  use  of  the  infinitive  in  reported  questions  of  the  first  or 
third  person,  these  questions  being  usually  equivalent  to  state- 
ments, and  put  in  the  form  of  questions  only  for  rhetorical 
effect. 

(/)  The  indicative  is  used  in  explanatory  clauses  inserted  by 
the  narrator,  and  not  belonging,  therefore,  to  the  reported 
speech.  Rarely,  also,  the  indicative  is  found  in  other  subordi- 
nate clauses. 


F.     Order  of  Words  and  Clauses. 

In  a  normal  prose  sentence  the  subject  comes  first  and  is 
followed  by  its  modifiers;  the  verb  stands  last,  proceeded  by 
its  modifiers. 

Modifiers  of  nouns  may  either  follow  or  precede  their  nouns ; 
modifiers  of  other  parts  of  speech  more  often  precede. 

Demonstrative  pronouns  usually  precede,  and  relative  and 
interrogative  pronouns  regularly  stand  at  the  beginning  of  their 
clauses. 

Modifying  clauses  are  subject  to  the  same  general  rules  of 
order  as  words  and  phrases ;  those  which  limit  nouns  more 
often  follow ;  those  which  limit  verbs  more  often  precede. 

Few  sentences  of  any  length,  however,  show  the  normal  order, 
as  the  usual  position  of  words  and  clauses  is  constantly  varied 
for  the  sake  of  rhythm  or  emphasis. 

No  definite  statement  of  the  influence  of  rhythm  on  the  order 
of  words  can  be  given,  but  a  dislike  of  a  monosyllable  (other 
than  est  or  sunt)  at  the  end  of  a  sentence  or  of  a  Ime  of  poetry 
is  noticeable  in  good  Latin  writers. 

Any  word  may  be  emphasized  b/  putting  it  out  of  its  usual 
position.  The  beginning  and  end  of  a  sentence  are  the  specially 
emphatic  positions. 

In  poetry  the  order  of  words  is  fixed  to  a  great  extent  by. the 
requirements  of  metre. 


DATES.  111. 


G.    Dates. 

The  year  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  giving  the  names  of  the 
consuls  for  that  year  in  the  ablative  absolute,  or  by  the  number 
of  years  from  the  founding  of  the  city;  e.fj.:  — 
L.  Pisone,  u4..  Gahinio  consulihus  1 
anno   urbis    conditae   DCXCVI  V  =  58  B.C. 
anno  ah  urhe  condita  DCXCVI  ] 

These  expressions  are  seldom  written  in  full.  For  consulihus 
we  find  coss.;  for  anno  urbis  conditae,  a.  u.  c. 

The  month  is  expressed  by  mense  with  the  proper  month- 
name  added  as  an  adjective;  e.g.,  mense  Junto,  in  June;  exeunte 
mense  Aprili,  at  the  end  of  April,  etc. 

The  day  of  the  month  was  reckoned  backward  from  three 
fixed  dates,  the  Kalends,  Xones,  and  Ides  {Kalendae,  Nonae, 
Idus)  ;  the  first  being  originally  the  day  of  the  new  moon,  the 
last,  that  of  the  full  moon.  The  Kalends  was  the  first  day  of 
the  month ;  the  Nones  was  usually  the  fifth,  but  in  March, 
May,  July,  and  October,  the  seventh ;  the  Ides  was  the  eighth 
day  after  the  Nones,  and,  therefore,  the  thirteenth  or  fifteenth. 

Dates  falling  on  the  Kalends,  Nones  or  Ides  were  expressed 
by  Kalendis,  Nonis  or  Idibus,  with  the  name  of  the  month 
added  as  an  adjective;  e.g.,  Kalendis  Juniis  (June  1),  Nonis 
Aprilibus  (April  5),  Idibus  Decembrihus  (Dec.  13),  etc. 

Dates  falling  between  the  Kalends  and  Nones  are  reckoned 
backward  from  the  Nones.  The  day  before  the  Nones  was 
called  pridie  Nonas  (see  [268] ) ;  the  second  day  before  was 
expressed  by  tertio  die  ante  Nonas,  or  ante  diem  tertium  Nonas, 
as  the  Romans  counted  in  the  day  reckoned  from.  In  like 
manner  the  third  day  before  was  called  fourth,  etc. 

Dates  falling  between  the  Nones  and  Ides  were  expressed  in 
the  same  way,  pridie  Idus  Aprilis,  ante  diem  sextum  Idus  Martias, 
etc.  So,  too,  dates  falling  between  the  Ides  and  Kalends,  the 
adjective  added  being,  of  course,  the  name  of  the  following  month. 

These  expressions  are  seldom  written  in  full,  the  usual  con- 
traction being  of  the  form  prid.  Kul.  Mart.,  IV.  Non.  Apr.,  VI. 
Id.  Sept.,  etc.;  or  a.  d.  iv  Non.  Apr.,  etc. 

In  leap-year  the  24th  of  February  was  counted  twice,  so  that 
both  the  24th  and  25th  of  the  month  were  called  VI.  Kal.  Mart. 


116 


SUPPLEMENT  TO    SYNTAX. 


496  I  The  days  of  the  months  are  given  in  the  following  schedule : 


Day 

or 
Month. 

January  (also 
August  and 
December). 

February. 

March  (also 

May,  July, 

and  October)  . 

April  (also 

June,  Sept.,  and 

Xovember)  . 

1 

Kal.  Jan. 

Kal.  Feb. 

Kal.  Mart. 

Kal.  Apr. 

2 

IT     Non.  Jan. 

IV    IS!"on.  Feb. 

VI    Xon.  :SIart. 

IV      Nou.  Apr. 

3 

Ill        "        " 

Ill      "       " 

V             "         " 

Ill         "        " 

4 
5 

prid.    "         " 
Xon.  Jan. 

prid.  "       " 
Xon.  Feb. 

IV           "         " 

III       "      " 

prid.      "        " 
Xon.  Apr. 

G 

VIII    Id.   Jan. 

VIII  Id.  Feb. 

prid.    "       " 

VIII      Id.   Apr. 

7 

VII        "          " 

VII      "        " 

Non.  Mart. 

VII          "          " 

8 

VI          "         " 

VI       "       " 

VIII    Id.  Mart. 

VI          •'         " 

9 

V 

V           «<         " 

VII         "        " 

V            "        " 

10 

IV         "         " 

rv      "      " 

VI         '•       " 

IV             "          " 

11 

III       "        " 

III      "      " 

V           "       " 

III         "       " 

12 
13 
14 

prid.    " 
Id.  Jan. 
XIX  Kal.  Feb. 

prid.  "       " 

Id.  Feb. 

XVI  Kal.  Mart. 

IV         "       " 
in        "       " 
prid.    "      " 

prid.     '•        " 

Id.  Apr. 

XVIII  Kal.  Maias. 

15 

XVIII    "          " 

XV      "       " 

Id.  Mart. 

XVII       "         " 

16 

XVII     "         " 

XIV     "       *' 

XVII  Kal.  Apr. 

XVI         "         " 

17 

XVI       " 

XIII    "        " 

XVI       "       " 

XV         "        "• 

18 

XV        '«         " 

Xll      "        " 

XV        "       '« 

XIV        "         " 

19 

XIV       "          " 

XI       "       " 

XIV       "       " 

XIII        "         " 

20 

XIII      "          " 

X        "      " 

XIII      "       '« 

XII         "         " 

21 
22 
23 

XII        " 

XI 

X            "          " 

IX        "        " 

XII        "       " 
XI         «'       '• 
X          "       " 

XI          "        " 
X           "        " 
IX          "        " 

via   "      " 
VII      "       " 

In  leap  year. 

24 

IX 

VI       "       '* 

VI  Kal.  M. 

IX         "       " 

VIII        "         " 

25 

vin     "       " 

V        "      " 

VI     "     " 

VIII      *'       '• 

VII         "        '♦ 

26 

Vll       "         " 

IV       "       " 

V      '•    " 

VII        *'       " 

VI             "          " 

27 

VI 

III     «'      " 

IV     "     " 

VI         "       •' 

V               "          " 

28 
29 
30 
31 

V         '«        " 
IV         "        " 
III       "       " 
prid.  " 

prid.  '•      " 

III    "    " 
prid."    " 

V             "         " 

IV         "       •' 

III       "     " 
prid.    "      " 

rv         "       *• 
111         "       " 
prid.     •• 

497 


The  schedule  here  given  was  in  use  after  Caesar's  reform  of 
the  calendar,  B.C.  45.  Before  that  date  the  Roman  year  had 
only  355  days,  and  an  extra  montli  was  inserted  every  other 
year  after  Feb.  23. 


I 


APPENDIX. 
498.     List   of  Verbs 

[Compiled  from  llohifs  Latin  Grammar.'] 

[This  list  contains  all  the  verbs  of  the  Latin  language,  with  the 
following  exceptions,  viz. :  — 

1.  Stems  in  -a  or  -i,  which  use  the  simple  stem  as  present  stem  and 
form  the  perfect  stem  by  adding  -v.  Most  of  them  are  derived  from 
nouns  or  adjectives,  and  form  their  principal  parts  after  the  models 
here  given :  — 

dono  donare  donavi  donatum  dona- 

finia  finire  finivi  finitum  flni- 

2.  Consonant-stems  which  form  the  present  stem  by  adding  -e,  and 
the  perfect  stem  by  adding  -u ;  and  lack  the  forms  from  the  simple 
stem.  Most  of  them  are  derived  from  nouns  or  adjectives,  and  form 
their  principal  parts  after  the  model  here  given :  — 

floreo  florere  florui  flor- 

3.  Verbs  which  form  the  present  stem  by  adding  -sc,  -esc  or  -isc, 
and  have  only  the  incomplete  te^ises,  or  form  the  perfect  stem,  when 
one  is  found,  by  adding  -u.     Examples  are  :  — 

gemmasco    gemmascSre  gemma- 

roresco  roresc6re  ror- 

inggmisco     ingemiscgre    ingemui  in-gSm- 

4.  Compounds  which  do  not  diifer  from  the  simple  verb,  or  differ 
only  in  the  usual  weakening  of  the  stem  vowel,  or  in  being  defective. 
Weakening  of  diphthongs  is  mentioned,  however. 

The  supine  form  is  given,  though  but  few  verbs  have  a  supine  in 
use,  whenever  a  future  active  or  perfect  passive  participle  is  found  to 
decide  what  the  form  of  the  supine  would  be. 

Forms  preceded  by  a  hyphen  {e.g..,  -lictus)  are  found  only  in  com- 
pounds.] 


118 


APPENDIX. 


Tres.  Ind.       Pres.  Inf.         Perf.  Ind.       Sup.  or  Part. 

Accerso  (another  spelling  of  arcesso). 

Scuo  acuSre  acui 

aegreo  aegrere 

adblesco  (see  -oleo) 

agnosco  (see  nosco) 

ago  agere  egi 

ajo  (defective.    See  [235].) 

albeo  albere 

algeo  algere  alsi 

^o  algre  alui 

alitum  also  in  later  writers. 

^micio         amicire         amici  amictum 

amicui,  amixi  are  mentioned  as  perf. 

ango  angSre 

Spiscor        apisci  aptus 

(  arctus 
arceo  arcere  arcui         4 

(.  artus 

In  compounds,  ex-ercitus,  co-ercitus. 

arcesso        arcessSre      arcessivi     aroessitum 
ardeo  ardere  arsi  arsum 

arguo  argugre  argui  argutum 

arguiturus,  once. 

audeo  audere  ausum 

For  perf.  ausus  sum  is  used.     See  [210]  (</) 

ave  (defective.     See  [235].) 

aveo  avere 

augeo  augere  auxi  auctum 


Stem. 


acutum 

sharpen 

Scu- 

he  sick 

aegr-? 

grow 

ad-61e- 

know 

ad-gno- 

actum 

drive 

Sg- 

say 

ag-? 

he  white 

alb-? 

he  cold 

alg- 

altum 

nourish 

al- 

clothe 


^mic- 


throttle,  vex  ahg- 
get  Sp- 

inclose         arc- 


summon       arcess-i- 
he  onjire     ard- 
charge         argu- 


dare 


hail! 
long 
increase 


aud- 


av-? 
aug- 


Batuo  batugre         batui  heat  b5tu- 

bibo  bibgre  bibi  drink  blb- 

Tlie  stem  is  properly  ba,  but  becomes  bib-  by  reduplication  and 
loss  of  the  final  vowel.     See  [158]. 
-btlro  -burgre  -bussi  -bustum         hum  bus- 


LIST  OF  VERBS. 


119 


Perf.  Int). 

Sup.  or  Part. 

Stem. 

cgcldi 

casum 

fall 

cSd- 

he  blind 

caecuti? 

cgcidi 

caesum 

fell,  kill 

caed- 

ae  to  1. 

calui 

calitum ' 

he  hot 

cSl- 

he  hald 

calv-? 

Fkes,  Ind.  Pres.  Inf. 

C^do  cadgre 

caeciitio  caecutire 

caedo  caedSre 

Compounds  weaken  ae  to  i. 

caleo  calere 

calveo  calvere 

calvor  calvi  play  tricks  calv- 

caneo  canere  he  gray        can-? 

cano  cangre  cScini  (-cantum)     sing  cSn- 

In  compounds,  the  perfect  is  -cinui  (oc-cgcini  once). 

cSpesso       capessgre     capessivi    capessitum  seize 
cepi  captum 

canii  carltum 


capio 

c^eo 

caro 

carpo 

cSveo 


capSre 

carere 

cargre 

carpSre 

cavere 


carpsi 
cavi 


carptum 
cautum 


take 

he  in  want 

card 

pluck 

heware 


cSpess-i- 

c5p- 

cSr- 

car- 

carp- 

cSv- 


count 
decide 


cens- 
cSr-,  cre- 


cavitum,  rare. 
cedo  cedSre  cessi  cessum         yield  cgd- 

cSdo  (imperative)  plur.  cette,  no  other  forms.       give  cSd-? 

-cello  -cellere         -ciili  -culsum         strike  f         cSl- 

Also  ex-cellui.     celsus,  excelsus,  praecelsus  are  adjectives. 

-cendo  -cendSre       -cendi  -censum        set  on  fire     cend- 

censeo  censere        censui  censum 

cerno  cernSre         crevi  cretum. 

certus  is  used  as  an  adjective. 

cieo  jciere  ^j^.  ^j^^^ 

cio  (.  cire 

In  compounds  also  -citus  sometimes. 

cingo  cingSre         cinxi  cinctum        gird 

clango  clanggre  clang 

claudo  claudSre       clausi  clausum        close 

Compounds  weaken  the  stem  to  -clud. 

clSpo  clepSre         clepsi  cleptum        steal 

clueo  cluere  -clfitum         he  called 


stir  up         ci- 


cing- 

clang- 

claud- 


clSp- 
clu- 


coenatiirio  coenaturire 


wish  to  dine  coenatiiri-? 


120 

APPENDIX. 

Pres.  Ind. 

Pkes.  Inf. 

Perf.  Ind. 

Sup.  or  Part, 

Stem. 

cognosce 

(see  nosco) 

know 

co-gno- 

cogo 

cogere 

coegi 

coactum 

compel 

co-Sg- 

colo 

colere 

colui 

cultum 

cultivate  c61- 

coepio 

coepere 

coepi 

coeptum 

hegin 

co-ap- 

como 

comere 

compsi 

comptum 

comb 

com- 

comperco    compercere  compersi 

save 

com-parc- 

comperio 

(see  pario) 

find  out 

com-par- 

compesco  (see  pasco) 

curb 

com-pas- 

concino  ( 

see  cano) 

sing 

con-can- 

consiilo 

consulere 

consului 

consultum 

consult 

constll- 

c6qvo 

coqvgre 

coxi 

coctum 

cook 

c6qv- 

credo 

credgre 

credidi 

creditum 

believe 

cre-d- 

crepo 

crepSre 

crepui 

crepitum 

rattle 

crgp- 

cresco 

crescere 

crevi 

cretum 

grow 

cre- 

^cubo 

5  cub  are 
1  -cumbere 

cubui 

cubitum 

lie 

ctib- 

( -cumbo 

cubavi,  rare. 

cudo 

cudgre 

cudi 

cusum 

hammer 

cud- 

ciipio 

cupgre 

cupivi 

cupitum 

desire 

ciip-i 

Imperfect  subjunctive  cupiret 

once. 

curro 

currgre 

ctlcurri 

cursum 

run 

curr- 

Compounds  sometimes  retain  the  reduplication. 
-ciitio  (see  qvStio). 


Debeo 

debgre 

debui 

debit;  I  m 

oive 

dgb- 

dego 

deggre 

pass  time 

^dgg- 

deleo 

delere 

delevi 

deletum 

destroy 

dg-le- 

dementio 

dementire 

be  mad 

dementi-? 

demo 

demgre 

dempsi 

demptum 

remove 

dem- 

depso 

depsgre 

depsui 

depstum 

knead 

deps- 

dico 

dicgre 

dixi 

dictum 

saij 

dic- 

dilego  (see 

>  Iggo). 

disco 

discere 

didici 

learn 

dlc- 

Compounds  keep  the  reduplication. 
divido  dividgre         divisi  divisum         divide       di-vid- 

do  (see  226)  dSre  dgdi  dStum  give  da- 

Compounds  retain  the  reduplication  (except  abscon-di). 


LIST   OF   VERBS. 


121 


Pres.  Ind. 

Tres.  Inf. 

Perf.  Ind. 

Sup.  or  Part. 

Stem. 

d6ceo 

docere 

docui 

doctum 

teach 

d6c- 

dSleo 

dolere 

dolui 

dolitum 

grieve 

d61- 

d6mo 

domare 

domui 

domitnm 

.  tame 

d6m- 

duco 

ducere 

duxi 

ductum 

lead 

diic- 

Edo(seeJ 

223)  edgre 

§di 

esum 

eat 

6d- 

essum  and  estum,  rare. 
gmo  emSre  emi 

empttirio     empturire 
eo  (see  227)  ire  ivi 

Perfect  -ii  in  compounds. 
excello  (see  cello) 
expergiscor  expergisci 

expergitum,  old. 
exuo  exugre         exui 


emptum  take,  huy  Sm- 

wish  to  htnj  emptiiri-  ? 
itum  go  i- 

excel        ex-cel- 
experrectum  arouse     ex-p6r-reg- 

exutum  strip  off  exu- 


Facesso       facessgre 

facessivi 

facessitum     make 

f^cess-i- 

facio             facgre 

feci 

factum 

make 

fSc- 

fallo              fallgre 

fgfelli 

falsum 

deceive 

fall- 

farcio            farcire 

farsi 

fartum 

stuff 

farc- 

fateor           fateri 

fassus 

confess 

fat- 

fatisco          fatiscgre 

-fessum 

gape 

f5t- 

Also  deponent. 

• 

fSveo            favgre 

favi 

fautum 

favor 

fav- 

-feiido          -fendere 

-fendi 

-fensum 

strike 

fend- 

fgrio              ferire 

strike 

fgri-? 

fgro               ferre 

(tiili) 

(latum) 

carry 

fgr- 

ttili  and  latum  are 

!  borrowed  from  tollo. 

tgtiili  is  . 

3ld.           . 

f  erveo        (  fervefe 
fervo          1  fervgre 

fervi,  ferbui 

hail    ■ 

ferv- 

fido               fidgre 

fisum 

trust 

fld- 

fisus  sum  is  used 

as  perfect. 

See  [216], 

{gy 

figo               figgre 

fixi 

fixum 

fix 

flg- 

fiotus,  rare. 

fio(see229)   figri 

(factus) 

become 

fi- 

fiudo            findgre 

fidi 

fissum 

cleave 

fid- 

122 

APPENDIX. 

Pres.  Ind. 

Pbes.  Inf. 

Perf.  Ind. 

Sup.  or  Part. 

Stem. 

fingo 

finggre 

fmxi 

fiotum 

form 

rig- 

flaveo 

flavere 

be  yellow 

flav-? 

fleo 

flere 

flevi 

fletum 

loeep 

fle- 

flecto 

flectere 

flexi 

flexum 

bend 

flect- 

-fligo 

-fligere 

-flixi 

-flictum 

strike 

flig- 

fluo 

fluSre 

fiuxi 

fluxum 

fiow 

fltigv- 

fSdio 

fodgre 

fodi 

fossum 

dig 

f6d- 

fodiri  old. 

foeteo 

foetere 

be  fetid 

foet-? 

[for]  see  [235]  f ari 

fatum 

speak 

fa- 

f6veo 

fovere 

fovi 

fotum 

cherish 

f6v- 

frango 

frangere 

fregi 

fraotum 

break 

frSg- 

frSmo 

fremere 

fremui 

fremitum 

roar 

frgm- 

frendo 

frendgre 

fressum 

gnash 

frend- 

Also  fresum. 

frico 

fricare 

fricui 

frictum 

rub 

fric- 

Also 

fricatum. 

frigeo 

frigere 

frixi 

be  cold 

frlg- 

frigo 

friggre 

frictum 

roast 

frig- 

frondeo 

frondere 

leaf 

frond-? 

fruor 

frui 

fructuiu 

enjoy 

f  ru-,  frug-? 

fruitus  once,  fruiturus  once. 

fttgio 

fuggre 

fugi 

fugitum 

flee 

ftig- 

fulcio 

fulcire  * 

fulsi 

fultum 

prop 

fulc- 

(  fulgeo 
i  fulgo 

( fulgere 
( f ulggre 

fulsi 

shine 

fulg- 

fundo 

fundgre 

fudi 

fusum 

pour 

ftld- 

fungor 

fungi 

functus 

discharge 

fung- 

[fuo]  (see  sum) 

fui 

fiiturus 

be 

fu- 

ftlro 

Jurgre 

rage 

ftlr- 

Gaudeo  gaudere  gavisum        be  glad  gSvid- 

gavisus  sum  is  used  as  perfect.     See  [210],  (^). 

ggmo  gemgre         gemui         gemitum       groan  ggm- 

ggro  gergre  gessi  gestum  carry  ggs- 

gigno  gigngre         ggnui  genitum        beget  ggn- 

giguo  for  giggno.     ggno  is  old. 


LIST  OF  VERBS. 


123 


Pres.  Tnd.  Pres.  Inf. 

glisco  gliscere 

glocio  glocire 

glubo  glubere 

grSdior  gradi 

In  compounds  -grediri  is  found 

-gruo  -gruere  -grui 


.  Ind. 

Sup.  or  Part. 

Stem. 

swell 

gli- 

cluck 

gloci-? 

gluptum 

peel 

glub- 

gressus 

step 

grad- 

gni- 


HSbeo 

habere 

habui 

habitum 

have 

hSb- 

haereo 

haerere 

haesi 

haesum 

stick 

haes-' 

haurio 

haurire 

hausi 

haustum 

drain 

haus- 

hgbeo 

hebere 

• 

he  blunt 

hgb-? 

hisco 

hiscere 

yaion 

hi- 

humeo 

humere 

be  moist 

hum-? 

-icio  (foi 

jacio  in  compounds). 

ico? 

ic6re 

ici 

ictum 

strike 

ic- 

imbuo 

imbugre 

imbui 

imbutum 

imbue 

imbu- 

incesso 

incessgre 

incessivi 

attack 

incess-i- 

indulge  0 

indulgere 

indulsi 

yield 

indulg- 

indultum,  late. 

induo 

indugre 

indui 

indutum 

put  on 

indu- 

ineptio 

ineptire 

trifle 

Inepti-? 

infit  (no 

other  form) 

begins 

9 

inqvam 

(see  [235]) 

inqvii 

quoth 

inqvi-? 

intellSgo  (see  lego) 

understand  intel-lgg- 

irascor 

irasci 

iratus 

be  angry 

ira- 

JSceo 

jacere 

jacui 

jacitum 

lie 

jac- 

jScio 

jacgre 

jeoi 

j  actum 

throiv 

jSc 

jtibeo 

jubere 

jussi 

jussum 

bid 

jtib- 

jungo 

junggre 

juuxi 

June  turn 

yoke 

jung- 

jiivo 

juvare 

juvi 

jutum 

aid 

jtiv- 

Also  juvaturus. 

Labor 

labi 

.lapsus 

slip 

lab- 

IScesso 

lacessgre 

lacessivi 

lacessitun] 

L  provoke 

lacess-i- 

lacteo 

laotere 

suck 

lact-? 

laedo 

laedgre 

laesi 

laesum 

hurt 

laed- 

Compounds  weaken  ae  to'i. 


124 

APPENDIX. 

Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perf.  Ind. 

Sup.  or  Part 

Stem. 

lambo 

lambere 

Iambi 

lick 

lamb- 

langveo 

langvere 

langvi 

he  faint 

langv- 

ClSvo 
(lavo 

( lavere 
(.  lavare 

lavi 

1  lotnm 

wash 

ISv- 

( lautum 

Also  lavatum. 

ISgo 

leggre 

legi 

lee  turn 

cJioose 

16g- 

Perf. 

-lexi  in  di-lego,  intel-lego,  neg-lego. 

-leo  (see 

deleo). 

libet 

libere 

libuit 

libitum 

it  pleases 

lib- 

Also 

spelled  liibet. 

liceo 

licere 

licui 

licitum 

he  on  sale 

lic- 

liceor 

liceri 

licitus 

hid  for 

lic- 

licet 

licere 

licuit 

licitum 

it  is  allowed  lic- 

-licio 

-licere 

-lexi, -licui -licitum 

entice 

lac- 

lingo 

lingSre 

linctum 

lick 

ling- 

lino 

lingre 

levi,  livi 

litum 

smear 

li- 

linqvo 

linqvgre 

liqvi 

-lictum 

leave 

liqv- 

liqveo 

liqvere 

Ucui 

he  clear 

liqv- 

liqvor 

liqvi 

melt 

liqv- 

liveo 

livere 

he  livid 

liv-? 

ISqvor 

loqvi 

locutus 

speak 

16qv- 

luceo 

lucere 

luxi 

heam 

luc- 

ludo 

ludgre 

lusi 

lusum 

sport 

lud- 

lugeo 

lugere 

luxi 

mourn 

lug- 

luo 

lu6re 

lui 

-lutum 

pay 

lu- 

MSceo 

macere 

he  lean 

mSc-? 

maereo 

maerere 

grieve 

maer-  ? 

malo 

malle 

malui  (see  225) 

prefer 

ma-v61- 

mando 

mandgre 

mandi 

mansum 

chew 

mand- 

m^eo 

manere 

mansi 

mansum 

wait 

m^- 

e-minui  also  in 

perfect. 

mSdeor 

mederi 

cure 

mgd- 

mSmini 

(see  [235]) 

remember 

mSn- 

nigreo 

nierere 

merui 

meritum 

earn 

mgr- 

mergo 

merggre 

mersi 

mersum 

sink 

merg- 

metior 

metiri 

mensus 

measure 

met-? 

mSto 

metSre 

messui 

messum 

mow 

mgt- 

LIST  OF   VERBS. 


126 


Pres.  Ind.       Pres.  Inf. 

Pekf.  Ind. 

Sup.  or  Part. 

Stem. 

mgtuo         metugre 

metui 

metutus  (once)  fear 

metu- 

mico            micare 

micui 

glitter 

mic- 

-micavi,  -micatnm  in  compounds. 

-miniscor   -minisci 

-mentus 

call  to  niih 

id  m^- 

mingo          minggre 

minxi 

mictum 

mig- 

Pres.  also  mejo  (f( 

jr  mgg-i-o) 

'. 

minuo          minuSre 

minui 

minutum 

lessen 

mlnu- 

misceo        miscere 

miiscui 

mixtum,  mistum  mix 

misc- 

misgreor     misereri 

miseritus 

pity 

misgr- 

misertus,  rare,  also  rarely  an 

active  form  misereo. 

misgret       miserere 

miseruit 

miseritum 

it  pities 

misgr- 

mitto           mittgre 

misi 

missum 

send 

mitt- 

m61o            molgre 

molui 

molitum 

grind 

m61- 

mSiieo         monere 

monui 

monitum 

icarn 

m5n- 

mordeo        mordere 

m6mordi 

morsum 

bite 

mord- 

m6rior         mori     See 

[216]  (A) 

(moriturus) 

die 

m6r- 

mortuus  sum  is  used  as  perfect.     m,oriri  is 

old. 

m6veo         movere 

movi 

m.otum 

move 

m6v- 

muceo          mucere 

be  moldy 

muc-? 

mulceo        mulcere 

mulsi 

mulsum 

soothe 

mulc- 

Also  per-mulctus. 

mulgeo        mulgere 

mulsi 

milk 

mulg- 

-mungo        -mungere 

-muiixi 

-munctum 

wipe 

mung- 

Nanciscor  nancisci 

nactus,  nanctus  gam 

nSc- 

nascor          nasci 

natus 

be  born 

na-- 

The  full  stem  gna 

-  appears  in  some  compounds. 

ngco             necare 

j  necavi 
(  ngcui 

j"  necatum 
( -nectum 

kill 

ngc- 

iiecto           nectere 

nexi 

nexum 

join 

nect- 

neglggo  (see  lego). 

neo                nere 

nevi 

netum 

spin 

ne- 

ngqveo  (see  qveo) 

can  not 

ng-qvi- 

nexo             nexgre 

nexui 

tie 

nex- 

( ningit              .      w 
J     .   ^              mnggre 
(  ningvit 

ninxit 

it  snoios 

5  ning- 
(  ningv- 

nitor            niti 

nixus,  nisus 

lean 

nict- 

126 


APPENDIX. 


Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf. 

-niveo  -nivere 

uoceo  nocere 

nolo  nolle 

nosco  uoscere 


Perf.  Ind.     Sup.  or  Part, 
-nivi,  -nixi 
nocui         nocitum 
nolui     See  225 
novi  notum 


Stem. 
wink  nigv- 

liarm  n6c- 

he  miwilling  n6-v61- 
learn  no- 


The  full  stem  gno-  appears  in  some  compounds,   -gnitum  is  found 
in  a-gnitum,  co-gnitum. 

nubo  nubere         nupsi  nuptum  marry  nub-    " 

-nuo  -nuere  -nui  nod  -nu- 

ab-nuiturus  once. 


Obliviscor  oblivisci 

oblitus 

forget 

ob-llv-  ? 

occulo       ocoulere 

occului      occultum 

conceal 

oc-ciil- 

odi  (see  235). 

j  -61eo        ( -olere 
( -Slesco    ( -olescgre 

5  -olevi       ( -oletum 
(  -olui         (  -olitum 

groto 

61-?  die-? 

Sdolesco  has  ad-ultus. 

f  61eo         (  olere 
\  61o           \  ol6re 

olui 

smell 

61- 

Sportet      oportere 

oportuit 

it  is  proper 

6p6rt- 

ordior        ordiri 

orsus 

commence 

ord- 

6rior           oriri     See 

[216]  (h)       ortus 

rise 

6r- 

Also  oriturus. 
[6vo]  defective.     See  [235]. 


PSciscor    pacisci         pgpigi         pactum  bargain         pSc-,  pSg- 

paenitet    paenitere     paenituit  it  repents       paenit- 

paeniturum  is  mentioned  by  g-rammarians. 


pando 

pandgre 

pango 

panggre 

parco 

parcgre 

pareo 

parere 

pSrio 

parere 

Also  pariturus. 
partiirio  parturire 
pasco         pascgre 

-pescui  in  compesco  and  dispesco. 


pandi 

pansum,  passum  open 

pand- 

pegi 

pactum,  TpdiXiCtMiQ.  fasten  p5g- 

5  pgperci 
( parsi 

parsum          spare 

parc- 

parui 

paritum         appear 

par- 

pgpgri 

partum           bring  forth 

pSr- 

Compoundi 

s  have  -perire. 

be  in  labor 

partiiri- 

pavi 

pastum          feed 

pSs- 

LIST  OF   VERBS. 


127 


Pbes.  Ind. 

Pbes.  Inf. 

Pbbf.  Ind. 

Sup.  or  Pabt. 

Stem. 

patior 

pati 

passus 

heir 

pat- 

pSveo 

pavere 

pavi 

fear 

pSv- 

pecto 

pectgre 

pexi 

pexum 

comb 

pect- 

pedo 

pedere 

pgpedi 

ped- 

pello 

pellgre 

pgpflli 

pulsum 

drive 

pgl- 

pendeo 

pendere 

pgpendi 

pensum 

hang 

pend- 

pendo 

pendgre 

pgpendi 

pensum 

tceigh 

pend- 

pergo 

perggre 

perrexi 

perrectum 

continue 

pgr-rgg- 

-perio 

-perire 

-perui 

-pertum 

pgr- 

peritus  as  an  adjective,  and 

.  in  opperitus 

pgto 

petere 

petivi 

petitum 

seek 

pgt-i- 

piget 

pigere 

piguit 

pigitum 

it  vexes 

piS- 

pingo 

pinggre 

pinxi 

pictum 

paint 

piS- 

^  pinso 

(  pinsgre 
I  pisgre 

5  pinsui 
(  pinsi 

5  pinsitum 
1  pistum 

pound 

pis- 

Ipiso 

pisi 

once,  pinsibant  once. 

plSceo 

placere 

placui 

placitum 

please 

plSc- 

plango 

planggre 

planxi 

planctum 

heat 

plang- 

plaudo 

plaudere 

plausi 

plausum 

clap 

plaud- 

Most  compounds 

1  weaken  an 

L  to  6. 

plecto 

plectgre 

strike 

plect- 

-plector 

-plecti 

-plexus 

twine 

plect- 

-pleo 

-plere 

-plevi 

-pletum 

fill 

ple- 

plico 

plicare 

( -plicui, 
1  -plicavi 

(  -plicitum, 
(  plicatum 

fold 

plic- 

pluo 

plugre 

pluit 

rain 

plu- 

pluvit  often  in  Livy. 

poUeo 

pollere 

he  strong 

poll-? 

poUucec 

)    poUucere 

polluctum 

offer 

pglluc- 

poiio 

pongre 

p6sui 

positum 

place 

pQ-s- 

pono  is  for  po-i 

sino ;  see  sino.     posivi  and  posi  arc 

!  found,  and 

in  poetry  postus. 
posco         poscgre       pSposci  pose- 

Compounds  retain  reduplication. 
possum      posse  p6tui     See  222  can  p6t-gs- 

p6tior         potiri     See  [216]  (Ji)    potitum         he  master       p6ti- 
poto  potare  potavi        potum,  potatum  drink     pota- 

p5tum  seems  to  belong  to  a  simpler  stem,  po-. 


128 

APPENDIX. 

Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perf.  Ind. 

Sup.  or  Part. 

Stem. 

praebeo 

praebere 

praebui 

praebitum 

furnish 

praeb- 

prandeo 

prandere 

prandi 

pransnm 

dine 

prand- 

(  prehendo 
1  prendo 

prehendere  prehendi  prehensum 
prendere     prendi        prensum 

seize 

(  prehend- 
(  prend- 

prgmo 

premere 

pressi 

pressum 

press 

prgm- 

pr6ficiscor  profioisci 

profectus 

advance 

prS-fac- 

promo 

promgre 

prompsi 

promptum 

bring  out 

prom- 

prurio 

prurire 

itch 

pruri-  ? 

psallo 

psallere 

psalU 

play 

psall- 

piidet 

pudere 

puduit 

puditum 

it  shames 

ptid- 

pungo 

pungere 

piipiigi 

puuctum 

prick 

Ptig- 

Compounds  have  -punxi. 


Qvaero        qvaerSre     qvaesivi    qvaesitum    seek  qvaes-i- 

qvaeso  and  qvaesumus  are  old  colloquial  forms.     Compounds 
weaken  ae  to  i. 


qvStio 

qvatgre 

qvassum 

shake 

qvSt- 

Perfecl 

-J  -cussi  in  compounds. 

See  -cutio. 

qveo  (228) 

qvire 

qvlvi 

qvitnm 

can 

qvi- 

qvSror 

qveri 

qvestus 

complain 

qvgs- 

qviesco 

qviescSre 

qvievi 

qvietum 

rest 

qvie- 

-qvinisco 

-qviniscSre  -qvexi 

defile 

qvic- 

RSbo 

rabgre 

rave 

rSb- 

rado 

radgre 

rasi 

rSsum 

scrape 

rad- 

rSpio 

rapgre 

rapui 

raptum 

seize 

rSp- 

ravio 

(-rausi) 

(rausunis) 

he  hoarse 

rSv- 

refert 

referre 

rettlUt 

it  concertii 

'  re-fgr- 

rggo 

reggre 

rexi 

rectum 

rule 

rgg- 

rgnideo 

renidSre 

glitter 

rg-nid- 

reor 

reri 

rStus 

think 

ra- 

rgpgrio 

reperire 

reppgri 

repertum 

discover 

rg-pSr- 

repo 

repgre 

repsi 

reptum 

creep 

rep- 

rgsipisco  see  sSpio 

rg-sSp- 

rideo 

ridere 

risi 

risum 

laugh 

rid- 

ringor 

ringi 

grin 

rlg- 

rodo 

rodgre 

rosi 

rosum 

gnaw 

rod- 

LIST   OF   VERBS. 


129 


Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perf.  Ind, 

,      Sup.  or  Part. 

Stem. 

rtido 

rudSre 

rudivi 

4--  'hif 

bray 

riid-i- 

rumpo 

rumpere 

rupi 

ruptum 

h^eak 

riip- 

ruo 

mere 

rui 

riitum 

dash 

ru- 

ruiturus,  late. 

Saepio 

saepire 

saepsi 

saeptum 

hedge 

saep- 

salio 

(  (salire  ?) 
(  sallgre 

I  salitum 
(.  salsnm 

salt 

sal- 

sallo 

salio 

salire 

salui 

' 

sSl- 

Also  salivi,  rare. 

salve,  see 

:  [235]. 

sancio 

sancire 

sanxl 

sanctum 

halloiv 

sanc- 

sancitum,  rare. 

s5pio 

sapgre 

sapivi 

be  loise 

sap. 

Also  perfect  re-sipui-. 

sarcio 

sarcire 

sarsi 

sartum 

patch 

sarc- 

sario 

sarire 

sarui,  sarivi  saritum 

hoe 

sSr-,  sari-? 

sarpo 

sarpgre 

sarptum 

trim 

sarp- 

satago  (= 

r  sat  ago,  see 

ago). 

scabo 

scabSre 

scabi 

scratch 

scab- 

scalpo 

scalpere 

scalps! 

scalptum 

scrape 

scalp- 

scando 

scandere 

scandi 

scansum 

climb 

scand- 

sc&teo 

scatere 

bubble 

scat-? 

scindo 

scindere 

soldi 

scissum 

cut 

scid- 

scicidi  is  old. 

scisco 

sciscgre 

scivi 

scitum 

enact 

sci- 

scribo 

scribgre 

scripsi 

scriptum 

7iirite 

scrib- 

sculpo 

sciilpgre 

sculpsi 

sculptum 

carve 

sculp- 

sgco 

secare 

secui 

sectum 

cut 

sec- 

secaturus,  once. 

sSdeo 

sedere 

sedi 

sessum 

sit 

sed- 

sentio 

sentire 

sensi 

sensum 

think 

sent- 

sepglio 

sepelire 

sepelivi 

sepultum 

bury 

sepel- 

seqvor 

seqvi 

secutus 

follow 

seqv- 

sero 

sergre 

sevi 

satum 

sow 

sa- 

sgro 

serere 

-serui 

-sertum 

put  in  rows  ser- 

serpo 

serpgre 

serpsi 

serptum 

c7^atol 

serp- 

130 


APPENDIX. 


Pbes.  Ind.       Pres.  Inf.        Pebf.  Tnd.      Sup.  or  Part.  Stem. 

sido  sidSre  sidi  settle  sid- 

sedi  and  sessum  (borrowed  from  sedeo)  are  also  found. 


solutum 
sonitum 


set 

he  wont 

)• 

loose 

sound 


singulti-? 

si- 

Bta- 

s61- 


singultio      singultire  soh 

slno  sinere  slvi  situm  permit 

sisto  sistSre  stiti  statum 

Compounds  keep  the  reduplication. 
s51eo  solere  solitus 

solitus  sum  is  used  as  perfect;  see  [216]  (</) 
solvo  solvere        solvi 

s6no  (sonare  c«v.,,i 

■I  sonui 

.  s6no  ( songre 

sonaturus,  once. 
sorbeo         sorbere        sorbui  swallow       sorb- 

Perfect  -sorpsi,  late  and  rare. 


solv- 
s6n- 


spargo          sparggre 
sperno          sperngre 
-spicio         -spicere 
splendeo     splendere 
spondeo      spondere 
de-sp6pondi,  old. 

sparsi 
sprevi 
-spexi 

spSpondi 

sparsnm 
spretum 
-spectum 

sponsum 

scatte}' 

despise 

look 

shine 

promise 

sparg- 
spgr-,  spre- 
spgc- 
splend-  ? 
spond- 

spuo 

sqvaleo 

statuo 

spuSre 

sqvalere 

statugre 

spui 
statui 

sputum 
statutum 

spit 

be  rough 

set  up 

spu- 

sqvai-? 

statu- 

sterno 

sterngre 

stravi 

stratum 

strew 

stgr-,stra 

sternuo 

sternugre 

sternui 

sneeze 

sternu- 

sterto 

stertgre 

stertui 

snore 

stert- 

stingvo 
sto 

stingvgre 
stare 

-stinxi 
stgti 

-stinctum 
statum 

extinguisi 
stand 

h    stingv- 
sta- 

Also  staturus,  rare. 

strgpo 

strideo 

strido 

strepgre 

stridere 

'  stridgre 

strepui 
stridi 

strepitum 

make  a  noise  strgp- 
hiss               strid- 

stringo 
struo 

stringgre 
strugre 

strinxi 
stnixi 

strictum 
structum 

graze 
huild 

strig- 
striigv- 

sugo             suggre 
sum  see  212     esse 

suxi 
(fui) 

suctum 
(futurus) 

suck 
he 

sug- 
gs- 

Complete  tenses  and  future  participle  borrowed  from  [fuo]. 


LIST   OF   VERBS. 


131 


Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perp.  Ind. 

Sup.  or  Part. 

Stem. 

sumo 

sumere 

STimpsi 

sumptum 

take 

sum- 

suo 

sugre 

sui 

sutum  . 

sew 

su- 

surgo 

surgere 

surrexi 

surrectum 

rise 

sur-rgg- 

svadeo 

svadere 

svasi 

svasum 

jyersuade 

svad- 

svesco 

svescgre 

svevi 

svetum 

get  icont 

sve- 

Tabeo 

tabere 

waste 

tab-? 

taceo 

tacere 

tacui 

taciturn 

he  silent 

tac- 

taedet 

taesum 

it  wearies 

taed- 

tago  (old 

form  of  tango) . 

tango 

tanggre 

tgtigi 

tactum 

touch 

tag- 

tggo 

teggre 

texi 

tectum 

cover 

•  tgg- 

temno 

temngre 

tempsi 

temptum 

despise 

tem- 

tendo 

tendgre 

tgtendi 

tentum,  tensum  stretch 

tend- 

tgneo 

tenere 

tenui 

tentum 

hold 

tgn- 

tgtiui  is  quoted. 

terreo 

terrere 

terrui 

territnm 

frighten 

terr- 

( tergeo 
( tergo 

5  tergere 
I  terggre 

tersi 

tersum 

wipe 

terg- 

tgro 

tergre 

trivi 

tritum 

rub 

tgr-,  tri- 

at-terui,  once. 

texo 

texgre 

texui 

textum 

weave 

tex- 

5  tingo 
( tingvo 

( tinggre 
( tingvgre 

tinxi 

tinctum 

dye 

tingv- 

tollo 

tollere 

(susttili) 

(sublatum) 

lift 

t61-,  tla- 

The  simple  tiili  and  latum  have  the  sense  of  fgro,  and  the  coin- 
pound  forms  given  are  used  in  the  sense  of  tollo. 


tondeo 

tondere 

tStondi 

tonsum 

shear 

tond- 

t5no 

tonare 

tonui 

tonitum 

thunder 

t6n- 

in-tonatus,  once. 

torqveo 

torqvere 

torsi 

tortum 

twist 

torqv- 

torreo 

torrere 

torrui 

tostum 

roast 

tors- 

traho 

trahgre 

traxi 

tractum 

drag 

trah- 

trgmo 

tremgre 

tremui 

tremble 

trgm- 

tribuo 

tribugre 

tribui 

tributum 

assign 

tribu- 

trudo 

trudgre 

trusi 

trusum 

thrust 

trud- 

132 


APPENDIX. 


Pres.  Ind.        Pres.  Inf. 
tueor  ( tueri 

tuor  I  tui 

tundo  tundSre        tiitiidi 

Also  perfect  re-tundi 

turgeo  turgere        tursi 


Perf.  Ind.      Sup.  or  Part.  Stem. 

tutus,  tuitus  look  at        tu- 
tusum,  tunsum  thump  tiid- 


swell 


turg- 


Ulciscor 

uloisci 

UltUB 

avenge 

ulc- 

ungo 
ungvo 

j  ungere 
(  ungvgre 

unxi 

unctum 

anoint 

ungv- 

urgeo 

urgere 

ursi 

urge 

urg- 

uro 

urgre 

ussi 

ustum 

hum 

us- 

utor 

uti 

UBUS 

use 

tit- 

Vado 

vadgre 

-vasi 

-vasum 

go 

v5d- 

vaieo 

valere 

valui 

valitum 

he  strong 

vai- 

vggeo 

vegere 

arouse 

vgg-? 

veho 

vehgre 

vexi 

vectum 

carry 

vgh- 

vello 

vellgre 

velli 

vulsum 

jiluck 

vgl- 

Perfect  also  vulsi, 

late. 

vendo 

vendSre 

vendidi 

venditum 

sell 

ven-d- 

veneo 

venire 

venivi 

to  he  sold 

ven-i- 

vSnio 

venire 

veni 

ventum 

come 

vgn- 

vgreor 

vereri 

veritus 

fear 

vgr- 

vergo 

verggre 

incline 

verg- 

verro 

verrgre 

verri 

versum 

hrush 

verr- 

verto 

vertgre 

verti 

versnm 

turn 

vert- 

vescor 

vesci 

eat 

veso- ? 

v6to 

vetare 

vetui 

vetitum 

forbid 

vgt- 

Also  vetavi,  rare. 

video 

videre 

vidi 

visum 

see 

vid- 

-vido,  see 

divido. 

vieo 

viere 

vietum 

plait 

vie- 

Also  viStus. 

LIST   OF   VERBS. 


133 


Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perf.  Ind. 

Sup.  or  Part. 

Stem. 

vincio 

vincire 

vinxi 

vinctum 

hind 

vinc- 

vinco 

vincere 

vici 

victum  • 

conquer 

vic- 

viso 

visgre 

visi 

visit 

vis- 

VIVO 

vivgre 

vixi 

victum 

live 

vigv- 

volo 

velle 

volui     see  225 

ivish 

v61- 

volvo 

volvSre 

volvi 

volutum 

roll 

volv- 

v6mo 

vomere 

vomui 

vomitum 

vomit 

v6m- 

v6veo 

vovere 

vovi 

votum 

vow 

v6v- 

499.    n^DEX    OF    TOPICS, 


Ablative  case,  use  of 292-308 

Ablative  proper 293-296 

Accent 19,  20 

Accusative  case,  use  of 262-268 

a-declension 52-56 

Adjectives,  a-  and  o-stems ....  70-72 

agreement  of 255 

consonant-stems.  .91-93 
formation  of. .  .242-244 

i-stems 106-108 

Adverbs,  formation  of 248-249 

Alphabet 1 

Appositives,  agreement  of 254 

-dies,  decl.  of  adjs.  in [108] 

Calendar 496 

Case-endings,  a-stems 54 

consonant-stems  74, 75 

e-stems 58 

/-stems 99,101 

o-stems 62,63 

?<-stems 110,  111 

Cases 42-49 

use  of 258-308 

Cognate  accusative  . : [262] 

Comitative  ablative 304-306 

Comparatives,  decl.  of [92] 

formation  of 119 

Comparison 119-123 

Complete  tenses 144 

of  pass.  [207],  [214] 

Composition 252 

Concord,  rules  of 254-257 


Conditional  sentences,  forms  of 

446-456 

Conjugations 191-193 

Conjunctions,  formation  of 251 

Consonants,  classification  of....  12 

euphony  of [12] 

sounds  of 6-11 

Consonant   declension 73-93 

Dates 487-497 

Dative  case,  use  of 269-272 

Declensions 50,  51 

Defective  nouns [117] 

Defective  verbs 235 

Demanding,  verbs  of [262] 

Demonstrative  pronouns. .  .127-137 

Deponent  verbs 154 

-dicus,  comp.  of  adjs.  in 122 

Diphthongs 4,  5 

Distributive  numerals [US] 

e-declension v.57-60 

Endings  defined 28,  29 

a-stem  nouns 54 

a-stem  verbs 194-195 

complete  tenses 206 

consonant-stem  nouns 

74,75 
consonant-stem  verbs 

198, 199 

e-stem  nouns 58 

e-stem  verbs 196, 197 

i-stem  nouns 99, 101 


136 


INDEX   OF   TOPICS. 


Endings  long  i-stem  verbs . .  203,  204 

o-stem  nouns 02,  63 

short  /-stem  verbs. 200,  202 

simple-stem  forms 209 

tf-stem  nouns 110,  111 

It-stem  verbs 198,  199 

-er,  stems  in,  decl.  of 80 

comp.  of 121 

-eri,  stems  in,  decl.  of 102 

comp.  of 121 

-ero,  stems  in,  decl,  of .60 

comp.  of 121 

Exclamatory  sentences [^14] 

Factitive  verbs,  constr [262] 

-Jicus,  compar.  of  adj.  in 122 

Finite  verb 148,  agreement  257 

Future  in  -so [216] 

imperative [181] 

Gender 30-40 

grammatical  and  natural  31 

natural,  rules  of 32-40 

a-stem  nouns 56 

consonant-stem  nouns  82-90 

c-stem  nouns 59, 60 

/-stem  nouns 103-105 

o-stem  nouns 69 

It-stem  nouns 113 

Genitive  case,  use  of 275-291 

Gerund 150 

use  of 348,349 

Gerundive,  use  of 349 

-/,  dat.  ending 71 

Imperative,  use  of 315 

Impersonal  verbs 230-234 

Inceptive  verbs [161] 

Inchoative  verbs [161] 

Incomplete  tenses 143 

Indefinite  pronouns 140, 141 

Indicative,  use  of 313, 314 


Infinitive 149 

use  of 335-342 

Inflection 21-26 

Instrumental  ablative 297,  298 

Interjections,  formation  of 250 

Interrogative  particles 426-434 

pronouns 139 

-io,  stems  in,  decl.  of 67 

Irregular  declension 114-117 

verbs 215-229 

/-declension 94-108 

/-stem  adjectives 106-108 

-ites,  decl.  of  adjs.  in [198] 

-ms,  gen.  ending 71 

Locative  ablative 299-303 

Locative  case,  a-stems 55 

consonant-stems.  .77 

e-stems [58] 

o-stems 65 

use  of 273,274 

UHstems [110] 

-mino,  imperative  ending [216] 

Mood-and-tense  signs 171-178 

Moods 145-147 

use  of 313-333 

Nasalizing 160 

Negative  particles 422-425 

Nominative  case,  use  of . . .  .258-260 
Non-finite  verb-forms,  use  of  334-852 

Nouns,  formation  of 239-241 

Number 41,253 

Numerals 118 

o-declension 61-69 

Open  vowels 3 

Order  of  words  and  clauses .  479-486 

Participles 152 

use  of.- 343-347 


INDEX   OF   TOPICS. 


137 


Passive  voice 153, 154 

Passive  voice,  complete  tenses . .  153 

Perf .  act.  endings 189,  190 

Perfect  stem  of  verbs 163-167 

Periphrastic  conjugations.  .212,213 

Person 41,253 

Person-and-number  suffixes  179-182 

Personal  pronouns 124, 125 

-plex,  decl.  of  adjs.  in [1^8] 

Possessive  pronouns 126 

Predicate  noun,  agreement  of.  .254 

Prepositions,  formation  of 251 

use  of 268,308 

Present  stem  of  verbs 157-162 

Principal  parts  of  verbs . . .  168, 169 

Pronouns 124-141 

agreement  of 256 

use  of 435-445 

Quantity,  gen.  rules 14-18 

sp.  rules 364-397 

Questioning,  verbs  of [262] 

Keduplication,  pres.  stem 158 

perf.  stem 164 

Keflexive  meaning  of  passive. .  .154 

Relative   pronouns 138 

Reported  speech 457-478 

Roots  .' 236 

Semi-vowel  stems,  decl.  of  .  . .  78,  79 

Sequence  of  tenses 312 

Stem,  defined 27 


Stems,  formation  of 237,  238 

Subjunctive,  use  of 316-333 

Suffixes,  defined 27 

verbal 179-187 

Superlative 120 

Supine  151 

use  of 350-352 

•tat,  stems  in,  decl.  of [81] 

Tendencies  affecting  quantity 

356-363 

Tenses,  use  of 309-312 

Theme,  defined 28, 29 

-trix,  decl.  of  adjs.  in [108] 

Two  objects,  vbs.  with [262] 

M-declension 109-113 

V  dropped 215 

Verb-forms 142-235 

Verb-stems 155, 167 

Verbal   suffixes 170-190 

Verbs,  formation  of 245-247 

list  of 498 

Verse,  laws  of 353-421 

Versification 398-421 

Vocative  case,  o-stems 64 

use  of 261 

Voice 253 

volus,  comp.  of  compounds  of.  .122 

Vowels,  sound  of 2 

euphony  of [2] 

Weakening  of  vowels [2],  76 

Word-formation 236-252 


500.    IXDEX    OF    WOEDS. 


[This  list  contains  all  words  mentioned  in  the  book  because  of  any  peculiarity 
of  form  or  construction.'] 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


abl ablative. 

ace accusative. 

assim assimilation. 

comp comparison. 

constr construction. 

crapds compounds. 

dat dative. 

decl declension. 

def defective. 

gen genitive. 

gend gender. 


indie indicative. 

inflect inflection. 

irreg irregular. 

loc locative. 

pron pronoun. 

quant quantity. 

redupl reduplication. 

semi-dep semi-deponent. 

subj subjunctive. 

vb verb. 

w with. 


ab assim.  [12] 

abies quant.  383 

absens [221j 

accipiter decl.  [80] 

acies decl.  [58] 

acus    gend.  [113] 

ad assim.  [12] 

ad in  cmpds.  vv.  dat.  [269] 

adeps gend.  [82] 

aedili abl.  [99] 

agger gend.  [89] 

ajo def.  vb.  [235] 

^1^^^^    I decl.  141 

aliqvis  > 

alius decl.  71,  w.  abl.  [296] 

alter decl.  71 

alvus gend.  [69] 


ambo decl.  [72],  quant.  [365] 

amni abl.  [99] 

amplius .constr.  [296] 

amussim ace.  [99] 

angvi abl.  [99] 

animi loc.  [273] 

ante in  cmpds.  w.  dat.  [269] 

ante  diem w.  ace.  [268] 

antes gend.  [103] 

Aprili abl.  [99] 

Arar decl.  [102] 

Arari abl.  [99] 

Ararim ace.  [99] 

arbos gend.  [89],  quant.  383 

arcus decl.  [110],  gend.  [113] 

aries quant.  383 

artus decl.  [110] 


140 


INDEX   OF   WORDS. 


decl.  [98] 

decl.  [98] 

asser gend.  [89] 

audeo semi-dep.  [216] 

ave def.  vb.  [235] 

avi abl.  [99] 

axi abl.  [99] 

balneum decl.  [115] 

bene quant.  [396] 

bibi redupl.  [164] 

bibo redupl.  [158] 

bidui constr.  [284] 

bonus comp.  [123] 

bos decl.  [112],  quant.  [368] 

burim ace.  [99] 

buris gend.  [103] 

caelum decl.  [116] 

calix gend.  [82] 

callis gend.  [103] 

canis decl.  [96] 

caput gend.  [82] 

carbasus gend.  [69],  decl.  [116] 

career gend.  [89] 

cardo gend.  [86] 

caro decl.  [115] 

caulis gend.  [103] 

cave w.  subj.  [315] 

-c6 [19],  quant.  [395] 

celer decl.  [93],  [108] 

cello [162] 

celo vv.  two  ace.  [262] 

Ceres quant.  383 

cinis gend.  [89] 

citerior comp.  [123] 

citimus comp.  [123] 

cito quant.  [396] 

cttus quant.  [209] 

civi abl.  [99] 

clam w.  abl.  [308] 

classi abl.  [99] 


classis gend.  [103] 

clunis . . .  ^ gend.  [103] 

-clutus quant.  [209] 

cohors gend.  [105] 

colli abl.  [99] 

collis gend.  [103] 

colus gend.  [69],  [113] 

com assim.  [12] 

complures decl.  [92] 

con in  cmpds.  w.  dat.  [269] 

cor gend.  [82],  decl.  [98] 

corbi abl.  [99] 

corbis gend.  [103] 

cortex gend.  [83] 

cos decl.  [98] 

eras quant.  [395] 

cratim ace.  [99] 

cravim ace.  [99] 

cucumi abl.  [99] 

cucumim ace,  [99] 

cucumis gend.  [89],  [103] 

cujus decl.  [139] 

-cum [19] 

cupido gend.  [84] 

cur quant.  [395] 

da quant.  [361],  [385] 

das quant.  [361],  [385] 

datus quant.  [209] 

dea decl.  [50] 

dens gend.  [105] 

deus decl.  68 

Diana quant.  [17] 

die 216 

die loc.  [58],  [273] 

dies gend.  60 

difficilis comp.  121 

dignor w.  abl.  [303] 

dignus w.  abl.  [300],  [303] 

dissimilis comp.  121 

dius quant.  [17] 

do irreg.  vb.  226,  quant.  [385] 


INDEX   or   WORDS. 


141 


doceo w.  two  ace.  [262] 

domi...-. loc.  [273] 

domo constr.  [293] 

domos constr.  [265] 

domui loc.  [110] 

domum constr.  [265] 

domus gend.  [113],  decl.  [115] 

dos decl.  [98] 

duam subj.  [226] 

due  216 

duim subj.  [226] 

dum w.  pros.  [309] 

-dum [19] 

duo decl.  [72],  quant.  [365] 

eampse [1^2] 

eapsc [132] 

eapse [132] 

ebur [76] 

^^^^^     I   decl.  141 

ecqvis  ) 

edim subj,  [223] 

edo irreg.  vb.  223 

effigies decl.  [58] 

ego decl.  12-5,  quant.  [374] 

eheu quant.  [17] 

eja quant.  [397] 

eluvies decl.  [58] 

en quant.  [395] 

eo irreg.  vb.  227 

eopse [132] 

epulum decl.  [115] 

ergo w.  gen.  [285] 

escit [221] 

escunt [221] 

eumpse  [132] 

exseqvias  ire [265] 

exterus comp.  [123] 

extimus comp.  [123] 

extremus comp.  [123] 

fac 216 


f acies decl.  [58] 

facilis comp.  121 

f aex decl.  [98] 

fames decl.  [115] 

f amilia decl.  [54] 

faseis gend.  [103] 

febri abl.  [99] 

f ebrim ace.  [99] 

fel gend.  [88] 

femur [76],  decl.  [115] 

f ero irreg.  vb.  224 

fides decl.  [58] 

fido semi-dep.  [216] 

filia decl.  [54] 

fini abl.  [99] 

finis gend.  [103] 

fio quant.  [17],  irreg.  vb.  229 

follis gend.  [103] 

f ons gend.  [105] 

[for] def.  vb.  [235] 

f oras constr.  [265] 

f5rem    }  ^^^^^'  '^^^^^'  ^"''"*-  ^^^^^ 

forceps gend.  [82] 

forfex gend.  [83] 

fornix gend.  [82] 

frater decl.  [80] 

fraus decl.  [98] 

frenum decl.  [116] 

fruor w.  abl.  [297] 

fuam,  etc subj.  [221] 

fungor w.  abl.  [297] 

fusti abl.  [99] 

fustis gend.  [103] 

futurus [221],  quant.  [209] 

gaudeo semi-dep.  [216] 

gigno redupl.  [158] 

glacies decl.  [58] 

glis decl.  [98] 

gracilis comp.  121 

grex gend.  [82] 


142 


INDEX   OF    WORDS. 


grfis decl.  [112],  quant.  [361] 

Hadria gend.  [33] 

haud  scio  an w.  indie.  [323] 

hebes decl.  [93],  [108] 

hie decl.  134 

hie quant.  [395] 

liiems decl.  [78],  gend.  [81] 

hue quant.  [395] 

huniilis comp.  121 

humi loc.  [273] 

humo constr.  [293] 

humus gend.  [69] 

ibi quant.  [378] 

id  genus [267] 

id  temporis [267] 

idem decl.  136,  vv.  dat.  [271] 

idus gend.  [113] 

igni abl.  [99] 

ilico quant.  [396] 

ille decl.131 

illie decl.  [135] 

imber decl.  [102],  gend.  [103] 

imbrex gend.  [83] 

imbri abl.  [99] 

imus comp.  [123] 

in assim.  [12] 

in in  cmpds.  w.  dat.  [269] 

-inde  [19] 

indignus w.  abl.  [300],  [303] 

inferne quant.  [396] 

inferus comp.  [123] 

infimus comp.  [123] 

infitias  ire [263] 

inqvam def .  vb.  [235] 

instar w.  gen.  [285] 

inter in  cmpds.  w.  dat.  [269] 

interest w.  gen.  [291] 

interior comp.  [123] 

intimus comp.  [123] 

ipse ...decl.  132 


ipsus [132] 

is decl.  129 

iste decl.  130 

istie decl.  [135] 

istue  aetatis [267] 

istus [130] 

ita quant.  [397] 

iter decl.  [115] 

itus quant.  [209] 

jecur [70],  decl.  [115] 

jocus decl.  [116] 

jugerum decl.  [116] 

junior comp.  [123] 

Jupiter decl.  [112] 

juvenis  . . .  .decl.  [96],  comp.  [123] 

lac gend.  [105] 

lacti abl.  [101] 

lacus decl.  [110] 

lapis gend.  [82] 

lar quant.  384 

larix gend.  [82] 

later gend.  [89] 

lentim ace.  [99] 

Liger decl.  [102] 

Ligeri abl.  [99] 

Ligerim ace.  [99] 

linter   decl.  [102],  gend.  [103] 

lis decl.  [98] 

litus  quant.  [209] 

locus decl.  [116] 

longius constr.  [296] 

lues decl.  [112] 

lux decl.  [98] 

macte [261] 

magis comp.  with,  123 

magnus comp.  [123] 

major comp.  [123] 

male quant.  [396] 

malo .irreg.  vb.  225 


INDEX   OF   WORDS. 


143 


malus comp.  [123] 

manus gend.  [113] 

margo gend.  [84] 

mas decl.  [98],  quant.  384 

mater decl.  [80] 

maturus comp.  [121] 

maxime comp.  with  123 

maximus comp.  [123] 

maximus  natu [123] 

mel gend.  [88] 

melior comp.  [123] 

memini def .  vb.  [235] 

mentis [274] 

meridies gend,  60 

messim ace.  [99] 

messis gend.  [103] 

-met [19] 

mens decl.  126 

mUIe decl.  [118] 

minimus comp.  [123] 

minimus  natu [123] 

minor comp.  [123] 

minoris [274] 

minus. .  .comp.  [123],  constr.  [296] 

miseret w.  gen.  281 

modo quant.  [396] 

mons gend.  [105] 

morior inflect.  [216] 

multus comp.  [123] 

mus decl.  [98] 

navi abl.  [99] 

navim ace.  [99] 

-n6 [19],  [314],  quant.  [395] 

neqveo irreg.  vb.  228 

nescio  an w.  indie.  [323] 

neuter decl.  71 

ningvis decl.  [98] 

nix .-.decl.  [98] 

nolo irreg.  vb.  225 

non quant.  [395] 

nosco an  o-stem,  [155] 


nullus decl.  71 

num [314] 

ob assim.  [12] 

ob in  cmpds.  w.  dat.  [269] 

obex gend.  [83] 

odi def.  vb.  235 

ohe quant.  [17],  [396] 

olle [130] 

operae  est [272] 

optimus comp.  [123] 

opus w.  abl.  [297] 

orbi abl.  [99] 

orbis gend.  [103] 

ordo gend.  [84] 

'orior inflect.  [216] 

OS •. gend.  [89] 

[ovo]  def.  vb.  [235] 

paenitet w.  gen.  281 

par quant.  384 

par decl.  [93],  [102],  [108] 

paries gend.  [82],  quant.  383 

parti  abl.  [99] 

partini ace.  [99] 

partus decl.  [110] 

parvus, comp.  [123] 

pater decl.  [80] 

pax decl.  [98] 

pecten gend.  [87] 

pejor comp.  [123] 

pelagus decl.  [115] 

pello [162] 

pelvi abl.  [99] 

pelvim ace.  [99] 

pends quant.  [397] 

penus gend.  [112] 

pes  . .  .gend.  [82],  quant  [361],  383 

pessimus comp.  [123] 

pessum  dare [265] 

pessum  ire [265] 

piget w.  gen.  281 


144 


INDEX   OF   WORDS. 


plebes decl.  [58] 

plebes decl.  [98] 

plebs decl.  [98] 

plurimus comp.  [123] 

pluris [274] 

plus  .  .decl.  [92],  comp.  [123], 

constr.  [296] 

pons gend.  [105] 

porticus gend.  [113] 

portus decl.  [IIOJ 

possiem,  etc subj.  [222] 

possum irreg.  vb.  222 

post in  cmpds.  w.  dat.  [269] 

posterns comp.  [123] 

posti  abl.  [99] 

postis gend.  [103] 

postremus • comp.  [123] 

postridie.  w.  ace.  [268],  w.  gen.  [285] 

postumus comp.  [123] 

potessem,  etc [222] 

potior w.  gen.  [290] 

potior  .  .inflect.  [216],  w.  abl.  [298] 

prae in  cmpds.  w.  dat.  [269] 

praecox decl.  [93],  [108] 

praesens [221] 

praesepim ace.  [99] 

pridie. .  .w.  ace.  [268],  w.  gen.  [285] 

primus comp.  [123] 

prior comp.  [123] 

pro in  cmpds.  w.  dat.  [269] 

procul w.  abl.  [308] 

pVofecto quant;  [396] 

propior.  .comp.  [123],  w.  ace.  [268] 

propius w.  ace.  [268] 

prosum irreg.  vb.  [222] 

proxime w.  ace.  [268] 

proximus.  .comp.  [123], w.  ace.  [268] 

-pt6 [19],  quant.  [395] 

pubes quant.  383 

pudet w.  gen.  281 

pulvis  .  . ; gend.  [89] 

puppi abl.  [99] 


puppim ace.  [99] 

puta quant.  [397] 

qvaesumus [179] 

-qvando [19] 

qvanto  .  .  .  tanto [299] 

-qve [19],  quant.  [395] 

qveo irreg.  vb.  228 

qvi decl.  138,  quant.  [374] 

qvia quant.  [397] 

qvid  facias,  etc w.  abl.  [297] 

qvid  fies,  etc w.  abl.  [297] 

qvin quant.  [395] 

qvinam [1^9] 

qvinqvatrus gend.  [113] 

Qvintili abl.  [99] 

qvis decl.  139 

qvisuam [139] 

qvitus quant.  [209] 

qvo  .  .  .  eo [299] 

rastrum decl.  [116] 

ratus quant.  [209] 

ravi abl.  [99] 

ravim ace.  [99] 

rg- quant.  [395] 

refert w.  gen.  291 

res decl.  [58] 

restim ace.  [99] 

Rhea quant.  [17] 

robur [76] 

rumex gend.  [83] 

rumi abl.  [99] 

rure constr.  [293] 

ruri loe.  [273] 

rus constr.  [265] 

rfttus quant.  [209] 

sal .V  . . .  gend.  [88],  quant.  384 

sallo [162] 

salve def.  vb.  [235] 

sam pron.  [128] 


indp:x  of  words. 


145 


sangvis gend.  [87],  clecl.  [115] 

sas pron.  [128] 

satur decl.  [71] 

satus quant.  [209] 

scrobis decl.  [98],  gend.  [103] 

scrobs   decl.  [98] 

securi abl.  [99] 

securim ace.  [99] 

scdes decl.  [96] 

sementim ace.  [99] 

senex decl.  [115],  comp.  [123] 

sentis gend.  [103] 

series decl.  [58] 

sero redupl.  [158] 

Sextili abl.  [99] 

sic quant.  [395] 

siem,  etc subj.  [221] 

silex gend.  [83] 

similis comp.  121 

simul w.  abl.  [308] 

sin quant.  [395] 

sisto redupl.  [158] 

siti abl.  [99] 

sitim ace.  [90] 

situs quant.  [209] 

sodali abl.  [99] 

soleo semi-dep.  [21(3] 

solus decl.  71 

sort! abl.  [99] 

species decl.  [58] 

specus decl.  [110],  gend.  [112] 

spes decl.  [58] 

status quant.  [209] 

stiti redupl.  [164] 

strigili abl.  [99] 

sub assim.  [12] 

sub in  cmpds.  w.  dat.  [269] 

sui decl.  125 

sum irreg.  vb.  221 

sum pron.  [128] 

summus comp.  [123] 

sumus [179] 


sus decl.  [112],  quant.  [361] 

supellex decl.  [115] 

super in  cmpds.  w.  dat.  [269] 

superne-. quant.  [396] 

superus comp.  [123] 

supremus comp.  [123] 

taedet w.  gen.  281 

tellus gend.  [89] 

tenus  .• w.  gen.  [285] 

teres decl.  [93],  [108] 

Tiberi abl.  [99] 

Tiberim  ace.  [99] 

tollo [162] 

torqvis gend.  [103] 

torris gend.  [103] 

totus decl.  71 

trabes decl.  [98] 

trabs decl.  [98] 

tres  decl.  [118] 

tribus decl.  [110],  gend.  [113] 

tridui constr.  [284] 

tu decl.  125 

turbo gend.  [86] 

turri abl.  [99] 

turrim ace.  [99] 

tussi.... abl.  [99] 

tussini ace.  [99] 

tussis gend.  [103] 

• 
ubi quant.  [378] 

ullus . , decl.  71 

ulterior comp.  [123] 

ultimus comp.  [123] 

ungvi abl.  [99] 

ungvis gend.  [103] 

unus decl.  71 

usus w.  abl.  [297] 

uter (pron.)  decl.  71 

uter decl.  [102],  gend.  [103] 

utor w.  abl.  [298] 


140 


IN])EX  OF   WORDS. 


vannus gend.  [69] 

varix gend,  [82] 

vas decl.  [115] 

vates decl.  [96] 

-ve [19],  quant.  [395] 

vectis gend.  [103] 

venuni  dare [265] 

venuni  ire [265] 

venter decl.  [102],  gend.  [103] 

veru decl.  [110] 

vescor vv.  abl.  [298] 

vesper -gend.  [89],  decl.  [115] 


veterrimns comp.  [123] 

vetus comp.  [123] 

vi abl.  [99] 

vim ace.  [99] 

vir decl.  [66] 

virile  secus [267] 

virus decl.  [115] 

vis decl.  [115],  quant.  [361] 

volo irreg.  vb.  225 

volumus [179] 

vomer gend.  [89] 

vulgus decl.  [115] 


Latin  Exercises 


IKTRODUCTOBT  TO 


CESAR'S  GALLIC  WAE, 


TO  ACCOMPANY  THB   8TUDT  OF 


BLACKBURN'S  "ESSENTIALS  OF  LATIN  GRAMMAR/ 


BOSTON : 

GINN,  HEATH,  AND  COMPANY. 

1883. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1883, 

By  F.  a.  BLACKBURN, 

In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress  at  Washington. 


J.  S.  Gushing  &  Co.,  Pbiktbrs,  Boston. 


PREFACE. 


rpHESE  exercises  have  been  prepared  as  a  necessary 
supplement  to  my  "  Essentials  of  Latin  Grammar  " 
to  furnish  the  needed  illustration  and  drill  for  the 
beginner.  They  do  not  essentially  differ  from  other 
collections  of  the  same  plan  and  aim,  but  in  compiling 
them  I  have  kept  in  view  the  following  objects  :  — 

1.  To  provide  the  means  for  studying  the  Grammar 
systematically  from  the  beginning.  Most  exercise-books 
for  beginners  in  Latin  are  so  arranged  as  to  use  the 
Grammar  as  a  reference-book  only,  giving  the  pupil 
detached  principles  to  hold  in  memory  until  he  begins 
the  study  of  his  first  Latin  author.  In  this,  on  the  con- 
trary, the  Grammar  is  taken  in  its  own  order,  and  the 
few  verb-forms  and  principles  of  syntax  necessary  to 
make  sentences  are  put  in  the  vocabularies  and  notes ; 
nothing  is  anticipated,  and  the  use  of  the  Grammar  as 
a  book  of  reference  is  limited  to  portions  already  mas- 
tered, until  the  pupil  reaches  the  exercises  on  syntax. 

2.  To  make  the  earlier  lessons  very  simple,  so  as  to 
require  as  little  labor  as  possible  in  translation  and 
leave  a  broad  margin  of  time  for  the  thorough  mastery 
of  forms.    If  my  experience  is  of  any  value,  poor  scholar- 


4  PREFACE. 

ship  in  Latin  is  far  more  often  the  result  of  lack  of 
training  in  the  inflections  than  in  the  syntax.  The 
latter  is  comparatively  easy  when  the  forms  are  perfectly 
familiar  and  the  general  force  of  flectional  syllables 
understood  and  felt.  The  earlier  sentences,  therefore, 
are  very  easy ;  exercise  in  translation  will  come  later. 

3.  To  make  the  pupil  familiar,  so  far  as  it  can  be  done 
in  a  book  of  this  kind,  with  the  vocabulary  and  style  of 
Caesar's  Commentaries,  and  thus  render  easier  the  hardest 
step  in  the  study  of  Latin, — the  transition  from  the  exer- 
cise-book to  a  Latin  author.  To  this  end  all  the  words 
are  taken  from  the  first  book  of  the  Gallic  War,  and  the 
sentences  are  from  the  same  source  with  the  necessary 
changes,  omissions,  and  variations.  The  Gallic  War  has 
been  chosen  because  it  is  usually  the  first  Latin  author 
put  into  the  pupil's  hands,  and  these  exercises  are  meant 
to  be,  as  they  are  entitled,  "  introductory  "  to  it. 

In  the  matter  of  orthography  I  have  followed,  though 
with  reluctance,  the  usual  custom  of  distinguishing  y  from 
i  and  u  from  v  (except  after  q^  g,  and  s),  believing  that 
the  slight  inconsistency  of  usage  between  the  Grammar 
and  Exercise-book  would  be  less  trouble  to  a  beginner 
than  the  difficulty  of  unlearning  a  system  after  once 
becoming  familiar  with  it.  Marks  of  quantity  have 
been  added  in  the  vocabularies  and  indices,  but  in  the 
exercises  they  have  been  used  only  as  an  aid  to  pronun- 
ciation and  accent,  and  this  aid  is  gradually  withdrawn. 


PREFACE.  5 

No  consistent  plan  of  noting  quantity  has  been  followed ; 
the  marks  have  been  added  to  those  syllables  which  as 
experience  shows,  are  most  often  mispronounced.  In  a 
few  instances  also  the  quantity  mark  has  been  used  to 
give  the  pupil  a  hint  of  the  case  used ;  e.g.^  the  ablative 
singular  of  a-stems  or  accusative  plural  of  2-stems. 

References  to  the  Grammar  are  added  in  both  vocabu- 
laries and  indices  to  all  words  in  the  form  or  syntax  of 
which  there  is  anything  irregular  or  peculiar.  The 
notes  are  intended  to  cover  all  cases  where  the  pupil,  if 
left  without  help,  would  be  likely  to  go  astray,  and  the 
hints  and  directions  for  the  use  of  the  book  are  meant 
for  such  teachers  as  from  lack  of  experience  in  teaching 
elementary  Latin  may  feel  the  need  of  them. 

Corrections  and  suggestions  will  be  welcome. 

F.  A.  BLACKBURN. 

San  Francisco,  Gal., 

July  27,  1883. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


abl ablative. 

ace accusative. 

act active. 

adv adverb. 

(c.) common  [gender] 

conj conjunction. 

(f.) feminine. 

ind indicative. 


inf injinitive. 

(m.) masculine. 

(n.) neuter. 

pi plural. 

prep preposition. 

pres present. 

sing singular. 

w WlYA. 

Gr.,  Blackburn's  "Essentials  of  Latin  Grammar." 
A  small  figure  added  to  a  word  refers  to  the  notes  which  follow  the  exercises. 


00]:^TE1^TS. 


EXERCISES   ON   FORMS. 

I.  Preliminary .9 

11.  The  a-declension ;  present  indicative  of  sum;  subject 
nominative;  agreement  of  tlie  finite  verb;  agree- 
ment of  the  predicate-noun 9 

III.  The  e-declension;  imperfect  indicative  of  sum  .                  .  10 

IV.  The  o-declension ;  questions     .         .                 •         .         •  11 
V.   Adjectives  of  the  a-  and  o-declensions ;   agreement  of  the 

adjective;   present  indicative  active  and   present  in- 
finitive active  of  the  a-stem  verb ;  direct  object           .  12 
VI.   Irregular  a-  and  o-stem  adjectives ;   indirect  object         .  13 
VII.   Eeview  of  Group  A. ;    present  indicative  passive  of   the 

a-stem  verb ;  vocative           ......  14 

VIII.   The  consonant-declension ;  agreement  of  the  appositive  15 
IX.   Adjectives  of  the  consonant-declension;    future  indicative 

active  of  sum 16 

X.  The  1-declension ;  extent  of  time  and  space         .         .         .17 

XI.   Adjectives  of  the  1-declension           .....  18 

XII.   The  u-declensioh 19 

XIII.  Keview  of  the  declensions ;  irregular  nouns    ...  21 

XIV.  Numeral  adjectives 22 

XV.   Comparison  of  adjectives 23 

XVI.   Irregular  comparison .  24 

XVII.   Personal  and  possessive  pronouns    .....  25 

XVIII.   Demonstrative  pronouns ;  is,  ille,  istc,  ipse      .         .         .26 

XIX.   Demonstrative  pronouns ;  hie,  idem       ....  27 

XX.   Relative,  interrogative  and  indefinite  pronoun    .         .         .28 

XXI.   Inflection  of  the  verb 28 

XXII.   Incomplete  tenses  of   a-stem  verbs  ;    moods  in  indepen- 
dent sentences .29 

XXIII.  Incomplete  tenses  of  e-stem  verbs   .....  30 

XXIV.  Incomplete  tenses  of  consonant-stem  and  u-stem  verbs       .  31 


CONTENTS. 


XXV.  Incomplete  tenses  of  short  i-stem  verbs 

XXVI,  Incomplete  tenses  of  long  i-stem  verbs 

XXVII.  Complete  tenses,  active  voice 

XXVIII.  Verb-forms  from  the  simple  stem 

XXIX.  The  periphrastic  conjugations 

XXX.  Review  of  verbs ;   irregular  verbs ;  sum  and 

pounds  - 

XXXI.  Irregular  verbs ;  edo,  fero    .... 

XXXII.  Irregular  verbs ;  volo,  nolo,  malo   . 

XXXIII.  Irregular  verbs ;  do,  eo,  fio  . 

XXXIV.  Impersonal  and  defective  verbs 


its  com- 


32 
33 
84 
35 

37 

38 
39 
40 
41 
42 


EXERCISES  ON   SYNTAX. 

XXXV.   Nominative,  vocative  and  accusative  cases    .        .        .43 

XXXVI.   Dative  case          .        . 44 

XXXVII.   Locative  case 45 

XXXVIII.   Genitive  case ;  source  and  cause        ....  46 
XXXIX.   Genitive  case ;  possessive  and  special  uses    .        .        .47 

XL.  Ablative  case  proper 48 

XLI.   Instrumental  ablative     . 49 

XLII.  Locative  ablative 50 

XLIII.   Comitative  ablative 51 

XLIV.   Ablative  absolute ;  ablative  with  prepositions  .        .  52 

XLV.   Use  of  the  tenses 53 

XL VI.    Subjunctive  in  dependent  clauses       ....  54 

XLVII.   Subjunctive  in  dependent  clauses  (continued)        .        .  55 

XLVIII.   Infinitive 56 

XLIX.   Participles 57 

L.   Gerund  and  gerundive 58 

LI.   Supine 59 

LII.   Forms  of  conditional  sentences 60 

LIII.   Indirect  discourse 61 

LIV.   Indirect  discourse  (continued) 62 

LV.   Indirect  discourse  (continued) 63 

LVI.   Relations  of  place 64 

LVII.    Relations  of  place  (continued) 65 

LVIII.   Relations  of  time 66 

LIX.   Relations  of  time  (continued) 67 

LX.   Caesar,  B.  G.  I.,  cap.  I.-IV,    For  miscellaneous  review  68 


LATIN   EXERCISES. 


EXERCISES. 


>>Kc 


EXERCISES     ON     FORMS, 


Preliminary. 
Learn  thoroughly  Gr.  1-51,  and  practise  to  secure  a 
good  pronunciation  and  the  habit  of  placing  the  accent 
rightly. 

II. 

The  a-declension ;  Gr.  52-56. 

Present  indicative  of  the  verb  sum  (to  he). 

Subject  nominative. 

Agreement  of  the  finite  verb. 

Agreement  of  the  predicate  noun. 

VOCABULARY. 

GalliS,  -ae,  Gaul  (now  France).  e  or  ex  (prep.  w.  abl.),i  out  of,  from. 

linguS.,-ae,  tongue, speech, language.  Sd  (prep.  w.  ace.),  to,  towards,  for. 

Belgae,  -arum  (pi.),  Belgians..  6t  (conj.),  and,  also. 

caus^,  -ae,  cause,  reason.  non  (adv.),^  not. 

GarumnS,  -ae,  Garonne  (river).  stim,  *(/)  am. 

Aquitania,   -ae,  Aquitania   (now  es,  {thou)  art. 

S.  W.  France).  est,  {he,  she,  it)  is. 

In  (prep,  with  abl.),  in,  on,  among.  siiiniis,  {loe)  are. 

In  (prep,  with   ace),  into,  to,  to-  estis,  {you)  are. 

wards, for.  sunt,  {they)  are. 

*  The  personal  pronoun-subject  is  expressed  in  Latin  only  when 
emphatic;  in  ordinary  speech  the  verb-form  shows  the  person  and 
number  of  the  subject. 


10  EXERCISES    ON  FORMS. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  in  Gallia  sum.  2.  lingua^  Belgarum.  3.  in  Garumuam. 
4.  ad  Garumuam.  5.  causa  es.^  6.  exAquitania.  7.  sumua 
in  Gallia.  8.  ad  Belgas.  9.  Belgae  causa  sunt.  10.  lingua 
Galliae  lingua  Belgarum  non  est.  11.  in  Belgis.  12.  in 
Gallia  et  in  Aquitania.        13.  ex  Aquitania  in  Galliam. 

1.  We  are  the  cause.  2.  To  the  Belgians.  3.  Out  of 
Gaul.  4.  In  the  language  of  the  Belgians.  5.  The 
Garonne  is  in  Gaul  and  Aquitania.  6.  The  Garonne  is 
not  in  [the  land  of]^  the  Belgians.  7.  He  is  not  the 
cause.  8.  There  is  no  cause.^  9.  Out  of  Gaul  into  [the 
land  of]  the  Belgians.       10.  Toward  the  Garonne. 


III. 

The  e-declension  ;  Gr.  57-60. 

Imperfect  indicative  of  the  verb  sum  (to  he). 

VOCABULARY, 

res,  r6i,  thing,  matter,  circumstance.  provInciJi,  -ae,  province. 

dies,  diei  (c.),*  day.  naturft,  -ac,  nature,  character. 

fides,  -^1,  faith,  belief ,  promise.  Srftiii,  (7)  was. 

spes,  -6i,  hope.  6ras,  {thou)  wast. 

cXim{^veT^.yf.ai\A.),with,  along  with.  grSt,  {he,  she,  it)  was. 

glorift,  -ae,  glory.  Srainiis,  {we)  were. 

copiS,  -ae,  plenty,  supply.  eratis,  {you)  were. 

copiae  (pi. ),/orces,  troops.  Srant,  {they)  were. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  cum  fide.        2.    erat  spes   gloriae.        3.    fidei   causa.^ 
4.  cum  provinciae  copils.     5.  in  provincia  non  est  Garumna. 
6.  causarum  erat  copia.       7.  rerum  natura.      8.  cum  Belgis 

♦Gender  is  denoted  by  (m.),  (f.),  (n.)  or  (c),  but  only  when  the 
noun  is  an  exception  to  the  rules  given  in  the  Grammar. 


EXERCISES    ON   FORMS.  11 

eratis.  9.  in  copiTs  proviiiciae  Belgae  erant.  10.  Belgae 
non  sumiis.  11.  gloria  diei.  12.  copiae  Belgarum  in 
provincia  sunt.     13.  rerum  causa. 

1.  The  glory  of  the  days.  2.  You^  are  the  glory  of  the 
province.  3.  The  troops  of  the  province  are  among  the 
Belgians.  4.  There  are  troops  in  Gaul.  5.  By  the  na- 
ture of  glory.  6.  With  faith  and  hope.^  7.  He  was  in 
Aquitania  with  the  Belgians.  8.  For  the  sake  of  the  prov- 
ince. 9.  You  were  in  Gaul  for  the  sake  of  glory.  10.  Out 
of  the  province  into  Gaul. 


IV. 

The  o-declension  ;  Gr.  61-69. 
Questions. 

VOCABULARY. 

Snimiis,  -i,  spirit,  courage,  mind.  regnum,  -i,  kingdom,  kingly  power. 

belliim,  -i,  war.  ftg6r,  agri,  land,  farm-land,  field. 

Rlienus,  -i,  Rhine  (river).  frumenttiin,  -i,  corn,  grain  (often 
proelilim,  -i,  battle.  pL). 

Galli,    -oriiin    (pi.),    Gauls    (a  filiQs,  -i,  son. 

people).  populfis,  -i,  a  people,  a  nation. 

Germani,  -oriini  (pi.),  Germans.  f  ilia, -ae,  daughter;  (Gr.  [54]). 

luitiuni,  -i,  beginning.  impgrium,  -i,  power,  sway. 

aorfib  (prep.  w.  abl.),iaz^;a^ /row?,  trans  (prep.  w.  ace),  across,  be- 

from.  yond. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  belli  causa  Galli  erant.  2.  ab  initio  belli.  3.  in 
agro  frumentum  est.  4.  in  agris  Gallorum  frumenti  est 
copia.  5.  ab  Rheno  ad  Garumnam.  6.  cum  filiis  et 
filiabus.  7.  nonne  in  Gallia  initio  belli  eras?  8.  non 
eram.  9.  cum  fide  et  animo.  10.  trans  Rhenura  in 
Germanis  eramus.       11.  estne  copia  frumenti? 


12  EXERCISES    ON   FORMS. 

1.  Was  there  plenty  of  corn?  2.  There  was.  3.  In 
the  beginning^  of  the  war  the  Germans  were  in  Gaul. 
4.  B3'  the  sway  of  Gaul.  5.  By  the  nature  of  the  land. 
6.  The  glory  of  the  war.  7.  The  sph-it  of  the  Belgians. 
8.  The  peoples  of  Gaul.  9.  From  the  Garonne  to  the 
Rhine.  10.  Are  3'ou  Gauls?  11.  We  are  not.  12.  Was 
the  nature  of  the  land  the  cause  of  the  battle?     [No.] 


y. 

Adjectives  of  the  a-  and  o-declensions ;  Gr.  70. 

Agreement  of  the  adjective. 

Present  indicative  active  and  present  infinitive  active 

of  the  a-stem  verb. 
Direct  object. 

VOCABULARY, 

alttis,  -a,  -uni,  high,  deep.  pugnO,  {I)  fight. 

amicus, -S, -uin,iyrienrf/y.  pugnas,  [thou)  fightest. 

angustiis,  -S,  -um,  narrow.  pugnSt,  [he,  she,  it)  fights. 

ctipldus,  -S,  -liin,  desirous.  pugnainiis,  (we)  fight. 

latus,  -ft,  -iim,  broad.  pugnatis,  (ijou)  fight. 

meiis,  -S,  -Tun  (Gr.  120),  my,  mine.  pugnant,  {thei/)  fight. 

pugnarg,  to  fight.  occiipo,  {/)  seize. 

occtiparg,  to  occupy,  seize.  occiipas,  [thou)  seizest. 
intiportarg,  to  import.  etc.  etc. 

RhodSnus,  -i,  Rhone  (river).  import  o,  (/)  import. 
tufis,  -a,  -tim,  thy,  thine,  your.  etc.  etc. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  trans  Rhenum  pugnat.  2.  pugnare  in  Gallis.  3.  regni 
cupidus  est.  4.  populi^  amici  sunt.  5.  trans  Rhenum 
popiili  amici  non  sunt.  6.  Galli  amici^  Germanis  non  sunt. 
7.  Gallorum  amici  Germani  non  sunt.  8.  angustine  sunt 
Rhodanus  et  Rhenus?  9.  Rhodanus  angustus  est;  Rhenus, 
latus.  10.  agrum  amicorum  non  occiipo.  11.  importamus 
frumentum  in  Galliam. 


EXERCISES    ON   FORMS.  13 

1.  You  are  importing  things  into  the  province.  2.  Were 
the  nations  desirous  of  war?  3.  Is  the  Rhine  deep?  4.  The 
Rhine  is  deep  and  broad.  5.  My  son  was  friendly  to  your 
daughter.  6.  Were  you  friendly  to  m}-  daughter?  7.  To 
fight  with  the  Gauls  across  the  Rhone.  8.  My  friends 
were  desirous  of  war.  9.  We  are  seizing  the  lands  of 
the  Belgians.  10.  Are  you  seizing  the  lands  of  my 
friends?  11.  My  friends  are  importing  corn  into  Gaul. 
12,  We  are  desirous  of  glory. 


VI. 

Irregular  a-  and  o-stem  adjectives ;  Gr.  71,  72. 
Indirect  object. 

VOCABULARY, 

ftliiis,  -a,  -iid,i  another.  do,^  (/)  give. 

alter,  -a,  -ttm,i  the  other  (of  two).  dare,  to  give. 

totiis,  -a,  -ttm,  whole,  all.  nuuti  o,  (/)  announce,  tell. 

nniis,  -fi,  -um,  one.  nuntiare,  to  announce,  to  tell. 

inoltiis,  -a,  -tim,  much,  pi,  many.  rip^,  -ae,  hank  (of  a  river). 

magniis,  -S,  -tlm,  great,  large.  viS,  -ae,  way,  road,  path. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  totam  provinciam  occupat.  2.  aliae  viae  sunt.  3.  to- 
tlus  belli  causa  eras.  4.  Gallis  fidem  dat.  5.  aliud  regnum 
occupare.  6.  multae  viae  in  Gallia  sunt.  7.  Gallis  causam 
nuntiat.  8.  altera  via  angusta  est.  9.  ad  ripam  Rhodani. 
10.  Gallis  nuntiamus  belli  magni  initium.  11.  alii  pugnant, 
alii  provinciam  occupant.       12.  erantne  viae  in  provincia? 


1.  The  Rhine  is  broad  and  large.  2.  We  give  the  prov- 
ince to  the  Belgians.  3.  Are  the  Germans  seizing  the 
province?  [No.]  4.  Are  yq^  not  fighting  in  Gaul?  5.  The 
troops  are  on  the  road.  6.  Some  are  desirous  of  glory; 
others,  of   war.       7.  The   people  give   my  son^  the  king- 


14  EXERCISES   ON   FORMS. 

dom.  8.  In  the  whole  province  we  are  desirous  of  a 
battle.  9.  There  is  one  road  in  the  province.  10.  We 
give  all  Gaul  to  the  Germans.  11.  There  is  great  hope 
of  glor}'.  12.  Courage  gives  the  sway  of  Gaul  to  the 
Germans.       13..  Was  there  a  great  war  in  Aquitania? 


Review  of  Group  A. 

Present  indicative  passive  of  a-stem  verbs. 

Vocative. 

VOCABULARY. 

silvS,  -ae,  forest.  6b  (prep.  w.  ace),  on  account  of, 
posterus,  -S,  -Hm,  following,  next.  because  of  for. 

Celtae,  -arum  (pi.),  Celts.  Victoria,  -ae,  victory. 

appello,  -are,i  call.  viuQin,  -i,  wine. 

maturtis,  -fi,  -um,  ripe.  appellor,  (7)  am  called. 

deiis,  -i  (Gr.  G8),  god.  appellarls,  (thou)  art  called. 

gratis,  -a,Q,  popularity ,  favor .  appellatur,  {he,  she,  it)  is  called. 

a  or  Sb  (prep.  w.  abl.),  by  (to  ex-  appellanifir,  {we)  are  -called. 

press  the  doer).  appellamini,  {you)  are  called. 

noster,  -trft,  -trtim,  our,  ours.  appellantiir,  {they)  are  called. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  lingua  nostra  Galli  appellantur.-  2.  alter  Rhenus  appel- 
latur ;  alter,  Rhodanus.  3.  amici  appellamini.  4.  filiusne 
tuus  imperii  cupidus  est?  5.  nostrae  filiae  cupidae  sunt 
gratiae.  6.  Galli  a  Belgis  Celtae  appellantur.  7.  Celtas 
Gallos  appellamus.  8.  frumenta  in  agris  non  erantmatura. 
9.  postero  die^  proelium  erat  in  silva  Belgarura.  10.  im- 
perium  a  dis  datur.  11.  multae  res  in  Belgas  non  im- 
portantur.       12.   proelium  Gallis  a  filio  tuo  nuutiatur. 

1.  Your  son  is  telling  [the  news  of]  the  battle  to  the 
Gauls.  2.  The  one*  people  is  called  Belgians;  the  other, 
Gauls.       3.  You  call  the  Belgians  Gauls.       4.  The  nations 


EXERCISES    ON   FORMS.  15 

of  Gaul  are  called  Celts  in  the  language^  of  the  Belgians. 
5.  Land  is  given  to  the  Germans  b}^  the  Celts.  G.  You 
are  desirous  of  war,  Belgians.^  7.  They  are  fighting  for^ 
many  reasons,  my  son.  8.  The  gods  are  giving  victory  to 
our  friends.  9.  On  the  following  day^  there  was  a  battle 
in  the  forest.  10.  Wine  is  not  imported  into  [the  country 
of]  the  Belgians.  11.  We  do  not  import  our  wine.  12.  The 
grain  ^  is  not  ripe. 


Till. 

The  consonant-declension ;  Gr.  73-90. 
Agreement  of  the  appositive. 

VOCABULARY. 

adsiim,^  (Z)  am  present,  am  by.  honor,  -oris,  honor. 

ddSs,  {thou)  art  present,  art  by.  ciipidltas,  -atls,  desire,  greediness. 

etc.  etc.  constll,  -fills,  consul. 

absfim,!  (7)  am  absent,  am  away.  temptis,  -oris,  time. 

ftbes,  (thou)  art  absent,  art  away.  CaesSr,  -Srls,  Ccesar. 

etc.  etc.  mercator,  -oris,  trader,  merchant. 

lex,  legls,  law.  humanitas,  -atls,  culture,  rejine- 
flamSn,  -Inls,  river.  ment. 

virtus,  -litis,  manhood,  courage,  civitas,  -atls,  state, 

merit.  sol,  soils,  sun. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  tempore  belli  non  aderam.  2.  nonne  consul  abest? 
3.  regni  cupiditas  causa  erat  belli.  4.  Caesar  ob  cupi- 
ditatem  gloriae  pugnat.  5.  mercatores  in  Germanos  multas 
res  important.  6.  cum  fide  et  virtute.  7.  Csesar  consul 
leges  civitati  dat.  8.  leges  naturae  a  dels  dantur.  9.  leges 
totius  Galliae  multae  erant.  10.  tempore  proelii  trans 
flumen  in  Germanis  eram.  11.  honoris  causa  consules 
pugnant. 


16  EXERCISES    ON   FORMS. 

1.  With  Caesar  and  the  consuls.  2.  With  hope  and 
courage.  3.  Caesar  fights  on  one^  bank  of  the  river; 
the  Germans  on  the  other.  4.  Corn  is  imported  across 
the  river  by  the  traders.  5.  Is  Caesar,  the  consul,  seiz- 
ing the  land  of  the  Belgians?  6.  In  the  state  of  the 
Belgians  are  many  rivers.  7.  The  courage  of  the  tradera 
is  not  great.  8.  The}'  were  away  from  the  province  at 
the  beginning  of  the  war.  9.  They  are  called  great  on 
account  of  courage  and  glory.  10.  The  courage  of  the 
Belgians  is  great.  11.  We  were  absent  from  Gaul  in 
the  time^  of  the  war.  12.  The  gods  give  victory  to  the 
consul  on  account  of  [his]   courage. 


IX. 

Adjectives  of  the  consonant-declension ;  Gr.  91-93. 
Future  indicative  active  of  the  verb  sum  (to  6e). 

VOCABULARY. 

v6tfis,  -6rls,  old,  ancient.  ero,  (/)  shall  be. 

ulterior, -ifis, /ar^/ier.  ^r  is,  (thou)  wilt  be. 

cltSrior,  -itts,  nearer.  grit,  {he,  she,  it)  icill  be. 

minor,  -fis,  less,  smaller.  Srlmiis,  {we)  shall  be. 

major,  -us,  larger,  greater.  6rltls,  {yon)  will  be. 

quftm  (conj.),  than.  erunt,  {thet/)  will  be. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  in  Gallia  ulteriore  pugnant  Belgae.  2.  in  silva  cum 
Celtis  erimus.  3.  Caesaris  coj^iae  in  via  erant.  4.  hel- 
ium erit  in  Gallia.  5.  non  erat  causa  belli  in  provincia. 
6.  nonne  amici  Caesaris  eritis?  7.  Belgae  minus  frumenti 
quam  Galli  important.  8.  num  Caesar  consul  erit?  9.  pro- 
vinciara  occupant  et  belli  cupidi  sunt.  10.  Gallia  citerior 
Caesaris  provincia  erat.  11.  veteris  belli  proelia  multa  et 
magna  ^  erant. 


EXERCISES    ON   FORMS.  17 

1.  The  Rhine  is  larger  than  the  Rhone.  2.  Across  the 
Rhine  are  larger  forests  than  in  Gaul.  3.  The  forests  will 
be  smaller.  4.  The  Germans'  courage  is  greater  than  the 
Gauls'.  5.  Will  there  not  be  a  battle  in  the  forest?  6.  My 
friends  will  be  present.  7.  The  whole  people  was  present. 
8.  Farther  Gaul  is  larger  than  Hither^  Gaul.  9.  The  war 
will  be  greater  than  the  old  [war].''  10.  My  desire  of  war 
is  less  [than  it  was].  11.  A  great  battle  is  announced. 
12.  The  gods  give  victory  and  glory  in  war.  13.  On  the 
banks  of  the  Rhine  were  many  large  ^  forests.  14.  Some 
are  friendly,  others  are  desirous  of  war. 


The  i-declension ;  Gr.  94-105. 
Extent  of  time  and  space. 

VOCABULARY. 

pars,  -rtls,  part  crSmo,  -are,  I  hum. 

finis,  -ms   (c),  end;   pi.   hounds,  post  (prep,  with  ace),  q/?er. 

lands.  multitudo,  -Inls,  multitude. 

mons,  -ntis  {si.),  mountain.  pStgr,  -tris,  father. 

mors,  -rtis,  death.  annQs,  -i,  year. 

urbs,  -bis,  city.  pax,  pacis,  peace. 

mensis,  -is,  month.  enuntio,  -are,  /  announce. 

ignis,  -is,  Jire.  Smo,  -are,  /  love, 

de  {i^re-p.w.  abl.),  down  from,  from.  Germania, -ae,  Germany. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  rem  enuntiat.  2.  res  enuntiatur.  3.  filio  meo  r6s 
enuntiantur.  4.  fines  Bfelgarum  magni  erant.  5.  pars 
magna  igni  crematur.  6.  Caesar  urbem  cremat.  7.  con- 
sulis  causa  pacem  amo.  8.  filius  consulis  amicus  Caesari 
erat.  9.  multos  annos  in  finibus  Belgarum  eram.  10.  de 
monte  in  fiumen.     11.  a  filio  meo  pax  enuntiatur.     12.    nam 


L 


18  EXERCISES    OX   FORMS. 

montes  Galliae  majores  sunt  quam  nostri?  13.  pater  tuus 
urbis  Galliae  igni  cremat.  14.  post  annos  multos  pax 
enuntiatur.        15.  mors  consulis  enuntiatur. 

1.  The  death  of  Caesar  is  announced.  2.  A  multitude 
of  traders.  3.  The  cities  of  Gaul  are  large.  4.  He  is 
burning  a  part  of  the  cities  with  fire.  5.  I  am  friendl}^  to 
the  consul's  son  for  Caesar's  sake.  6.  The  greediness  of 
the  traders  was  the  cause  of  the  war.  7.  I  was  in  the  land^ 
of  the  Belgians  many  months.  8.  There  was  a  fire  in  the 
mountains  [for]  many  days.  9.  In  the  mountains  there 
are  many  rivers.  10.  Some  of  the  traders  were  among  the 
Belgians,  others  were  across  the  river.  11.  The  honors  of 
Caesar  are  many.  12.  I  was  among  the  mountains  one 
month.      13.  We  announce  peace. 

XI. 

Adjectives  of  the  i-declension ;  Gr.  106-108. 

VOCABULARY. 

omnls,  -S,  all;  every.  Impero,   -ar6,  I  order,   I  levy 

tres,  tria  (pi.),  three.  (troops). 

6i*iens,  -ntls,  rising.  ISgio,  ronls,  legion. 

oriens  sol,  east.  altitude,  -Inls,  height  or  depth 

fScIlIs,  -6,  easy.  p6r  (prep.  w.  ace),  through. 

ilpttd  (prep.  w.  ace),  among,  with.  milSs,  -Itis,  soldier. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  tres  viae  sunt  per  Galliam.  2.  via  facilis  est  per 
Belgas..  3.  altitudo  fluminis  minor  est.  4.  tres  partes 
sunt  omnis  Galliae.  5.  tota  via  angusta  erit.  6.*  In 
Gallia  legio  erat  una.  7.  tres  legiones  provinciae^  im- 
perat.  8.    Caesaris   gratia    apud    milites    magna    erat. 

9.  militibus  fidem  damus.        10.  postero  die  tres  legiones 


EXERCISES    ON   FORMS.  19 

aberant.  11.  altitudo  montium  magna  erat.  12.  omnes 
viae  angustae  sunt  et  fluminum  altitudo  magna.  13.  honor 
consiilis  major  erat  quam  virtus.  14.  virtute  et  animo 
honor  et  victoria  militibus  dantur. 

1.  We  shall  be  desirous  of  peace.  2.  The  old  forest  is 
burning.^  3.  I  was  in  the  city  three  days.  4.  All  the 
roads  are  narrow.  5.  At  the  beginning  of  the  war  there 
were  three  legions  in  Gaul.  6.  The  popularity  of  Caesar 
was  less  among  the  Gauls  than  among  the  Germans.  7.  The 
courage  of  the  soldiers  gives  peace  to  the  province.  8.  One 
part  of  the  road  was  narrow ;  the  other  part  was  easy. 
9.  The  hope  of  glory  gives  courage  to  the  soldiers.  10.  I 
levy  three  legions  on  the  province  (lit.  order  to  the  prov- 
ince). 11.  I  was  in  the  province  three  months.  12.  There 
is  an  easy  road  through  Gaul.  13.  All  the  legions  were 
present. 

XII. 

The  u-declension ;  Gr.  109-113, 

VOCABULARY. 

Ciilttis,  -us,  civilization ;  refinement.       Dumnorix,  -Igis,  Dumnorix. 

Ificiis,  -us  (Gr.  [110]),  lake.  Divitiaciis,  -i,  Divitiacus. 

m&iiiis,  -us  (p.),  hand.  Orgetorix,  -igiis,  Orgetorix. 

occasfis,  -us,  fall,  setting  (of  the       Piso,  -onis,  Piso. 

sun).  Messala,  -ae,  Messala. 

occasus  soils,  sunset,  west.  matrimonium,  -i,  marriage. 

seuatiis,  -us,  senate.  liSbito,  -are,  /  dwell. 
principatus,  -us,  leadership. 

EXERCISES. 

1.- Dumnorix  et  Divitiacus  cum  Caesare  pugnant.  2.  a 
senatu  amicus  appellor.  3.  tres  menses  in  Gallia  eram  ; 
annum  unum  in  urbe.  4.  post  mortem  Caesaris  in  Ger- 
mania    tres    annos    eramus.         5.    Mem    inter    se^    dant. 


20  EXERCISES   ON   FORMS. 

6.  Dumnorix  igni  ^  crematur.  7.  in  iirbe  Belgarum  habita- 
mus.  8.  habitasne  trans  Rhodanum?  9.  principatus 
cupidus  erat  Messala.  10.  cultus  provinciae  major  quam 
Gallorum  est.  11.  Piso  et  Messala  tres  mensis  aberaut  in 
Gallia.  12.  num  in  Gallia  citeriore  multos  niensis  eritis? 
13.  pacem  amat  multitudo.       14.  populi  causa  pugnamus. 

1.  The  Belgians  are  distant  from  the  culture  and  refine- 
ment of  the  province.  2.  The  Belgians  dwell  in  one  part 
of  Gaul ;  the  Gauls,  in  another.  3.  Divitiacus  is  called 
friend  by  the  senate.  4.  After  the  death  of  Dumnorix, 
Piso  was  in  the  city  [for]  many  months.  5.  From  the 
lake  to  the  mountain.      6.  Piso  and  Messala  were  consuls. 

7.  The  depth  of  the  river  is  less  than  [that]  of  the  lake. 

8.  He  gives  his  daughter  in  marriage^  to  Dumnorix.  9.  The 
consul,  Messala,  was  on  the  mountain  af*  sunset.  10.  The 
lands  of  the  Gauls  are  broad,  ours  are  narrow.  11.  He 
tells  [the  news  of]  the  battle  to  the  senate.  12.  The 
leadership  of  Gaul  is  given  to  Caesar  by  the  people. 


EXERCISES    ON   FORMS.  21 


XIII. 

Review  of  the  declensions. 
Irregular  nouns ;  Gr.  114-117. 

VOCABULARY. 

lociis,  -i  (Gr.  [116]),  joZace.  Iter, -itmeris  (Gr.  [116]),  journei/, 

circtim  (prep,  w,  ace),  around.  inarch,  route. 

domiis,  -us  (r.),  (Gr.  [115]),  house,  Helvetii,  -ortim,  Helvetians. 

home.  ■  voluntas,  -atls,  wish,  consent. 

sanguis,    -mis   (m.),    (Gr.   [115]),  livdmo, -SiV^,  I  am  wintering. 

blood. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  iter  Helvetidrum  Caesari  nuntiatiir.  2.  tres  legiones 
•circum  urbem  hiemant.  3.  domus  angusta  erat.  4.  locus 
magnus  est.  5.  iter  non  facile  erit.  6.  itinera  facilia 
sunt.  7.  voluntate  Caesaris  in  Belgis  habito.  8.  regni 
cupiditate^  provinciam  occupatis.  9.  apud  milites  hiemo. 
10.  iter  vetus  facile  erat.  11.  altero  in  loco  proelium 
erat  magnum.       12.  agri  militibus  a  populis  Galliae  dantur. 

13.  initio  belli  spes  erat  victoriae  magna.       14.  trans  flumen 
via  angusta  est.        15.  pater  mens  in  urbe  non  habitat. 

1.  We  are  wintering  among  the  Belgians.  2.  The  places 
are  large  and  broad.  3.  The  Helvetians  are  on  the  march. 
4.  I  dwell  in  Caesar's  house.  5.  Around  the  places  was 
much  blood.^  6.  The  Rhine  and  the  Garonne  are  large 
xivers.  7.  We  were  in  the  place  three  years.  8.  The 
houses  are  small.  9.  We  were  at  home.^  10.  There  is 
a  road  through  the  mountains.  11.  Orgetorix  was  desirous 
of  kingty  power..  12.  The  soldier  was  at  home  on  the 
next  da3\       13.  The  legions  winter  among  the  Helvetians. 

14.  There  was  an  easy  route  through  Gaul.     15.  Dumnorix 
and  Divitiacus  dwell  among*  the  mountains. 


22  EXERCISES    ON   FORMS. 

XIV. 

Numeral  adjectives ;  Gr.  118. 

VOCABULARY. 

passiis,  -us,  step,  pace.  confirm  are,  tojix,  appoint,  set. 

mille  passuiini,  mile  ( 1000  paces ) .  confirm  o,  I  appoint. 

pes,  pedis  {M.),foot.  etc.  etc. 

profectio,  -onis,  departure,  start.  homo,  -inis,  man,  person. 

vicus,  -i,  village.  reditio,  -onis,  coming  back,  return. 

Alpes,  -ium,  Alps.  ItSliS,  -ae,  Itali/. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  domum^  reditionis  spes.  2.  vici  omnes  cremantur. 
3.  profectionem  in  tertium  annum  lege  confirmant.  4.  de- 
cern annos  in  Gallia  eram.  5.  millia  passuum  viginti  tria 
silva  abest.  6.  flumen  pedes  undeviginti  altum  erat.  7.  in 
itinere  copia  frumenti  legionibus  datnr.  8.  fratri  tuo  im- 
perium  Galli  dant.  9.  duae  Galliae  sunt;  citerior  in  Italia 
est,  ulterior  trans  Alpis.  10.  Gallia  citerior  minor  est 
quam  Gallia  ulterior.  11.  per  Alpis  in  Galliam  mercatores 
multas  res  important.  12.  ob  profectionem  militum  pater 
tuus  omnis  vicos  cremat.  13.  in  vicis  amicis  copia  erat 
frumenti.       14.  vici  amicorum  tuorum  cremantur. 

1.  The  road  is^  three  miles  from  the  river.  2.  There  is 
one  legion  in  Farther  Gaul.  3.  Our  departure  is  fixed  by 
law  for^  the  third  year.  4.  The  Alps  are  high  mountains. 
5.  The  Germans  were  in  Gaul  five  months.  6.  After  the 
death  of  Orgetorix,  the  war  was  announced  to  my  father 
by  Piso.  7.  Three  months  after  the  beginning  of  the  war 
I  was  at  home.^  8.  Two  legions  are  wintering  in  Gaul ; 
the  one  among  the  Belgians,  the  other  across  the  Garonne. 
9.  The  city  is  ^  thirteen  miles  from  the  mountain.  10.  On 
the  seventh  day  ^  I  shall  be  on  the  bank  of  the  Rhine. 


EXERCISES    ON   FORMS.  23 

XV. 

Comparison  of  adjectives ;  Gr.  119-123. 

VOCABULARY. 

nobilis,  -e,  noble,  of  high  birth.  fortis,  -e,  brave. 

magis  (adv.),  more.  longe  (adv.),_/ar,  by  far. 

difficnis,  -e,  difficult,  hard.  miniis  (adv.),  less. 

maxime   (adv.),  most,  very,  espe-  Romaniis,  -S,  -ilin,  Roman. 

ciallij.  f&cllis,  -e,  easy. 
spero,  -are,  /  hope,  I  expect. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  una  ex  parte ^  mens  altissimus^  est;  altera  ex  parte, 
flumen  Rhenus ;  tertia,  Rhodanus.  2.  flumina  latissima 
multa  sunt.  3.  Piso  in  Helvetiis  hiemat.  4.  tempore 
belli  magnus  est  honor  militum.  5.  a  senatu  populi  Ro- 
man! amicus  appellatur.  6.  apud  Romanos  in  ripa  fluminis 
aderamus.  7.  difficillimura  est^  res  in  Belgas  importare. 
8.  itinera  per  AlpTs  in  Galliam  erant.  9.  altitudo  mon- 
tium  magna  est.       10.  via  non  est  alia. 

1.  Among  the  Helvetians  Orgetorix  was  far  the  noblest. 
2.  The  Belgians  are  the  bravest  of  all  the  Gauls.  3.  To 
seize  all  Gaul  is  difficult.  4.  The  journey  is  very  difficult. 
5.  There  are  many  very  high  mountains  in  Gaul.  6.  There 
are  rivers  in  Gaul  deeper  than  the  Rhone.  7.  The  Rhine 
is  broader  than  the  Rhone.  8.  The  route  through  the  Alps 
is  harder.  9.  We  iBght  with  the  Romans.  10.  The  Ger- 
mans are  braver  than  the  Gauls.  11.  It  is  more  difficult^ 
to  fight  with  the  Romans  than  with  the  Belgians. 


24  EXERCISES    ON   FORMS. 

XYI. 

Irregular  comparison ;  Gr.  [123]. 

VOCABULARY. 

boniis,  -S,  -ttm,  good.  interior ;  intimiis,  inner ;  inmost. 

mglus,  -a,  -fim,  had.  prior;  primus, former;  first. 

parvus,  -a,  -fim,  small.  pro  prior;  proximus,  nearer;  Tzear- 

senex  (Gr.  [115]),  oW.  est,  next. 

juvenis  (Gr.  [96]),  yomi^r.  ulterior;   ultimiis, /wrfAer, /<rfA- 

exterfis,  -a,  -iim,i  outside,  outer.  est. 

duo, -ae, -6  (Gr.  [72]),  ^u;o.  Sequfini,    -orfim,    Sequanians   (a 

Inferus,  -S,  -iiin,i  lower,  inferior.  tribe). 

supSrus,  -a,  -uin,i  upper.  confirmo,  -are,  make  (peace). 

EXERCISES. 

1.  ad  iuferiorem  partem  flaminis  Rheni.  2.  cum  proxi- 
mis  civitatibus  pacem  confirmatis.  3.  erant  itinera  duo; 
unum  per  Sequanos.,  angustum  et  difficile,  alterum'per  pro- 
vinciam  nostram.  4.  quam^  maximis  itineribus.  5.  quam 
plurimas  urbis  occupant.  6.  tres  partes^  Helvetiorum  trans 
Rhodanum  sunt.  7.  per  Alpis  erat  proximum  ^  iter  in  Gal- 
liam  ulteriorem.  8.  Helvetii  primus  populus  trans  Rho- 
danum sunt.  9.  in  summo  monte''  multi  milites  sunt. 
10.  nostri  milites  fortiores  sunt.  11.  flumina  Galliae 
majora  quam  Italiae  sunt.  12.  veterrima  est  urbs  Hel- 
vetiorum. 

1.  Nearer  Gaul  is  smaller  than  Farther  Gaul.  2.  On 
the  following  day,  Caesar  was  among  the  Sequanians.  3.  I 
am  making  peace  with  as  many  states  as  possible.^  4.  Cae- 
sar's desire  of  kiuglj'  power  was  less  than  Piso's.  5.  The 
former  soldiers  were  j'ounger  and  braver.  6.  There  are 
older  men  in  the  neighboring^  cities.  7.  In  the  country 
of  the  Belgians  are  many  large  ^  cities.  8.  The  larger  part 
of  the  multitude  is  on  the  road.  9.  Victory  is  given  to  the 
braver  men.  10.  The  Romans  are  called  brave  by  our  con- 
suls.    11.  The  old  route  is  better  than  the  narrow  road. 


EXEllCISES    ON   FORMS.  25 

XTII. 

Personal  and  possessive  pronouns  ;  Gr.  124-126. 

VOCABULARY. 

inter    (prep.    w.   ace),  between,  csistis, -us,  chance,  accident, 

among.  sui,  etc.,  himself,  herself,  etc. 

^gjo,  etc.,  /,  me,  etc.  nulliis,  -S,  -um  (Gr.  71),  no,  no 
tu,  etc.,  thou,  thee,  etc.  one. 

suiis,  -S,  -ttm,  his,  his  oicn,  her,  etc.  vest6r,  -trS,  -trum,  ijour,  yours. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  tu,  ml  fill,  junior  es  quam  ego.  2.  nostri  animi  belli 
cupidi  sunt.  3.  principatum  provinciae  Caesar  mihi  dat. 
4.  et^  ego^  et  tu,  mi  amice,  eramus  in  silva.  5.  tibi  nun- 
tiat  victoriam.  6.  vobiscum^  tres  menses  milites  erant. 
7.  hostes  inter  se®  pugnant.  8.  victoria  nostrarum  legio- 
num  nuntiatur.  9.  iter  nobis  difRcilius  erit  quam  tibi. 
10.  Helvetii  nos  amicos  appellant.  11.  vestri  fines, 
amici,  a  Gallis  occupantur.  12.  omnes  legiones  nostrae 
cum  amicis  tuis  in  Belgis  pugnant.  13.  senatus  te  ami- 
cum  populi  appellat.  14.  castra  Caesaris  meliore  in  loco 
quam  mea  est. 

1.  You  are  too^  desirous  of  war,  my  friends.  2.  My 
legion  is ^  four  miles  distant^  from  the  Rhone.  3.  At  the 
time  of  your  departure  I  was  with  Caesar.  4.  The  lands 
of  the  Sequanians  are  broader  than  our  [lands].  5.  Five 
years  after  the  war,  Orgetorix  was  with  us  in  Farther  Gaul. 
6.  It  will  be  easy  to  seize  your  cities.  7.  The  Sequanians 
are  fighting  with  one  another.^  8.  A  part  of  the  enemy  is 
present  in  the  cit3\  9.  There  are  very  man}^  nations  in  the 
country^  of  the  Germans.  10.  The  legions  were  present 
by  chance. 


26  EXERCISES    OX   FORMS. 


XYIII. 

Demonstrative  pronouns ;   is,  ille,  iste,  ipse ; 
Gr.  127-132. 

VOCABULARY. 
incolS,  -ae  (m.),  inhabitant.  saepe  (adv.),  often. 

satis  (adv.),  enough.  is,  eS,  id,  this,  that ;  he,  she,  it. 

novus,  -a,  -um,  new.  iste,  Istfi,  istttd,  that. 

ille,  ilia,  illiid,  that.  ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum,  self. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  Galliae  incolae  ipsorura  lingua  Celtae,  nostra  Galli 
appellantur.  2.  eorum  omnium  fortissiml  sunt  Belgae. 
3.  ad  eos  mercatores  saepe  res  important.  4.  illi  populi 
proximi  sunt  Germanis.  5.  ea  de  causa  Helvetii  fortissiml 
sunt  omnium  Gallorum.  6.  is  locus  angustus  erat  natura. 
7.  consul  ipse  aberat  a  proelio.  8.  mortem  patris  mei 
ipsam  nuntiatis.  9.  ad  eas  res  satis  ^  est  annus.  10.  mer- 
catores ipsi  res  istas  in  Belgas  non  important.  11.  vinum  a 
nobis  non  importatur.  12.  illius  urbis  incolae  res  nullas  im- 
portant. 13.  Belgae  sunt  Galliae  populus  ultimus.  14.  om- 
nium militum  longe  erat  ille  fortissimus. 

1.  These  soldiers  are  braver  than  you.  2.  He  levies  on 
the  whole  province  a  large  number  of  soldiers.  3.  For 
these  reasons  I  shall  be  present  with  you.  4.  At  that  time 
the  journey  through  the  Alps  was  very  difficult.  5.  The 
road  itself  is  easier  than  yours.  6.  This  grain  is  not  ripe. 
7.  His  desire  of  honor  is  very  great.  8.  The  height  of 
that  mountain  is  less  than  [that]  of  the  Alps.  9.  Dum- 
norix  himself  is  desirous  of  a  revolution.-  10.  You  are  at 
home  ;  I  am  desirous  of  a  return  home.  11.  I  am  levying 
as  many  soldiers  as  possible^  on  the  province.  12.  They 
are  fighting  with  him  on  the  top  of  the  mountain.  13.  I 
was  in  that  city  three  months. 


EXERCISES    ON   FORMS.  27 

XIX. 

'     Demonstrative  pronouns ;  hic,  idem ;  Gr.  133-137. 

VOCABULARY. 

consiliuin,  -i,  j;/an.  regio,  -onls,  region,  country. 

castrS,  -oruin  (pi.),  cavip.  Mc,  liaec,  hoc,  this. 

navis,  -IS,  ship.  id6m,  eadgin,  Idem,  same. 
lux,  lucls,  light. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  eodem  tempore  apud  vos  aderam.  2.  baec  via  vetus 
est;  ilia  est  nova.  3.  eadem  nuntiantur  ab  aliis.  4.  in 
ejusdem  fluminis  ripa  urbs  erat  major.  5.  ab  iisdem  nostra 
consilia  hostibus  enuntiantur.  6.  prima  luce  ego  in  summo 
monte  eram.  7.  hi  milites  in  Gallia  hiemant ;  illi  in  vicis 
Alpium.        8.    pacem   cum  civitatibus  iisdem  confirmamus. 

9.  eo   die   tria  millia  passuum  ab  eorum  castris   aberam. 

10.  habito  in  ripa  fluminis  ejusdem.  11.  naves  ipsae 
eodem  in  loco  erunt.  12.  eo  tempore  et  ego  et  ille  casu 
aderamus.  13.  via  ilia  magis  angusta  quam  difficilis  est. 
14.  in  castris  majoribus  multi  milites  eo  tempore  erant. 

1.  The  rivers  of  this  region  are  broad.  2.  The  other 
mountain  is  higher  than  this.  3.  I  was  present  with  you 
in  that  battle.  4.  The  depth  of  these  rivers  is  great. 
5.  These  things  are  told  to  me  by  the  enemy.  6.  My 
enemies  are  very  many  and  their  country  ^  large.  7.  The 
place  was  narrow  and  the  road  new  and  difficult.  8.  The 
cities  and  villages  are  burned  with  fire.  9.  Three  ships  of 
Caesar  himself  are  burned  by  the  same  enem3\  10.  There 
was  no  hope  of  peace.  11. 1  give  you  my  promise.  12.  This 
region  is  the  best  part  of  the  land  of  the  Belgians.  13.  This 
mountain  is  ^  three  miles  distant  ^  from  the  river.  14.  The 
same  men  dwell  across  this  river. 


28  EXEIiCISES    ON   FORMS. 

XX. 

Relative,  interrog.  and  indef.  pronoun  ;  Gr.  138-141. 

VOCABULARY, 
ante  (prep.  w.  ace),  before.  factio,  -onis,  parti/,  faction. 

acies,  -ei,  edge,  line  of  battle.  pSratus,  -a,  -ttin,  ready,  prepared. 

effemino,  /  weaken ;  effeminate.  quis,    quae,   quid,   wlio  9    which  f 

etc.  etc,  what  ? 

qui,  quae,  quod,  who,  which,  that.       quis,  quae,  quid,  any,  any  one. 
nunc  (adv.),  now. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  duo  legiones,  quae  in  castris  eraut,  in  silva  nunc  pug> 
nant.  2.  iidem,  qui  nobiscum  in  acie  erant,  in  vicis  Hel- 
vetiorum  hiemant.  3.  quis  has  res  importat?  4.  cui 
victoria  hostium  nuntiatur?  5.  mihi  erit  hoc  iter  difficilius 
quam  tibi,  qui  es  junior.  6.  Galliae  totius  factiones  sunt 
duae.  7.  omnis  Galliae  tres  sunt  partes,  quarum  una 
Aquitania  appellatur.  8.  mercatores  ea  important  quae 
animos  effeminant.  9.  ad  earn  rem  parati  sumus.  10.  do- 
mum  reditionis  spes  non  est.  11.  populi  qui  trans  Rhenum 
habitant  fortiores  sunt  quam  Galliae  populi. 

1.  We,  who  are  in  camp,  are  ready  for  war.  2.  There 
will  be  a  battle  in  this  village.  3.  Those  things  which 
weaken  the  courage^  of  the  Belgians  are  not  imported. 
4.  You  arc  seizing  more  land  ^  than  the  enemy.  5.  There 
is  a  large  number  of  the  enemy  on  that  mountain.  6.  Across 
the  same  river  there  is  a  multitude  of  our  soldiers.  7.  Be- 
fore his  return  from  the  war,  there  will  be  a  battle.  8.  Cae- 
sar calls  his  soldiers  friends.  9.  They  give  a  promise  to 
each  other.  10.  On  the  next  day  they  burn  the  village 
which  was  on  the  bank  of  this  river.  11.  Who  is  not 
ready  to  fight  with  the  enemy?  12.  What  troops  are  in 
the  villages?      13.  Is  any  one  fighting  in  the  forest?  [No.] 

XXI. 

Inflection  of  the  verb ;  Gr.  142-190. 


EXERCISES    ON   FORMS.  29 

XXII. 

Incomplete  tenses  of  a-stem  verbs;  Gr.  191-195. 
Moods  in  independent  sentences. 

VOCABULARY. 

commeo,  -are,  go  and  come ;  with  concllio,  -ar6,  gain,  gain  over,  get. 

ad,  visit,  praesto,  -arg,  stand  before,  excel. 

specto,  -arS,  look,  look  at,  see.  vSgor,  -ari  (dep.),^  wander. 

bello,  -are,  make  war,  war.  arbitror,  -ari  (dep.),i  think,  judge. 

comparo,   -ar6,  prepare,  make  conor,  -ari  (dep.),i  tnj,  attempt. 

readij.  Inclto,  -arg,  rouse  up,  excite. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  mercatores  saepe  ad  Gallos  commeant.  2.  Belgae 
proximi  sunt  Germanis  qui  trans  Rhenum  habitant.  3.  ea 
comparare  conabar,  quae  importantur.  4.  conemur,  mei 
amici,  urbem  occupare.  5.  nuutiate  victoriam,  mi  pater, 
tuls  militibus.  6.  spectant  in  orientem  solem.  7.  fides 
dabitur^  nobis.  8.  conabantur  Orgetorix  et  Helvetii  omnis 
populos  Galliae  incitare.       9.  hostes  bellandi^  cupidi  erant. 

10.  civitas  ob  earn  rem  incitabitur.  11.  Helvetii  minus 
vagabantur  quam  alii  populi  Galliae.  12.  Belgae  extremis 
in  finibus  Galliae  habitabant.  13.  regnum  in  civitate  sua 
occupabit  Orgetorix,  cujus  pater  nobis  amicus  multos  annos 
erat. 

1.  Rouse  up  the  men  of  this  city.  2.  My  sons  were 
trying  to  rouse  up  the  states  of  Gaul.  3.  The  enemy  were 
wandering  through  the  country  and  cities  of  the  Sequanians. 
4.  After  the  death  of  Orgetorix  the  Helvetians  tried  to  seize 
the  lands  of  all  Gaul.  5.  Orgetorix  will  be  burned  with 
fire  by  his  own  state.  6.  Call  him,  my  son,  the  friend  of 
the  Roman  people.  7.  Let  us  prepare  all  things  for  our 
return  home.  8.  May  you  be  called  brave  !  9.  May  they 
be  burned  with  fire !        10.  May  the  gods  give  you  glory ! 

11.  In  their  own  language  they  are  called  Celts;  in  ours, 
Gauls.  12.  Traders  visit  "*  them  least  often  and  import 
wine  and  other  things. 


so  EXERCISES    OK   FORMS. 

XXIII. 

Incomplete  tenses  of  e-stem  verbs ;  Gr.  196-197. 

VOCABULARY. 

pertineo,    -er6,    pertain,     belong,  video,  -erg,  see. 

stretch.  obtmeo,  -erg,  hold,  possess. 

prohibeo,  -ere,  heep  out,  jjrohibit,  contineo,  -er6,  hold  in,  hound. 

stop.  pSteo,  -erg,  extend. 

hSbeo,  -ere,  have.  JurS,  -ae.  Jura  (a  mountain). 

undiquS  (adv.),  on  all  sides.  qu5d  (conj.),  because. 
moveo,  -erg,  move. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  Belgae  pertinent  ad  inferiorem  partem  fluminis  Rheni. 
2.  undique  loci  natura  Helvetii  continentur ;  una  ex  parte  ^ 
monte  Jura  altissimo,  qui  est  inter  Sequanos  et  Helvetios ; 
altera  ex  parte  flumine  Rheno,  altissimo  et  latissimo.  3.  pro- 
fectio  nostra  in  annum  tertium  lege  confirmabatur.  4.  pos- 
ter© die  castra  ex  eo  loco  movent.  5.  Caesar  ei  legion! 
quam  secum  habebat  copiam  frumenti  comparabat.  6.  haec 
in  Belgas  per  provinciam  importamus  quod  aliud  iter  nullum 
habemus.  7.  urbs  extrema  haec  est  et  proxima  Helvetio- 
rum  finibus. 

1.  There  are  two  routes  by  which  ^  traders  will  visit  ^  us. 
2.  The  Belgians  kept  traders  out  of  their  territories.  3.  I 
will  gain  the  royal  power  ^  for  3'ou  with  my  troops.^  4.  The 
territories*  of  the  Helvetians  were  narrow.  5.  The  Helve- 
tians had  narrow  territories,  which  extended  two  hundred 
and  forty  miles  in  length,®  one  hundred  and  eighty  in 
breadth.®  6.  You  will  attempt  the  same  thing  as^  I. 
7.  Did  he  move  camp  on  that  day?  [No.]  8.  Let  us 
keep  the  enemy  ^  out  of  our  territories.  9.  Move  camp 
often  and  report^  to  me  the  battles  3^ou  see.^"  10.  The 
Gauls  hold  one  part  of  the  country;  the  Belgians,  another. 
11.  Aquitania  extended  from  the  Garonne  river  to  the 
mountains. 


EXEllCISES    ON    FORMS.  31 


XXIY. 

Incomplete  tenses  of  consonant-stem  and  u-stem  verbs ; 
Gr.  198, 199. 

VOCABULARY. 

incolo,  -6re,  dwell.  contendo,  -6re,  contend,  fight,  has- 
divido,  -erg,  divide,  separate.  ten,  strive. 

g6ro,  -6re,  manage,  carry  on,  wage.  influo,  -er6,  flow  into. 

praecedo,  -ere,  precede,  surpass.  tribuo,  -erg,  assign,  attribute. 

oce^niis,  -i,  ocean.  debeo,  -ere,  owe,  ought. 

aut  (conj.),  or.  f6re  (adv.),  almost. 

aut .  .  .  aut,  either  .  .  .  or.  quotidiauiis,  -h,  -fim,  daily. 

perduco,  -ere,  lead  through,  build,  fossS,  -ae,  ditch, 

construct.  mnrus,  -i,  wall. 

nemo,  -Inis,  no  one.  cum  (conj.),  when. 
fluo,  flu6r6,^ow. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  flumen  est  quod  per  fines  Sequanorum  fluit.  2.  Belgae 
proximi  sunt  Germanis,  qui  trans  Rhenum  incoluut,  qua  de 
causa^  alios  virtute  praecedunt.  3.  hu jus  regionis  una  pars, 
quam  Galli  obtinent,  continetur  Garumua  flumme,  Oceano, 
finibus  Belgarum.  4.  Helvetii  reliquos  Gallos  virtute  prae- 
cedunt,  quod  fere  quotidianis  proeliis  cum  Germanis  conten- 
dunt,  cum  aut  suis  finibus  eos  prohibent  aut  ipsi  in  eorum 
finibus  bellum  gerunt.  5.  a  lacu,  qui  in  Rhodanum  influit, 
ad  montem  Juram,  qui  fines  Sequanorum  ab  Helvetiis  dividit, 
murum  et  fossam  perducit. 

1.  I  keep  all  men  out  from  the  province  ;  I  allow^  no  one 
a  passage.^  2.  Caesar  hastened  into  the  province  b3'  forced^ 
marches.  3.  He  hastens  through  the  Alps  with  these  five 
legions  b}'  the  shortest^  route.  4.  We  attribute  the  victory 
to  3'our  courage.  5.  He  has  a  large  number  of  soldiers 
about  him.^      6.  A  wall  and  a  ditch  were  constructed  from 


32  EXERCISES    ON   FORMS. 

the  lake  to  the  river  by  that  legion  which  Caesar  had  with 
him.*  7.  There  was  a  hard  road^  between  mount  Jura  and 
the  river  Rhone.  8.  Ma}^  you  dwell  at  home  in  peace. 
9.  For  this  reason  I  was  waging  war  in  the  land  of  the 
Germans.  10.  The  banks  of  the  river  which  flows  through 
our  city  are  high. 

XXT. 

Incomplete  tenses  of  short  i-stem  verbs ;  Gr.  200-202. 

VOCABULARY. 

cfipio,  -erg,  take,  receive.  conf  Icio,  -6rg,   do,  accomplish, 

suscipio,  -6re,  undertake.  Jinish. 

eripio,  -erg,  rescue.  perflcio,  -6r6,  do,  perform. 

dolor,  -oris,  grief,  sorrow.  aflflcio,  -6rg,  move,  affect. 

nomen,  -Inis,  name.  septentrio,  -onis,  north  (usually 

f rater,  -tris,  brother.  pi.). 

fftcio,  -6re,  do,  make. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  per  eos  omnes  Orgetorix  se  eripiebat.  2.  post  ejus 
mortem,  Ilelvetii  iter  facere  conabuntur.  3.  una  para 
initium  capit^  a  flumine  Rhodano.  4.  homines  bellandi 
cupidi  magno  dolore  afficiebantur.  5.  capiamus  urbem. 
6.  hie  locus  e  reditione  exercitus  nomen  capiet.  7.  quas- 
in  partes  hostes  iter  faciunt?  8.  ab  iisdem  nostra  consilia 
et  quae  in  castris  geruntur  hostibus  enuntiantur.  9.  initium 
pugnae  Dumnorix  faciebat  et  milites  ejus.  10.  eripite 
meum  patrem,  amici  mei !  11.  Belgae  spectant  in  septen- 
trionem  et  orientem  solem.  12.  Aquitania  spectat  inter 
occasum  solis  et  septentriones.  13.  tune  bellum  cum 
Gallis  geres? 

•  1.  I  am  making  a  journey  through  the  province.  2.  These 
things  will  be  accomplished  by  us.  3.  On  the  following  day 
he  undertook  the  matter.     4.  The  place  takes  its  name  from^ 


EXERCISES   ON   FORMS.  33 

the  victory  of  the  Roman  legions.  5.  Does  the  river  take 
its  name  from^  the  battle  ?  [No.]  6.  In  the  time  of  Caesar 
many  legions  were  rescued  from^  the  hands  of  the  enemy. 

7.  Let  us  try  to  take  the  city  which  the  enemy  rescued  from^ 
our  hands.  8.  It  is  hard  to  take  a  city  that  has  a  wall  and 
ditch  around  it.^  9.  This  matter  was  told  to  the  Helvetians 
by  us.  10.  After  his  death  the  Helvetians  tried  to  make 
the  journey'.  11.  Orgetorix  will  give  his  daughter  in  mar- 
riage to  Dumnorix,  the  brother  of  Divitiacus. 

XXYI. 

Incomplete  tenses  of  long  I-stem  verbs ;  Gr.  203,  204. 

VOCABULARY, 
vgnio,  -ir6,  come.  si  (conj.),  if. 

communio,  -ire,  icall,fortifij.  perx^nio, -ire,  cotne  through,  arrive. 

interficio,  -ere,  kill,  slai/.  vis,  vis  (Gr.  [115]),  violence,  force ; 

conv^nlo,   -ire,   come   together,  pi.  strength. 

assemble.  tib!  (conj.),  when,  where. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  ad  eam  partem,  quae  in  ripa  fluminis  habitabat  per- 
veniebat.  2.  eodem  die  milites  ad  ripam  conveniebant. 
3.  venite  ad  me,  filiae  meae  !  4.  eodem  proelio,  quo  Helvetii 
filium  interficiebant,  patrem  interficiebant.  5.  Caesar  uno 
die  id  faciet  quod  nos  viginti  diebus  facimus.  6.  pacem 
cum   Caesare   faciamus !       7.    in  dolorem  veniatis,  hostes  ! 

8.  urbs  ab  hostibus  magna  vi  communiebatur.  9.  ea  facie- 
mus  quae  nobis  tribuuntur.  10.  pacem  cum  proximis  civi- 
tatibus  confirmare  Helvetii  conabantur.  11.  postero  die 
conveniunt  ad  ripam  Rhodani  et  castra  in  eo  loco  communi- 
unt.     12.   murum  et  fossam  a  flumine  ad  lacum  perducamus  ! 

1.  Caesar  is  fortifying  a  camp  on  the  top  of  the  mountain. 
2.  Many  soldiers  come  out  of  the  city  which  you  are  fortify- 


34  EXEKCISES   ON   FORMS. 

ing.  3.  I  shall  arrive  at  the  city  within^  the  next  ten  days. 
4.  The  enem}'  are  slaying  the  traders  themselves.  5.  The 
enemy  will  burn  with  fire  those  who  shall  be  taken  in  battle. 

6.  This^  [news]  is  told  us  b}^  the  soldiers  whom  you  rescued. 

7.  If  you  do^  violence,  I  shall  stop  [you].  8.  When  that 
day  comes, ^  I  shall  allow  you  a  passage  through  the  city. 
9.  There  is  one  legion  [only]  in  farther  Gaul;  if  the  enemy 
assemble,^  they  will  seize  the  whole  region.  10.  The  Gauls 
are  coming  across  the  river  and  we  shall  all  be  slain. 


XXVII. 

Complete  tenses,  active  voice ;  Gr.  205-207. 

VOCABULARY. 

perv^nio, -ire,-xeni,co7ne,  arrive.  perflcio,   -6r6,  -feci,   r/o,  accom- 
constituo,  -tuere,  -tui,  determine,  plish. 

decide  on.  conv6nio,-v6nir6,-veni,assewt»/e. 

spero,    sperarg,   speravi,    hope,  cSpio,  cSpgrg,  cepi,  take,  etc. 

expect,  hope  for.  habeo,  hSberg,  h^bui,  have,  etc. 

pono,  ponere,  posui,  place,  pitch.  do,  dSre,  dedi,  give,  etc. 

fScio,  fScgrg,  feci,  do,  etc.  mitto,  mitterg,  misi,  send. 

pauciis,  -a,  -um  (comm.  Y)l.),few.  gero,  gerSre,  gessi,  ivaye,  etc. 

iiiterflcio,  -gr6,  -feci,  kill.  hSbltOj  -ar6,  -avi,  dwell. 

mtnlme  (adv.),  least.  jfibeo,  -er6,  jussi,  bid,  order. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  post  ejus  mortem  Helvetii  id  quod  constituerat  facere 
conabantur.  2.  multa  mihi  dederas.  3.  ad  magnam  par- 
tem legionis  perveneram,  quae  tria  millia  passuum  a  flumine 
castra  ponebat.  4.  hi  hostes  'consulem  interfecerant,  et 
milites  ejus  ceperant.  5.  si  vos  vim  feceritis,  ego  prohibebo. 
6.  Caesar  bellum  trans  Rhenum  gessit.  7.  ubi  id  quod  con- 
stituisti  perfeceris,  veni  domum  ad  nos.  8.  quae  in  castris 
nostris  geruntur,  ea  hostibus  ille  nuntiabit.  9.  hi  sunt 
trans  Rhodanum  primi. 


EXERCISES   ON  FORMS.  35 

1.    I   had  ordered  him  to  seize  the  city  of  the  enemy. 

2.  The  top  of  the  mountain  was  occupied^  by  the  soldiers. 

3.  Caesar  had  arrived  at  the  same  time.  4.  He  has  dwelt 
among  the  Sequanians  many  months.  5.  Had  you  pitched 
your  camp  when  I  arrived?  6.  If  you  assemble-  at^  the 
bank  of  the  river,  I  will  give  you  a  passage^  through  the 
province.  7.  There  are  few  rivers  in  the  Alps,  which  are 
very  high  mountains.  8.  Of  all  these  the  Belgians  are  the 
bravest  because  traders  visit  them  least  often.  9.  Aqui- 
tania  extends  from  the  Garonne  river  to  the  mountains 
and  the  ocean.  10.  This  circumstance  was  tokP  to  the 
Helvetians. 

XXYIII. 

Verb-forms  from  the  simple  stem  ;  Gr.  208,  209. 

VOCABULARY. 

pugno,  -nare,  -navi,  -natiim.  divido,  -d6r6,  -visi,  -visiim. 

occupo,  -pare,  -pavi,  -patum.  gero,  gerere,  gessi,  gestiini. 

importo,  -tare,  -tavi,  -tatiiin  cSpio,  cSpCre,  cepi,  captttm. 

pertmeo,  -nere,  -iiui.  fScio,  fScgrS,  feci,  factfim. 

prohibeo,  -bere,  -biii,  -bitflm.  venio,  venir6,  veni,  ventum. 

moveo,  -vere,  niovi,  inotuni.  fluo,  flu6re,  fluxi, 

Conor,  -ari,  -attts.  tribuo,  -uere,  -iii,  -utttm. 

vehementer    (adv.),    greatly,  rogo,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim,  asA-,  as^ 
strongly.  fof. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  facile  faetu^  est  iter  perficere.  2.  ad  consules  patrem 
mittit  rogatum^  pacem,  3.  bellum  gesserat  in  finibus  lios- 
tium.  4.  quae  est  causa  belli  quod  gerimus ?  5.  nobilissimi 
cum  Germanis  pugnant.  6.  milites,  ab  hostibus  capti,  inter- 
ficientur.  7.  multae  res,  in  Belgas  importatae,  animos 
eorum  eff'eminabant.  8.  consul,  magis  cupiditate  imperii 
niotus  quam  spe  reditionis,  urbem  occupat.       9.  multae  res. 


36  EXERCISES    ON    FORMS. 

in  fines  nostros  importatae,  a  militibus  capiebantur.  10.  quis 
haec  a  finibus  Gallorum  prohibet?  11.  nemo,  dolore  motus, 
vim  facere  conabitur.  12.  multi  milites,  in  proelio  interfecti, 
domum  mittebantnr  ad  amicos  suos. 

1.  The  city,  having  been  seized  bv  the  legions,  was 
burned.  2.  I  had  come  to  ask^  peace.  3.  In  many  places 
the  river  flows  through  large  forests.  4.  The  Belgians, 
effeminated  by^  imported  things,   are  tr3ing  to  wage  war. 

5.  Maj^  the  gods  give  you  those  things  which  you  hope  for! 

6.  This  journey  will  be  easy  to  make.^  7.  1  am  greatly 
moved  by  Caesar's  death.  8.  All  kingdoms  and  cities  are 
the  gods'.  9.  Let  us  wage  war  with  the  legions  that  have 
burned  our  homes.  10.  With^  that  legion  which  he  had  with 
him  and  with*  the  soldiers  who  had  assembled  from^  the 
province,  Caesar  builds  a  wall  from'  the  lake  to  Mt.  Jura, 
which  divides  the  territories*^  of  the  Sequanians  from  the 
Helvetians. 


EXERCISES    ON   FORMS.  37 

XXIX. 

The  periphrastic  conjugations ;  Gr.  210-214. 

VOCABULARY. 

sttm,  esse,  fui,  futnrfis.  spero,  -are,  -avi,  -attim. 

do,  dSre,  dedi,  dStum.  eflfemino,  -are,  -avi,  -atum. 

nuntio,  -are,  -avi,  -atum.  hSbeo,  habere,  habui,  hSbitum, 

appello,  -are,  -avi,  -atum.  obtlneo,  -ere,  -ui,  obtenttim. 

cremo,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim.  pSteo,  patere,  patui. 

enuntio,  -are,  -avi,  -atum.  commeo,  -are,  -avi,  -attim. 

impero,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim.  specto,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim. 

habito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum.  concilio,  -are,  -avi,  -attim. 

hiemo,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim.  vSgor,  -ari,  -atiis. 

confirmo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum.  incolo,  -er6,  -ui. 

praecedo,  -dere,  -di,  -essiim.  contendo,  -derg,  -di,  -nttim. 

eripio,  -ripgre,  -ripui,  -reptiim.  communio,  -nirg,  -nivi,  -nittim. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  iter  mihi  datum  est  ;  idem  tibi  dabitnr.  2.  coiiatus 
erat  iter  per  Alpes  faeere.  3.  capturus  sum  illam  urbem. 
4.  ea  legione,  quam  mecum  habeo,  fines  Gallorum  occupare. 
conar.  5.  pars  hostium  Orgetorigis  victoria  ad  bellum 
mota  erat.  6.  per  Alpes  iter  faciendum  est.  7.  Alpes 
minores  altae  sunt.  8.  tres  legiones  in  Gallia  ulteriore 
hiemabant.  9.  domi  futurus  sum.  10.  num  daturus  es 
iter  per  provinciam  hostibus  ?       11.  fuerasne  in  vetere  urbe  ? 

1.  All  Gaul  is  divided^  into  three  parts.  2.  This  matter 
was  announced  to  the  Helvetians.  3.  Orgetorix  rescued 
himself  through  his  friends.  4.  The  soldiers  whom  he  had 
with  him  had  come  together  out  of  the  province.  5.  Three 
legions  which  had  wintered  in  Hither  Gaul,  hastened  through 
the  Alps  into  the  province.  6.  The  Helvetians  had  killed 
Piso  in  the  same  battle.  7.  If  you  make^  peace  with  us, 
we  will  winter  in  Gaul.  8.  I  intend  to  winter  in  Gaul. 
9.  The- soldiers  have  been  rescued  from^  the  hands  of  the 
Belgians.  10.  The  city  must  be  seized  b}^  you.  11.  A 
large  part  of  the  city  had  to  be  burned  with  fire. 


38  EXERCISES   ON  FORMS. 


XXX. 

Review  of  verbs. 

Irregular  verbs  ;  siim  and  compounds  ;  Gr.  215-222» 

VOCABULARY. 

adsum,  Sdesse,  adfui,  adfiiturus. 

absttm,  abesse,  afui,  affiturus. 

prostim,  prodesse,  profui,  prof iiturfis,  be  advantageous,  useful. 

possum,  posse,  potui,  be  able,  caii,  have  power  or  infiuence. 

praesum,  praeesse,  praefui,  praefuturiis,  be  present}  be  first,  at  the  head. 

supersiim,  superesse,  superfui,  sOperf uturtts,  be  left  over,  survive. 

duco,  ducere,  duxi,  ductum,  lead,  (also,  to  marrij). 

debeo,  debere,  debui,  debltfim,  owe,  ought. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  bellum  gerere  nou  possiimus,  quod  a  provincia  longe 
absiimus.  2.  omnia  quae  facere  potestis,  fecistis.  3.  quis 
illud  dicere  possit^?  4.  mihi  non  prodest^  saepe  cum  iis  qui 
in  ripis  liuminis  habitant  contendere.  5.  adesse  non  facile 
est.  6.  Sequanos  praeseutis  et  absentis  incitare  conabar. 
7.  per  provinciam  iter  vobis  dare  non  potero.  8.  num 
potuerunt  iter  difficile  facere?     9.  si  potero,  apud  vos  adero. 

1.  Dumnorix  had  very  much  influence  among  the  Helve- 
tians, because  he  had  married  the  daughter  of  Orgetorix 
from  that  state.  2.  It  had  been  advantageous  to  him  to  be 
able  to  move  camp.  3.  Be  good  and  brave,  my  friends  ; 
our  position*  is  advantageous  to  us.  4.  The  wliole  multi- 
tude was  present.  5.  The  whole  state  is  divided^  into  four 
parts.  6.  Those  who  ought  to  be  useful  to  us  have  moved 
camp  and  are  not  present.  7.  He  did  in^  one  day  what 
the  enemy  did  in*'  twenty  days.  8.  The  daughter  of  Orge- 
torix and  one  of  his  sons  were  taken.'  9.  One  hundred 
and  twenty  thousand  men'  survived. 


EXERCISES    ON   FORMS.  39 

XXXI. 

Irregular  verbs ;  eclo,  fero ;  Gr.  223,  224. 

VOCABULARY, 
gdo,  edere,  edi,  esum,  eat,  consume. 
f 6ro,  ferre,  tiili,  latum,  carry,  bring,  hear. 
infero,  inferrg,  intuli,  illatiini,  carry  on,  make  (war). 
differo,  diflferre,  distiili,  dilatum,  differ. 
conf ero,  conferre,  contiili,  coUatfim,  collect,  bring  together',  compare ; 

se  conferre,  to  betake  one's  self,  go. 
ref  ero,  referrg,  rgtiili,  rglatttm,  carry  back  ;  pedem  referre,  retreat. 
jiibeo,  jubere,  jussi,  jussQm. 
impedimentum,  -i,  hindrance;  pi.  baggage. 
hostls,  -Is  (c),  enemy. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  bellum  inferre  noii  possunt.  2.  Dumnorix,  cujus  frater 
Divitiaciis  eo  tempore  principatum  in  civitate  obtinebat,  idem 
couari  poterat.  3.  erat  uua  per  Sequauos  via,  qua  ire  non 
poterant.  4.  frumentum  non  contulerant,  quod  dare  debe- 
bant.^  5.  ager  Germanorum  conferri  non  potest  cum  agro 
Gallorum.  6.  contendebant  pedem  referre.  7.  jubebat 
partem  militum  impedimenta  in  unum  locum  conferre  ;  par- 
tem pedem  referre.  8.  hi  omnes  inter  se^  lingua  differunt. 
9.  trans  flumen  in  agros  hostium  se  contulerant. 

1.  The  Helvetians  brought  their  baggage  together  to  one 
place.  2.  He  ordered  the  ships  to  be  brought  together  into 
one  place.  3.  For  this  reason  the}^  could  not  make  war 
on^  their  enemies.  4.  I  shall  bring  together  many  men, 
and  make  war  on  the  nations  beyond  the  Rhine.*  5.  The 
seventh  and  tenth  legions  did  not  retreat.  6.  Let  us  retreat, 
soldiers,  if  the  enemy  are^  many.  7.  The  baggage  will  be 
brought  together.  8.  .  You  ought  to  go  to  the  camp  of  the 
Germans.  9.  Who  can  make  war  on  us?  10.  A  few  can 
stop  the  soldiers  from  [their]  march  in  those  places.  11 .  The 
soldiers  that  we  had  levied  came  together  in  a  few  days. 


40  EXERCISES    OK   FOKMS. 

XXXII. 

Irregular  verbs ;  volo,  nolo,  malo ;   Gr.  225. 

VOCABULARY. 

auxnitim,  -i,  help,  aid.  volo,  vell6,  volui,  to  wish,  he  in'I- 
unde  (adv.),  whence,  from  which.  ling. 

vaco,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  be  empty,  nolo,  nolle,  nolui,  to  he  unwilling. 

he  vacant.  Hialo,  malle,  nialui,  to  prefer, 
■dlscedo,  -derS,  -cessi,  -cessfim,  choose  rather,  in'sh  more. 

depart,  go  out  or  away.  fiigS,  -a^,  flight. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  nolebam  pedem  referre.  2.  noli  bellum  Romanis, 
amicis  nostris,  iuferre.  3.  in  earn  partem  Helvetii  se  con- 
ferent,  nbi  eos  esse  volueris.  4.  voluerat  totam  Galliam 
occiipare.  5.  malo  trans  Rhenum  bellum  Germanis  inferre 
quam  in  Gallia.  6.  num  vis  illud  suscipere?  7.  pars 
militum  pedem  referre  vult.  8.  faciamus  omnia  quae  facere 
volumus.  9.  quid  vultis,  amici?  10.  maluit  ab  liostibus 
interfici  quam  pedem  referre.  11.  ii  qui  ad  ripas  venerant, 
pedem  referre  quam  bellum  gerere  malebant. 

1.  Dumnorix  wished  to  have  great  influence^  with^  the 
Sequani.  2.  We,  who  were  across  the  river,  were  not  able 
to  bring  help  to  our  [friends].  3.  I  did  not  wish  to  say 
this  to  man}'  men.  4.  He  did  not  wish  that  place  from 
^hich  the  Helvetians  had  departed  to  be  empt}'.  5.  Many 
prisoners^  were  brought  into  the  city.  6.  I  had  rather*  be 
taken  than  save  myself  by  flight.  7.  Do  3'ou  prefer  to  be 
slain  [rather]  than  be  taken  [prisoner]  ?  8.  Many  were 
taken  and  slain,  who  were  unwilling  to  rescue  themselves  by 
flight.  9.  The  flight  of  the  enemy  had  given  us  the  victory. 
10.  The  cit}'  which  we  wished  to  take  was  given  to  us  hy  the 
■consent  of  the  inhabitants.  11.  The  journey  will  have  to 
be  performed.  12.  I  am  unwilling  to  retreat ;  I  prefer  to 
fight. 


EXERCISES    ON   FORMS.  41 


XXXIII. 

Irregular  verbs ;  do,  eo,  fio ;   Gr.  226-229. 

VOCABULARY. 

eo,  ire,  ivi,  (ii),  ttiim,  go.  rStls,  -Is,  raft. 

fio,  fieri,  (faetiis),  be  made,  be-  aufero,  aiiferre,  abstuli,  abla- 

come,  happen.  turn,  take  away. 

transeo,   transire,   transii,  Sdeo,  adirg,  adii,  aditum,  ^o  <o, 

transitiim,^  go  over,  cross.  go  near,  approach,  visit. 

linter,.  -tris  (c),  boat,  skiff.  pagiis,  -i,  district,  canton. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  multa  finnt  quae  uon  volumus.  2.  id  si  fiet  magiio 
cum  periciilo  provinciae  erit.  3.  ii  qui  flumen  transierant 
suis^  auxiliura  ferre  nou  poterant.  4.  spes  gioriae  major 
facta  erat.  5.  via  per  Alpes  angusta  est;  alio  itiuere  traus- 
eamus.  6.  in  linibiis  Sequauorum,  qui  traus  Rhodanum 
incolunt,  bellum  gerebam.  7.  num  hostes  possuut  amici 
fieri?  8.  Caesar  populos  adire  volebat,  qui  traus  Rheuum 
iucoluut.       9.  uoli  hostes  cum  militibus  adire. 

1.  The  Helvetians  were  crossing  this  river  b}"^  [means 
of]  boats  and  rafts.  2.  The  beginning  of  that  flight  was 
made  by  Dumnorix  and  his  horsemen.  3.  Let  us  cross  this 
river.  4.  The  hope  of  a  return  home  has  been  taken  away. 
5.  At  the  beginning  of  the  war,  there  were  large  forces  in 
the  province.  6.  It  is  ver}-  difficult  to  cross  a  river  by 
[means  of]  boats  and  rafts.  7.  A  large  river,  which  we 
were  crossing,  flows  into  the  lake.  8.  Do  not  cross  the 
Rhine,  legions  ;  the  enemy  are  numerous  and  brave.  9.  The 
whole  state  is  divided  into  four  cantons.  10.  There  is  a 
river  which  flows  through  the  territories  of  the  Sequani  into 
the  Rhone.  11.  If  they  try^  to  cross,  he  will  be  able  to 
prevent  [them]. 


42  EXERCISES    ON   FORMS. 

XXXIY. 

Impersonal  and  defective  verbs ;   Gr.  230-235. 

VOCABULARY. 

licet,  licerg,  llcult,  is  permitted,  neqv6  .  .  .  ngqve,  neither  .  .  .  nor, 

one  may.  abeo,  -ir6,  -ii,  -itum,  go  aicay, 
oportet,   -tere,    -tuit,    is  proper,  depart. 

right;  one  ought,  it  behooves.  Haeclui,  -orum,  Hceduans,  (a 
ngqvg  (or  nee),  and  not,  nor.  Gallic  nation). 

EXERCISES. 

1.  id  facere  per  me^  licet  tibi.  2.  oportet  cum  hosti- 
bus  contendere.  3.  tres  legiones  in  Galliam  mittam. 
4.  Rhodaniis  in  lacum  fluit.       5.  castra  proximo  die  movit. 

6.  pliires  hostium  capientur.  7.  bellum  in  Haeduis  ges- 
serat.  8.  multa  bella  gesta  erant.  9.  iter  per  provinciam 
non  dabo.  10.  si  id  feceritis,  multa  millia  hominum  inter- 
ficientur.  11.  malo  id  facere  quam  bellum  inferre.  12.  apud 
nos  fortes  sunt  milites  multi.  13.  tres  annos  in  provincia 
fuerat. 

1.  The  land  of  the  Belgians  extends  many  miles  to  the 
east.  2.  Do^  not  attribute  the  victory  to  me,  soldiers; 
the  gods  have  given  us  victor}'.  3.  Rescue  yourselves  from* 
the  hands  of  the  enem}^  if  you  can,  my  sons.  4.  The 
consul  had  taken  many  cities.  5.  Peace  will  come  when 
the  enemy  are^  slain.       6.    Let  us  rescue  ourselves,  Piso. 

7.  By  daily  battles  one  ought  to  bring  peace.  8.  It  is 
neither  permitted  nor  proper  to  make  war  on^  friends. 
9.  You  may^  cross  the  river,  my  friends ;  the  enemy  have 
departed.  10.  The  soldiers  whom  you  had  levied  did  not 
assemble.  11.  The  Helvetians  are  trying  to  make  a  march 
through  our  province. 


EXERCISES     ON     SYNTAX. 


XXXV. 

Nominative,  vocative  and  accusative  cases ;  Gt.  253-268. 

VOCABULARY. 

tergttm,  -i,  back.  hil)ernus,-a.,-nm,of  winter, wintri/. 

audeo,  -ere,  ausiis,i  dare.  hiberna,  -Drum,  winter  quarters. 

ita  (adv.),  thus,  in  this  way.  auxilia,  -oruiii,  auxiliaries. 

polliceor,  -eri,  -ittis,  promise.  flagito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  demand. 

verto,  -ere,  verti,  versiiin,  turn.  hostis,  -is,  enemy. 

dico,  -ere,  -xi,  -ctum,  say.  castra,  -oruin,  camj^. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  eorum  qui  domum  redierunt  census  habitus  est.     2.  ita 

dies   circiter   quindecim   iter   feceruut.        3.    tres    copiarum 

partes^  Helvetii  id  flumeu^  transduxerant.      4.  omnes  hostes 

terga  verterunt.       5.    reliquos  omues   nostri   interfecerunt. 

6.  Caesar   in    hiberna    in    Sequauos*    exercitum    deduxit. 

7.  paucos  dies  moratur.  8.  primam  et  secuudam  aciem 
in  armis  esse,  tertiam  castra  muiiTre  jussit.  9.  hie  locus 
ab  hoste  circiter  passus  sescentos,  uti  dictum  est,  aberat. 
10.  salutem  suam  Gallorum  equitatui  committere  non  aude- 
bat.       11.  hunc  montem  murus  arcem  efficit. 

1.  He  made  haste  to  go  to  Bibracte.  2.  Caesar  demanded 
of  the  Haeduans^  the  corn^  which  they  had  promised. 
3.  Thus  they  made  [their],  march  [for]  fifteen  days.  4.  He 
left  two  legions  and  a  part  of  the  auxiliaries  there.  5.  On 
the  same  day®  he  moved  camp.  6.  For'  five  successive 
days   Caesar   led   forth   his    troops   in   front   of   his   camp.. 

7.  He   thought  himself   able^  to  do  this  without  danger. 

8.  While  he  was  waiting^  a  few  days,  a  panic  seized  the 
whole  army.  9.  He  hastened  toward  Ariovistus  by  forced 
marches. 


44  EXERCISES    ON    SYNTAX. 

XXXYI. 

Dative  case ;   Gr.  269-272. 

VOCABULARY. 

contlnentgr  (adv.),  constant///.  usiis,  -us,  use,  advantage. 

curS,  -ae,  care.  munitio,  -oins,  fortification . 

summus,  -a,  -um,  liighest,  greatest.  f  acultas,  -atls,  supplj. 

colloquiuin,  -i,  conference,  talk.  iterum  {a,dy.), again,  a  second  time.. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  proximi  sunt  Germanis,  qui  trans  Rheuuni  incolunt, 
quibuscum^  contiuenter  bellum  gerunt.  2.  Ilelvetiis  est  in 
animo^  per  agrum  Sequanorum  iter  facere.  3.  ob  eas  causas 
ei  munitioui^  quani  fecerat  T.  Labienum  legatum  praefecit. 

4.  his  omnibus  rebus  unum  repugnabat.  5.  omnium  rerum 
quae  ad  bellum  usui^  erant  summa  erat  in  eo  oppido  facultas. 
6.  decima  legio  per  tribunos  militum  ei  gratias  egit.  7.  dies 
•colloquio  dictus  est,  ex  eo  die  quintus.  8.  is  sibi  lega- 
tionem  ad  civitates  suscepit.  9.  iterum  colloquio  diem 
constituit.        10.  haec  mihi  sunt  curae. 

1.  This  matter  will  be  cared  for  by  Caesar  (lit.,  will  be  for 
a  care  to  C).  2.  We  have  nothing  left^  except  the  soil  of 
our  land.  3.  Dumnorix  was  in  command  of  the  cavalry 
which  the  Haeduans  had  sent  to  Caesar's  aid.^  4.  The  Hel- 
vetians are  neighbors  of^  the  province  and  of  the  AUobroges. 

5.  What  business^  has  Caesar  or  the  Roman  people  in  my' 
Gaul?  6.  The  Roman  people  pardoned  the  Arverni  and 
did  not  reduce  [them]  to  a  province.^  7.  Caesar  had 
favored^*'  this  legion,  and  trusted ^*^  [it]  on  account"  of  [its] 
courage.  8.  They  arrived  in  the  country  of  the  Lingones 
on  the  fourth  day.  9.  Caesar  ordered  two  lines  to  repulse 
the  enemy,  the  third  [one]  to  finish  the  work. 


EXERCISES    ON   SYNTAX.  45 

XXXVII. 

Locative  case  ;  Gr.  273,  274. 

VOCABULARY. 

coUis,  -Is  (m.),  hill.  subduco,  -6re,  -xi,  -ctum,  with- 
conscribo,  -ere,  -psi,  -ptiiin,  levy  draw. 

(troops).  postquam  (conj.),  after. 

colloco,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  -post^  pro  (prep.  w.  abl.),  before,  for,  in 

place.  proportion  to,  etc. 

celeriter  (adv.),  quickhj.  solfis,  -S,  -flm  (Gr.  71.),  alone. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  et  domi  et  in  reliqua  Gallia  plurimum  poterat.^  2.  post- 
quam id-  animum  advertit,  copias  siias  Caesar  in  proximum 
collem  subducit.  3.  in  summo  jiigo  duas  legiones,  quas  in 
Gallia  citeriore  conscripserat,  et  omnia  auxilia  collocavit. 
4.  provincia  mea  liaec  est  Gallia,  sicut  ilia  vestra.  5.  cele- 
riter concilium  dimittit,  Liscum  retinet ;  quaerit  ex  solo  ea* 
quae  in  conventu  dixerat.  dicit  liberius  atque  audacius. 
6.  ob  earn  causam,  quamdiu  potui,  tacui.  7.  pro  multitu- 
dine  hominum  et  pro  gloria  belli  atque  fortitudinis,  angustos 
fines  habemus. 

1.  On  the  next  day,  because  two  days  remained,  he  has- 
tened to  go  to  Bibracte.  2.  There  was  nothing  at  home. 
3.  The  number  of  those  who  returned  home  was  found  out 
[to  be]  one  hundred  and  ten  thousand.''  4.  The  Sequanians 
had  admitted  Ariovistus  within  their  country.  5.  The  river 
Dubis  as  [if]  drawn  by  a  pair  of  compasses  surrounds  almost 
the  whole  town.  6.  I  came  into  Gaul  earlier  than  the 
Roman  people  [did].  7.  The  Suevi  who  had  come  to  the 
banks  of  the  Rhine  began  to  return  home.  8.  The  kind  of 
fight  in  which  the  Germans  had  trained  themselves  was  this. 
9.  At  sunset  Ariovistus  led  his  troops  back  to  camp. 


46  EXEllCISES    OK  SYNTAX. 

XXXTIII. 

Genitive  case ;  source  and  cause ;  Gr.  275-284. 

VOCABULARY. 

amitto,  -6re,  -isi,  -issiiin,  lose.  cSdo,  -ere,  cecXdi,  casum,  faU. 

accipio,  -€rg,  -cepi,  -ceptttm,  re-  eques,  -itis,  horseman. 

ceive.    •  obliviscor,  -isci,  -litHs,  for-get. 

numeriis,  -i,  number.  pello,  -6r6,  pepiili,  pulsiim,  drive, 
pSdes,  -itis,  foot-soldier.  defeat. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae.  2.  tridui^  viam 
processerunt  hostes.  3.  reminiscere  et  veteris  iucommodi 
popiili  Romani  et  pristinae  viitutis  Helvetiorum.  4.  veteris 
contumeliae  oblivisci  volebat.  5.  tridui  viam  processit. 
6.  pauci  de  nostris^  cadunt.  7.  equitura  millia  eraut  sex ; 
totidem  numero^  pedites  velocissimi  ac  fortissimi.  8.  Haedui 
eorumque  clientes  semel  atque  iterum^  cum  his  conteuderunt 
armis  ;  magnam  calamitatem  pulsi  acceperuut ;  omnem  uobi- 
litatem,  omnem  senatum,  omuem  equitatum  amiserunt. 

1.  All  Gaul  is  divided  into  three  parts,  one  of  which  the 
Belgians  inhabit.  2.  No  one  receives  more  sorrow^  from^ 
that  [fact]  than  I.  3.  We  are  not  aware  of  any  wrong. 
4.  Do  not  forget  the  injuries  which  the}'  have  inflicted  on  the 
Haeduans  and  their  allies.  5.  At  first  about  fifteen  thou- 
sand of  these  crossed  the  Rhine;  they  are  now  in  Gaul  to 
the  number  of  one  hundred  and  twenty  thousand.  6.  He 
attacked  them  and  slew  a  large  part  of  them.  7.  Our  J^men] 
waited  three  days  on  account  of  the  wounds  of  the  soldiers. 
8.  Those  through  whose  country  the  enemy  had  gone  brought 
them  back.  9.  By  the  panic  of  these  [men]  even  the  sol- 
diers and  centurions  were  disturbed. 


EXERCISES    ON   SYNTAX.  47 


XXXIX. 

Genitive  case ;    possessive  and  special  uses ;    Gr.  285- 
291. 

VOCABULARY. 

averto,  -ere,  -ti,  -sum,  turn  away,  praemitto,  -6re,  -isi,  -issilin;  send 

turn  aside.  ahead. 

cognosco,  -ere,  -ovi,  -Itiim,  learn ;  gniieiti^,  -Sie,  friendship. 

perf.  know.  ibi  (adv.),  there. 

postridie  (adv.),  tlie  next  day,  on  postea  (adv.),  afterwards. 

the  morrow.  *  sgqnor,  -i,  -cutiis, /o//ow. 


EXERCISES. 
1.  postridie  ejus  diei^  iter  ab  Helvetiis  avertit.  2.  ibi 
filia  Orgetorigis  atque  iinus  e  filiis  captus  est.^  3.  ii,  qui  ex 
urbe  amicitiae  causa  Caesarem  secuti  erant,  iion  magnum  in 
re  militari^  usum  habebant.  4.  Divitiaci  summum  in  popii- 
lum  Romauum  studium  cognoverat.  5.  P.  Considius  qui  rei 
militaris  peritissimus  habebatur  et  in  exercitu  L.  Sullae  et 
postea  in  M.  Crassi  fuerat,  cum  exploratoribus  praemittitur. 
6.  ea  res  per  fugitivos  L.  Aemilii,  decurionis  equitum  Gallo- 
rum,  nuntiatur.  7.  ipse  Dumnorix  rerum  no  varum  cupidus 
est. 

1.  The  place  takes  its  name  from  the  slaughter  of  the 
Roman  army.  2.  The  feelings^  of  Divitiacus  were  hurt  by 
his  brother's  punishment.  3.  Neither  his  coming  nor  [that] 
of  Labienus  was  known.  4.  On  account  of  the  excellence 
of  the  land,  the  Germans  who  dwell  across  the  Rhine,  will 
cross  over  from  their  own  country  into  the  country  of  the 
Helvetians.  5.  On  the  next  day  he  hastened  to  go  to 
Bibracte,  the  largest  town  of  the  Hseduans.  6.  I  shall  not 
overlook  the  wrongs  of  the  Haeduans.  7.  Caesar  cheered 
the  spirits  of  the  Gauls  by  his  words.  8.  Led  by  the  desire 
of  kingly  power,  Orgetorix  made  a  conspiracy  of  the  nobility. 
9.  The  Helvetians,  moved  by  his  sudden  arrival,  send  envo3's 
to  him. 


48  EXERCISES    ON    SYNTAX. 

XL. 

Ablative  case  proper ;  Gr.  292-296. 

VOCABULARY, 

abstlneo,  -ere,  -ui,  -tenttim,  hold  aflfero,  -ferre,  attuK,  allatiiin,. 

off,  refrain.  bring. 

corpus,  -oris,  hodjj.  cogo,   cogere,   coegi,  coactum,, 
desisto,   -ere,    destiti,    -stltfim,  compel. 

cease  from,  leave  off.  educo,  -ere,  -xi,  -etum,  lead  out. 

ingens,  -ntis,  great,  huge.  mos,  -oris,  custom,  habit. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  Labienus  nostros  expectabat  proelioqiie  abstinebat. 
2.  a  Bibracte,  oppido  Haednorum  longe  maximo,  non  ampliu& 
milibus  passuum  octodecim  aberat.  3.  moribus  suis  Orge- 
toriorem  ex  vinculis  causam  dicere  coegerunt.  4.  Duninorix 
gratia  et  largitione  apud  Sequanos  plunmum  poterat.  5.  ne- 
gotio  desistere  non  poteram.  6.  ob  earn  rem  ex  civitate 
profugi  et  Romam  ad  senatum  veni.  7.  ea  res  Caesari  non 
minorem  quam  ipsa  victoria  voliiptfitem  attiilit.  8.  duae 
fuerunt  Ariovisti  uxores,  una  quam  domo  secum  eduxcrat, 
altera  quam  in  Gallia  duxerat. 

1.  They  had  gone  from  home.  2.  The  enemy  are  trying 
to  keep  our  army  from  the  march.  3.  By  their  flight  the  rest 
of  the  cavalry  was  frightened.  4.  He  was  trying  to  shut 
Caesar  oflf  from  the  corn  which  was  supplied  from  the  Sequa- 
nians  and  Haeduans.  5.  Ariovistus,  king  of  the  Germans, 
has  seized  a  third  part  of  their  land,  which  is  the  best  of  all 
Gaul.  6.  He  now  orders  the  Sequanians  to  leave  the  second 
third  part.  7.  Mettius  was  found  and  brought  back  to  him-. 
8.  Ariovistus  sent  sixteen  thousand  men  with  all  the  cavalry. 
9."  On  the  next  day,  Caesar,  according  to  his  custom,  led  his 
forces  out  of  both  camps.  10.  All  the  enemy  turned  their 
backs  and  did  not  cease  to  flee.  11.  On  the  next  day  they 
arrived  at  the  Rhine. 


EXERCISES    ON   SYNTAX.  49 

XLI. 

Instrumental  ablative ;  Gr.  297,  298. 

VOCABULARY. 

aequus,  -S.,  -ttm,  equal,  level.  etiam  (adv.),  also,  even. 

nihil  (indeclinable),  nothing.  oratio,  -onis,  speech,  talk. 

opus,  -eris,  work.  telum,  -i,  missile,  iveapon. 

tlinor,  -oris, /ear,  panic.  utor,  -i,  usus,  use. 

vescor,  -I,  feed  on,  eat.  vox,  -ocis,  voice,  talk,  words. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  hac  oratione  adducti,  inter  se  fidem  et  jus  jurandum 
dant.  2.  ea  legioiie  quam  secum  habebat,  militibusque, 
qui  ex  provincia  couvenerant,  murum  fossamque  perducit. 
3.  operis  munitione  et  militum  concursu  et  telis  hostes  re- 
pulsi  sunt.  4.  eo  frumento^  quod  flumine  Arare^  navibus 
subvcxerat,  uti  non  poterat.  5.  domi  nihil  erat  quo^  vesci 
poterant.  6.  horum  vocibus  ac  timore  etiam  ii  qui  magnum 
in  castris  usum  habebant,  milites  centurionesque  quique^ 
equitatui  ^  praeerant  perturbabantur.  7.  hie  locus  aequo 
spatio  ab  castris  Ariovisti  et  Caesaris  aberat. 

1.  Elated  by  this  battle,  the  Helvetians  began  to  resist 
more  boldly.  2.  Induced  by  the  lack  of  all  things,  we  sent 
ambassadors  to  you  about  a  surrender.  3.  He  filled  the 
whole  mountain  with  men.  4.  We  do  not  contend  by  means 
of  trickery,  or  depend  upon  artifice.  5.  Our  [men]  got 
possession  of  the  baggage  and  camp.  6.  This  town  was 
fortified  by  the  nature  of  [its]  situation.  7.  The  Hseduans 
did  not  make  use  of  the  help  of  the  Roman  people  in  the 
wars  that  they  had  with  me.  8.  Much^  was  said  by  Caesar. 
9.  Broken  by  these  defeats,  the  Haeduans  have  been  com- 
pelled to  give  hostages  to  the  Sequanians.  10.  They 
fought'^  with  their  swords.  11.  We  wish  Gaul,  though 
conquered  in  war/  to  use  its  own  laws. 


50  EXERCISES    ON    SYNTAX. 

XLII. 

Locative  ablative  ;  Gr.  299-303. 

VOCABULARY. 

conatiis,  -ns,  attempt.  '  dejicio,  -ere,  -jeci,  -jectum,  cast 
inlmicus,  -ft,  -um,  unfriendhi,  hos-  down. 

tile.  injuria,  -ae,  wrong,  injur}/. 

nonnulliis,  -a,  -iim,  some,  a  few.  pridie  (adv.),  on  the  day  before. 

temper5,-are,-avi, -a turn, re/ram.  v&duin,  -i,  shoal,  ford. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  hie  pagus  unns,  patrum  nostrorum  memoria,  L.  Cas- 
sium,  consulem  interfecerat,  et  ejus  exercitum  sub  jugum 
miserat.  2.  pridie  proelium  nou  commiserant.  3.  ex  eo 
proelio  circiter  millia  centum  et  trigiota  superfuerunt  eaque 
tota  uocte  continenter  ierunt.  4.  totis  castris^  testamenta 
obsignabantur.  5.  inter  fines  Helvetiorum  et  Allobro- 
gum    Rhodanus  fluit  isque  nonnullis   locis^    vado  transitur. 

6.  homines    inimici    nobis    non    temperabunt    ab    injuria. 

7.  Helvetii  ea  spe  dejecti,  hoc  conatu  destiterunt.  8.  nunc 
sunt  in  Gallia  multa  millia. 

1.  These  all  differ  from  one  another^  in  language,  customs 
[and]  laws.  2.  At  daybreak  he  was  not  far  away  from 
the  camp  of  the  enemy.  3.  They  join  battle  with  the  cavalry 
of  the  Helvetians  in  an  unfavorable  place.  4.  On  all  these 
days  Ariovistus  kept  his  army  in  camp.^  5.  Records  were 
found  in  the  camp  of  the  Helvetians  and  brought  to  Cajsar. 

6.  He  ordered  them  to   await   his   arrival  in   that   place. 

7.  They  attacked  our  [men]  on  the  right  flank.*  8.  On 
the  next  day  he  turned  his  course  from  the  Helvetians. 
9.  Earl}'  in  the  night''  about  six  thousand  men  of  that  can- 
ton which  is  called  Verbigenus  left  the  camp  of  the  Helve- 
tians, and  hastened  toward  the  Rhine  and  the  country  of 
the  Germans. 


EXERCISES    ON    SYNTAX.  51 


XLIII. 

Comitative  ablative  ;  Gr.  304,  306. 

VOCABULARY, 

anceps, -ipitis  (Gr.  [116.]),  doubt-  diu  {adv.),  lotig. 

fill.  coUoquor,  -i,  -cutiis,  talk  with, 
cousuesco,  -ere,  -evi,  -etuni,i  g^f  converse. 

used,  be  ivont.  dux,  diicis,  guide,  leader. 

peto,  pgtere,  petivi,  -ituni,  ask,  lenitas,  -atis,  gentle7iess,  slowness. 

beg.  vigilia,  -ae,  watch. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  flumeii  est  Arar,  quod  per  finis  Haeduorum  in  Rho- 
danum  influit  incredibiU  lenitate.  2.  omues  qui  aderant 
magno  lletu  auxilium  a  Caesare  petere  coeperunt.  3.  anci- 
piti  proelio  diu  pugnatum  cst.^  4.  ea  omnia  injussu^ 
Caesaris  et  civitatis  fecerat.  5.  per  C.  Valerium,  cui"* 
summani  omnium  rerum  fidem^  habebat,  cum  eo  colloquitur. 

6.  de^  tertia  vigilia  T.  Labienum,  cum  duabus  legionibus  et 
iis  ducibus  qui  iter  cognoverant,  raontem  adscendere  jubet. 

7.  eo  die  quo  consuerat  intervallo''  hostes  sequitur  et  millia 
passuum  tria  ab  eorum  castris  castra  ponit. 

1 .  Caesar  hastened  to  this  cit}'  by  forced  marches.  2.  Dum- 
norix,  the  brother  of  Divitiacus,  was  meant  by  this  speech  of 
Liscus.  3.  Dumnorix,  [a  man]  of  the  greatest  boldness, 
is  desirous  of  a  revolution.  4.  He  himself  hastened  to  the 
enemy  in  the  fourth  watch  by  the  same  route  by  which  they 
had  gone.  5.  At  daybreak  neither  his  arrival  nor  [that] 
of  Labienus,  as  he  afterward  learned  from  prisoners,  was 
known.  6.  Meanwhile  he  drew  up  a  line  of  battle  of  the 
four  legions  half  way  up®  the  hill.  7.  He  was  not  more 
than  a  mile  and  a  half^  from  the  enemy's  camp.  8.  The 
Sequanians  have  received  Ariovistus  into^^  their  country,  and 
all  their  towns  are  in  his  power.  9.  The  Germans  are  of 
huge  size  of  body  and  of  incredible  courage. 


62  EXERCISES    OX    SYNTAX. 

XLIY. 

Ablative  absolute  ;  ablative  with  prepositions  ;  Gr.  307, 
•   308. 

VOCABULARY, 
cornu,  -us,  horn,  wing.  nox,  noctis,  night. 

induco,  -erg,  -xi,  -ctttm,  lead  on,       invenio,   -ire,  -veni,  -ventiim, 

induce.  come  i(pon,Jind. 

confido,  -ere,  -fisiis,  (Gr.  [216]       proficiscor,  -i,  -fecttts,  start,  set 
[g)),  trust  in,  confide.  out. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  Orgetorix,  M.  Messala  et  M.  Pisone  consulibus,  regni 
cupiditate  inductus  conjurationem  nobilitatis  fecit.  2.  bis 
rebus  coguitis,  Caesar  Gallorum  animos  confirmavit.  3.  bel- 
le rielvetiorum  confecto,  totius  fere  Galliae  legati  ad  Caesa- 
rem  gratulatum^  convenerimt.  4.  nullam  partem  noctis 
itinere  intermisso  in  fines  Lingonum  die  quarto  pervenerunt. 
5.  eorum  satisfactione  accepta  et  itinere  exquisTto  per  Divi- 
tlacum,  de  quarta  vigilia  prof  actus  est.  6.  ipse  a  dextro 
cornu  ^  proelium  commisit.  7.  perpauei  aut  viribus^  confisi 
tranare  contenderuut  aut  lintribus  inventis  sibi  salutem  re- 
pererunt. 

1.  They  could  not  go  by  this  way,  because  the  Sequanians 
were  unwilling.  2.  After  this  council  was  dismissed  the 
same  chief  men  of  the  states  returned  to  Caesar.  3.  After 
driving'*  back  our  cavalry,  they  formed  a  phalanx  and  came 
up  to  our  first  line.  4.  Aft^r  giving  this  answer,  he  left. 
5.  Calling  together  their  chiefs,  a  large  number  of  whom  he 
had  in  camp,  he  blames  them  severely.  G.  When  Ctcsar's 
arrival  was  known,  Ariovistus  sent  envoys  to  him.  7.  When 
the  camp  had  been  fortified,  he  left  two  legions  there ;  the 
remaining  four  he  led  back  to  the  larger  camp.  8.  By  the 
delivery  of  this  speech^  the  minds  of  all  were  changed. 
9.  He  allowed  all  the  rest  to  surrender  after  they  had  de- 
livered the  hostages,  arms  and  deserters. 


EXERCISES   ON   SYNTAX.  53 

XLY. 

Use  of  the  tenses ;  Gr.  309-312. 

VOCABULARY. 

castellfim,  -I,  fort,  redoubt.  princeps,  -cipis,  leading,  chief. 

uoudum  (adv.),  not  yet.  praesidium,  -i,  garrison,  defence. 

dlspono, -nere, -posui, -positttm,  reverto,    -ere,   -verti,   -versum, 

place, post.  return  (also  deponent). 

EXERCISES. 

1.  ea  res  enuntiata  est.  2.  post  ejus  mortem  nihilo^  minus 
Helvetii  id  quod  constituerant  facere  conantur.  3.  AUobro- 
ges  nondum  bono  animo^  in  populum  Romanum  videbantur. 
4.  milites,  quos  imperaverat,  conveniebant.  5.  eo  opere 
perfecto  praesidia  disponit,  castella  communit.  6.  ubi  ea 
dies  quam  constituerat  cum  legatis  venit,  legati  ad  eum 
reverterunt.  7.  legates  ad  eum  mittunt,  cujus  legationis 
Divico  princeps  fuit,  qui  dux  Helvetiorum  fuerat.  8.  hac 
oratione  habita,  conversae  sunt  omnium  mentes.  9.  Helvetii 
castra  movebunt. 

1 .  This  district  was  called  Tigurinus ;  for  all  the  Helve- 
tian state  is  divided^  into  four  districts.  2.  The  Helvetians 
were  crossing  this  river.  3.  Setting*  out  from  camp  with 
three  legions,  he  came  to  that  part  which  had  not  yet  crossed 
the  river.  4.  While  this  was^  going  on,  the  horsemen  of 
Ariovistus  threw  missiles  at  our  men.  5.  He  began  battle  on 
the  right  wing,  because  he  had  noticed  these  facts.  6.  Then 
at  last  the  Germans  from  necessity  led  out  their  forces  from 
the  camp  and  posted  them  at  equal  intervals,  tribe  by  tribe. 

7.  I  dare  not  go  into  that  part  of  Gaul  without  an  army. 

8.  The  Sequani  must  endure  all  tortures.       9.    The  enemy 
charged  suddenly  and  swiftly. 


64  EXERCISES    ON    SYNTAX. 

XLVI. 

Subjunctive  in  dependent  clauses ;  Gr.  322-333. 

VOCABULARY. 

lillquls,  -qua,  -quid,  some  one,  any  custos,  -odis,  guard,  sentinel. 

one.  hortor,  -ari,  -atus,  urge. 

exeo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itiini,  ^ro  out,  depart.  loquor,  -i,  -cutiis,  speak,  talk. 

impetus,  -us,  attack.  persuadeo,  -ere,  -si,  -sfim,  per- 
ociiltts,  -i,  eye.  suade. 

plSceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -ittini,  please.  vel,  or. 

scio,  -scire,  -scivi,  -scitum,  know.  vel  .  .  .  v61,  either  .  .  .  or. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  civitati  persuasit  ut  de  finibiis  suis  cum  omnibus  copiis 
exTrent.  2.  Arar  in  Rhodanum  influit  iucredibili  leuitate, 
ita  ut  oculis,  in  utram  partem  fluat,^  judicari  non  possit. 
3.  placuit  ei  ut  ad  Ariovistum  legates  mitteret  qui  ab  eo 
postularent  uti  aliqiiem  locum  colloquio  diceret.  4.  equi- 
tatum  qui  sustineret  liostinm  impetum,  misit.  5.  per  eos, 
ne  causam  diceret,  se  eripuit.  G.  petit  atque  hortatur  ut  vel 
ipse  de  eo  statuat  vel  civitatem  statuere  jubeat.  7.  Dum- 
norigi  custodes  ponit  ut,  quae  agat,^  quibuscum  loquatur,^ 
scire  possit. 

1.  There  was  no  doubt  that^  the  Helvetians  were  the  most 
powerful  of  all  Gaul.  2.  He  sent  [men]  to  find  out^  what^ 
the  character  of  the  mountain  was.  3.  There  were  two 
ways  by  which  they  could^  go  out  from  home.  4.  Divitiacus 
with  man}'  tears  began  to  beg  Cajsar  not  to  decide  on  any- 
thing too  severe  toward  his  brother.  5.  He  warns  Dum- 
liorix  to  avoid  all  suspicions  for  the  future.  6.  He  ordered 
the  Allobroges  to  furnish  them  a  supply  of  com.  7.  I  am 
the  only  [one]  who  could*  not  be  brought  to  take  an  oath 
or  give  m}'  children  [as]  hostages.  8.  Our  men  attacked 
the  enemy  so  vigorously  when  the  signal  was  given,  that  no 
room  was  given  for  throwing  the  javelins  at  the  enemy.® 


EXERCISES    ON    SYNTAX.  55 

XLYII. 

Subjunctive  in  dependent  clauses  (^continuecT)'. 

VOCABULARY. 

hora,  -ae,  hour.  priusquSm  (conj.),  before. 

intellego,  -ere,  -xi,  -cttim,  know,       voco,  -ar6,  -avi,  -atfim,  call, 
understand. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  Helvetii,  cum  id  intellegerent,  legates  ad  eum  mittunt. 
2.  id  ubi  Caesar  resciit,  quorum  per  finis  ierant,  his,  uti 
reducerent,  imperavit.  3.  hoc  toto  proelio,  cum^  ab  hora 
septima  ad  vesperum  piignatum  sit,  aversum^  hostem  videre 
nemo  potuit.  4.  priusquam  quicqvam  couaretur,  Divitiacum 
ad  se  vocavit.  5.  diutius  cum  nostrorum  impetus  sustinere 
non  possent,  alteri,  ut  coeperant,  iu  montem  sc  recepe- 
runt ;  alteri  ad  impedimenta  et  carros  suos  se  contulerunt. 
6.  vehemeuter  eas  incusavit  quod  quaerereut^  quarii  in  par- 
tem^ aut  quo  consilio  ducerentur. 

1.  At  daybreak,  when  the  top  of  the  mountain  was  held 
b}^  Labienus,  Considius  runs  up  to  Caesar.  2.  When  this 
had  been  reported  to  Caesar,  he  hastened  to  start  from  the 
city.  3.  When  the  day  which  he  had  set  came,  he  gave  no 
one  a  passage  through  the  province.  4.  When  they  could 
not  persuade  them,  they  sent  ambassadors  to  Dumnorix  the 
Haeduan,  in  order  to  gain  their  request  from  the  Sequanians 
through  his  intercession.^  5.  He  could  not  use  that  corn 
which  he  had  brought  up  the  Arar,^  because  the  Helvetians 
had  turned  their  course  from  the  river.  6.  He  accuses  them 
strongly,  because  he  is  not  aided  by  them.  7.  Before  he 
made^  any  attempt  he  ordered  Divitiacus  to  be  summoned 
to  him. 


56  EXERCISES    ON   SYNTAX. 

XL  VIII. 

Infinitive ;  Gr.  334-342. 

VOCABULARY, 

ago,  agere,  egi,  actum,  do,  deal,  valeo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itflm,  he  strong, 

talk.  be  able. 

oportet,  -ere,  -uit,  it  is  proper,  one  auctoritas,  -atis,  authority,  infiu- 

ought.  ence. 

potior,     potiri,     potitiis,      (Gr.  si  (conj.),  if. 

[2^1]),  get,  get  control  of.  plebs,  plebis,  (Gr.  [98]),  people, 
interim  (adv.),  meanwhile.  common  people. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  perfacile  est,  cum  virtute  omnibus^  praestemus,  totius 
Oalliae  imperio^  potiri.  2.  interim  quotidie  Caesar  Haednos 
fnimentum  flagitare.  3.  Liscus  dicit  esse  noniiiillos  quorum 
auctoritas  apud  plebem  plurimum  valeat.  4.  Caesari  cum 
id  nuntiatum  esset,  eos  per  provinciam  nostram  iter  facere 
conari,  maturat  ab  urbe  proficisci.  5.  Ariovistus  respondit, 
si  quid  Caesar  velit,  ilium  ad  se  venire  oportere.  G.  Ario- 
vistus ad  Caesarem  legatos  mittit  velle^  se  de  his  rebus  agere 
cum  eo.  7.  pauci,  viribus  confisi,  tranare  contenderunt. 
8.  per  exploratores  Caesar  cognovit  montem  a  suis  teneri. 

1.  He  did  not  wish  these  things  to  be  discussed  while  more 
[persons]  were  present."*  2.  It  is  dangerous  for  the  Germans* 
to  get  used  to  cross  the  Rhine.  3.  He  saw  that  the  Ha3duaus 
were  held  under^  the  sway  of  the  Germans.  4.  When  Ciesar 
learned  that  they  kept'  in  camp,  he  chose  a  place  suitable 
for  a  camp  six  hundred  paces  beyond  them.  5.  The  Suevi, 
who  had  come  to  the  banks  of  the  Rhine,  began  to  return 
home.  6.  Word  was  brought  to  Caesar  that  the  horsemen 
of  Ariovistus  were  coming  nearer  to  the  hill  and  throwing 
stones  and  javelins  at  our  men.  7.  Caesar  promised  to  care^ 
for  the  matter,  [saying]  that  he  had  great  hoj^e  that  Ario- 
vistus would  put  an  end^  to  his  injuries. 


EXERCISES    ON    SYNTAX.  57 

XLIX. 

Participles ;  Gr.  343-347. 

VOCABULARY, 

converto,  -ere,  -verti,  -versum,  oro,  -ar6,  -avi,  -atiim,  heg,  pray, 

turn,  change.  ask. 

fleo,  flere,  flevi,  fletum,  weep.  mens,  -ntis,  7nind,  reason. 

projicio,-ere,-jeci,-jectuin,</irow.  soeiiis,  -i,  friend,  ally. 

tandem  (adv.),  at  last,  at  length.  vulntis,  -eris,  ivound. 

CO  (adv.),  thither.  verbfim,  -i,  word. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  Bojos,  receptos^  ad  se,  socios  sibi  adsciscunt.  2.  per- 
suadent  finitimis,  iiti  eodem  usi  consilio  cum  iis  proficiscan- 
tur.  3.  liaec  cum  pluribus  verbis  fleus  a  Caesare  peteret, 
Caesar  cousolatus  rogat  finem  oraudi  faciat.^  4.  tandem 
vulueribus  defessi  et  pedem  referre  et  quod  mons  suberat 
circiter  mille  passuum  eo  se  recipere  coeperunt.  5.  hoc  toto 
proelio  aversum^  hostem  vide  re  nemo  potuit.  6.  Bojos 
petentibus"*  Haeduis  ut  in  finibus  suis  collocarent  concessit. 
7.  ea  re  impetrata,  sese  omnes  flentes  Caesari  ad  pedes 
projecerunt. 

1.  Caesar  learned  that  Considius,  in  his  fright,^  had  reported 
to  him  what  he  liad  not  seen.^  2.  After  encouraging  his 
men,  Caesar  joined  battle.  3.  The  Helvetians  who  had 
betaken  themselves  to  the  mountain,  began  again  to  make  a 
stand,  when  they  saw  this.^  4.  Our  [men]  having  waited 
three  days  on  account  of  the  wounds  of  the  soldiers  and  the 
burial  of  the  slain,  could  not  pursue  them.  5.  After  the 
lapse ^  of  three  days  he  began  to  follow  them  himself  with  all 
his  forces.  G.  When  he  had  noticed  this,  he  called^  a  council 
and  severel}^  upbraided  them.  7.  He  treated  those  who  were 
brought  back  as  enemies. ^"^  8.  The  Ubii,  who  dwell  nearest 
the  Ehine,^^  pvirsued^-  them  [while  the}'  were]  frightened, 
and  slew  a  large  number  of^^  them. 


68  EXERCISES   ON   SYNTAX. 

L. 

Gerund  and  gerundive ;  Gr.  348,  349. 

VOCABULARY, 

euro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  care  for,  trado,  -dere,  -didi,  -ditiim,  give 

attend  to.  over,  surrender. 

Instruo,    -viere,    -uxi,    -uctum,  inititiin,  -i,  beginning. 

draw  up,  arrange.  mulier,  -eris,  woman. 

pando,  -dere,  -di,   pansum  and  pons,  -ntis,  bridge. 

passum,  extend,  stretch  out.  potestas,  -atls,  poiver,  opportunity. 
servitus,  -utis,  slavery. 

EXERCISES. 
1 .  mercatores  ea  important  quae  ad  effeminandos  animos 
pertinent.  2.  pontem  in  Arare  faciendum  curat.  3.  collo- 
quendi  Caesari  causa  visa  non  est.  4.  reperiebat  in  quae- 
rendo^  Caesar  initium  ejus  fugae  factum  esse  a  Dumnorige, 
atque  ejus  equitibus.  5.  ad  eas  res  conficiendas,  Orgetorix 
delegitur.  6.  mulieres  in  proelium  proficiscentis  milites 
passis  manibus  flentes  implorabant  ne  se  in  servitutem  Ro- 
manis  traderent.  7.  P.  Crassus  tertiam  aciem  uostris 
subsidio  misit.  8.  aciem  instruxit  hostibusque  pugnandi 
potestatera  fecit.^  9.  dixit  id  se  sui  muniendi  non  Galliae 
impugnandae  causa  facere. 

1.  As  the  liope  of  returning  home  had  been  lost,^  we  were 
the  more  prepared  to  undergo^  all  dangers.  2.  The  highest 
zeal  and  eagerness  for  waging  war  sprang  up.  3.  The 
tenth  legion  affirmed  that  it  was  perfectly  ready  to  wage 
war.  4.  Caesar  stops*  speaking  and  returns  to  his  [men]. 
5.  Caesar  went  to  Nearer  Gaul  to  hold  the  assizes.''  6.  The 
enemy  charged  so  suddenly  and  quickl}'  that  no  room  was 
given  for  throwing^  their  javelins  at  the  enemy.  7.  The 
town  was  so  fortified  by  the  nature  of  its  position  that  it 
gave  a  great  opportunity  for  prolonging  a  war.  8.  He 
said  that  he  ought  to  suspect  that  Caesar,  because  he  had 
an  army  in  Gaul,  had   [it]  to  crush  him.^ 


EXERCISES   ON   SYNTAX.  69 

LI. 

Supine ;  Gr.  350-352. 

VOCABULARY, 
conspicio,  -6r6,  -exi,  -ectam,  see,       stipgro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  conquer, 

perceive.  overcome. 

existimo,  -are,  -avi,  -atam,  think,       Inde  (adv.),  thence,  from  there. 

believe.  tento,  -are,  -avi,  -attim,  try,  test. 

fortan^,  -a,^,  fortune. 

EXERCISES. 
1.  Haedui,  cum  se  suaque  ab  iis  defendere  uon  possent, 
legates  ad  Caesarein  mittunt  rogatum  auxilium.  2.  perfacile 
facta  esse  illis  probat  conata  perficere.  3.  eos  cum  apud 
se  in  castris  Ariovistus  conspexisset,  conclamavit,  quid  ad  se 
venirent.^  4.  Ariovistus  respondit  Haeduos  sibi  quoniam 
belli  fortunam  tentasseut  et  armis  superati  essent  stipendi- 
arios  esse  factos.  5.  legati  veniebant  questum  sese  ne 
obsidibus  quidem-  datis  pacem  redimere  potuisse.  6.  neque 
sibi  homines  feros  ac  barbaros  temperaturos^  existimabat, 
quin,^  cum  omnem  Galliam  occupassent,  ut  ante  Cimbri 
Teutonique  fecissent,  in  provinciam  exirent  atque  inde  in 
Italiam  contenderent. 

1.  The  Haeduans  came  to  complain  because  the  Harudes, 
who  had  latel}^  been  brought  over  into  Gaul,  were  la3'ing* 
waste  their  country.  2.  I  fled  from  the  state  and  came  to 
Rome  to  ask  help.  3.  He  blamed  them  severel}^,  [saying 
that]  Ariovistus  had  most  eagerly  sought  the  friendship  of 
the  Roman  people,  when  he  was  consul.'^  4.  He  resolved 
to  send^  envo3's  to  Ariovistus  to  ask  him  to  name  some  place 
for  a  conference,  [saying]  that  he  wished  to  treat  with  him 
about  the  most  important  interests  of  each.  5.  Caesar  prom- 
ised to  care^  for  this  matter,  [sa3dng]  that  he  had  great 
hope  that  Ariovistus,  led  by  his  kindness  and  influence, 
would  put'^  a  stop  to  his  wrongs. 


60  EXERCISES    ON    SYNTAX. 

LII. 

Forms  of  conditional  sentences ;  Gr.  446-456. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  si  quid  vultis,  ad  Idus  Aprilis  revertimini.  2.  si  vim 
facere  conentur,  prohibeat  Caesar.  3.  id  si  fiet,  magno  cum 
periculo  provinciae  erit.  4.  id  si  fiat,  magno  cum  periculo 
provinciae  sit.  5.  id  si  factum  esset,  magno  cum  periculo 
provinciae  fuisset.  6.  si  Roman i  superent,  nobis  liberta- 
tem  eripiant.  7.  si  Romani  superabunt,  nobis  libertatem 
eripient.  8.  si  quid  accidat  Romanis,  summam  in  spem 
regni  obtinendi  Dumnorix  venit.^  9.  si  quid  mihi-  a  Caesare 
opus  esset,  ego  ad  eum  venissem ;  si  quid  ille  me  vult,  ilium 
ad  me  venire  oportet.  10.  si  nemo  sequatur,  tamen  ego 
cum  sola  decima  legione  eam. 

1.  If  the}'  tr}'  to  cross  against  my  will,  I  shall  stop  them. 
2.  If  they  should  try  to  cross,  I  should  stop  them.  3.  If 
they  were  trying  to  cross,  I  should  stop  them.  4.  If 
they  had  tried  to  cross,  I  should  have  stopped  them.  5.  I 
will  make  peace  with  you,  if  hostages  are  given  me  by  you. 
6.  If  hostages  had  been  given  me,  I  should  have  made  peace 
with  the  enemy.  7.  If  anything  happens  to  him,  no  one 
will  think  that  it  has  not  been  done  by  my  consent.  8.  If 
anything  were  happening,  all  would  think  that  it  was  done 
by  my  consent.  9.  If  you  wish  to  be  free  from  blame, 
bring  back  the  fugitives.  10.  If  this  be  told,  we  shall  come 
into  the  severest  torture.  11.  If  this  should  be  told  to 
Ariovistus,  I  do  not  doubt^  that"*  he  would  inflict^  punish- 
ment on  the  hostages.  12.  If  this  had  been  told  me,  I 
should  have  inflicted  punishment  on  you.  13.  A  wall,  put 
around  this  mountain,  makes  [it]  a  fort.  14.  Considius 
says  that  the  mountain  which  Caesar  wished  to  be  seized  b^^ 
Labienus  is  held  by  the  enemy. 


EXERCISES   ON   SYNTAX. 


61 


LIII. 

Indirect  discourse  ;  Gr.  457-478. 


1.  tres  jam  copiarum  partes 
Helvetii  id  flumeni  transdux- 
erunt. 


EXERCISES. 

Caesar  certior  f actus  est  tres 
jam  copiarum  partes  Ilelvetios 


2.  sunt  nonnulli  quorum  auc- 
toritas  apud  plebem  plurimum 
valet. 

3.  scio  ilia  esse  vera  nee  quis- 
quam  ex  eo  plus  quam  ego  do- 
loris  capit. 

4.  mons  quern  a  Labieno  oc- 
cupari  voluisti  ab  hostibus  ten- 
etur;  id  a  Gallicis  armis  atque 
irisignibus  cognovi. 


id  flumen  transduxisse. 

Liscus  dicit  esse  nonnuUos 
quorum  auctoritas  apud  plebem 
plurimum  valeat. 

Divitiacus  dixit  scire  se  ilia 
esse  vera  nee  quenquam  ex  eo 
plus  quam  se  doloris  capere. 

Considius  dicit  montem  quem 
a  Labieno  occupari  voluerit  ab 
hostibus  teneri ;  id  se  a  Gallicis 
armis   atque   insignibus   cogno- 


1.  They  are  trying  to  march 
through  our  province. 

2 .  We  intend  to  march  through 
the  province  without  any^  harm, 
because  we  have  no  other  road. 


3.  Men  of  hostile  spirit,  if  the 
privilege  of  marching  through 
the  province  be  given,  will  not 
refrain, from  wrong  and  harm. 


Word  was  brought  to  Caesar 
that  they  were  trying  to  march 
through  our  province. 

They  sent  ambassadors  to  him 
to  say  that  they  intended  to 
march  through  the  province  with- 
out any  harm  because  they  had 
no  other  road. 

He  did  not  think  that  men  of 
hostile  spu'it,  if  the  privilege  of 
marching  through  the  province 
were  given,  would  refrain^  from 
wrong  and  harm. 


EXERCISES    ON   SYNTAX. 


LIV. 


Indirect  discourse  (continueiT). 


EXERCISES. 


1.  si  pacem  populus  Horn  anus 
cum  Helvetiis  f  aciet  in  earn  par- 
tem ibunt  atque  ibi  erunt  ubi  tu 
eos  constitueris  1  atque  esse  vol- 
ueris  ;i  sin  bello  persequi  perse- 
verabis,  reminiscere  et  veteris 
incommodi  populi  Romani  et 
pristinae  virtutis  Helvetiorum. 


2.  eo  mihi  minus  dubitationis 
datur  quod  eas  res  quas  vos  com- 
memoravistis  memoria  teneo. 


is  ita  cum  Caesare  agit;  si 
pacem  populus  Romanus  cum 
Helvetiis  faceret  in  eam  partem 
itui'os  atque  ibi  futuros  Helve- 
tios  ubi  eos  Caesar  constituisset 
atque  esse  voluisset;  sin  bello 
persequi  perseveraret,  reminis- 
cere tur  et  veteris  incommodi 
populi  Romani  et  pristinae  vir- 
tutis Helvetiorum.     ' 

his  Caesar  ita  respondit;  eo 
sibi  minus  dubitationis  dari  quod 
eas  res  quas  legati  Helvetii  com- 
memorassent  memoria  teneret. 


1.  Do  not  cause  this  place 
where  we  stand-  to  take  [its] 
name  from  the  defeat  of  the 
Roman  people  and  the  slaugh- 
ter of  [their]  army. 

2.  The  Helvetians  have  been 
taught  by  their  forefathers  to 
be  8  in  the  habit  of  receiving* 
hostages,  not  of  giving ;  of  that 
fact  the  Roman  nation  is  a  wit- 


[He  told  him]  not  to  cause 
that  place  where  they  stood  to 
take  its  name  from  the  defeat 
of  the  Roman  people  and  the 
slaughter  of  their  army. 

Divico  answered  that  the  Hel- 
vetians had  been  taught  by  their 
forefathers  to  be  in  the  habit  of 
receiving  hostages,  not  of  giv- 
ing ;  that  the  Roman  nation  was 
a  witness  of  that  fact. 


EXERCISES    ON   SYNTAX.  63 

LT. 

Indirect  discourse  (continued). 

EXERCISES. 

1.  Caesari  renuuciatur  Helvetiis  esse  in  animo  per  agrum 
Sequanorum  et  Haeduorum  iter  in  Santonum  lines  facere  qui 
non  longe  a  Tolosatium  finibus  absunt^  quae  civitas  est^  in 
provincia. 

2.  Liscus  dicit  hos  seditiosa  atque  improba  oratione  mul- 
titudinem  deterrere  ne  frumentum  couferant  quod  praestare 
debeant. 

3.  Caesar  reperit  Dumnorigem  odisse  Romanos  quod 
eorum  adventu  potentia  ejus  deminuta  et  Divitiacus  frater 
in  antiquum  locum  gratiae  atque  honoris  sit  restitutus. 

4.  eodem  die  ab  exploratoribus  certior  factus  hostes  sub 
monte  consedisse  milia  passuum  ab  ipsius  castris  octo, 
qualis  esset  natura  montis  et  qualis  in  circuitu  ascensus  qui 
cognoscerent  misit.    renunciatum  est  facilem  esse. 

1.  Divitiacus  the  Haeduan  spoke  for^  them,  [saying] 
that  all  Gaul  was  divided  into  two  parties^;  that  the  Ha^d- 
uans  held  the  leadership  of  one  of  these,  the  Arverni  of  the 
other ;  that  after  these  had  fought^  with  each  other  for^  the 
power  man}'  years,  it  came  to  pass  that  the  Germans  were 
hired  ^  b}'  the  Arverni ;  that  at  first  about  fifteen  thousand  of 
these  crossed  the  Rhine  ;  that  now  there  were  in  Gaul  one 
hundred  and  twenty-  thousand. 

2.  He  said  that  he  was  the  only  one  out  of  the  whole  state 
of  the  Hifiduans  who  could  not  be  brought  to  take  the  oath, 
or  give  his  children  as  hostages  ;  that  for  this  reason^  he  had 
fled  from  the  state,  and  had  come  to  Rome  to  the  senate  to 
ask  aid,  because  he  alone  was  not  held  either^  b}'  an  oath  or 
by  hostages. 


64  EXERCISES    OX    SYNTAX. 

LTI. 

Relations  of  place. 

Place  where;  locative,  Gr.  273 ;  ablative,  Gr.'299;  witli 

prepositions,  Gr.  308. 
Place  to  which ;  accusative,  Gr.  265  ;  with  prepositions, 

Gr.  268. 
Place  from  which ;  ablative,  Gr.  293 ;  with  prepositions, 

Gr.  308. 

EXERCISE. 
1.  Belgae  a  cultu  atqiie  humanitate  longissime  absimt, 
minimeque  ad  eos  mercatores  saepe  commeant.  2.  aut  siiis 
finibus  eos  prohibent,  aut  ipsi  in  eorum  finibus  bellum  gerunt. 
3.  civitati  persiiasit  ut  de  finibus  suis  cum  omnibus  copiis 
exirent.  4.  trium  mensium  molita  cibaria  sibi  quemque 
dome  effen-e  jubent.  5.  Rhodanus  nonnullis  locis  vado  trau- 
situr.  6.  ex  eo  oppido  pons  ad  Helvetios  pertinet.  7. 
Caesari  cum  id  nuntiatum  esset,  eos  per  provinciam  nostram 
iter  facere  conari,^  maturat  ab  urbe  proficisci  et  quam  max- 
imis  potest  itineribus  in  Galliam  ulteriorem  coutendit  et  ad- 
Genuam  pervenit.  provinciae  toti  quam  maximum  potest 
militum  numerum  imperat  —  erat  omnino  in  Gallia  ulteriore 
legio  una  —  pontem,  qui  erat  ad  Genuam,  jubet  rescindi. 
8.  interea  ea  legione  quam  secum  habebat,  militibusque,  qui 
ex  provincia  convenerant,  a  lacu  Lemanno,  qui  in  flumen 
Rhodanum  influit,  ad  montem  Juram,  qui  fiues  Sequanorum 
ab  Helvetiis  dividit,  millia  passuum  decern  novem  murum  in 
altitudinem  pedum  sedecim  fossamque  perducit.  9.  eo 
autem  frumento  quod  flumine^  Arare  navibus  subvexerat 
propterea  minus*  uti  poterat,  quod  iter  ab  Arare  Helvetii 
averterant  a  quibus  discedere  nolebat.  10.  non  solum 
domi  sed  etiam  apud  finitimas  civitates  largiter  potest.  1 1 . 
Divitiacus  dixit  ob  eam  rem  se  ex  civitate  profugisse  et 
Romam  ad  senatum  venisse  auxilium  postulatum. 


EXERCISES    ON    SYNTAX.  65 

LYII. 

Relations  of  place  (^continued'). 

EXERCISE. 

1.  hie  locus  aequo  fere  spatio  ab  castris  Arioyisti  et  Cae- 
saris  aberat.  eo,  ut  erat  dictum,  ad  colloquium  veuerunt. 
legionem  Caesar,  quam  equis  devexerat,  passibus  duceutis 
ab  eo  loco  constituit.  2.  ultra  eum  locum,  quo  in  loco 
Germani  consederant,  circiter  passus  sescentos  ab  iis,  castris 
idoueum  locum  delegit  acieque  triplici  instructa  ad  eum  locum 
venit.  3.  ipse  a  dextro  cornu,  quod  cam  partem  minime 
firmam  hostium  esse  animadverterat,  proelium  commisit. 
4.  hoc  proelio  trans  Rhenum  nuntiato  Suevi,  qui  ad  ripas 
Rheni  venerant,  domum  reverti  coeperant;  quos  Ubii,  qui 
proximi  Rhenum  incolunt,  perterritos  insecuti  magnum  ex 
his  numerum  occiderunt.  Caesar  una  aestate  duobus  maxi- 
mis  bellis  confectis  maturms  paulo  quam  tempus  anni  postu- 
labat,  in  hiberna  in  Sequanos  exercitum  deduxit ;  hibernis 
Labienum  praeposuit ;  ipse  in  citeriorem  Galliam  ad  conven- 
tus  agendos  profectus  est.  5.  Belgae  ab  extremis  Galliae 
finibus  oriuntur,  pertinent  ad  inferiorem  partem  fluminis 
Rheni,  spectant  in  septentrionem  et  orientem  solem.  Aqui- 
tania  a  Garumna  flumine  ad  Pyrenaeos  montes  et  cam  partem 
oceani,  quae  est  ad^  Hispaniam,  pertinet ;  spectat  inter  occa- 
sum  solis  et  septentriones.  G.  biduo  post  Ariovistus  ad 
Caesarem  legatos  mittit ;  velle  se  de  his  rebus  quae  inter  cos 
agi  coeptae  neque  perfectae  essent  agere  cum  eo ;  uti  ant 
iterum  colloquio  diem  constitueret,  aut,  si  id  minus  vellet,  e 
suis  legatis  aliquem  ad  se  mitteret.  colloquendi  Caesari 
causa  visa  non  est,  et  eo  magis,  quod  pridie  ejus  diei  Ger- 
mani retineri  non  poterant  quin  in  nostros  tela  iconjicerent. 
legatum  e  suis  sese  magno  cum  periculo  ad  eum  missurum  et 
hominibus  feris  objecturum  existimabat.  commodissimum 
visum  est  C.  Yalerium  Procillum  ad  eum  mittere. 


66  EXERCISES   ON   SYNTAX, 


LYIII. 

Relations  of  time. 
Time  when  or  within  which ;  Gr.  301. 
Time  during  which ;  Gr.  266,  302. 
Dates ;  Gr.  487-497. 
Ablative  absolute ;  Gr.  307. 
Temporal  clauses ;  Gr.  330. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  die  constituta  causae  dictionis,  Orgetorix  omiiem  suam 
famiUam  undique  coegit.  2.  cum  civitas  jus  suum  exsequi 
conaretur,  Orgetorix  mortuus^  est.  3.  ubi  jam  se  ad  earn 
rem  paratos  esse  arbitrati  sunt,  vices  incendunt.  4.  diem 
dicunt,  qua  die  ad  ripam  omnes  conveniant.  is  dies  erat  a. 
d.^  V.  Kal.  Apr.  L.  Pisone,  A.  Gabinio  consulibus.  5.  ut 
spatium  intercedere  posset,  dum  milites  quos  imperaverat 
convenirent,^  legatis  respondit  diem*  se  ad  deUberandum 
sumpturum ;  si  quid  velleut  ad*  Id.  Apr.  reverterentur. 
6.  in  fines  Vocontiorum  die  septimo  pervenit.  7.  lega- 
tionis  Divico  princeps  fuit,  qui  bello  Cassiano*'  dux  Helveti- 
orum  fuerat.  8.  ita  dies  circiter  quindecim  iter  fecerunt. 
9.  pluribus  praesentibus  eas  res  jactari  nolebat.  10.  itaque 
prius  quam  quicquam  conaretur/  Divitiacum  ad  se  vocari 
jubet.  11.  de  tertia  vigilia  T.  Labienum  summura  jugum 
mentis  adscendere  jubet.  12.  post  quam  id  animum  adver- 
tit  copias  suas  Caesar  in  preximum  collem  subducit.  13. 
hoc  tote  preelie,  cum  ab  hera  septima  ad  vesperum  pugna- 
tum  sit,  aversum  hestem  videre  nemo  potuit.  14.  ea  tota 
necte  continenter  ierunt ;  nullam  partem  noctis  itinere  inter- 
misse  in  fines  Lingenum  die  quarto  pervenerunt,  cum  ct 
propter  vulnera  militum  et  propter  sepulturam  occisorum 
nostri  triduum  morati  eos  sequi  non  petuissent. 


EXERCISES    ON    SYNTAX.  67 

LIX. 

Relations  of  time  (continued). 

EXERCISE. 

1.  prima^  nocte  e  castris  Helvetiorum  egressi  ad  Rhenmn 
finesquc  Germanorum  coutendernnt.  2.  paucis  mensibiis 
ante  Harudura  millia  horaiiium  xxiii  ad  eum  veneraiit. 
3.  futurum  est^  paucis  annis  ut  omnes  ex  Galliae  finibus 
pellantur.  4.  dum  pan  cos  dies  ad  Vesontiouem  rei  frumen- 
tariae  commeatusque  causa  moratur,  timor  omnera  exercitura 
occupavit.  5.  haec  cum  auimadvertisset,  vehementer  eos 
incusavit.  6.  dixit  Ariovistum  se  consule  cupidissime  pop- 
uli  Romani  amicitiam  appetisse.  7.  factum  ejus  hostis 
periculum  patrum  nostrorum  memoria ;  factum  etiam  nuper 
in  Italia  servili  tumultu.  8.  septimo  die,  cum  iter  non 
intermitteret,  ab  exploratoribus  certior  factus  est  Ariovisti 
copias  a  nostris  millibus  passnum  quattuor  et  viginti,  abesse. 
9.  biduo  post  Ariovistus  ad  Caesarem  legatos  mittit.  10. 
ex  eo  die  dies  continuos  quinque  Caesar  pro  castris  suas 
copias  produxit,  ut,  si  vellet  Ariovistus  proelio  contendere, 
ei  potestas  non  deesset.  Ariovistus  his  omnibus  diebus 
exercitum  castris  continuit.  11.  ubi  ne  tum  quidem  eos 
prodire  intellexit,  circiter  meridiem  exercitum  in  castra 
reduxit.  tum  demum  Ariovistus  partem  suarum  copiarum, 
quae  castra  minora  oppugnaret,^  misit.  acriter  utrimque 
usque  ad  vesperum  pugnatum  est.  solis  occasu  suas  copias 
Ariovistus  multis  et  inlatis  et  acceptis  vulneribus  in  castra 
reduxit.  12.  ubi  eum  castris  se  tenere  Caesar  intellexit, 
ne  diutius  commeatu  prohiberetur,  ultra  eum  locum  quo  in 
loco  Germani  consederant,  circiter  passus  sescentos  ab  iis, 
castris  idoneum  locum  delegit  acieque  triplici  instructa  ad 
eum  locum  venit.  primam  et  secundam  aciem  in  armis  esse, 
tertiam  castra  munire  jussit. 


68  EXERCISES    ON   SYKTAX= 

LX. 

For  miscellaneous  questions  in  review. 

EXERCISE. 
Caesar,  Bell.  Gall.  I.,  Cap.  I.-IV. 

I.  Gallia  est  omiiis  clivisa  Id  partes  tres  ;  quarum  imam 
incolunt  Belgae,  aliam  Aquitauia,  tertium  qui^  ipsorum-  lin- 
gua Celtae,  nostra  Galli  appellautur.  hi  omnes  lingua, 
institutis,  legibus  inter  se  differ unt.  Gallos  ab  Aquitauis 
Garumna  flumen,  a  Belgis  Matrona  et  Sequana  dividit.^ 
horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae,  propterea  quod  a 
cultu  atque  humanitate  provinciae  longissime  absunt,  mini- 
meque  ad  eos  mercatores  saepe  commeant  atque  ea  quae  ad 
effeminandos  animos  pertinent,  important,  proximique  sunt 
Germanis,  qui  trans  Rhenum  incolunt,  quibuscum  conti- 
nenter  bellum  gerunt.  qua  de  causa ^  Helvetii  quoque  reli- 
quos  Gallos  virtute  praecedunt,  quod  fere  cotidianis  proeliis 
cum  Germanis  contendunt,  cum  aut  suis  finibus  eos  pro- 
hibent,  aut  ipsi  in  eorum  finibus  bellum  gerunt.  eorum 
una  pars  quam  Gallos  obtinere  dictum  est,'^  initium  capit  a 
flumine  Rhodano;  continetur^  Garumna  flumine,  Oceano,  fin- 
ibus Belgarum ;  attingit  etiam  ab^  Sequanis  et  Helvetiis 
flumen  Rlieuum ;  vergit^  ad  septentriones.  Belgae  ab  ex- 
tremis Galliae  finibus  oriuntur,  pertinent  ad  iuferiorem  par- 
tem fluminis  Rheni,  spectant^  in  septentrionem  et  orientem 
solem.  Aquitauia  a  Garumna  flumine  ad  Pyrenaeos  montes 
et  cam  partem  Oceani,  quae  est  ad  Hispaniam,  pertinet; 
spectat  inter  occasum  soils  et  septentriones.^*^ 

II.  Apud"  Helvetios  longe  nobilissimus  f  uit  et  ditissimus 
Orgetorix.  Is  M.  Messala  et  M.  Pisone  consulibus  regni 
cupiditate  inductus  conjurationem  nobilitatis  fecit  et  civitati 
persuasit,  ut  de  finibus  suis  cum  omnibus  copiis  exirent ; 
perfacile  esse,^^  cum  virtute  omnibus  praestarent,  totius  Gal- 


EXERCISES    OX   SYNTAX.  69 

liae  imperio^'^  potiri.  id  hoc"  facilius  eis  persuasit  quod 
undique  loci  natiira  Helvetii  coiitinentiir ;  una  ex^^  parte 
flumine  Rheno  latissimo  et  altissimo,  qui  agrum  Helvetium 
a  Germanis  dividit ;  altera  ex  parte  monte  Jura  altissimo  qui 
est  iuter  Sequanos  et  Helvetios ;  tertia  lacu  Lemauno  et 
flumine  Rliodauo,  qui  proviuciam  nostram  ab  Helvetiis 
dividit.  his  rebus^^  fiebat,  ut  et  minus  late  vagarentur,  et 
minus  facile  finitimis  bellum  inferre  possent ;  qua  de  causa 
homines  bellandi  cupidi  maguo  dolore  adficiebantur.  pro^^ 
multitudine  autem  hominum  et  pro  gloria  belli  atque  forti- 
tudinis  angustos  se  fines  habere  arbitrabantur,  qui  in  longi- 
tudinem  millia  passuum  ccxl  in  latitudinem  clxxx  patebaut. 
III.  His  rebus  adducti  et  auctoritate  Orgetorigis  permoti 
constituerunt  ea  quae  ad  proficiscendum  pertinerent  compa- 
rare,  jumentorum  et  carrorum  quam  maximum  numerum 
coemere,  sementes  quam  maximas  facere,  ut  in  itiuere  copia 
frumenti  suppeteret,  cum  proximis  civitatibus  pacem  et  ami- 
citiam  confirmare.  ad  eas  res  conficiendas  biennium  sibi 
satis  esse  duxerunt,  in  tertium  annum  profectionem  lege 
confirmant.  ad  eas  res  conficiendas  Orgetorix  deligitur. 
is  sibi^^  legationem  ad  civitates  suscepit.  in  eo  itinera  per- 
suadet  Castico,  Catamantaloedis  filio,  Sequano,  cujus  pater 
regnum  in  Sequanis  multos  annos  obtinuerat  et  a  senatu 
populi  Romani  amicus  appellatus  erat,  ut  regnum  in  civitate 
sua  occuparet,  quod  pater  ante  habuerat ;  itemque  Dumno- 
rigi  Haeduo,  fratri  Divitiaci,  qui  eo  tempore  principatum  in 
civitate  obtinebat  ac  maxime  plebi  acceptus^^  erat,  ut  idem 
conaretur  persuadet,  eique  filiam  suam  in  matrimonium  dat. 
perfacile  factu  esse  illis  probat  conata  perficere,  propterea 
quod  ipse  suae  civitatis  imperium  obtenturus  esset ;  non  esse 
dubium,  quin  totius  Galliae  plurimum  Helvetii  possent ;  se 
suis  copiis  suoque  exercitu  illis  regna  conciliaturum  con- 
firmat.  hac  oratione  adducti  inter  se  fidem  et  jus  jurandum 
dant  et  regno  occupato^  per  tres  potentissimos  ac  firmissi- 
mos  populos  totius  Galliae-^  sese  potiri  posse  sperant. 


70  EXERCISES    ON   SYNTAX. 

IV.  Ea  res  Helvetiis  per  indicium  enuntiata.  moribus 
suis  Orgetorigem  ex  vinclis  causam  dicere-'  coegerunt. 
damnatiim^  poenam  sequi  oportebat,  ut  igui  cremaretiir. 
die  constituta  causae  dictionis^*  Orgetorix  ad  judicium  omnem 
suam  familiam,^  ad  hominum  milia  decem,  undique  coegit  et 
omnes  clientes  obaeratosque  suos  quorum  magnum  numerum 
habebat,  eodem  conduxit ;  per  eos  ne^  causam  diceret,  se 
eripuit.  cum  civitas  ob  earn  rem  incitata  armis  jus  suum 
exsequi  conaretur  multitudinemque  hominum  ex  agris  magis- 
tratus  cogerent,  Orgetorix  mortuus  est  ;-^  neque  abest  suspi- 
cio,  ut  Helvetii  arbitrantur,  quin  ipse  sibi  mortem  consci- 
verit.^ 


NOTES. 


[The  exercises  are  numbered  for  convenience  of  reference,  but 
it  is  not  intended  that  each  shall  be  a  separate  lesson,  though  most 
of  them  will  be  found  of  the  proper  length  for  a  single  recitation. 
Some,  however,  contain  matter  which  shovdd  be  slowly  learned  and 
digested.  Such  are  the  topics  included  under  the  head  of  "Pre- 
liminary "  and  of  "  Inflection  of  the  Verb."  In  all  cases,  however, 
the  teacher  should  divide  the  work  according  to  the  needs  and  capa- 
bilities of  his  class. 

The  references  to  the  Grammar  at  the  head  of  each  exercise  in- 
clude only  the  head  matter  in  larger  print,  which  should  be  thor- 
oughly and  completely  memorized.  In  connection  with  each  lesson 
the  notes  should  be  carefully  read  over,  and,  when  necessary,  ex- 
plained and  illustrated  by  the  teacher.  In  particular,  the  teacher 
should  assure  himself  that  all  the  technical  terms  of  grammar  em- 
ployed are  made  perfectly  clear  to  the  pupils  by  repeated  definition 
and  explanation.  Such  terms  often  suggest  only  the  vaguest  ideas 
to  a  beginner,  and  time  spent  in  giving  an  exact  knowledge  of  them 
is  spent  to  the  best  advantage  possible.  In  some  cases,  especially 
in  the  lessons  on  syntax,  portions  of  the  notes  should  be  memorized. 
Such  cases  are  left  to  the  judgment  of  the  teacher,  as  no  directions 
can  be  given  that  will  suit  all  classes. 

Besides  the  references  to  the  Grammar,  the  pupil  should  be  required 
to  commit  to  memory  the  vocabularies,  giving  the  Latin  word  when  the 
teacher  gives  the  English,  or  vice  versa.  The  English  sentences  should 
be  written  out  in  Latin,  copied  on  the  blackboard,  corrected,  and  given 
orally  as  a  review  along  with  the  following  lesson.  Such  a  method  is 
a  very  exacting  one  for  both  teacher  and  pupil,  but  is  after  all  the 
shortest,  since  it  brings  in  the  end  far  better  results  with  far  less  work. 
All  the  words  used  in  the  exercises  on  forms  are  given  in  the  vocabu- 
laries, that  the  pupil  may  have  as  much  time  as  possible  to  gain  a  per- 
fect mastery  of  the  inflections ;  words  used  in  the  exercises  on  syntax 


72  NOTES. 

must  often  l)e  looked  for  in  the  index  at  the  end  of  the  book.  The 
omission  is  intentional,  its  object  being  to  give  the  pupil  practice  in 
iinding  words  in  an  alphabetical  vocabulary.  Few  teachers  are  aware 
how  large  a  part  of  the  two  or  three  hours  spent  in  translating  a  page 
of  a  Latin  author  is  spent  by  the  beginner  in  the  mechanical  task  of 
searching  out  words  in  his  lexicon.  A  little  more  expertness  in  finding 
a  word  will  certainly  be  no  loss  to  the  pupil  when  he  takes  up  his 
Caesar  or  Cicero. 

The  teacher  should  not  confine  himself  to  the  exercises  given  here, 
but  should  give  various  oral  exercises,  taking  a  short  sentence  and 
varying  it;  changing  the  number  or  person  of  the  subject,  the  tense, 
mood  or  voice  of  the  verb,  etc.  That  there  should  be  constant  prac- 
tice in  repeating  and  writing  inflectional  forms  is  so  self-evident  that  it 
is  unnecessary  to  dwell  upon  it  here.  Moreover,  from  the  very  first 
the  pupil  should  be  trained  to  notice  the  ending  of  the  inflected  words. 
Such  a  habit,  formed  at  the  beginning,  will  do  much  to  prevent  the 
blundering  in  translation  that  always  results  from  a  disregard  of  the 
meaning  and  force  of-  flectional  syllables.  Too  great  stress  cannot  be 
given  at  the  beginning  to  the  difference  between  English  and  Latin  in 
their  methods  of  expressing  the  relation  of  words  to  one  another,  the 
former  chiefly  by  prefixing  something  to  the  significant  word ;  the  lat- 
ter, by  adding  something.  The  pupil  should  bo  made  to  see  at  the 
very  beginning  that  in  virtutis,  for  example,  it  is  the  final  syllable  that 
expresses  the  relation  which  is  expressed  in  English  by  the  preposition 
"of";  and  the  rest  of  the  word  which  gives  the  meaning  "courage."] 


The  preliminary  definitions  and  principles  should  be  taken  slowly 
and  carefully,  and  special  pains  should  be  taken  with  pronunciation 
and  accent.  As  soon  as  the  pupil  has  memorized  the  rules  of  quantity 
and  accent,  he  should  be  given  practice  in  pronouncing  words,  point- 
ing out  long  and  short  syllables,  etc.  Any  page  of  the  exercises  Avill 
furnish  material  for  such  training.  The  teacher  may,  if  he  chooses, 
assign  certain  portions  to  be  read  over  in  advance  as  a  part  of  the 
lesson,  and  require  the  pupil  to  point  out  all  syllables,  the  quantity  of 
which  can  be  determined  by  inspection. 

The  rules  of  euphony  of  vowels  and  consonants  may  properly  be 
omitted  in  the  reading  of  the  notes,  until  flectional  forms,  that  serve  to 
illustrate  them,  are  reached.  Such  will  be  found  chiefly  in  the  con- 
sonant-declension and  the  verb. 


UNIVERSITY 


%. 


; 


NOTES.  73 


II. 

Rules  of  Syntax.     (To  be  carefully  memorized.) 

The  nominative  is  used  as  the  subject  of  a  Jinite  verb. 

The  Jinite  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in  person  and  number. 

The  predicate-noun  agrees  with  the  subject  in  case. 

(The  teacher  should  assure  himself  that  every  pupil  has  a  clear  .ind 
definite  idea  of  the  meaning  of  "subject/'  "finite  verb,"  "agrees/' 
"predicate-noun/'  etc.) 

1.  e  stands  only  before  consonants ;  ex  before  both  consonants  and 
vowels. — 2.  non  precedes  the  word  it  limits.  —  3.  The  Latin  has  no 
articles,  causa,  for  example,  may  be  translated  cause,  a  cause,  or  the 
cause,  as  the  sense  of  the  passage  requires. — 4.  The  verb  of  a  Latin 
sentence  is  more  commonly  at  the  end.  —  5.  AVords  in  brackets  are  to 
be  omitted  in  translating  into  Latin.  —  6.  The  Latin  has  no  words  cor- 
responding to  the  English  introductory  there  and  it.  These  words 
should  therefore  be  omitted  in  translating  into  Latin.  "There  is  no 
cause"  becomes  in  Latin  "cause  is  not"  (i.e.  does  not  exist). 

III. 

1.  causa  (abl.)  means  "for  the  sake,"  and  stands  after  the  genitive 
that  limits  it ;  e.g.  gloriae  causa,  for  glorifs  sake,  for  the  sake  of  glory. 
—  2.  You  may  be  translated  into  Latin  by  either  the  singular  or  the 
plural.     In  the  earlier  exercises  the  pupil  should  write  both  forms. — 

3.  use  cum. 

IV. 

Questions  answered  by  yes  or  no  are  indicated  in  Latin,  not  as  in 
English,  by  putting  the  verb  before  the  subject,  but  by  tlie  use  of  the 
interrogative  particles  -ne  and  num. 

A  question  is  asked  by  appending  -ne  to  the  prominent  or  emphatic 
word,  which  is  regularly  put  first  in  the  sentence;  e.g.  estne  causa? 
"  Is  there  a  cause  ?  "  causane  est  ?  "  Is  there  a  cause  ?  " 

The  insertion  of  a  negative  word,  as  in  English,  shows  that  the  an- 
swer yes  is  expected,  -ne  is  appended  to  the  negative  as  the  prominent 
word,     nonne  causa  est?     "Is  there  not  a  cause  1  " 

Num  is  used  when  the  answer  no  is  expected.  It  stands  regularly  at 
the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  num  causa  est?  "Is  there  a  cause  ?  " 
(  =  There  is  no  cause,  is  there  ? ), 

Answers  are  usually  given  by  repeating  some  words  of  the  question. 

1.  a  stands  only  before  consonants ;  ab  before  both  vowels  and 
consonants.  —  2.  Abl.  without  a  prep.  Compare  No.  7  of  the  Latin 
exercise. 


74  NOTES. 


Rules  of  Syntax. 

The  adjective  agrees  ivi'th  the  noun  it  limits  in  gender,  number  and  case. 

The  accusative  is  used  as  the  direct  object  of  an  action. 

The  inflection  of  an  a-stem  verb  in  the  pres.  ind.  act.  is  given  in 
the  vocabulary.  The  pupil  should  carefully  learn  the  endings.  Take 
notice  that  occupo  and  importo  are  inflected  in  the  same  way  as 
pugno.    The  pres.  infin.  act.  (ending  -are)  is  also  given. 

The  Latin  has  no  progressive  or  emphatic  forms  of  conjugation. 
pugnat  may  be  translated  "he  Jights"  "he  is  fighting"  or  "he  does 
fight,"  according  to  the  connection. 

1.  Adjectives  are  often  used  substantively  as  in  English ;  e.g. 
amicus  =  a  friendly  man ;  i.e.  a  friend.  —  2.  populi  may  be  either 
gen.  sg.  or  nom.  pi.  here.  Translate  the  sentence  in  both  ways. — 
3.  Translate  amici  in  this  sentence  as  an  adjective,  but  in  the  fol- 
lowing one  as  a  noun. 

VI.  , 

RuLK  OF  Syntax. 

The  dative  is  used  as  the  indirect  object. 

(The  teacher  should  make  the  meaning  of  "  indirect  object "  per- 
fectly clear  by  repeated  illustration.) 

1.  alius  .  .  .  alius  =  one  ....  another;  alii  .  .  .  alii  =  some  .  .  . 
others;  alter  .  .  .  alter=the  one  ...  the  other.  —  2.  do  is  peculiar 
in  having  S  in  the  endings  -ftiiiiis,  -fttls,  while  other  a-stem  verbs 
have  -amiis,  -atls.  So  in  the  infin.  diirg.  —  3.  i.e.  to  my  son;  indirect 
object. 

VII. 

Rule  of  Syntax 
The  vocative  is  used  to  denote  the  person  or  thing  spoken  to. 
1.  Verbs  meaning  "  call,"  "  name,"  etc.,  take  two  direct  objects  as 
in  English,  one  of  which  becomes  subject  when  the  verb  is  passive; 
the  other  a  predicate-noun.  —  2.  "They  are  called,"  etc.  Galli  is  the 
predicate-noun,  not  the  subject.  —  3.  "On  the  next  day."  —  4.  See  VI., 
note  1.  —  5.  Compare  Ko.  1  of  the  Latin  exercise.  —  6.  The  nominative 
is  regularly  used  for  the  vocative  in  the  plural,  and  in  the  singular 
when  there  is  no  separate  vocative  form.  — 7.  Use  ob. — 8.  Compare 
No.  9  of  the  Latin  exercise.  —  9.  Use  the  plural. 


NOTES.  75 


VIII. 

Rule  of  Syntax. 

The  appositive  agrees  with  the  noun  it  limits  in  case. 

Before  going  on  M-ith  the  exercises,  the  pupil  should  thoroughly 
master  this  lesson,  and  be  able  to  inflect  any  consonant  stem,  on  know- 
ing the  nom.  and  gen.  sg.  and  the  gender. 

1.  adsiiin  and  absum  are  inflected  like  sum ;  ad  or  ab  being  pre- 
fixed to  each  form.  —  2.  Compare  VI.,  note  1,  and  notice  that  alter, 
not  alius,  is  used  when  only  two  things  are  spoken  of.  —  3.  Compare 
No.  1  of  the  Latin  sentences. 

IX. 

1.  Less  of  corn;  i.e.  less  corn.  —  2.  "Many  and  great  "  =  the  Eng- 
lish "many  great,"  etc. — 3.  Hither  Gaul;  i.e.  nearer  Gaul,  —  the 
valley  of  the  Po.  —  4. "Old"  must  agree  with  the  understood  noun, 
"  war." 

X. 

Rule  of  Syntax. 

The  accusative  is  used  to  denote  extent  of  time  or  space. 

This  lesson  also  needs  special  care.  The  teacher  should  require  the 
l)upil  to  tell  the  class  of  each  i-stem ;  to  repeat  the  endings  until  they 
are  entirely  familiar,  and  to  consult  the  lists  in  [99]  whenever  a  new 
i-stem  is  met  with,  to  determine  its  form  in  doubtful  cases. 

1.  Use  pi.  of  finis. 

XI. 

1.  "  Orders  to  the  province,"  i.e.  levies  on,  etc. ;  orders  the  province 
to  furnish. — 2.  "Is  burning,"  i.e.  is  being  burned.     Use  passive. 

XII. 

1.  inter  se,  "  mutually."  Translate  each  other  or  one  another,  pre- 
ceded by  to,  for,  from,  or  any  preposition  that  the  English  idiom  re- 
quires.—  2.  See  Gr.  [99].  —  3.  Translate  "for  marriage"  ;  in  with  ace. 
— 4.  Use  abl.  without  a  prep. 

XIII. 

Time  will  be  saved  by  stopping  on  the  review  of  the  declensions 
until  the  pupils  have  thoroughly  mastered  them. 

The  irregularities  of  the  words  given  in  the  vocabulary  should  be 
learned  from  [115]  and  [116]  ;  other  irregular  nouns  should  be  learned 
in  the  same  way  as  they  are  met  with  hereafter. 


76  NOTES. 


1.  Translate  "from"  or  "because  of."  —  2.  Translate  "much  of 
blood."  Compare  IX.,  note  1.  —  3.  At  home;  domi,  locative. — 
4.  Use  in. 

XIV. 

The  first  ten  numerals  should  be  learned,  also  centum  and  niille,  and 
the  method  of  formation  of  the  others  noticed. 

1.  The  ace.  domuni  means  "home,"  "homeward";  the  locative 
domi,  "at  home."  —  2.  Use  abest.  —  3.  Use  in  w.  ace. — 4.  Abl. 
without  a  prep. 

XV. 

1.  "On  one  side."  —  2.  "Very  high."  The  superlative  often  means 
"  very."  —  3.  "  It  is  very  hard,  etc."  Literally,  "  to  import,  etc.,  is 
very  hard."  The  infinitive  is  used,  as  in  English,  as  subject,  but  there 
is  no  introductory  word.  Compare  II.,  note  6.  An  infinitive  thus  used, 
being  an  indeclinable  noun,  is  neuter,  and  the  predicate-adjective  must 
agree  with  it  in  the  neuter  singular. 

XVI. 

1.  exterus,  inferus  and  superus  are  rarely  found  in  the  positive. 
—  2.  quani  before  a  superlative  emphasizes  it ;  e.g.  quain  inaxiinus, 
"the  very  greatest,"  "the  greatest  possible."  —  3.  "Three  fourths."  — 
4.  "The  nearest  route,"  i.e.  shortest.  —  5.  sunimus  n»ons  =  "top  of 
the  mountain."  So  imus  nions  =  foot  of  the  mountain.  —  6.  Translate 
"  nearest  cities."  —  7.  Translate  "  many  and  large." 

XVII. 

1.  et  .  .  .  et=  both  .  .  .  and. — 2.  ego  et  tu  is  the  usual  order  of 
the  personal  pronouns  in  Latin,  —  3.  cum  is  appended  to  the  ablative 
case  of  the  personal  pronouns  ;  vobiscum  =  cum  vobis.  — 4.  Express 
too  by  using  the  comparative.  —  Use  abest.  —  6.  inter  se ;  see  XIL, 
note  1.  —  7.  Use  fines. 

XVIII. 

When  used  adjectively  is,  ille  and  iste  correspond  nearly  *to  the 
English  this  or  that;  ipse  to  self  {mi/self,  himself,  etc.,  according  to  the 
word  it  limits).  All  of  them  are  often  used  substantively,  and  are 
translated  by  he,  she  or  it ;  ipse,  being  emphatic,  may  be  translated  by 
emphasizing  the  English  pronoun,  or  by  adding  self. 

1.  satis  is  often  used  with  the  verb  "be"  as  an  indeclinable  predi- 
cate-adjective.—  2.  res  novae,  "new  things,"  a  change  in  government, 
revolution.  —  3.  See  XVI.,  note  2. 


NOTES.  77 


XIX. 

Hie,  when  used  adjectively,  means  this;  idem,  same.  Both  are 
often  used  substantively,  and,  like  Is  and  ille,  have  the  general  force 
of  personal  pronouns ;  he,  she,  it. 

1.  Use  fines.  —  2.  Use  absum. 

XX. 

Rule  of  Syntax. 

The  relative  pronoun  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gender,  number  and 
person. 

1.  Translate  "minds."— 2.  Translate  "more  of  land,"  plus  agri. 

XXI. 

The  preliminary  lessons  on  verbal  inflections  may  be  taken  in  con- 
nection with  Lessons  XXII.  to  XXIX.,  instead  of  memorizing  the  whole 
at  once.  But  the  teacher  should  see  that  all  of  this  preliminary  mat- 
ter is  thoroughly  mastered  before  leaving  the  verb  and  passing  to  the 
exercises  in  Syntax. 

The  lessons  that  follow  on  the  verb-forms  should  not  be  taken  too 
rapidly.  The  pupil  should  master  the  lists  of  verbal  endings  thor- 
oughly, and  the  teacher  should  give  him  practice  in  repeating  these 
rather  than  in  repeating  the  model  verb  given  in  the  foot-notes.  There 
should  be  constant  practice  in  analyzing  the  verb-forms  into  their  ele- 
ments of  stem,  sign,  and  suffix,  until  the  pupil  can  tell  any  one  of  them 
at  a  glance.  Constant  practice  in  writing  inflections  on  the  board  is  of 
course  indispensable, 

XXII. 

Rules  of  Syntax. 

The  indicative  is  used  to  malce  a  statement  directly. 

The  indicative  is  used  to  ask  a  question  directly. 

The  imperative  is  used  to  give  a  command  directly. 

The  subjunctive  is  used  to  make  a  statement  doubtfully. 

The  subjunctive  is  used  to  ask  a  question  doubtfully. 

The  subjunctive  is  used  to  give  a  command  doubtfully  (e.g.  in  exhorta- 
tions, ivishes,  requests,  or  mild  commands). 

1.  Deponent  verbs  are  to  be  translated  as  active  forms.  —  2.  do, 
dare,  has  short  a  as  stem  vowel.  Gr.  226.  —  3.  The  gerund  corre- 
sponds to  the  English  verbal  noun  in  -ing.  —  4.  visit,  commeo  ad ;  lit. 
"travel  to." 


78  NOTES. 


XXIII. 

1.  See  XV.,  note  1.— 2.  Abl.  without  a  prep.  — 3.  See  XXIL,  note 
4. — 4.  royal  power;  regnum.  —  5.  fines.  —  6.  Use  in  w.  ace. — 7. 
"The  same  thing  which  I"  [attempt];  Idem  quod,  etc.  —  8.  Use 
plur.  —  9.  nuntio.  — 10.  Use  f ut.  In  English  tlie  present  tense  is 
often  used,  as  here,  of  actions  really  future  in  time,  especially  in 
subordinate  clauses.  The  Latin  is  more  exact  in  the  use  of  the  tenses. 
Notice  also  that  the  relative  pronoun  is  omitted  in  this  sentence  in 
English,  but  must  be  inserted  in  the  Latin ;  "  battles  which  you 
shall  see." 

XXIV. 

1.  "for  which  reason,"  or  simply  "therefore."  —  2.  "give  a  jour- 
ney." —  3.  "  great  marclies."  —  4.  "  nearest  route."  —  5.  "  him  "  refers 
to  the  subject ;  use  the  i)roper  case  of  sui.  The  prep,  cum  is  ap- 
pended to  the  abl.  case  of  the  personal  pronouns.  See  XVIL,  note  3. 
—  6.  Use  iter. 

XXV. 

1.  "Takes  its  beginning  from";  i.e.  begins  at  .  .  . — 2.  Use  c  or 
ex. —  3.  Compare  XXIV.,  note  5. 

XXVI. 

1.  Use  ablative  without  a  prep.  —  2.  "  This  news  "  —  these  things, 
haec. —  3.  Use  future.     Compare  XXIIL,  note  10. 

XXVII. 

The  forms  of  verbs  given  in  the  vocabulary  are  the  first  three  of 
the  "principal  parts."     See  Gr.  168,  169. 

1.  Use  imperf.  tense. — 2.  Use  future  perf.  The  "assembling"  is 
to  be  finished  before  the  "giving."  —  3.  "  to  the  bank";  ad  w.  ace.  — 
4.  See  XXIV.,  note  2. 

XXVIII. 

The  force  and  construction  of  the  forms  from  the  simple  stem  can- 
not be  clearly  given  until  tlie  pupil  has  gone  further,  as  most  of  them 
have  no  corresponding  forms  in  English.  Meanwhile  the  supine  may 
be  translated  by  the  English  infinitive,  and  the  fut.  act.  participle  by 
"  about  to."  The  perf.  pass,  participle  corresponds  to  the  English  pass, 
participle;  e.g.  dfttus  =  "  given,"  or  "having  been  given";  dlltiirus, 
"  about  to  give,"  etc. 

From  this  point  tlie  teacher  should  require  the  principal  parts,  of 
all  verbs,  and  the  form  of  each  stem,  with  the  manner  of  formation  of 


NOTES.  79 


the  present  and  perfect  stems  as  shown  in  the  Gr.  158-1G2  and  1G4-1G7. 
Verbs  in  the  vocabularies,  without  any  meaning  added,  have  been  al- 
ready defined  in  preceding  vocabularies. 

1.  "  easy  to  do."  —  2.  "  to  ask  for."  —  3.  Compare  the  second  Latin 
sentence.  —  4.  Abl.  without  a  prep. — 5.  factu.  —  6.  Use  e.  —  7.  Use 
a.  —  8.  fines. 

XXIX. 

1.  i.e.  is  now  divided  ;  has  been  divided.  Use  the  perf.  tense.  The 
present  would  mean  "  is  being  divided,"  "  is  now  undergoing  division." 

—  2.  Use  future  perf.     Compare  XXIII.,  note  10,  and  XXVII.,  note  2. 

—  3.  Use  e. 

XXX. 
1.  The  pres.  part,  praesens  usually  means  "  present,"  perhaps  be- 
cause adsuin  lacks  the  participle.  —  2.  "would  be  able";  see  Gr.  317. — 

3.  "it  is  not  advantageous,  etc."  —  4.  locus.  —  5.  Perfect  tense.  —  6. 
Abl.  without  a  prep.  —  7.  Use  the  singular.  A  finite  verb  sometimes 
agrees  with  the  nearest  subject,  and  is  understood  with  the  others. — 
8.  "One  hundred  and  twenty  thousands  of  men." 

XXXI. 

1.  debebant,  "were  under  obligation."  As  the  English  ought  has 
no  past  tense,  some  other  expression  of  the  same  force  must  be  used 
here. — 2.  "from  one  another."  —  3.  Use  dative  case  to  express  on 
here.  —  4.  Translate  "  nations  which  are  beyond  the  Rhine."  —  5.  Use 
fut.  tense. 

XXXII. 

1.  Translate  "to  be  able  very  much"  (plurimum).  —  2.  "with," 
apud.  —  3.  "many  taken  enemies."  —  4.  Pres.  xnalo,  I  prefer.  Trans- 
late "rather  .  .  .  than  "  by  quam. 

XXXIII. 

1.  Compounds  of  eo  almost  always  drop  the  v  of  the  perfect  stem. 
See  Gr.  [12]  (c). — 2.   "to  their  friends."  —  3.  Abl.  without  a  jjrep. — 

4.  Future  tense. 

XXXIV. 

1 .  per  me,  "  for  all  of  me,"  "  as  far  as  I  am  concerned."  —  2.  Use 
nolite  with  the  intin.,  "  be  unwilling  to,  etc."  —  3.  Use  e.  —  4.  Use 
future  perf. — 5.  Compare  XXXL,  note  3. — 6.  "you  may"  =  "it  is 
permitted  to  you." 


80  NOTES. 

Exercises  on  Syntax. 
[The  exercises  on  syntax  given  here  are  not  enough  to  give  the 
pupil  a  thorough  training,  but  are  intended  to  cover  the  more  impor- 
tant and  common  constructions,  and  give  him  enough  familiarity  with 
them  to  begin  the  translation  of  a  Latin  author.  The  teacher  should 
keep  in  mind  the  fact  that  constant  repetition  is  the  only  way  to  make 
a  principle  familiar  to  the  learner,  and  also  that  pupils  find  such  repe- 
tition and  training  much  less  irksome  at  the  beginning  of  their  studj^ 
than  later.] 

XXXV. 

1.  audeo  is  semi-deponent;  see  Gr.  [210]  {(/).  —  2.  tres  partes  = 
three-fourths.  —  3.  See  Gr.  [2G8].  —  4.  Translate  in  Sequanos  "among 
the  Sequani."  —  5.  See  Gr.  [2G2],  end.  —  6.  Abl.  without  a  prep. — 
7.  "  For  "  is  often  used  in  English  to  express  extent  of  time  and  space. 
—  8.  Translate  "thought  himself  to  be  able,"  etc.  —  9.  Use  duni  with 
present  tense. 

XXXVI. 

1.  quibuscuin;  see  XVII,  note  3.  —  2.  "The  Helvetians  have  in 
mind,"  Gr.  270.  —  3.  Dat.  with  a  compound  of  prae,  Gr.  [269],  end. — 
4.  "advantageous,"  lit.  "for  an  advantage."  Gr.  [272]. — 5.  Translate 
"nothing  of  left,"  i.e.  of  remainder,  nihil  reliqui. —  6.  "for  an  aid  to 
Caesar." — 7.  "neighboring  to."  —  8.  "what  of  business."  —  9.  "into  a 
province,"  in  with  ace. — 10.  See  Gr.  [2G9].  — 11.  "on  account  of," 
propter. 

XXXVII. 

1.  ("was  able  very  much,"  i.e.)  "had  great  influence."  —  2.  See 
Gr.  [268].  —  3.  ("asks  from  him  alone  those  things,"  i.e.)  questions  him 
privately  about,  etc.  — 4.  Translate  "  one  hundred  and  ten  of  thousands.'* 

XXXVIII. 

1.  tridui,  see  Gr.  [284].  — 2.  See  Gr.  [284],  near  end.  — 3.  (foot- 
soldiers  equally  many  in  number,  i.e.)  "the  same  number  of  foot- 
soldiers." —  4.  "once  and  again"  i.e.  repeatedly,  several  times.  —  5. 
Translate  "  more  of  sorrow."  —  6.  Use  ex. 

XXXIX. 

1.  See  Gr.  [285],  end.  — 2.  See  Gr.  [257].  — 3.  res  militaris  =  war- 
fare.—  4.  feelings;  animus,  lit.  soul,  mind. 

XLI. 

1.  See  Gr.  [297].— 2.  See  Gr.  [297],  end.  — 3.  "and  those  who.'* 
The  antecedent  is  often  implied  in  the  relative.  —  4.  See  Gr.  [269],  end. 


NOTES.  81 


—  5.  Translate  "many  things,"  inulta.  —  6.  Translate  "it  was  fought.'* 
See  Gr.  [234].  — 7.  "In  war."  bello;  lit.  "by  war." 

XLII. 

1.  See  Gr.  [299].  —  2.  inter  se.  —  3.  Use  abl.  without  a  prep.  The 
Latin  uses  an  abl.  of  means ;  "  kept  in  his  army  by  means  of  tlie  camp." 

—  4.  aperto  latere;  "on  the  open  (i.e.  undefended)  side."  The  left 
side  was  covered  by  the  shield.  —  5.  prima  nocte;  in  the  first  part  of 
the  night. 

XLIII. 
1.  The  perfect  means  "am  wont";  plup.  "was  wont,"  etc. — 2. 
See  Gr.  [234].  —  3.  injussu  (found  only  in  the  abl.)  means  "with  the 
no-order,"  i.e.  without  the  order  of,  etc.  —  4.  Translate  "in  whom."  —  5. 
"  faith  of  all  things,"  i.e.  confidence  in  all  matters.  —  6.  "  in  the  third 
watch."  —  7.  "  at  what  interval  he  was  wont,"  i.e.  at  the  interval,  at 
which,  etc.  —  8.  in  coUe  medio ;  lit.  on  the  middle  of  the  hill.  Me- 
dius,  like  summus,  imus,  primus,  etc.,  sometimes  refers  to  a  part 
of  the  word  it  limits.  Compare  XVI.,  note  5.  —  9.  "a  thousand  and 
five  hundred  paces."  —  10.  intra  fines. 

XLIV. 

The  pupil  should  carefully  read  Gr.  [307]  and  take  note  of  the  dif- 
ferent ways  of  translating  the  ablative  absolute.  The  absolute  con- 
struction, though  not  common  in  English,  is  a  favorite  one  in  Latin. 
In  some  of  the  sentences  given  in  the  exercise  more  than  one  way  of 
translation  is  possible,  and  the  teacher  should  require  the  pupil  to  give 
them  all,  and  tell  the  modification  expressed,  —  time,  cause,  conces- 
sion, etc. 

1.  gratulatiim  is  supine.  —  2.  on  the  right-wing.  —  3.  viribus 
may  be  dative  (Gr.  [269])  or  ablative  (Gr.  [297]).  Both  cases  are 
found  with  confido. — 4.  Active  forms  in  English  must  often  be 
changed  to  the  passive  in  translating  into  Latin,  since  the  Latin  has  no 
perfect  active  participle.  So  here,  translate  "  our  cavalry  having  been 
driven  back."  —  5.  "  This  speech  having  been  delivered." 

XLV. 

Illustrations  of  "  sequence  of  tenses  "  will  come  in  the  next  exer- 
cise and  the  following,  when  the  subjunctive  in  subordinate  clauses 
has  been  introduced. 

1.  niliil  is  usually  found  only  in  nom.  and  ace,  but  a  regularly  de- 
clined o-stem  is  found  in  the  old  Latin,  and  the  abl.  uihilo  occurs  with 


82  NOTES. 


minus  to  denote  degree  of  difference.  —  2.  Supply  esse.  Certain 
forms  of  sum  are  often  omitted.  For  bono  animo,  see  Gr.  305.  —  3. 
Use  perf.  —  4.  Translate  "  having  set  out."  The  Latin  is  more  exact 
than  the  English  in  the  use  of  tenses.  The  perfect  must  be  used  here, 
because  the  setting  out  takes  place  before  the  coming.  A  present  par- 
ticiple would  imply  that  it  took  place  at  the  same  time.  —  5.  Use 
present.    See  Gr.  [309]. 

XLVI. 

[The  exercises  given  in  this  and  the  next  lesson  are  too  few  to  give 
the  necessary  training  on  subjunctive  uses,  but  the  following  lessons 
will  contain  illustrations,  and  the  teacher  should  require  a  reason  for 
every  subjunctive  met  with  from  this  time  forth.  Subjunctives  in  con- 
ditional sentences  are  purposely  omitted,  that  the  various  forms  of  con- 
ditional sentences  may  be  given  together  in  a  later  lesson. 

The  pupil  should  take  notice  that  the  English  usually  expresses 
purpose  by  the  infinitive,  and  should  translate  accordingly.  Most  of 
the  explanation  necessary  is  left  to  the  teacher,  who  should  give  mi- 
nute and  patient  training  on  the  moods  until  the  pupil  has  formed  the 
habit  of  noticing  the  force  of  a  subjunctive,  and  the  modification  of 
thought  expressed  by  its  use.] 

1.  See  Gr.  323.-2.  quin.  See  Gr.  [326].  — 3.  Use  rel.  pr.  and 
compare  No.  3  of  the  Latin  exercise.  —  4.  Use  qualis.  —  6.  Subj.  A 
clause  of  characteristic.  See  Gr.  [326].  —  6.  "room  of  throwing  . . .  was 
not  given." 

XLVII. 

1.  "although."  —  2.  an  enemy  turned  away,  i.e.  an  enemy  fleeing. 

—  3.  What  difference  of  meaning  would  the  indicative  give  ?  See  Gr. 
[328].  — 4.  "In  what  direction."  — 5.  Translate  "he  [being]  inter- 
cessor"; abl.  abs.  —  6.  Abl.  See  Gr.  [297],  end.  — 7.  Compare  No.  4 
of  the  Latin  exercise. 

XLiVIII. 

1.  See  Gr.  [269],  end.  —  2.  See  Gr.  [297].  — 3.  velle  is  the  object  of  a 
verb  of  saying  implied  in  legatos  mittit.  Insert  "  saying  "  in  translation. 

—  4.  Use  abl.  abs.  —  5.  i.e.  "that  the  Germans  should  get  used,"  etc. 
Notice  the  use  of  "  for "  in  English  before  an  infinitive  phrase. ,  The 
sentence  can  mean  also  that  crossing  is  dangerous  for  the  Germans,  in 
which  case  "  Germans  "  would  be  dative.  Write  it  in  both  ways.  —  6. 
Translate  "in  the  sway."  —  7.  i.e.  kept  themselves  there.  Translate  ac- 
cordingly. —  8.  After  verbs  of  promising,  etc.,  the  exactness  of  the  Latin 


NOTES.  83 


requires  the  future.  As  there  is  no  future  infinitive,  the  pres.  infin.  of 
the  act.  periphrastic  conjugation  must  be  used,  as  it  is  nearly  equivalent 
to  a  future.  Translate  "  that  the  matter  was  going  to  be  for  a  care 
to  him."  — 9.  Translate  "make  an  end  for  his  injuries,"  and  notice 
that  a  future  form,  as  in  the  first  part,  is  required. 

XLIX. 

1.  Translate  receptos  as  an  independent  clause.  So  usi,  in  the 
next  sentence,  as  if  in  the  same  construction  as  profiiciscantur. — 
2.  ut  is  omitted.  See  Gr.  [325],  mid.  — 3.  "  a  fleeing  enemy."  The  par- 
ticiple is  equivalent  to  a  simple  adjective.  —  4.  Translate  petentibus 
by  a  relative  clause. —  5.  Translate  "  frightened."  —  6.  Subj.  See  Gr. 
322.-7.  "having  seen  this,"  conspicati.  — 8.  " three  days  having  in- 
tervened." —  9.  "a  council  having  been  called  together,  he  upbraided," 
etc.  — 10.  Translate  "  held  the  brought-back  [ones]  in  the  number  of 
enemies"— 11.  See  Gr.  [268],  end.  — 12.  "having  pursued  .  .  .  slew," 
etc.  —  13.  of  them  ;  ex  his. 

li. 

1.  "in  the  course  of  his  inquiry."  The  abl.  without  a  prep,  would 
mean  "  by  inquiring."  —  2.  "  made  the  enemy  a  chance,"  or  in  English 
idiom,  "gave  them  a  chance  to  fight."  —  3.  Use  abl.  abs.  "The  hope 
of  a  return  home  having  been  taken  away."  —  4.  "for  undergoing," 
ad  with  gerundive.  —  5.  "makes  an  end  of  speaking."  —  6.  ad  with 
gerundive ;  a  common  way  of  expressing  purpose.  —  7.  Translate  "  room 
of  throwing."  —  8.  sui  opprimendi  causa.  The  genitive  of  the  ger- 
und or  gerundive,  with  causa,  is  often  used  to  express  purpose.  For 
sui,  see  Gr.  [348]. 

lil. 

1.  In  translating,  insert  "asking"  before  the  last  clause.  It  is 
implied  in  conclamavit.  For  the  mood,  see  Gr.  323.  —  2.  quideni 
emphasizes  the  word  before  it.  Translate  "  not  even  by  giving  host- 
ages."—  3.  Translate  "refrain  from  going  on,  etc."  —  4.  Subj.  See  Gr. 
[328].  —5.  Use  abl.  abs.  Translate  "he"  by  se.  Why  ?  —  6.  placuit 
ei  ut  initteret;  lit.  it  pleased  him  to  send.  — 7.  See  XLVIII.,  note  8. 

LII. 

1.  venit  in  spem,  "entertains  a  hope."  Notice  that  expressions  of 
hoping,  doubting,  etc.,  are  modified  by  the  same  form  of  condition  as 
hypothetical  statements.  —  2.  "  if  I  had  any  need."  Gr.  270.  —  3.  See 
note  1  above.  — 4.  Use  quinj  Gr.  [326]. 


84  NOTES. 


LIII. 

The  left-hand  column  in  this  exercise,  and  the  following,  contains 
sentences  in  the  direct  form ;  the  other  contains  the  same  sentences 
made  dependent  on  verbs  of  saying,  etc.  The  teacher  should  call  the 
attention  of  the  pupil  to  the  changes  of  tense  required  by  tlie  rule  of 
sequence,  as  well  as  the  clianges  of  mood.  —  1.  See  Gr.  [268].  —  2.  Use 
ullus.  —  3.  When  a  fut.  indie,  becomes  infin.  the  act.  periphrastic  infin. 
must  be  used,  as  the  future  lacks  the  infin. 

LIV. 

1.  These  verbs  are  fut.  perf.  —  2.  Perf.  "  where  we  have  taken  our 
stand";  constitimus. —  3.  ut  w.  subj.  —  4.  infinitive. 

LV. 

The  pupil  sliould  be  required  to  change  all  the  sentences  of  these 
exercises  to  the  direct  form. 

1.  Notice  that  the  relative  clauses  at  the  end  are  not  a  part  of  what 
is  said  to  Caesar,  but  are  remarks  added  by  the  writer.  They  .are  in  the 
indicative,  therefore.  See  Gr.  [322],  end.  — 2.  pro.  —  3.  Translate  "  that 
there  were  two  parties  of  all  Gaul."  —  4.  Use  impf.  "  When  they  [had 
fought  and]  were  [still]  fighting  many  years.  —  5.  de,  concerning. — 
6.  "  summoned  by  means  of  pay."  —  7.  "  on  account  of  this  thing."  — 
8.  "  bound  neither  by  an  oath,  nor,"  etc. 

[The  remaining  lessons,  LVI.  to  LX.,  are  intended  to  give  additional 
drill  on  tlie  various  ways  of  expressing  time  and  place  in  Latin,  and 
at  the  same  time  to  serve  as  a  general  review  of  the  more  common  con- 
structions of  syntax.  Many  of  the  sentences  in  them  are  repeated 
from  previous  lessons.  Not  only  the  head  matter,  but  also  the  notes  of 
the  Grammar,  should  be  studied  in  connection  with  them.] 

LVI. 

1.  See  Gr.  339.  —  2.  ad  with  the  name  of  a  town  means  to  or  in 
the  vicinity  of.  —  3.  See  Gr.  [297],  end.  —  4.  minus  often  has  the  same 
force  as  non. 

L.VII. 

1.  See  LVI.,  note  2. 

liVIII. 

1.  Tlie  adj.  niortuus,  dead,  with  the  verb  sum,  sui)plies  the  lack- 
ing tenses  of  morior.  —  2.  a.  d.  =  ante  diem.  —  3.  See  Gr.  [330]. — 


NOTES.  85 


4.  "a  while."  —  5.  ad  with  dates  means  about.  —  6.  Cassian  war,  i.e.  war 
with  Cassius.  —7.  See  Gr.  [330],  mid. 

LIX. 

1.  "early  in  the  night." — 2.  "it  will  come  to  pass."  —  3.  See  Gr. 
325. 

JjX. 

1.  qui=ii  qui,  as  often,  "those  who." — ipsorum  =  an  emphatic 
"their."  — 3.  See  Gr.  [267],  end.  — 4.  "for  this  reason."  The  rel.  clause 
is  the  favorite  construction  in  Latin,  and  is  often  used  where  the  English 
idiom  requires  a  demonstrative.  —  5.  "which  it  has  been  said  that  the 
Gaul's  occupy."  —  6.  "is  bounded."  —  7.  "off  the  Sequani";  i.e.  on 
that  side  of  the  country  where  the  Sequani  dwell.  So  a  dextra  means 
"on  the  right,"  etc. — 8.  "slopes";  i.e.  extends.  —  9.  "they  look  to 
the  north  " ;  i.e.  their  country  stretches  away  in  a  northerly  direction.  — 
10.  The  whole  phrase  means  "  north-west."  — 11.  apud  before  the  name 
of  a  man  means  "  at  the  house  of  " ;  before  the  name  of  a  people,  "  in 
the  country  of,"  "  among."  — 12.  Insert  "  saying  "  which  is  implied  in 
persuasit.  —  13.  See  Gr.  [297].  — 14.  hoc  .  .  .  quod,  "for  the  reason 
that."  — 15.  "on"  one  side.  — 16.  See  Gr. 295.  — 17.  " in  proportion  to," 
"  considering." — 18.  sibi  suscepit, "  took  on  himself." — 19.  See  Gr.  344. 
plebi  aceeptus  =  popular.  —  20.  "  when  they  have  seized,"  or  "  after 
seizing," abl.  abs.  expressing  time.   See  Gr.  [307].  —  21.  See  Gr.  [290]. — 

22.  "compel  him  to  plead  in  chains,"  i.e.  arrest  and  bring  to  trial. — 

23.  damnatum  limits  the  understood  object  of  sequi.  "  it  was  right 
that  the  punishment  should  overtake  the  condemned  [criminal],  i.e. 
the  law  required  this  punishment  to  be  inflicted  on  him  if  he  were 
found  guilty.  —  24.  "  appointed  day  of  the  pleading,"  i.e.  day  set  for 
the  pleading,  or  for  his  trial. — 25.  familia,  slaves  ;  not  family  in  the 
English  sense.  —  26.  escaped  trial,  lit.  rescued  himself  in  order  not  to 
plead  his  case.  —  27.  died.  The  adj.  mortuus  supplies  the  place  of 
the  lacking  participle  of  morior,  and  with  the  verb  sum  has  the  same 
meaning  as  the  complete  tenses.  —  28,  The  Latin  expression  for  "  com- 
mitted suicide." 


LATIJ^    IISTDEX. 


A.  =  Auliis. 

a  (prep.  w.  abl.),  from,  away  from ; 

b'j  (to  denote  the  agent) ;  a  dex- 

tro  cornu,  on  the  rUjht  wing. 
ab  (prep.  w.  abl.),  from,  away  from, 

hy.^ 
abe6,  -ire,  -ii,  -Itum,  to  (jo  aivay, 

depart. 
abstlned,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -ten- 
turn,  to  hold  off,  abstain,  refrain. 
absum,  abesse,  afui,  afuturus, 

to  be  aioay,  be  absent,  be  distant. 
ac  (conj.),  and. 
acceptus,   -a,   -um,    acceptable; 

plebi  acceptus,  popidar. 
accld6,  -cldere,  -cidi,  to  happen. 
acclpi6,    -cipere,   -cepi,    -cep- 

tum,  to  receive. 
S,cies,  -ei,   edf/e ;  line  (of  battle) ; 

army  (in  order  of  battle), 
acrlter  (adv.),  sharply ,  fiercely . 
S-d  (prep.  w.  ace.),  to,  toicard ;  for  ; 

near,  adjoininf/. 
adduc6,  -ducer6,  -duxi,  -duc- 

tura,  to  lead,  move,  inflnence. 
ade6,  -ire,  -ii,  -Itum,  to  //o  to,  go 

near,  approach,  visit. 
adferd,  -ferre,  -tull,  -latum,  to 

bring,  bring  on. 
adflcid,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectiim, 

to  affect. 
adscendd,   -scendere,   -scendi, 

-scensum,  to  ascend. 
adsciscd,  -sciscere,  -scivi,  -sci- 

tum,  to  take   to,  join  to  (one's 

self). 


adsiim,  adesse,  adfui,  adfiitu- 
riis,  to  be  present,  be  by. 

adventus,  -iis,  coming,  arrical. 

advertd,  -vertere,  -verti,  -ver- 
sum  (Gr.  [2G8]),  to  tarn  to; 
animiim  ad  vertere,  to  turn  the 
mind  to,  notice. 

Aemlliiis,  -i,  ^Emilius. 

aequus,  -a,  -um,  equal,  even,  leveL 

aestas,  -atis,  summer. 

afferd ;  see  adfSrd. 

afflcid,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectiim,, 
see  adflcid. 

S,ger,  ag-ri  (Gr.  (J(J),  land,  farm- 
land, country. 

agr6,  agere,  egi,  actum,  to  do, 
deal,  to  hold,  conduct,  to  talk. 

ailquls,  -qua,  -quid  (Gr.  Ml), 
some  one. 

alius,  -a,  -ud  (Gr.  71),  another; 
alius  .  ,  .  alius,  one  .  .  .  another, 
alii  .  .  .  alii,  some  .  .  .  others. 

Allobroges,  -um,  Allobroges  (a 
Gallic  tribe). 

Alpes,  -ium  (f.),  Aljys. 

alter,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  71),  the  other  ; 
alter  .  .  .  alter,  the  one  .  .  .  the 
other ;  pi.  alteri  .  .  .  alteri,  one 
party  .  .  .  the  other  party. 

altltado,  -Inis,  height,  depth. 

altus,  -a,  -um,  high,  deep. 

S,micltia,  -a-e,  friendship. 

amicus,  -a,  -um,  friendly,  often 
as  a  noun,  amicus,  friend. 

amitto,  -mittere,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum,  to  lose. 

am5,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  love. 


88 


LATIN    INDEX. 


amplius  (adv.),  more. 

anceps,      -cipltis      ( Gr.   [115]), 

double,  douhtfi.d. 
ang-ustus,  -a,  -um,  narroio. 
anlmadvertd,   -vertere,   -verti, 

-versum,  to  notice. 
animus,  -i,  spirit,  mind,  courage. 
anniis,  -i,  year. 
ants  (prep.  w.  ace),  before. 
ante  (adv.),  before,  formerly . 
ante  diem  (Gr.  [268]),  the  day  be- 
fore. 
antiquus,  -a,  -um,  ancient,  old. 
append,   -are,    -avi,    -atiim,  to 

call. 
app§t6,  -petSre,  -petivi,  -peti- 

tum,  to  seek. 
Aprills,  -Is,  April :  Idas  apriles, 

Apr.  13  (Gr.  49C). 
S.pud  (prep.  w.  ace),  among ,  icith. 
AquitaniS,,  -ae,  Aquitania  (S.  W. 

France) . 
Aquitanus,  -&,  -iim,  Aqnitanian. 
Arar,  -arls  (Gr.  [102]),  the  Arar 

(river,  now  Saone). 
arbltror,   -ari,    -atiis,  to   think, 

judge. 
Ariovistus,  -i,  Ariovistus  (a  Ger- 
man king). 
arma,  -orxim,  arms. 
arx,  Sivcls,  fort,  citadel. 
ascend6,  -scendere,  -scendi,  as- 

censum ;  see  adscendO. 
ascensus,  -us,  ascent. 
atque  (conj.),  ajid. 
atting-6,  -ting-SrS,  -tigi,  -tacttim, 

to  reach  to,  touch. 
auctorltas,  -atls,  authority,  influ- 
ence. 
audaciiis  (adv.),  mo7'e  boldly. 
audeo,  auderS,  austls  (Gr.  [21G]), 

to  dare. 
auf§r5,  auferrS,  abstiili,  abla- 

tiim,  to  take  away. 
aut  (conj.),  or,-  aut  .  .  .  aut,  either 

.  ,  .  or. 


autem  (conj.),  but,  moreover. 

auxilium,  -i,  help,  aid;  pi.  aux- 
Ilia,  auxiliary  troops. 

avertd,  -vertere,  -verti,  -ver- 
sum, to  tinm  away,  turn  aside  ; 
aversus,  turned  away,  fleeing. 

B. 

barbarus,  -a,  -um,  barbarous. 

Belg-ae,  -arum,  Belgians. 

bellO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  tear, 

make  icar. 
bellum,  -i,  icar. 
Bibracte,  -Is  (n.)  (Gr.  [100]),  Bi- 

hracte  (a  town), 
biduum,  -i,  tv)o  days. 
bienniiim,  -i,  tv)o  years. 
Boji,  -oriim,  Boii  (a  tribe), 
bonus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  [123]),  good. 


C.  =  Gaius. 

cad6,  cad§re,  cecldi.  casum,  to 
fall,  haj^pen. 

Caesar,  -ftrls,  Cassar. 

c&lamltas,  -atls,  defeat,  misfor- 
tune. 

cS,pi6,  capSr§,  cepi,  captiim,  to 
take,  receive. 

carrtis,  -i,  caj-t. 

Cassianiis,  -&,  -Um,  Cassian,  of 
Ciissius. 

Cassitls,  -i,  Cassius. 

castelliim,  -i,fort,  redoubt. 

Casticiis,  -i,  Casticus. 

castrS,,  -orxim,  camp. 

casiis,  -US,  fall,  chance,  accident. 

Catamantaloedls,  -Is,  Cataman- 
t<d<rdis. 

causa,  -ae,  cause,  reason;  abl. 
causa,  for  the  sake;  causam 
dicere,  to  2ilead  one's  cause,  be 
tried. 

cel§rlt6r  (adv.),  quickly. 

Celtae,  -ariim,  Celts. 

censtis,  -tis,  ceyisus,  cotint. 


LATIN    INDEX. 


89 


centum,  hundred, 
centurio,  -onis,  centurion. 
certior,  -ius,  more  certain;  cer- 

tiorem  facere,  to  make  {one) 

moref'certain,  to  inform ;  certior 

fieri,  to  he  informed. 
clbaria,   -orum,    food;    clbaria 

mollta,  (/round  food ;  i.e.  meal. 
Cimbri,  -drum,  Cimbri. 
circlter  (adv.),  about. 
circultus,  -us,  circuit. 
circum  (prep.   \v.   ace),    around, 

about. 
citerior,  -ius  (Gr.  [123]),  nearer. 
civltas,  -atls,  state. 
cliens,  -litis,  client. 
coein6,  -emere,  -emi,  -emptum, 

to  buy  np,  buy. 
[coepid,  coepere],  coepi,  coep- 

tum,  to  bed  in.     (The  incomplete 

tenses  are  found  only  in  old  Latin.) 
cog-nosed,  -noscerS,  -novi,  -nl- 

tiim,  to  learn ;  perf .  cognovi,  to 

know. 
cog-d,  cog-^re,  coegi,  coactum, 

to  collect,  compel.  • 
coins,  -Is  {in.),  hill. 
collocO,    -are,    -avi,    -atum,  to 

2)lace,  pjost,  settle  (a  colony). 
colloquor,    -loqui,  -locutus,  to 

talk  tvith,  converse. 
coUoquiiim,  -i,  conversation,  con- 
ference. 
commeatus,  -us,  provisions,  siqo- 

p)lies. 
commetnord,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 

to  tell,  relate. 
commeo,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim,  to  fjo 

and  come;  commeo  ad,  to  r/s?'f. 
committO,  -mittere,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum,  to  entrust,  commit,  to  join 

(battle) . 
commodus,  -a,  -um,  fit,  useful, 

proper. 
communio,  -ire,   -ivi,    -itum,  to 

wall  in,  fortify. 


compare,  -are,  -avi,   -atiim,   to 

prepare,  make  ready. 
conatum,  -i  (a  thing  attempted). 

attempt. 
conatiis,  -lis,  attempt. 
concede,   -cedere,   -cessi,  -ces- 

sum,  to  grant,  allow. 
concllio,    -are,    -avi,    -atum,   to 

gain,  gain  over,  get. 
concilium,  -i,  council. 
conclamO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 

cry  out. 
concursiis,  -us,  assembling,  (com- 
ing together. 
conduc6,  -du  cgre,  -duxi  -duc- 

tiim,   to  bring    together,    bring 

along. 
conferd,  -ferr6,  -tuli,  -latum,  to 

collect,   bring    together,  to  com- 

2Kire;    se   conferre,    to    betake 

one's  self,  go. 
conflcid,  -flc§re,  -feci,  -fectiim, 

to  do,  accomplish,  finish. 
confida,  -fid§re,  -fisus  (Gr.  [210]), 

to  trust,  confide  in. 
confirmd,   -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 

fix,  appoint ;   to  strengthen,  en- 
courage;   to    make   (peace);    to 

assure,  2-)romis''. 
conjIci6,  -jicere,  -jeci,  -jectum, 

to  throi.v ;  se  conjicere,  betake 

one's  self. 
conjuratiO,     -onIs,      conspiracy, 

league. 
Conor,  -ari,  -atiis,  to  try,  attempt. 
conscisco,  -sciscere,  -scivi,  -sci- 

tiim ;    sibl  mortem    conscis- 

cere,  to  kill  one's  self. 
conscribO,     -scribere,   -scripsi, 

-scriptum,  to  levy  (troops). 
Considiiis,  -i,  Considius. 
considd,  -sidere,  -sedi,  -sessiim, 

to  settle,  encamp. 
consilium,  -i,  plan. 
consoler,  -ari,  -atus,  to  console, 

cheer,  encourage. 


90 


LATIN    INDEX. 


consplcio,  -splcer§,  -spexi,  -spec- 
turn,  to  see,  perceive. 

constltuo,  -u§re,  -ui,  -utum,  to 
determine,  decide  on,  appoint, 
place. 

consuesc6,  -suescere,  -suevi, 
suetum,  to  rjet  used ;  perf .  con- 
suevi,  to  he  wont. 

consul,  -iills,  consul. 

contendd,  -tendere,  -tendi,  -ten- 
turn,  to  strive,  hasten;' to  con- 
tend, fight. 

contlnenter  (adv  ),  continually, 
constantly. 

contlned,  -tinere,  -tinui,  to  hold 
in,  bou7id,  keep  in. 

contlnuiis,  -a,  -una,  successive. 

contumelia,  -ae,  insult. 

convenid,  -v6mr6,  -veni,  -ven- 
tum,  to  come  together,  meet, 
assemble. 

conventus,  -Us,  meeting,  assem- 
bly ;  pi.  assizes. 

convertO,  -vertSre,  -verti,  -ver- 
siim,  to  turn,  change. 

copia,  -ae,  plenty,  supply.  In  pi. 
copiae, /orces,  troops. 

cornu ,  -us,  horn ,  icing  (of  an  army) . 

corpus,  -oris,  body. 

cotldianus,  -§,,  -tim  ;  see  quotid. 

Crassus,  -i,  Crassus. 

cremd,  -arS,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
burn,  set  on  fire. 

culttis,  -us,  civilization,  refine- 
ment. 

ciim  (prep.  w.  abl.),  ivith,  along 
loith. 

ciim  (conj.)  (Gr.  [328] ,  [329] ,  [330] ), 
vhen,  since,  because,  cdthough. 

clipldisslme  (adv.),  most  eagerly. 

ciipldltas,  -atls,  desire,  greed. 

cupldus,  -a,  -iim,  desirous,  fond. 

cura,  -ae,  care. 

cur6,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  care 
for,  attend  to. 

custos,  -odis,  guard,  sentinel. 


damnO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  co77- 

demn . 
de    (prep.   w.   abl.),    down  from, 

from,     concerning,    about;     de 

quarta  vlg-Ilia,   in    the  fourth 

icatch,  in  the  course  of .  .  . 
debeo,  -er§,  -ui,  -Itum,  to  ov:r, 

ought. 
decern,  ten. 

dgclmtis,  -a,  -um,  tenth. 
decurlo,  -onis,  decurion  (a  mili- 
tary officer) . 
deducO,    -ducere,   -duxi,   -duc- 

tum,  to  lead,  lead  down. 
defends,  -fendere,  -fendi,  -fen- 

siim,  to  defend. 
defetiscor,   -f§tisci,    -fessus,   to 

groio    votary;    part,     defessiis, 

tired,  worn  out. 
dejicid,  -jlc§r6,  -jeci,  -jecttim, 

to  cast  down,  throio  aicay ;  partic. 

dejectus,  disappointed. 
delegO,  -legSrS,  -legi,  -lectiim, 

to  choose. 
deliberd,    -ar§,    -avi,  -atum,   to 

deliberate,  consider. 
dellgo ;  see  delSgd. 
demlnud,  -u6r6,  -ui,  -utiim,  to 

lessen. 
demiim  (adv.),  at  last,  at  length. 
desists,    -sist§r6,    -stiti,    destl- 

ttim,  to  cease  from ,  leave  of.  desist. 
destlm,   deess§,   defui,  defiita- 

rtls,  to  be  wanting,  be  lacking. 
deterred,   -er6,    -ui,    -Itiim,    to 

frighten  ;  to  hinder. 
deiis,  -i  (Gr.  08),  god. 
devehd,    -veh§r6,    -vexi,    -vec- 

tiim,  to  bring  down,  bring. 
dext§r,  -S,  -tim ;  also,  -tra,  -trum, 

right,  on  the  right  hand;    as  a 

noun,   dextr&,    the  right   hand, 

the  right  side  or  fl((nk. 
dic6,  dic§r6,  dixi,  dictilm,  to  say^ 

tell,  appoint,  plead  (one's  cause). 


LATIN    INDEX. 


91 


dictio,  -onls,  x>leoding. 

dies,  ei  (c),  day  ;  a  while. 

differs,  -ferre,  -distuli,  -dila- 
tum,  to  differ. 

difflcills,  -e  (Gr.  121),  hard,  diffi- 
cult. 

dimittd,  -mittere,  -misi,  mis- 
sum,  to  dismiss. 

dis,  ditis,  rich. 

discedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -ces- 
sum,  to  depart,  go  out  or 
aivay. 

dispon6,  -ponere,  -posui,  -posl- 
tum,  to  arrange,  place,  p)OSt. 

diu  (adv.),  long. 

diutius  (adv.),  longer. 

Divico,  -onls,  Divico. 

divido,  -videre,  -visi,  -vistlm,  to 
divide,  separate. 

Divitiaciis,  -i,  Divitiacus. 

do,  dare,  dedi,  datum  (Gr.  226), 
to  give,  grant. 

d616r,  -oris,  grief,  sorrou\ 

domiis,  -us  (f.)  (Gr.  [115]),  house, 
home ;  domi,  at  home ;  d6miim, 
home,  homewards.  (Gr.  [273]  and 
[265].)  ^ 

dubltatio,  -onls,  doubt. 

dubius,  -a,  -um,  doubtful;  non 
est  dubium,  there  is  no  doubt. 

diicenti,  -ae,  -a,  two  hundred. 

duco,  ducere,  duxi,  ductum, 
to  lead,  bring ;  to  think,  regard; 
ducere  In  matrlmonium,  or 
often  ducere  alone,  to  marry 
(said  of  the  man). 

diim  (conj.)  (Gr.  [330]),  ivhile. 

Dumnorix,  -Igls,  Dumnorix. 

duo,  -ae,  -6  (Gr.  [72]),  two. 

dux,  duels,  guide,  leader. 


e  (prep.  w.  abl.),  out  of,  from. 
§d6,  edere,  edi,  esiim  (Gr.  223), 
to  eat,  consume. 


educo,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -ductiim, 

to  lead  out,  lead  forth,  bring. 

effemino,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim,  to 
weaken,  effeminate. 

effero,  -ferre,  extiili,  elatum,  to 
bring  forth,  bring. 

efflcid,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum,  to 
make,  render. 

ego  (Gr.  125),/,  me. 

egredior,  -g-redi,  -gressiis,  to  go 
out,  set  forth. 

enuntio,  -are,  avI,  -atiim,  to  an- 
nounce,  tell,  bring  neics  of. 

e6,  ire,  ivi  or  ii,  Itum  (Gr.  227), 
to  go. 

eo  (adv.),  thither. 

eodem  (adv.),  to  the  same  place. 

Sques,  -Itis,  horseman,  horse-sol- 
dier. 

equltatus,  -us,  cavalry. 

eripid,  -ripere,  -ripui,  -reptiim, 
to  take  avKiy  ;  to  rescue. 

6t  (conj.),  and;  §t  .  .  .  6t,  both  .  .  . 
and. 

6tiS,m  (adv.),  also,  even. 

ex  (prep.  w.  abl.),  out  of,  from. 

exe6,  -ir§,  -ii,  -Itum,  to  go  out,  go 
forth,  depart. 

exercltatio,  -5nls,  training,  skill. 

exercltus,  -us,  army. 

existlmo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
think,  believe. 

expectd,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to 
wait  for. 

explorator,  -oris,  spy,  scout. 

exquird,  -quirere,  -quisivi,  -qui- 
situm,  to  search  out,  inquire,  in- 
quire into. 

exsequSr,  -sSqui,  -secutiis,  to 
carry  out,  execute. 

exterus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  [123]),  out- 
side, outer. 

extimiis,  -a,  -lim  (Gr.  [123]),  out- 
ermost, fai^thest. 

extremus,  -a,  -\im  (Gr.  [123]),  oxit- 
ermost,  farthest. 


92 


LATEST    INDEX. 


P. 

fScIlS  (adv.),  easily. 

facllls,  -e  (Gr.  121),  ecmj. 

facllius  (adv.),  more  easily. 

faci6,  facere,  feci,  factum,  to 
make,  do. 

factid,  -onis,  party,  faction. 

facultas,  -atls,  supply. 

familia,  -ae  (Gr.  [54]),  hotise- 
hold. 

fere  (adv.),  almost,  nearly. 

fer6,  ferre,  tuli,  latum  (Gr.224), 
to  hear,  hriwj,  carry. 

ferus,  -a,  -um,  loild,  savage. 

fides,  el,  faith,  belief,  promise. 

filia,  -ae  (Gr.  [54]),  dauyhter. 

filius,  -i  (Gr.  (57),  son. 

finls.-Is  (c.)  (Gr.  [99]),  end;  pi. 
fines,  bounds,  land,  territories, 
country. 

finltlmus,  -a,  -iim,  neiyhborinf/ ; 
as  a  noun,  neiyhbor. 

fio,  figri  [factiis]  (Gr.  229),  to 
be  made,  become,  happen. 

flrmus,  -&,  -um,./??'m,  strony. 

flag-Itd,  -are,  -avi,  -atumi,  to  de- 
mand, ask  for. 

fled,  flerS,  fievi,  flettim,  to 
iveep. 

fletus,  -us,  weeping.- 

flum§n,  -Inis,  rwer. 

flu6,  fluere,  fluxi,  tojloio. 

fortis,  -§,  bold,  brave. 

fortitude,  -Inis,  courage,  forti- 
tude. 

f ortuna,  -ae,  Inck,  fortune. 

fossfi,,  -ae,  ditch,  moat. 

frater,  -tris  (Gr.  80),  brother. 

frumentariiis,  -&,  -dm,  of  corn ; 
res  frumentaria,  corn  sup- 
ply. 

frumentiim,  -i,  corn,  grain. 

fiigS,,  -ae,  fight. 

fug-Itivus,  -§,,  -um,  fleeing  ;  as  a 
noun,  fugltivus,  deserter,  run- 
away. 


G. 

Gabinius,  -i,  Gabinius. 

Gallus,  -i,  a  Gaid ;  pi.  Galli,  the 

Gauls. 
Gallia,  -ae,  Gaid  (now  France). 
Galllcus,  -a,  -um,  Gallic. 
Garumna,  -ae  (m.),  the  Garonne 

(river). 
Genua,  -ae,  Geneva. 
Germania,  -ae,  Germany. 
Germanus,    -a,    -um,    German ; 

usually  pi.   Germani,   the   Ger- 
mans. 
g-grd,  g-erer^,  g-essi,  gestiim,  ta 

manage,  carry  on,  wage  (war), 
gloria,  -ae,  glory,  honor. 
gratia,    -ae,    favor,    popularity  ; 

pi.    gratiae,    thanks;    gratias. 

ag-ere,  to  give  thanks,  thank. 
gratulor,  -ari,  -attis  (Gr.  [2G9] ) , 

to  congratulate. 

H. 
habe6,  -er6,  -m,  -Itiim,  to  have^ 

hold;  deliver  (a  speecli). 
habltd,    -ar§,.   -avi,    -atiim,     to 

dwell. 
Haeduus,  -&,  -lim,  Hseduan;  pL 

Haedui,  the  Ilseduans  (a  Gallie 

tribe). 
Harudes.  -xim.  Ilarudes. 
Helvetiiis,  -&,  -iim,  Helvetian;  pi. 

Helvetii,  the  Helvetians. 
hiberna,  -oriim  (neut.  pi.  of  hi- 

bernus),  winter  quarters. 
hibernus,  -&,  -Ura,  of  winter,  win- 
try. 
hie,  haec,  h6c  (Gr.  134),  this ;  he, 

she,  kc. 
hi6m6,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim,  to  loin- 

tcr. 
Hispania,  -ae,  Spain. 
Ii6m6,  -Inis,  man,  human  being. 
hSnor,  -oris,  honor. 
hora,  -ae,  hour. 
hortSr,  -ari,  -atiis,  to  urge. 


LATIN    INDEX. 


93 


hostls,  -Is,  enemy. 

humanltas,  -atls,  culture,  refine- 
ment. 

I. 

Ibi  (adv.),  there,  in  that  place. 

idem,    eadem.   Idem   (Gr.   137), 
same. 

idoneus,  -a,  -Viiai,fit,  suitable. 

Idus,  -uum  (F.),  ides  (Gr.  490). 

ignis, -is  (Gr.  [99]),. /ire. 

ille,  ilia,  illud  (Gr.  131),  that,  he, 
she,  &c. 

impedimentum,    -i,    hindrance ; 
pi.  impedimenta,  bac/f/ar/e. 

imperium,  -i,  j)oioer,  sway,  mili- 
tary authority. 

imperd,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim,  to  or- 
der, command,  levy  (troops). 

impetrO,  -are,    -avi,    -atum,   to 
gain,  r/ain  a  reqiiest. 

impetus,  -us,  attack. 

implorO,    -are,    -ftvi,    -atiiin,  to 
beg,  pray. 

import 6,  -ar§,  -avi,  -atum,  to  im- 
port, bring  in. 

improbus,  -a,  -iim,  bad,  tvicked. 

impugno,  -are,   -avi,  -atum,  to 
attack. 

in  (prep.)  w.  abl.,  in,  on,  among; 
w.  ace,  i7ito,  to,  toioardyfor. 

incendd,  -cenderS,  -cendi,  -cen- 
sum,  to  set  fire  to,  bui'n. 

incltd,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  rouse 
itp,  excite. 

incola,  -ae,  inhabitant. 

incolO,  -colere,  -colui,  to  ^well. 

incommodura,  -i,  misfortune,  de- 
feat. 

incredlbllls,  -e,  incredible. 

incusd,    -ar§,    -avi,    -aturd,    to 
blame. 

inde  (adv.),  thence,  from  there. 

indicium,  -i,  information. 

indued,    -diicere,    -duxi,    -duc- 
tum,  to  lead  on,  induce  ;  lead. 

inferidr.  -ius  (Gr.  [123]),  lower. 


infero,  -ferr§,  -tuli,  -latiim,  to 
carry  on,  wage  (war) ;  to  inflict 
(wounds) . 

inferus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  [123] ) ,  loiver, 
inferior. 

influd,  -fluere,  -fluxi,  iofloto  into, 
empty  (of  a  river). 

ingens,  -ntis,  huge,  great. 

Inlmicus,  -a,  -um,  unfriendly, 
hostile. 

Inltium,  -i,  beginning. 

injuria,  -ae,  wrong,  injury. 

injussa,  loithout  orders. 

ins§qu6r,  -sequi,  -sgcutus,  to 
pursue,  attack. 

insig-nia,  -ifim,  equipments,  in- 
signia. 

instltutiim,  -i,  custom. 

instruo,  -struere,  -struxi,-struc- 
tiim,  to  dra7o  up,  arrange. 

intellegd,  -legere,  -lexi,  -lec- 
tum,  to  knoiu,  understand. 

int^r  (prep.  w.  ace),  between, 
among ;  int6r  s§,  mutually,  with 
each  other,  ivith  one  another,  &c. 
See  XII,  note  1. 

intercedd,  -ced§re,  -cessi,  -ces- 
sum,  to  intervene. 

interea  (adv.),  meamvhile. 

interflcio,  -fIcSre,  -feci,  -fectum, 
to  slay,  kill. 

interim  (adv.),  meanwhile. 

interior,  -ius  (Gr.  [123]),  i7iner, 
interior. 

Intermittd,  -mittere,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum,  to  leave  off. 

intervalliim,  -i,  interval,  distance. 

intlmus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  [123]),  in- 
most. 

invenid,  -venire,  -veni,  -ven- 
tum,  to  come  %ipon,find. 

ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum  (Gr.  132),  selfy 
he  himself,  &c. 

ire,  to  go ;  see  eo. 

Is,  ea.  Id  (Gr.  129),  this  or  that,  he, 
&c. 


94 


LATIN    INDEX. 


iste,  ista,  istud  (Gr.  130),  thaU  he. 
Ita  (adv.),   thus,  in  this  way,  so ; 

ita  ut,  so  that. 
Itaque  (conj.),  therefore. 
Italia,  -ae,  Italy. 
Item  (adv.),  also,  likewise. 
Iter,  Itlnerls  (Gr.  [115]),  journey, 

march,  route. 
ItSrura    (adv.),    again,    a    second 

time. 

J. 
jacto,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim,  to  dis- 

CUSS. 

jam  (adv.),  already,  at  length. 
jubeo,  jubere,  jussi,  jussiim,  to 

hid,  order. 
judlciiim,  -i,  trial. 
judlcd,    -are,    -avi,    -atum,    to 

judge,  decide. 
jug-um, -i,  yoke,  ridge  (of  a  hill), 

hill. 
jumentum,  -i,  yoke  animal,  beast 

of  burden. 
junidr  (Gr.  [123]),  younger. 
JurS,,  -ae,  Jura  (a  mountain). 
jur6,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  sioear. 
jus,  juris,  right ;  jus  jurandum, 

oath. 
jiivSnIs,  -l8(Gr.  [96],  [123]),  young  ; 

as  a  noun,  a  youth. 


Kal.  =  Kalendae,   Calends  (first 
day  of  the  month,  Gr.  490) . 


L.  =  Luciiis. 

L§,bienus,  -i,  Labienus. 

lS,cus,  -us  (Gr.  [110]),  lake. 

larg-It§r  (adv.),  largely  ;  largiter 
posse,  to  have  great  poicer  or  in- 
fluence. 

Iargiti6,  -onis,  free  giving,  liber- 
ality ;  bribery. 

late  (adv.),  widely. 

latltudd,  -Inis,  breadth,  loidth. 


latus,  -a,  -um,  broad,  wide. 

latus,  -eris,  side,  flank. 

Ieg-ati6,  -onis,  embassy. 

leg-atus,  -i,  deputy ;  lieutenant,  en- 
voy, embassador. 

leg-id,  -onis,  legion. 

Lemannus,  -i  (Lake)  Leman; 
Lake  of  Geneva. 

lenltas,  -atls,  gentleness,  slowness. 

lex,  legls,  law. 

liberius  (adv.),  more  freely. 

libertas,  -bXIs,  freedom. 

licet,  llcere,  llcult,  llcltum,  it  is 
permitted,  one  may. 

Ling-ones,  -"lim,  Lingones. 

lingua,  -ae,  tongue,  speech,  lan- 
guage. 

linter,  -tris  (c.)  (Gr.   102),    boat, 

skifl: 

Liscus,  -i,  Liscus. 

16ciis,  -i  (Gr.  [116]),  place,  position, 
situatio7i. 

longe  (adv.),/ar,  by  far. 

longisslme  (adv.),  farthest,  very 
far. 

longitude,  -Inis,  length. 

16qu6r,  loqui,  Idcutiis,  to  speak, 
talk. 

lux,  lucls,  light ;  primfi,  lux,  day- 
break. 

.      M. 

M.  =  Marcus. 

mfi,gls  (adv.),  more. 

magistratiis,  -as,  magistrate. 

mag-nltud6,  -Inis,  size. 

magnils,  -&,  -•Cim(Gr.  [123]),  great, 
large. 

maj6r,  -■ds  (Gr.  [123]),  larger, 
greater. 

maid,  mall§,  malui  (Gr.  225),  to 
prefer,  choose,  icish  more. 

maliis,  -S,,  -lim  (Gr.  [123]),  bad. 

mS,nus,  -us  (f.),  Jrand. 

matrlmoniiim,  -i,  marriage;  in 
matrimonium  ducere,  to  mar- 
ry. 


LATIN    INDEX. 


96 


MatrSnS,  -ae  (m.),  Marne  (river), 
maturius  (adv.),  earlier. 
maturo,    -are,    -avi,    -atiim,    to 

make  haste,  hasten, 
maturus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  [121] ) ,  ripe. 
maxlme  (adv.),  most,  very. 
maximus,    -&,    -lim  (Gr.    [123]), 

greatest,  very  great. 
melior,  -ius  (Gr.  [123]),  better. 
memoriS,,  -ae,  memory. 
mens,  -ntis,  mind,  reason. 
mensis,  -Is  (Gr.  [96] ),  month, 
mercator,  -oris,  trader,  merchant. 
meridies,  -ei  (m.),  noon,  midday, 
MessalS,,  -ae,  Messala. 
meus,  -a,  -xim  (Gr.  126),  my,  mine. 
miles,  -Itis,  soldier, 
milltarls,  -e,  military;  res  mili- 

taris,  military  m,atters,  loarfare, 
mill§  (Gr.  \\\^),  thou  sand ;  millS 

passuiim  (a  thousand  paces),  a 

mile. 
minlme  (adv.),  least. 
mlnlmtis,    -&,    -Um   (Gr.    [123]), 

least,  smallest. 
mInSr,  -lis  (Gr.  [123] ),  less,  smaller. 
minus  (adv.),  less. 
mittd,  mitter6,  misi,  miss^m,  to 

send. 
m6l6,  -§re,  -ui,  -Itum,  to  grind, 
mons,  -nt\s{m^.),  mountain,  mount. 
mSror,  -ari,  -atus,  to  loait, 
mors,  -rtis,  death, 
mortuiis,  -a,  -um,  dead. 
mos,  morls,  custom,  usage. 
moved,  mSvere,  movi,  motiim, 

to  move, 
miilier,  -Sris,  woman. 
multltudd,  -Inis,  multitude,  great 

number. 
multiis,  -a,  -iim  (Gr.  [123] ) ,  much ; 

pi.  many. 
munio,  -ire,  -ivi,  -it'Gm,  to  fortify, 

defend. 
munitid,  -onis,  fortification. 
murus,  -i,  wall. 


N. 

naturS,,  -ae,  nature,  character. 

navis,  -Is  (Gr.  [99]),  ship, 

ne  (adv.  and  conj.),  not;  ne  .  .  . 
quidem,  not  even:  as  conj.  w. 
subj.,  in  order  that  ,  ,  ,  not,  lest, 
(SeeGr.  [325],  424). 

ng  (interrog.  particle)  (Gr.  427) . 

nee  (couj.),  ?io;\    See  neque. 

negotium,  -i,  business,  task. 

nem6,  -Inis,  no  one. 

n6qu§  (conj.),  and  not,  nor;  ne- 
que .  ,  .  neque,  neither  .  .  ,  nor. 

nihil  (indeclinable),  nothing. 

nihlliim,  -i  (rare),  nothing;  abl. 
nihilo  minus,  nevertheless, 

nobnis,  -e,  noble,  of  good  birth. 

nobnitas,  -atls,  nobility, 

nolo,  noll§,  nolui  (Gr.  225),  to 
be  imioilling. 

nomSn,  -Inis,  name. 

non  (adv.),  not. 

nondiim  (adv.),  not  yet. 

nonnuUiis,  -&,  -iim,  some,  a  few, 

noster.  -trft,  -triim,  our,  ours. 

n6v§m,  nine, 

noviis,  -a,  -iim,  new;  res  novae, 
a  revolution,  change  of  govern- 
ment. 

nox,  noctis,  night. 

nuUiis,  -a,  -iim  (Gr.  71),  no,  no 
one. 

niim  (interrog.  particle),  (see  Gr. 
429). 

niimSriis,  -i,  number, 

nunc  (adv.),  nov). 

nuutid,  -ar§,  -avi,  -atiim,  to  an- 
nounce, tell,  report, 

niip6r  (adv.),  lately,  recently. 


O. 

6b  (prep.  w.  ace),  on  account  of, 

because  of,  for, 
obaeratiis,  -&,  -iim,  indebted;  as 

subst.,  a  debtor. 


96 


LATIN    INDEX. 


obliviscSr,     oblivisci,     oblitus 

(Gr.  2S0),  to  for  get. 
obses,  -Idls,  hostcif/e. 
obsignO,    -are,    -avi,  -atiXm,  to 

seal,  make  (a  will). 
obtlneo,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -tentum, 

to  hold,  possess  ;  to  get,  obtain, 
occasus,  -us,  fall,  setting  (of  the 

sun) ;  occasus  soils,  sunset,  ivest. 
occidd,  -cidere,  -cidi,  -cisum,  to 

slay,  kill ;  occisi,  the  slain,  the 

dead. 
occfipd,    -ar6,    -avi,   -atum,    to 

seize,  occtipy. 
6ce§,nus,  -i;  ocean. 
oct6,  eight. 
oct6d§cim,  eighteen. 
oculus,  -i,  eye. 
odi,  odissS,  ostts  (Gr.  [235]),  to 

hate. 
omnino  (adv.),  altogether,  in  all, 

only. 
omnls,  -6,  all,  every. 
6port6t,  6porter§,  oportult,  it 

is  proper,  it  behooves,  one  ought. 
oppldum,  -i,  toion,  ivalled  toion. 
oppugnO,  -ar6,  -avi,  -atHm,  to 

attack. 
optlmiis,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  [123] ) ,  best. 
6pus,  -eris,  loork. 
6pus  (iudecl.)  (Gr.  [297]),  need. 
oratid,  -onis,  speech,  talk. 
Orgetorix,  -Igis,  Orgetoriz. 
driens,  -ntis,  rising ;  oriens  sol, 

east. 
6ri6r,  -iri,  orttis  (Gr.  [216]  (h)), 

to  rise ;  to  begin. 
6r6,  -ar6,  -avi,  -atiim,  to  beg,  pray, 

ask. 

P. 

P.  =  Pubims. 

pagiis,  -i,  district,  canton. 

pand6,  pand§r6,  pandi,  passiim 
and  panstim,  to  stretch  out,  ex- 
tend. 


paratus,  -a,  -ilm,  prepared,  ready. 
pars,  -rtis,  jyart ;  In  utr§,m  par- 
tem, in  which  direction,  which 

way. 
parvus,  -a,  -una,  small. 
passus,  -us,  pace,  step. 
pate6,  patere,  patui,  to  lie  open, 

extend,  stretch. 
pater,  -tris  (Gr.  SO),  father. 
paucus,  -a,  -um  (usually  pi.) ,  few. 
paul5  (adv.),  a  little. 
pax.  pads,  peace. 
pedes,  -Itis,  footman,  foot-soldier. 
pejor,  -us  (Gr.  [123]),  icorse. 
pell6,  pellere,  pepuli,  pulsum, 

to  drive,  repidse,   defeat;   drive 

out. 
per  (prep.  w.   ace),    through,    by 

means  of. 
perducd,  -ducSre,  -duxi,  -duc- 

tum,  to  lead  through,  build,  con- 
struct (e.g.,  a  wall). 
perfacHIs,  -§,  very  easy. 
perflcio,  -fIcerS,  -feci,  -fectiim, 

to  do,  perform,  accomplish. 
pSriculiim,  -i,  trial,  test ;  danger^ 
pentiis,    -a,   -lim,  knowing  {oi)^ 

skilled  (in) . 
permoveO,  -mdverl,  -movi,  -mo- 

tiim,  to  more  strongly,  move. 
perpauciis,  -a,  -\im,  very  feu\ 
pers6qu6r,  -sequi,  -sScatiis,  to 

follow,  pursue. 
pers6ver6,  -ar6,  -avi,  -atiim,  to 

persevere,  continue. 
persuaded,     -suader§,     -suasi,. 

-suasum  (Gr.  [2G9]),  to  persuade. 
perterreO,   -erS,  -ui,  -Ittlm,  ta 

frighten. 
pertlned,     -tlnerS,     -tInui,     to 

stretch,  extend;   to  pertain,   be- 
long. 
perturbd,  -ar§,  -avi,  -atxim,  to 

distiirb.  frighten. 
perv6ni6,  -v6nir§,  -veni,  -ven- 

tiim,  to  come  through,  arrive. 


LATIN    INDEX. 


97 


pes,  pedis,  foot ;  pedem  referre, 

to  retreat. 
pesslmus,    -a,    -um  (Gr.    [123]), 

ioorst9 
petd,  petere,  petivi,  pStitum,  to 

asl',  herj,  seek. 
Piso,  -onis,  Piso. 
placed,  -ere,  -ui,  -Itum  (Gr.  [2G9]), 

to  please ;  placuit  ei,  he  resolved. 
plebs,  plebis,  common  people,  peo- 

2)le. 
plurlmum     (adv.),     very     much, 

f/reatlij. 
plurlmus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  123),  most. 
plus  (Gr.  [92]  and  [123]),  more,  or 

often  simply  many. 
poena,  -ae,  penalty,  punishment. 
poUIceor,  -eri,  -Itus,  to  promise. 
pond,  ponere,  posui,  posltum, 

to  place,  pitch  (a  camp) . 
pons,  -ntis  (m.),  bridf/e. 
populus,  -i,  a,  people,  a  nation. 
possum,  possS,  potui  (Gr.  [222]), 

to  be  poioerful,  have  iiiflnence,  be 

able,  can. 
post  (prep.  w.  ace),  after. 
post  (adv.),  afterwards. 
postea  (adv.),  afterwards. 
posterus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  [123]),  fol- 

loiolnrj,  next  after. 
postquam  or  post  quam  (conj.), 

after. 
postremus,  -S,,  -um  (Gr.  [123]),  last. 
postridie  (adv.),  on  the  next  day, 

on  the  morrow. 
postiild,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  de- 
mand, ask;  require. 
postumus,  -a,  -um(Gr.  [123]),  last. 
potens,  -ntIs,  %)Oioerfid. 
potentift,  -ae,  poioer,  might. 
potestas,  -atls,  power ;   opportu- 
nity. 
potior,  potiri,  potitus  (Gr.  [216] 

(/i)),  to  (jet  control  of,  f/et,  f/ain. 
praecedd,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -ces- 

sum,  to  precede,  surpass. 


praeflcio,  -flc6r§,  -feci,  -fectum, 

to  put  over,  put  in  charge  of. 
praemittd,  -mittere,  -misi,  -mis- 

siim,  to  send  ahead. 
praepond,  -ponere,  -posui,  -p6si- 

txim,  to  put  in  charge,  place  in 

command. 
praesens,  -ntIs,  present. 
praesldium,  -i,  garrison,  defence. 
praesto,  -stare,  -stiti,  -stitum  or 

-statiim,  to  stand  before,  excel; 

to  furnish. 
praesum,  -esse,  -fui,  -futurus,  to 

be  ahead,  be  first,  be  present,  be 

in  command  of. 
pridie  (adv.),  on  the  day  before. 
primus,  -a,  -iim  (Gr.  [123]),  ^>s^ 
princeps,   -cipis,   leading,  chief; 

as  a  noun,  princeps,  a  chief. 
princlpatus,      -us,      leadership ; 

highest  office. 
prior,  -ius  (Gr.  [123] ), /ormer. 
pristlnus,  -a,  -um,  ancient. 
prius  quam,  or  priusquam(conj.), 

sooner  than,  before. 
pro  (prep.  w.  abl.),  before,  for,  in 

behalf  of ,  in  proportion  to. 
prdbo,  -ar§,  -avi,  -atum,  to  prove. 
pr6ced6,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -ces- 

sum,  to   go  forward,  advance, 

proceed. 
Procilliis,  -i,  Procillus. 
prodeo,  -ire,  -ii,  -Itiim,  to  come 

out,  go  forth. 
producd,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -duc- 

tum,  to  lead  out,  lead  forth. 
proelium,  -i,  battle. 
profectid,  -onIs,  departure,  start. 
proflciscor,  -ficisci,  -fectiis,  to 

start,  set  out,  advance. 
profug-id,  -fugere,  -fug-i,  to/ee. 
prohlbed,  -hibere,  -hibui,  -hlbl- 

tiim,  to  keep  out,  prohibit,  stop. 
projicid,  -jlcere,  -jeci,  -jectum, 

to  throic. 
propior,  -ius  (Gr.  [123]),  nearer. 


98 


LATIN    INDEX. 


propter  (prep.),  on  account  of. 
propterea  (adv.), /or  this  reason; 

propterea  quod,  for  the  reason 

th(it,  because. 
prosum,  prodesse,  profui,  pro- 

futurus  (Gr.  [269)] ,  to  be  useful, 

be  advantageous. 
provinciS.,  -ae,  province. 
proximus,    -§,,    -una   (Gr.    [123]), 

nearest,  next;  proximum  iter, 

shortest  route. 
pug"n6,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  to  fight. 
Pyrenaei  montes,  the  Pyrenees. 

Q. 

quaero,     quaerere,     quaesivi, 

quaesitum,  to  ask,  inquire. 

quails,  -e,  such  as;  what  kind  of, 
what. 

qu&in  (conj.  and  adv.),  than  ;  with 
superlatives  it  emphasizes  the 
meaning;  quam  maxlmiis,  the 
very  greatest,  the  greatest  2^osslble. 

quamdiu  (conj.),  as  long  as,  while. 

quartiis,  -5.,  -^m,  fourth. 

quattuor,  four. 

-que  (conj.),  and. 

quSrdr,  qu6ri,  questiis,  to  com- 
plain. 

qui,  quae,  qu6d  (Gr.  138),  who, 
which,  that,  ivhat. 

quid  (adv.),  ichy  ? 

quIdSm  (adv.),  even  ,•  ne  .  .  .  qul- 
dem,  not  even. 

quin  (conj.),  that,  but  that. 

quindScIm,  fifteen. 

quinqu§,  /??7c. 

quint  lis,  -&,  -urn,  fifth. 

quis,  quae,  quid  (Gr.  139),  who? 
which?  ichat?  {Gv.  140) ;  any  one, 
any  thing. 

quisqufi,m,  quicquam,  or  quid- 
quS,na(Gr.l41),  a7iy  one,any  thing. 

quisqu6,  quaequ§,  quidquS  (Gr. 
141),  every,  each. 

qudd  (conj.),  because. 


quoque  (adv.),  also. 
quotldianiis,  -a,  -lim,  daily. 
quotidie  (adv.),  daily. 

R. 

ratis,  -Is,  raft. 

rgclpio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum, 
to  take  back,  receive;  se  recl- 
pere,  to  betake  one's  self,  retreat. 

rede6,  -ir§,  -ii,  -Ittim,  to  go  back, 
return. 

rSdlnad,  -ImSre,  -emi,  -emptum, 
to  buy,  piirchase. 

r§dlti6,  -onis,  return. 

r6duc6,  -duc§r§,  -duxi,  -duc- 
tiim,  to  bring  back. 

refSrd,  r6ferr§,  rettuli,  rela- 
tiim,  to  carry  back ;  ped6m 
rSferre,  to  retreat. 

regid,  -onIs,  region,  country. 

regn^im,  -i,  kingdom,  kingly 
power.  [rest  of. 

rlllquiis,  -a,  -iim,  remaining ;  the 

rSmlniscor,  -sci  (Gr.  280),  to  re- 
member, recall,  call  to  mind. 

rSnuncid,  -ar§,  -avi,  -atiirQ,  to 
announce,  tell,  bring  xoord. 

renuntio  =  renuncio. 

r§pell6,  repell§r§,  reppiili,  re- 
pulsum,  to  drive  back,  drive  off, 
repulse. 

r6p§ri6,  r6p6rir6,  reppSri,  r6- 
pertiim,  to  find,  gain ;  to  find 
out,  learn. 

r6pugn6,  -arS,  -avi,  -atiim,  to 
oppose,  be  opposed  to. 

res,  rSi,  thing,  matter,  circum- 
stance ;  res  militaris,  warfare. 

rescindd,  -scind6r6,  -scldi,  -scis- 
stlm,  to  break  down,  destroy. 

resciscO,  -scisc§r6,  -scivi,  or 
-scii,  -scitum,  to  learn,  find  out. 

responded,  -sponderS,  -spondi, 
-sponstim,  to  answer. 

restltud,  -u6r§,  -ui,  -dtiim,  to  re- 
store, re-establish. 


LATIN    INDEX. 


99 


rStlned,  -tInerS,  -tinui,  -tentiim, 
to  keep,  retain. 

reverto,  -verterS,  -verti,  -ver- 
sum,  to  return  (also  pass,  re- 
verter, with  the  same  meaning) . 

Rhenus,  -i,  the  Rhine  (river). 

Rhodaniis,  -i,  the  Rhone  (river) . 

ripa,  -ae,  hank  (of  a  river). 

rdgd,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim,  to  ask, 
ask  for. 

Roma,  -ae,  Rome. 

Romanus,  -S,,  -lim,  Roman;  pi. 
Romani,  the  Romans. 


saepe  (adv.),  often. 

salus,  -utis,  safety. 

sanguis,  -Inis  (m.)  (Gr.  [115]), 
hlood. 

Santdnes,  -um,  the  Santones. 

satis  (adv.  and  indeclinable  adj.), 
enourjh. 

sS,tisfacti6,  -onis,  excuse. 

scio,  scire,  scivi,scitum,to  knoio. 

secundus,  -a,  -iim,  second. 

sed  (conj.),  hut. 

sedeclm,  sixteen. 

sedltiosiis,  -§,,  -um,  seditious, 
quarrelsome. 

s6mel  (adv.),  once ;  s§m§l  atquS 
ItSrum,  once  and  again,  repeat- 
edly. 

sementis,  -Is,  soxcing  (of  grain) . 

senatus,  -us,  senate. 

senex,  senis  (Gr.  [115]),  old. 

senior  (Gr.  [123]),  older. 

septentrio,  -onIs,  north  (usually 
pl.). 

Septimus,  -a,  -um,  seventh. 

sepultura,  -ae,  hurial. 

Sequana,  -ae  (f.),  Seine  (river). 

Sequanus,  -a,  -um,  Sequanian ; 
pl.  Sequani,  the  Sequanians. 

sequor,  sequi,  secutiis,  to  fol- 
loio ;  to  he  inflicted  (said  of  pun- 
ishment) , 


servills,  -6,    of  slaves;    servills 

tumultiis,  slave  insurrection. 
servltus,  -utIs,  slavery. 
sescenti,  -ae,  -a,  six  hundred. 
sex,  six. 
si  (conj.),  if. 
sicut  (conj.),  as,  just  as. 
silva,  -ae,  icood,  forest. 
sin  (conj.),  but  if. 
socius,  -i,  friend,  ally. 

sol,  soils,  SU71. 

solum  (adv.),  only;  non  solum 
.  .  .  s6d  6tiS,m,  not  only  .  .  .  but 
also. 

solus,  -a,  -Um  (Gr.  71),  alone. 

spatium,  -i,  space,  distance ;  time. 

spectd,  -are,  -avi,  -at\im,to  look, 
look  at,  see. 

sperO,  -ar§,  -avi,  -atiim,  to  hope, 
expect,  hope  for. 

spes,  spei,  hope  ;  In  spem  venirS, 
"  comeintoho]pe,"  entertainahope. 

statuO,  -u§r§,  -ui,  -utxim,  to  de- 
cide, determine. 

stipendiarius,  -a,  -iim,  tributary. 

stiidium,  -i,  zeal,  friendship. 

sub  (prep,  w,  ace.  and  abl.),  \inder. 

subdued,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -duc- 
tiim,  to  loithdraiv,  draw  off. 

subsldium,  -i,  reinforcement,  help. 

subsiim,  -ess§,  -fui,  -fiituriis,  to 
be  near,  he  at  hand. 

subvehd,  -veh§re,  -vexi,  -vec- 
tiim,  to  bring  up. 

Suevi,  -orum,  the  Suevi,  Sivabians. 

sui  (Gr.  125),  himself,  herself,  etc. ; 
themselves ;  inter  se  ;  see  inter. 

SuUa,  -ae,  Sulla. 

Slim,  esse,  fui,  futuriis  (Gr.  221), 
to  be. 

stimmiis,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  [123]), 
highest ;  summiis  mons,  top  of 
the  mountain;  so  in  similar  ex- 
pressions. 

sum6,  sumere,  sumpsi,  sump- 
I      tum,  to  take. 


100 


LATIN    INDEX. 


siip§ro,  -arg,  -avi,  -atum,  to  over- 
come, conquer. 

supersum,  -esse,  -fui,  -futurus, 
to  he  left  over,  survive. 

siiperus,  -&,  -urn  (Gr.  [123]),  up- 
per. 

suppeto,  -petere,  -petivi,  -peti- 
tura,  to  he  on  hand,  he  in  store. 

susclpio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -cep- 
tum,  to  undertake;  sibi  susci- 
pere,  to  take  on  one's  self. 

susplcid,  -onis,  suspicion. 

sustlneO,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -ten- 
tum,  to  hold  out  against,  with- 
stand. 

SUU3,  -a,  -um,  his  own,  his,  her, 
its,  etc. 


T.  =  Titus. 

tace&,  t§.cerg,  tS,cui,  t&cltiim, 

to  keej)  silent,  hold  oiic's  peace. 
tand§m  (adv.),  at  last,  at  length. 
telum,  -i,  missile,  javelin. 
tempero,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim,  to 

refrain. 
tempiis,  -oris,  time. 
teneo,  tenere,  tenui,    tentiim, 

to  hold. 
tent6,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim,  to  tnj, 

attempt,  test. 
tergtim,  -i,  hack. 
tertius,  -a,  -lim,  third. 
testamentum,  -i,  will. 
Teutoni,  -6riim,  the  Teutoni. 
timor,  -oris,  fear,  panic. 
Tolosates,  -ium,  the  Tolosates. 
totldem    (iudecliuahle    adj.),    as 

many,  the  same  numher  of. 
totiis,  -a,  --am  (Gr.  71),  loholc,  all. 
tradd,  -dSr6,   -didl,    -dlttlm,  to 

fjive  over,  surrender. 
trand,  -ar§,  -avi^  -atiim,  to  swim 

across. 
trans  (prep.  w.  ace),  over,  across, 

beyond. 


transduce,  -ducer6,  -duxi,  -duc- 

tum  (Gr.  [268]),  to  lead  over, 
transport. 

transeo,  -ire,  -ii,  -Itum,  to  go  over, 
cross. 

tres,  trig,  (Gr.  118),  three. 

tribunus,  -i,  tribune. 

trlbu6,  -uere,  -ui,  -utum,  to  as- 
sign, attribute. 

triduum,  -i,  three  days. 

trig-inta,  thirty. 

triplex,  -Ids  (Gr.  [108]),  triple. 

tu  (Gr.  125),  thou,  thee  ;  often  trans- 
lated by  Eng.  you. 

tuna  (adv.),  then. 

tumultus,  -us,  uproar,  broil ;  iiv- 
surrection. 

tuiis,  -&,  --am,  thy,  thine. 

U. 
tibi  (conj.),  whei'e,  token. 
Ubii,  -orum,  the  Uhii. 
ult§ri6r,  -iiis  (Gr.  [12Z]),  farther, 

later. 
ultlmiis,    -a,     -iim    (Gr.     [12.3]), 

farthest,  last. 
ultra  (prep.),  beyond. 
und6  (conj.),  ichence,from  icJiich. 
undeviginti,  eighteen. 
undlque  (adv.),  on  all  sides,  from 

all  sides. 
uniis,  -a,  -iim  (Gr.  71),  07ie,  only, 

alone. 
urbs,  -bis,  city. 
usquS  ad,  ^ip  to,  until. 
asus,  -us,  use,  experience,  advan- 
tage ;  dat.  Usui  (Gr.  [272]),  ad- 

vantageous,  vseful. 
at  (conj.),  as;  "W.  subj.,  in  order 

that,  that,  so  that. 
titer,  -tra,  -trtlm  (Gr.  71),  lohich 

(of  two), 
iiti  (conj.),  as;  that  (the  same  as 

ut). 
at6r,  ati,  asiis  (Gr.  [297]),  to  use, 

employ,  enjoy. 


LATIN    INDEX. 


101 


utrimque  (adv.).  on  both  sides. 
uxor,   -oris,  spouse ;  husband  or 
wife. 

V. 
vaco,  -are,    -avi,    -atiim,  to  be 

emjJti/,  be  vacant. 
vadum,  -i,  shoal,  ford. 
vag-or,  -ari,  -atus,  to  ivander. 
valeo,  valere,  valui,  valltiim, 

to  be  strong,  be  able,  have  influ- 
ence. 
Valerias,  -i,  Valerius. 
vehementSr     (adv.),     greatly, 

strongly. 
vel  (conj.),  or ;  v§l .  .  .  v§l,  either 

.  .  .  or. 
velox,  -ocis,  sicift. 
veni5,  vSnirS,  veni,  ventiim,  to 

come. 
verbtim,  -i,  word. 
vergb,  verger§,  to  slope,  extend. 
vertd,  vert§r§,  verti,  versttm, 

to  turn. 
verus,  -a,  -lim,  ti-ue. 
vescor,  vesci  (Gr.  [297]),  feed  on, 

eat. 


Vesontio,  -onis,  Veso7itio. 

vesper,  -i  (Gr.  [115]),  evening. 

vester,  -tra,  -trum,  your,  yours. 

vetus,  -eris,  old,  ancient. 

via,  -ae,  v:ay,  road,  path,  journey. 

victoria,  -ae,  victory. 

viciis,  -i,  village. 

video,  videre,  vidi,  visiim,  to 

see  ;  pass,  videri,  to  seem. 
vlgllia,  -ae,  icatch. 
viginti,  twenty. 
vincliirQ  =  vinculum, 
vinciiliini,  -i,  chain,  fetter. 
vinum,  -i,  loine. 
virtas,    -atfe,    manhood,    merit, 

courage. 
vis,  vis  (Gr.  \1\S\), violence,  force; 

pi.  vires,  strength. 
v6c6,  -are,  -avi,  -atiim,  to  call. 
Vocontii,  -oriim,  the  Vocontii. 
volo,    vell§,   vSlui    (Gr.  225),    to 

loisft,  be  willing. 
v61untas,  -atls,  loish,  consent. 
vSluptas,  -atls,  pleasure. 
vox,  vocis,  voice,  talk,  words. 
vulniis,  -Sris,  wound. 


ENGLISH    II^DEX. 


A. 

a  (not  expressed  in  Latin) . 

able ;  to  be  able,  possum,  posse, 
potui;  valeOy  valere,  valid. 

about  (adv.),  circiter;  prep,  cir- 
cum ;  de  (=  concerning) . 

absent,  to  be  absent,  ahsurn, 
abesse,  afui,  afuturus. 

accomplish,  conficio,  -ficSre,  -feci, 
-fectum. 

according  to  (expressed  by  abl. 
case) . 

account ;  on  account  of,  06  ,• 
propter. 

accuse,  accuso,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

across,  trans. 

admit,  recipio,  -cip^re,  -cepi,  -cep- 
tum. 

advantageous,  to  be  adv.,  pro- 
sum,  prodesse,  profui. 

af8.rm,  confirmo,  -arc,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

after  (conj.),  postquam  ;  often  ex- 
pressed by  abl.  abs. 

after  (j)rep.),pos«. 

afterward,  postea. 

again,  rursus. 

against  my  will,  me  invito. 

aid  (noun),  auxilium,  -i. 

aid  (rerh) ,  sublcvo,-dre,-dvi,-dtum. 

all,  totus,  -a,  -urn  (Gr.  71) ;  omms,  -e. 

ally,  soeius,  -i. 

Allobroges,  AUobrdcjes,  -um. 

allow,  do,  dare,  dedi,  datum ;  al- 
low to  surrender  =  receive  into 
surrender,  accipSre  in  deditioiiem. 

almost,  paene. 


alone,  solus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  71). 

Alps,  Alpes,  -ium  (f.). 

ambassador,  legdtus,  -i. 

among,  in  w.  abl.,  apiid. 

an  (not  expressed  in  Latin) . 

and,  et ;  -que ;  atque  or  ac. 

announce,  nuntio,  -dre,  -dvi, 
-dtum ;  enuntio,  renuntio. 

another,  alius,  -a,  -ud;  one  an- 
other ;  see  one. 

answer,  responsum,  -i. 

any,  aliquis,  -qua, -quid;  after  si, 
nisi,  ne,  num ;  quis,  qua,  quid ;  in 
neg.  sentences, quisquam  or  ullus. 

anything,  cdiquid;  after  ne,  etc., 
quid  (Gr.  [140]). 

Aquitania,  Aquitania,  -ae. 

Arar,  Arar,  -dris. 

Ariovistus,  Ariovistus,  -i. 

arms,  arma,  -drum. 

army,  exercUus,  -us. 

around,  circum. 

arrival,  adventus,  -us. 

arrive,  venio,  -Ire,  veni,  ventum; 
pervenio. 

artifice,  insidiae,  -drum. 

Arvemi,  Arverni,  -drum. 

as  (rel.  pr.),  qui,  quae,  quod. 

as  possible,  quam,  w.  superl. 

ask  for,  rogo,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum; 
postulo,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

assemble,  convenio,  -ire,  -vem, 
-ventum. 

assign,  tribuo,  -uere,  -ui,  -utum. 

assizes,  conventus,  -uum. 

at,  expressed  by  abl.  or  loo.  case ; 
at  home,  domi ;  (=  to)  ad. 


104 


ENGLISH   INDEX. 


attack,  adgredior,  -grMi,  -gres- 
sum ;  impetumfacio,  facere,  feci, 
factum,  w.  prep,  in  w.  ace. 

attempt  (verb),  conor,  -dri,  -utus. 

attempt  (noun) ;  make  any  at- 
tempt =  attempt  anything,  quic- 
qiiam  condri. 

attribute,  tribuo,-^(<ire,~ui,-utnm. 

auxiliaries,  auxilia,  -drum. 

avoid,  vito,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

await,  expecto,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

aware,  conscius,  -a,  -um. 

away,  be  away,  ahsum,  ahcsse, 
afui,  afuturus ;  take  away ;  see 
take. 

B. 

back,  tergmn,  -i. 

back  (adv.) ;  see  lead,  bring, 
etc. 

bad,  malus,  -a,  -um. 

baggage,  impedimenta,  -orum. 

bank,  ripa,  -ac. 

battle,  proelium,  -i. 

be,  sum,,  esse,  fui,  futurus ;  be, 
able,  advantageous,  absent, 
etc.  ;  see  under  able,  etc. 

bear,  fero,  ferre,  tuli,  latum, 

because,  quod  (Gr.  [328]);  ex- 
pressed also  by  abl.  abs. 

before  (prej).),  ante. 

before  {con].), pnus  .  .  .  quam. 

beg,  ohs^cro,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

begin  \coepio,  coep^re"],  coepi,  co- 
eptum;  begin  (battle),  com- 
mitto,  -mittlre,  -m'lsi,  -missum. 

beginning,  initium,  -i. 

Belgians,  Belgae,  -drum. 

best,  ox)tim%is,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  [123]). 

betake  one's  self,  se  recipio,  -ci- 
•pcre,  -cepi,  -ccjHum. 

better,  melior,  -ius  (Gr.  [123]). 

between,  inter. 

beyond,  ultra ;  (=  across),  trans. 

Bibracte,  Bibracte,  -is  (n.). 

"bidf  Jubeo,jubere,  jussi,  jussum. 


blame,  accUso,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum; 
incuso. 

blame,  free  from ;  see  free. 

blood,  sanguis,  -inis  (Gr.  [115]). 

boat,  linter,  -tris  (c). 

body,  corpus,  -Oris. 

Boii,  Boii,  -drum. 

boldly,  more  boldly,  audacius. 

boldness,  aadacia,  -ae. 

both,  uterque,  -trdque,  -trumque. 

hrsive,f ortis,  -e. 

breadth,  latitudo,  -inis ;  in 
breadth,  in  latitudXnem. 

bring,  /e?'o,  ferre,  tuli,  latum, 
rcfero;  bring  together,  con- 
fiiro ;  bring  back,  reduco,  -du- 
dire,  -duxi,  -ductum;  bring 
(=  induce),  adduco ;  bring  up 
(a  river),  subvcho,  -vehere,  -vexi, 
-vectum ;  bring  word,  nuntiOy 
-are,  -dvi,  -dtum;  bring  over, 
transporto,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

broad,  tatus,  -a,  -um. 

broken, /rac< us,  -a,  -um. 

brother,  frater,  -tris. 

build,  perduco,  -ducSre,  -duxi, 
-ductum. 

burial,  sepultura,  -ae. 

bum,  cremo,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

business,  negotium,  -i. 

by,  a,  ab  (to  denote  the  doer) ;  often 
expressed  by  abl.  case. 

O. 

Csesar,  Caesar,  -dris. 

call,  appcllo,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum ; 
voco,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum ;  call  to- 
gether, convdco. 

camp,  castra,  -orum. 

can,  j)ossum,  posse,  2>otui. 

canton,  pagus,  -i. 

care,  cura,  -ae. 

cause  (noim),  causa,  -ae. 

cause  (verb),  committo,  -mitti^re, 
-misi,  -missum ;  followed  by  a 
result-clause,  ut  w.  subj. 


ENGLISH    INDEX. 


105 


cavalry,  equitdtus,  -us. 

ce&se,  desisto,-sistere,~stUi,-stitum. 

Celts,  Celtae,  -drum. 

centurion,  centurio,  -onis. 

chance,  casus,  -us. 

change,  converto,  -vertere,  -verti, 

-versum. 
character,  natura,  -ae. 
charg-e,  procurro,  -curr^re,  -curri, 

-cursum. 
cheer,  confirmo,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtuni. 
chief,  princeps,  -tpis ;  chief  men, 

principes. 
children,  liberi,  -drum.  {turn. 

choose,  delef/o,  -legale,  -legi,  -lee- 
circumstance,  res,  rei. 
city,  urhs,  -bis. 
•come,  venio,  -Ire,  veni,  ventum; 

come    together,    convenio ; 

come   up  to,   succedo,  -cedere, 

-cessi,    -cessum,   w.   prep,    sub ; 

come  nearer,  2^ropius  accedo ; 

come  to  iiSisa,fio,  fieri, /actus. 
coming,  adventus,  -us. 
command,  be  in  command  of, 

praesum,     -esse,    -fui,    -futurus 

(Gr.  [269]). 
compasses;  see  pair, 
compel,  cogo,  cogh'e,  coegi,  coac- 

tum. 
complain,  queror,  queri,  questus. 
■conference,  colloquium,  -i. 
conquer,  vinco,  vincere,  vici,  vic- 

tum. 
consent,  voluntas,  -dtis. 
Considius,  Considivs,  -i. 
conspiracy,  conjuratio,  -67iis. 
construct,  perduco,  -duc^re,  -duxi, 

-ductum. 
consul,  consul,  -ulis. 
contend,  contendo,  -tend^re,-tendi, 

-tentum. 
corn,  frumentum,  -i;  or  pi.  fru- 

menta. 
council,  concilium,  -i. 
country,  jTtnes,  -ium. 


courage,  animus,  -i ;  virtus,  -utis. 
course,  iter,  itineris  (Gr.  [115] ) . 
cross,  transeo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itum. 
crush,  opprimo,  -X)rimere,  -prcssi, 

-pressum. 
culture,  humanitas,  -dtis. 
custom,  institutum,  -i. 


daily  (adv.),  quotidie;  (adj.)  quo- 
tididnus,  -a,  -um  (or  cotidianus). 
danger  jyericiilum,  -i. 
dangevovLS,  periciilosus,  -a,  -um. 
dare,  audeo,  -ere,  ausus  (Gr.  [210], 

Cv)). 

daughter,  j^^za,  -ae. 

day,   dies,  -ei  (c);     two    days, 

biduum,  -i. 
daybreak,  pnma  lux. 
death,  mors,  -rtis. 
decide     on,     statuo,     -ii&re,    -ui, 

-utum. 
deep,  altus,  -a,  -um. 
defeat,  calamitas,  -dtis. 
deliver  (a  speech),  habeo,  -ere,  -ui, 

-itum. 
demand,  flagXto,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
depart,    discedo,    -cedere,    -cessi, 

-cessum. 
departure,  profectio,  -onis. 
depend,  nitor,  niti,  nisus  or  nixus. 
depth,  altitudo,  -inis. 
deserter,  perfuga,  -ae. 
desire,  cupiditas,  -dtis. 
desirous,  cupidus,  -a,  -um. 
differ,  differo,  -ferre,  distuli,  dild- 

tum. 
difficult,  diffictlis,  -e  (Gr.  121). 
discuss,  Jacio,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
dismiss,  dimitto,  -mittere,  -mlsi, 

-missum. 
distant,  to  be  distant,  absum. 
district,  pagus,  -i. 
distiirb,  perturbo,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
ditch, /o5sa,  -ae. 
Divico,  Divico,  -onis. 


106 


ENGLISH    INDEX. 


divide,  divido,  -vidh'e,  -vlsi,  -vi- 
sum. 

Divitiacus,  JDivitiacus,  -i. 

do,  facio,  facer e,  feci,  factum ;  (as 
an  auxiliary,  not  expressed  in 
Latin). 

doubt  (noun),  there  is  no  doubt, 
7ion  est  dubium. 

doubt  (verb),  dubito,  -are,  -dvi, 
-dtxim. 

draw,  circumduco,  -ducire,  -duxi, 
-ductum;  draw  up  (troops),  i7i- 
struo,  -struSre,  -struzi ,  -structum. 

drive  back,  rejicio,  -jicere,  -jeci, 
-jectum. 

Dubis,  Duhis,  -is. 

Dumnorix,  Dumndri'X,  -Xgis. 

dw^ell,  hablto,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtitm; 
incOlo,  -colSre,  -colui,  -cultum. 


each,   uterque,  -ttaque,  -trumqtie 

(Gr.  71);  to  each  other,  m^erse. 
eagerly,  most  eagerly,  cupidis- 

stme. 
eagerness,  cupidUas,  -dtis. 
earlier  than,  prius  .  .  .  quam. 
early,  early  in  the  night,  prima 

node. 
east,  oriens  sol. 
easy,  facUis,  -e. 
effeminate,   effemlno,  -are,   -dvi, 

-dtum. 
eighty,  octoc/inta. 
elated,  subldtxis,  -a,  -um. 
empty,  to  be  empty,  vaco,  -dre, 

-dci,  -dtum. 
encourage,  cohortor,  -«r?,  -dtus. 
end,  finis,  -is  (c.)- 
endure,  perf^ro.-ferre,  -tuli,  -Idtum. 
enemy,  hostis,  -is. 
envoy,  lef/dtus,  -i. 
equal,  par,  -is  (Gr.  [108]). 
even,  etiam. 
exact,    sumo,    sumSre,    sumpsi, 

sumptum. 


excellence,  bonitas,  -dtis. 
except,  praeter. 
extend,  pateo,  -ere,  -ui. 

P. 
fact,  res,  rei ;  often  expressed  also 

by  neut.   adj.,  e.g.,  hiec,  these 

facts, 
faith,  fides,  -^i. 
far  (adv.),  longe. 
farther,  ulterior,  -ius. 
father,  pater,  -tris. 
favor,   indulf/eo,  -Igere,  -Isi    (Gr. 

[269]). 
feelings,  animus,  -i. 
few,  pi.  oipaucus,  -o,  -um. 
fifteen,  quindScim. 
fight,  jjugna,  -ae. 
fight,  pugno,    -dre,    -dvi,    -dtum; 

contendo,   -tendSre,  -tendi,   -ten- 

tum. 
fill,  compleo,  -plere,  -plevi,  -pletum, 
find,  find  out,  reperio,  -ire,  rep- 

p^ri,  repertum. 
finish,  perficio,  -flc^re,  -feci,   -fee- 

tum. 
fire,  ignis,  -is. 
first,  primus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  [123])  ; 

at  first,  prima. 
five,  quinque. 

fix,  confirmo,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
flank,  latus,  -fris;    right  flank, 

latus  apertum  (open  side). 
flee,  fugio,  fugSre,fugi,fugXtum ; 

profugio. 
flight,  fuga,  -ae. 
flow, /uo,  -Mgre,  -uxi. 
follow,  sequor,  sequi,  secutus. 
following,  postl'rus,  -a,  -um. 
for  (on  account  of),  ob ;   for  the 

sake,  see  sake ;   in  behalf  of, 

jjro. 
forces,  copiae,  -drum. 
forced  marches  =  great  marches, 
forefathers,  majores,  -um. 
forest,  silva,  -ae. 


ENGLISH    INDEX. 


107 


forget,  ohliviscor,  -livisci,  -litus 
(Gr.  280). 

form,  facia,  fac^re,  feci,  factum. 

former,  pi'ior,  -ius  (Gr.  [123]). 

fort,  arx,  arcis. 

fortify,  munio,  -ire,  -Ivi,  -itum; 
communio. 

forty,  quadraginta. 

four,  quattuor. 

fourth,  quartus,  -a,  -um. 

free  from  blame,  purgdtus,  -a, 
-um. 

friend,  amicus,  -i. 

friendly,  amicus,  -a,  -um. 

friendship,  amicitia,  -ae. 

frighten,  perterreo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum. 

from,  de ;  (away  from),  «,  «&  ,• 
(out  from),  e,  ex ;  from  which, 
unde ;  from  one  another,  inter 
se. 

front,  in  front  of,  pro. 

tu.g\ti^re,fugiiivus,  -i. 

furnish,  facio,  fac^re,  feci,  fac- 
tum. 

future,  for  the  future,  in  reli- 
quum  tempus. 

G. 

gain,  concilio,   -are,  -dvi,  -dtum ; 

gain  a  request,  impetro,  -are, 

-avi,  -dtum. 
Garonne  (river),  Garumna,  -ae. 
Gaul,  Gallia,  -ae. 
Gaul,  a  Gaul,  Gallus ;  the  Gauls, 

Galh. 
■  German,  Germdnus,  -a,  -um  ;  the 

Germans,  Ger'mani. 
get,   get  possession  of,  potior, 

-iri,  -itus  (Gr.  [297])  ;  get  used, 

consuesco,  -suescere,  -suevi,  -su- 

etum. 
give,  do,  dare,  dedi,  datum. 
glory,  gloria,  -ae. 
go,  eo,  ire,  ivi,  or  ii,  itum  ;  se  con- 

f&ro,  -ferre,  -tUli,  -Idtum ;  profi- 


ciscor,  -ficisci,  -fectus  ;  go  on  = 

be  carried  on,  pass,  of  gero,  ge- 

rere,  gessi,  gestum. 
god,  deus,  -i  (Gr.  68). 
good,  bonus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  [123]). 
grain,  fru7nentum,  -i;  or  pi.,  fru- 

menta. 
great,  magnus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  [123]). 
greatly,  vehemcnter. 
greediness,  cupiditas,  -dtis. 


habit,  be  in  the  habit,  complete 
tenses  of  consuesco,  -suescSre, 
-suevi,  -suetum. 

Hseduan,  Ilaeduus,  -a,  -um. 

half,  half  way  up  the  hill,  in 
colle  medio ;  a  mile  and  a  half 
=  * '  one  thousand  and  five  hun- 
dred paces." 

hand,  manus,  -us  (f.). 

happen,  accido,  -cid^re,  -cidi. 

hard,  difficUis, -e  (Gr.  [123]). 

harm,  maleficium,  -i. 

Harudes,  Harudes,  -um. 

haste,  make  haste  =  hasten. 

hasten,  contendo,  -dire,  -di,  -turn ; 
maturo,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

have,  habeo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum;  ex- 
pressed also  by  dat.  of  possessor  ; 
have  to  (=must),  expressed  by 
pass,  periphr.  conj. ;  I  had  rather, 
malo,  malle,  malui. 

he,  is,  ille,  &c. ;  in  nom.  usually  ex- 
pressed by  the  verb-ending. 

height,  altitudo,  -inis. 

help,  auxilium,  -i. 

Helvetian,  Helvetius,  -a,  -um;  the 
Helvetians,  Helvetii. 

high,  altus,  -a,  -um. 

hill,  collis,  -is  (m.). 

himself,  ipse,  &c.  (ref.)  siii,  &c. 

hire,  mercede  arcesso,  -essere, 
-essivi,  -essitum;  (lit.  summon 
by  pay) ;  gen.  of  is,  ille,  &c.  (ref.) 
suus,  -a,  -um. 


108 


ENGLISH   INDEX, 


hither,  Hither  Gaul,  Gallia  ci- 
terior. 

hold,  teneo,  -ere,  -id,  -tain  ;  (hold 
assizes),  ago,  ar/erc,.  cgi,  ac- 
tum. 

home,  domus,  -us  (Gr.  [115]);  at 
home,  domi ;  homeward,  do- 
mum. 

honor,  honor,  -oris. 

hope,  spes,  spci. 

hope,  hope  for,  spero,  -are,  -dvi, 

-dtUTll. 

horseman,  eques,  -itis. 
hostage,  obses,  -idis. 
hostile,  inimlcus,  -a,  -um. 
house,  domus,  -us  (Gr.  [115]). 
huge,  inf/cns,  -ntis. 
hundred,  centum. 
hurt,     offendo,    -fendere,     -fendi, 
-fensum. 


I,  ego  (Gr.  124);  often  expressed  by 
the  verb-eudiug. 

import,  impjorto,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

important,  most  important, 
sumnius,  -a,  -um  (highest). 

in,  in  w.  abl.;  often  expressed  by 
abl.  or  loc.  case. 

incredible,  incredihllis,  -e. 

induce,  adduco,  -duc^re,  -duxi, 
-ductuni. 

inflict,  infcro,  -ferre,  -tiili,  -latum ; 
inflict  punishment  on,  suppli- 
cium  sumcre  de  (exact  punish- 
ment from) . 

influence,  auctoritas,  -dtis;  to 
have  influence,  possum. 

inhabit,  incolo,  -(Ire,  -ui. 

inhabitant,  incdla,  -ae. 

injury,  injuria,  -ae. 

intend  =  have  in  mind,  esse  alicui 

■  in  animo  ;  also  expressed  by  act. 
periphr.  conj. 

intercessor,  deprecdtor,  -oris. 

interests,  res,  rerum. 


interval,  intervcdlum,  -i. 
intervene,  passive  of  intermitto,. 

-mittere,  -misi,  -missuin. 
into,  in  w.  ace. 
it,  sui ;  is,  ea,  id;  ille,  &c. 
itself,  ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum.  • 


javelin,  pilum,  -i. 

join   (battle),   committo,    -mittere, 

-misi,  -missum. 
journey,  iter,  itincris  (Gr.  [115]).. 
Jura,  Jura,  -ae. 


keep,  keep  out,  prohiheo,  -ere, 
-ui,  -Itum;  keep  in,  contineo, 
-tinere,  -tinui  ,•  (=  stay),  se  teneo, 
-ere,  -ui,  -turn. 

kno'W,  cognosco,  -nosc^re,  -novi, 
-nltum. 

known,  to  make  known,  mintio, 
-dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

kill,  interjicio,  -ficire,  -feci,  -fee- 
tum. 

kind,  genus,  -iris. 

kindness,  beneficium,  -i. 

king-,  rer,  regis. 

kingdom,  re  gnu  m,  -i. 

kingly  power,  regnum,  -i. 

L. 

Labienus,  Labienus,  -i. 

lack,  inopia,  -ae. 

lake,  lacus,  -us  (Gr.  [110]). 

land,  ager,  -gri ;  lands  (=  coun- 
try), ^nes,  -ium. 

language,  lingua,  -ae. 

lapse,  after  a  lapse  of  three 
days,  triduo  intermisso. 

large,  magnus,  -a,  -um. 

larger,  major,  -us  (Gr.  [123] ) . 

largest,  maxlmus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.. 
[123]). 

last,  then  at  last ;  see  then. 


ENGLISH  INDEX. 


109 


lately,  mtper. 

law,  lex,  legis. 

lay  -waste,  popwZor,  -art,  -citus. 

lead,  duco,  ducerc,  dxixi,  ductum ; 
lead  forth  or  out,  educo ;  lead 
back,  reduco ;  lead  (=  induce) , 
induco. 

leadership,  principdtus,  -us. 

learn,  comperio,  -per'ire,  -peri,  -per- 
tum ;  intellego,  -Icfjere,  -lexi,  -lec- 
tum;  cognosco,  -noscere,  -novi, 
-nitum. 

least,  minimus,  -a,  -nm ;  (adv.) 
minime. 

leave,  relinquo,  -linquerc^  -Uqui, 
-lictum;  (=  go  away)  decedo, 
-cedire,  -cessi,  -cessum,  w.  prep. 
de;  discedo ;  egredior,  -gredi, 
-gressus,  w.  prep.  c. 

left,  reliquus,  -a,  -um. 

legion,  legio,  -onis. 

length,  longitudo,-inis;  inlength, 
in  longitudinem. 

less  (adj.),  minor,  -us. 

less  (adv.),  mirius. 

let,  in  hortatory  sentences;  ex- 
pressed in  Latin  by  the  subj. 

levy,  impero,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

line  (of  battle) ,  acies,  -ei. 

Lingones,  Lingdnes,  -um. 

Liscus,  Liscus,  -i. 

lost,  suhldtus,  -a,  -um  (taken  away). 

M. 

make,  facio,  fac^re,  feci,  factum ; 
make  (war) ,  infero,  gero ;  make 
use  of,  utor,  uti,  usus;  make 
(=  render,  cause  to  be),  efficio, 
-ficere,  -feci,  -fectum;  make 
a  stand ;  see  stand. 

man,  homo,  -inis;  vir,  viri.  "  Men  " 
is  often  expressed  by  using  a 
masculine  adjective. 

many,  pi.  of  multus,  -a,  -um. 

march  (noun),  iter,  itineris  (Gr. 
[115]). 


march   (verb)  =  make  a  march ; 

iter  facio,  facere,  feci,  factum. 
marriage,     matrimonium;     in 

marriage,  in  matrimonium. 
marry,  in  matrimonium  duco,  du- 

cere,   duxi,    ductum ;    also    duco 

alone, 
matter,  res,  rei. 
may,  in  wishes  expressed  by  subj. ; 

may  (=  one  is  permitted) ,  licet,. 

licere,  licuit,  licitum. 
mean,  designo,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
meanwhile,  interim. 
Messala,  Messdla,  -ae. 
Mettius,  Mettius,  -i. 
mile,  mille  passuum. 
mind,  mens,  -ntis. 
missile,  telum,  -i. 
month,  mensis,  -is. 
more,  plus  (Gr.  [92]  and  [123]). 
most,    to   be   most    powerful, 

plurimum  possum. 
mountain,  mons,  -ntis. 
move,  moveOy  -ere,  movi,  motum; 

commoveo. 
much,   multus,  -a,   -um ;    much 

(=  many  things),  mxdta. 
multitude,  midtitudo,  -inis. 
must,  expressed  by  pass.  peri.  conj» 
my,  meus,  -a,  -um. 

N. 

name,  nomen,  -Inis. 

narrow,  angustus,  -a,  -um. 

naXiion,  populus,  -i. 

nature,  natura,  -ae. 

nearer,  citerior,  -iiis  (Gr.  [123] ) . 

nearer  (adv.),  propiws  (Gr.  [123]). 

nearest,  proximus,  -a,  -um   (Gr. 

[123]  and  [268]). 
necessity,  from  necessity,  ne- 

cessario  (adv.). 
neighbor,  fijiitimus,  -i. 
neighboring,  proximus,   -a,  -um 

(Gr.  [123]). 


no 


ENGLISH   INDEX. 


neither,  neque  or  nee. 

ne-w,  novus,  -a,  -um. 

next  (following)  ,posferws,  ~a,  -um  ; 
proximus,  -a,  -um ;  on  the  next 
day,  postridie  or  postridie  ejus 
dm  (Gr.  [285]). 

no,  nullus,  -a,  -um ;  no  one,  nemo, 
-inis;  nullus. 

nobility,  nobilitas,  -dtis. 

noble,  nohilis,  -e. 

nor,  neque  or  nee;  neither . . .  nor, 
neque  . .  .  neque  or  nee  . .  .  nee. 

not,  non  ;  not  yet,  nondum. 

nothing-,  nihil  (indecl.). 

notice,  animum  adverto,  -vertire, 
-verti,  -versum,  or  animadverto. 

number,  numerus,-i;  large  num- 
ber, magna  copia. 

numerous,  multi,  -ae,  -a. 

O. 

oaithjusjurandum,  juris  juratidi ; 

take  an  oath,  juro,  -are,  -avi, 

-atum. 
occupy,  occiipo,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
of,  expressed  by  gen.  case. 
off,  shut  off ;  see  shut, 
often,  saepe. 

old,  vetus,  -iris ;  senex,  senis. 
on,  in  w.  abl. ;  often  expressed  by 

abl.  or  dat.  case ;  on  the  right 

■wing,  a  dextro  cornu. 
one,  unus,  -a,  -um  (Or.  71) ;  the 

one  . . ,  the  other,  alter . . .  alter; 

one  another,  with,  for,  to,  &c., 

one  another,  inter  se. 
only,  unus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  71). 
opportunity,  facultas,  -dtis. 
or,  aut. 

order,  jubeo,  -ere,  jussi,  jussum. 
Orgetorix,  Orgetdrix,  -Xgis. 
other,  alius,  -a,  -ud;   the  other 

(of  two),  alter,  -a,  -um. 
ought,  debeo,  -ere,  -ui,  -Uum ;  also 

expressed  by  pass,  periph.  conj. 


our,  noster,  -tra,  -trum. 

out,  out  of,  out  from,  e  or  ex ; 

go  out,  exeo,  exlre,  exii,  exUum. 
over,  cross  over  =  cross, 
overlook,   neglego,   -legSre,  -lexi, 

-lectum. 
own,  suus,  -a,  -um;  also  expressed 

by  gen.  case  of  ipse. 

P. 
pace,  p>assus,  -us. 
pair  of  compasses,  circXnus,  -i. 
panic,  timor,  -oris. 
pardon,  ignosco,    -noscPre,  -novi, 

-notum  (Gr.  [269]). 
part,  pars,  -rtis. 
party,  /actio,  -onis. 
pass,  come  to  i>&38,  jio,  JiPri,  fac- 

tilS. 

passage,  iter,  iiiniris  (Gr.  [115]). 

peace,  pax,  pads. 

people  (a  nation), ^wpw^^/s,  -i. 

perfectly,  expressed  by  superla- 
tive. 

perform,  facio,  factre,  feci,  fac- 
tum ;  conjicio,  perficio. 

permit,  it  is  permitted,  licet,  li- 
cere,  licuit,  licUum. 

persuade,  persuadeo,  -ere,  -sudsi, 
-stidsum. 

phalanx,  j^halanx,  -ngis. 

Piso,  Piso,  -onis. 

pitch  (a  camp),  pono,  ponSre,  po- 
sui,  posUum. 

place,  loctis,  -i  (Gr.  [116]). 

plenty,  cop/a,  -ae. 

popularity,  gratia,  -ae. 

position,  locus,  -i  (Gr.  [116]). 

possession,  get  possession ;  see 
get. 

possible,  as  possible,  quam  w. 
superl. 

post,  constituo,  -uSre,  -ui,  -utum. 

power,  potestas,  -dtis ;  (=  sway, 
upper  hand),  potentdtus,  -us; 
kingly  power,  regnum. 


ENGLISH   IISTDEX. 


Ill 


powerful,  to  be  powerful,  pos- 
sum, posse,  potui. 
prefer,  malo,  malle,  malui. 
prepare,    compdro,    -are,    -dvi, 

-dtum. 
prepared  (=  ready),  pardtus,  -a, 

-um. 
present,  praesens,   -ntis;    to  be 

present,  adsum. 
prevent,  prohibeo,  -ere,  -m,  -itum. 
prisoner,  hostis  captus;  captivus, 

-L 
■prrvilege,facuUas,  -dtis. 
prolong-,  cluco,  ducSre,  duxi,  duc- 

tuin. 
promise,  poUiceor,  -eri,  -Uus. 
proper,    it    is    proper,    oportet, 

oportere,  oportuit. 
province,  provincia,  -ae. 
punishment,  supplicium,  -i. 
pursue,  sequor,  sequi,  secutus ;  in- 

sequor. 
put,  put  an  end  =  make  an  end ; 

put    around,    circvmdo,  -dare, 

-dedi,  -datum  (Gr.  226). 


raft,  ratis,  -is. 

rather ;  see  have. 

ready,  pardtus,  -a,  -um. 

reason,  causa,  -ae. 

receive,  capio,  capere,  cepi,  cap- 
turn;  accipio. 

record,  tabula,  -ae. 

reduce,  redigo,  -ig^re,  -egi,  -ac- 
tum. 

refinement,  cultus,  -us. 

refrain,  temp^ro,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum,. 

region,  regio,  -onis. 

remain,  supersum,  -esse,  -fui,  -fu- 
turus. 

remaining",  reliquus,  -a,  -um. 

report,  nuntio,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum; 
enuntio,  renuntio. 

repulse,  propulso,-dre,  -dvi,-dtum. 


request,  gain  a  request,  impS- 

tro,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
rescue,  eripio,  -ripSre,  -ripui,  -rep- 

tum. 
resist,  suhsisto,  -sistere,  -stiti,  -stl- 

tum. 
resolve,  he  resolved  =  it  pleased 

him,  pjlacuit  ei. 
rest  of,  reliquus,  -a,  -um. 
retreat,  petZem  reflro,  -ferre,-tuli, 

-latum. 
return,  reditio,  -onis. 
return,  redeo,  -Ire,  -ii,  -Hum;  re- 

vertor,  -certi,  -versus;  also  act. 

reverto ;  se  recipio,  -cipSre,  -cepi, 

-ceptum. 
revolution,  res  novae. 
Rhine  (river),  Rhenus,  -i. 
Rhone  (river),  Bhoddnus. 
right,  right  flank  ;  see  flank, 
ripe,  m.aturt(s,  -a,  -um. 
river,  flumeri;  -inis. 
road,  via,  -ae. 
Roman,  Romdnus,  -a,  -um. 
Rome,  Roma,  -ae. 
room,  spatium,  -i. 
rouse  up,  incito,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
route,  iter,  itinPris  (Gr.  [115]). 
royal  power,  regnum. 
run  up,  accurro,  -currSre,  -curri, 

-cursum. 

S. 
sake,  for  the  sake,  causa. 
same,  idem,  eddem,  idem. 
save,   eripio,  -ripSre,  -ripui,  -rep- 

tum. 
say,  dico,  dicSre,  dixi,  dictum. 
second,  alter,  -a,  -\im. 
see,  video,  -ere,  vidi,  visum;  con- 

spicor,  -dri,  -dtus. 
seek,  appHo,  -petere,  -petlvi,  -peti- 

tum. 
seize,  occupo,  -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
senate,  sendtus,  -us. 
send,  mitto,  mittSre,  misi,  missum. 


112 


ENGLISH   INDEX. 


Sequanian,  Sequanvs,  -a,  -um. 
set,  constituo,  -were,  -ui,  -utum; 

set  out,  proJicAscor,  -ficisci,  -fec- 

tus. 
seventh,  septimus,  -a,  -um. 
severe,     gravis,     -e;     severest 

(=  greatest),  summus,  -a,  -urn. 
severely,  firaviter,  vehementer. 
ship,  7iavis,  -is  (Gr.  [99]). 
shortest,  proximus,  -a,  -um. 
shut     off,     intercludo,     -cludere, 

-clusi,  -clusum. 
signal,  signum,  -i. 
situation,  locus,  -i  (Gr.  [116]). 
six,  sex. 

six  hundred,  sescenti,  -ae,  -a. 
sixteen,  sedecim. 
size,  magnitudo,  -inis. 
slain,  the  slain,  occisi,  -drum. 
slaughter,  interuecio,  -onis. 
slay,  interjicio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fec- 

tum ;  concldo,  -cidSre,  -cidi. 
small,  parvus,  -a,  -um. 
smaller,  minor,  -us  (Gr.  [123]). 
so,  ita. 

soil,  solum.,  -i. 

soldier,  iniles,  -Uis.  ^ 

some,  nonnullus,  -a,  -um;  som© 

.  .  .  others,  alii  ,  .  .  alii. 
son,  filius,  -i. 
sorrow,  dolor,  -oris. 
space,  spatium. 
speak,  loquor,  loqui,  locutus. 
speech,  oratio,  -onis. 
spirit,  animus,  -i. 
spring"  up,  innascor,  -nasci,  -ndtus. 
stand,    make     a    stand,    insto, 

-stare,  -instUi ;    take   a  stand, 

consisto,  -sistere,  -stUi,  -stitum. 
Btaxt,  proficiscor,  -ficisci,  -fectus. 
state,  civitas,  -atis. 
stone,  lapis,  -Idis  (c). 
stop,    lyrohiheo,   -ere,   -ui,    -Uum; 

(=  make  au  end) ,  finem  facio, 

facere,  feci,  facUim. 
strongly,  gravUer. 


successive,  continuus,  -a,  -um.. 
sudden,  subitus,  -a,  -um. 
suddenly,  repente. 
Suevi,  Suevi,  -drum. 
suitable,  idoneus,  -a,  -um,. 
summon,  voco,  -are,  -avi,  -dtum. 
sunset,  solis  occdsus,  -us. 
supply  (noun),  cojna,  -ae. 
supply  (verb),  supporto,-dre,-dvi, 

-dtum. 
surrender,  deditio,  -onis. 
surround,    cingo,  cingere,   cinxi, 

cinctum. 
survive,  supersum,  -esse,  -fui,  -fu- 

iurus. 
suspect,  suspxcor,  -dri,  -dtus. 
suspicion,  saspicio,  -o7iis. 
S"way,  imperium,  -i;  dicio,  -onis. 
swiftly,  celeriter. 
sw^ord,  gladius,  -i. 


take,  capio,  capPre,  cepi,  captum ; 
take  away,  aufero,  -ferre,  ah- 
stuli,  abldtum ;  tollo,  tollere,  sus- 
tuli,  subldtum;  take  an  oath, 
juro,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

teach,  instituo,  -uSre,  -ui,  -utum. 

tear,  lacrima,  -ae. 

tell,  nuntio,  -drc,  -dvi,  -dtum; 
p.nuntio,  renuntio ;  (=  order) ,  ju- 
beo,  jubere,  Jussi,  jussum. 

ten,  decern. 

tenth,  declmus,  -a,  -um. 

territories,  _//7ies,  -ium. 

than,  quam ;  also  expressed  by  abl. 
ease. 

that  (demon.),  is,  ea,  id;  ille,  ilia, 
illud;  iste,  ista,  istud ;  (relat.), 
qui,  q^iae,  quod. 

that  (couj.),  ut,  quin;  that  not, 
ne ;  but  that,  quin.  The  Eng- 
lish conj.  that  in  indirect  quota- 
tions is  omitted  in  Latin,  where 
the  infin.  is  used. 

the,  omitted  in  Latin. 


ENGLISH   INDEX. 


113 


their,  siius,  -a,  -um ;  when  not  re- 
flexive, expressed  by  the  gen.  case 
of   a   pronoun,    eorum,    illorum, 
&c. 
themselves,  sui;  ipse. 
then,  turn ;  then  at  last,  turn  de- 
mum. 
there  (introductory) ,  not  expressed 

in  Latin, 
there  (adv.  =  in  that  place),  ibi. 
these ;  see  this. 

thing-,  res,  rei ;  often  expressed  by 
a    neuter    adjective ;    e.g.    haec, 
these    thing's;     multa,    many 
things, 
think,  existimo,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 
third,  tertius,  -a,  -um. 
thirteen,  tredecim. 
this,  hie,  haec,  hoc ;  is,  ea,  id. 
those,  ii,  eae,  ea,  &c.;  illi,  illae, 

ilia,  &c. 
thousand,  mille  (Gr.  [118]). 
three,  tres,  tria;  three  days,  tri- 

dumn. 
through,  per. 
throw,  jacio,  jacSre,  jeci,jactum  ; 

conjicio,  -jicSre,  -jeci,  -jectum. 
thus,  ita. 

Tigurinus,  Tigurinus,  -i. 
time,  tempus,  -Oris. 
to,  ad,  in ;  often  expressed  by  dat. 

or  ace.  case, 
together,    usually    expressed    by 
con-;    e.g.     convdco,     call    to- 
gether, &c. 
too,  expressed  by  comparative. 
top,  expressed  by  summus  in  agree- 
ment, 
torture,  crucidtus,  -us. 
toward,  ad. 
town,  oppidum,  -i. 
trader,  msrcdtor,  -oris. 
train,  exerceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -Uum. 
treat,  ago,  ag^re,egi, actum;  treat 
as  enemies  =  hold  in  the  num- 
ber of  enemies. 


tribe,  tribe  by  tribe,  generdtim 

(adv.  "tribewise"). 
trickery,  dolus,  -i. 
troops,  copiae,  -drum. 
trust,   co7ifido,   -fidere,   -fisus,  w. 

dat.  (Gr.  [269])  or  abl.  (Gr.  295). 
try,  Conor,  -dri,  -dtus. 
turn,  verto,  vertere,  verti,  versum ; 

turn  away,  averto. 
twenty,  viginti. 

two,   duo,  -ae,  -o   (Gr.  72);   two 
•    days,  biduum,  -i. 
two  hundred,  ducenti,  -ae,  -a. 

Ubii,  Ubii,  -orum. 

under,  sub ;  under  the  sway,  in 

dicidne. 
undergo,  subeo,  -Ire,  -ii,  -Uum. 
undertake,  suscipio,  -clpSre,  -cepi, 

-ceptum. 
unfavorable,  alienus,  -a,  -um. 
unwilling,  invitus,  -a,  -um ;  to  be 

unwilling,  nolo,  nolle,  nolui. 
upbraid,  incuso,  -dre,  -dvi;  -dtum. 
use,  vtor,  uti,  usus  (Gr.  [297]). 
used,  get  used ;  see  get. 
useful,    to    be    useful,  prosum, 
prodesse,  profui,  profuturus. 

V. 

Verbigenus,  Verbigenus, -i. 
very,  expressed  by  the  superlative, 
victory,  victoria,  -ae. 
vigorously,  acriter. 
village,  vlcus,  -i. 
violence,  vis,  vis  (Gr.  [115]). 
visit,    commeo,   -dre,  -dvi,  -dtum; 
w.  prep.  ad. 

W. 

wage,  gero,  gerere,  gessi,  gestum. 
wait,  moror,  -dri,  -dtus. 
wall,  murus,  -i. 


114 


ENGLISH   INDEX. 


wander,  vagor,  -dri,  -dtus. 

war,  helium,  -i. 

warn,  moneo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itum. 

waste,  lay  waste  ;  see  lay. 

watch,  vigilia,  -ae. 

way,  via,  -ae ;  half  way  up ;  see 
half. 

we,  nos;  often  expressed  in  verb- 
ending. 

weaken,  effemino,-dre,-dvi,  -dtum. 

what,  qualis,  -e ;  qui,  quae,  quod. 

which  (relat.),  qui,  qtiae,  quod; 
from  which,  unde. 

while,  dum;  often  expressed  by 
abl.  abs. 

who  (rel.),  qui,  quae,  quod;  (in- 
terrog.),  quis?  quae?  quid? 

whole,  totus,  -a,  -um  (Gr.  71); 
omnis,  -e. 

will  (vb.),  expressed  by  future 
tense). 

will,  against  my  will,  =  I  [be- 
ing] unwilling,  abl.  abs. 

wine,  vinum,  -i. 

wing,  cornu,  -us. 

winter,  hi^mo,  -are,  -dvi,  -dtum. 

wish,  volo,  velle,  volui. 


with,  cum,  apud ;  often  expressed 

by  abl.  case, 
within,  intra  (time  within  which 

expressed  by  abl.  case), 
without,  sine. 
witness,  testis,  -is. 
word,  verbiim,  -i;  bring  word; 

see  bring, 
work,  ojjus,  -iris. 
wound,  vulnus,  -eris. 
wrong,  injuria,  -ae. 


Y. 

year,  annus,  -i. 

yet,  not  yet,  nondum. 

you,  tu,  te  or  vos  ;  often  expressed 

by  verb-ending. 
younger,  jimior  (Gr.  [123]). 
your,  tidis,  -a,  -um ;  vester,  -tra, 

-trum. 
yourselves,  vos. 


Z. 
zeal,  alacrltas,  -dtis. 


J.  S-  Cubbing  &;  Co.,  Printers,  115  High  Street,  Boston. 


1 

[For  Allen  &  Greenough's  Caesar;  four  books  with  vocabulary.] 

PAEALLEL  EEFERENOES   TO    BLACKBURN'S    "ESSENTIALS 
OF    LATIN    GRAMMAR." 

[Unbrackctcd  references  are  to  the  head  matter.  The  corresponding  note  should 
always  be  read  also,  and  the  illustrations  studied. 

Bracketed  references  are  to  the  notes.  When  a  note  contains  more  than  one  para- 
graph, a  small  figure  at  the  right  is  used  to  show  the  paragrajjh  referred  to.] 

BOOK   I. 

Chap.  I.  est  divisa,  [344].  —  lingua,  300.  —  dividit,  [257]^.  —  horum, 
283.  —  effeminandos,  349,  [349]"^.  —  Germanis,  271.  —  qua  de  causa, 
443.  —  quam  .  .  .  dictum  est,  [322]2,  337. 

Chap.  II.  ]V[essala,  etc.,  487,  307.  —  civitati  persuasit,  [209]^.  —  ut 
exirent,  [325]".  —  cum  praestarent,  [328].  —  imperio,  [297]^.  —  hoc,  298. 

—  id,  [269]3.  _  fiebat,  [309]3.  — ut  .  .  .  possent,  [326]  5.  — bellandi,  [288]. 

—  adficiebantur,  [12]  (/). 

Chap.  III.  quae  pertinerent,  [322]^.  —  comparare,  338.  —  ut  occuparet, 
[325]",  [269] 3,  [311] 2.  —  perfacile  factu,  352.  —  non  esse  dubium  quin, 
[326]  1.  —  regno  occupato,  307,  [346].  —  Galliae,  [290]. 

Chap.  IV.  ut  crcmaretur,  [326]^.  —  igni,  [99]*.  —  die  constituta,  60, 
301.  —  causae,  288.  —  cum  conaretur,  [330]  i. 

Chap.  V.   arbitrati  sunt,  [330]  i.  —  domum,  265.  —  receptos,  [346]. 

Chap.  VI.  possent,  316.  —  singuli,  [118].  —  locis,  [299].  —  a.  d.  v. 
Kal.  Apr.,  [268]^,  496. 

Chap.  VII.  qui  dicerent,  325.  —  sibi,  270.  —  ut  liceat,  [325]^.  —  Cas- 
sium  .  .  .  occisum,  338.  —  concedendum,  [348].  —  animo,  305.  —  itineris 
faciundi,  349.  —  dum  convenirent,  [330]*.  —  reverterentur,  324. 

Chap.  VIII.   quo  .  .  .  possit,  325,  [325]3.  —  si  .  .  .  possent,  328. 

Chap.  IX.    novis  rebus,  [269]3. 

Chap.  X.   ut  haberet,  [326]*,  [326]^. 

Chap.  XI.   depopulatis  agris,  [346]. 

Chap.  XII.   flumen,  [268].  —  Ararim,  [99]i.  —  mandarunt,215. 

Chap.  XIII.  pontem  faciendum,  [349]-2.  —  intelligerent,  [330]i.  — 
diebus,  301.  —  incommodi,  280. 

Chap.  XIV.  eo  .  .  .  quo,  [298]2.  —  quod  si,  [267].  —  vexassent,  322.  — 
cum,  [329]. 

Chap.  XVI.  cotidie,[12]2.—  Haeduos frumentum,[262]5.  —  flagitare,342. 

Chap.  XVII.  ne  .  .  .  conferat,  [325] 2.  —  dubitare  quin,  [326].  — 
Haeduis,  [269]^. 

Chap.  XIX.   conaretur,  [330]^. 

Chap.  XX.   futurum  uti,  476.  —  faciat,  [325]^.  —  tanti,  274. 

Chap.  XXI.    qui  cognoscerent,  325. 

Chap.  XXII.   milia,  266.         Chap.  XXIII.    diei,  [285] 3. 

Chap.  XXIV.   qui  sustineret,  325.         Chap.  XXV.   impedimento,  272. 

Chap.  XXVI.   coniciebant,  [12]  (c).  —  Lingonas,  [74]2. 

Chap.  XXXI.  Caesari,  [269].  —  adamassent,  215.  —  quo  minus  essent, 
[325]3.  —  banc  consuetudinem,  440.  —  vicerit,  322.  —  quin  sumat,  [326]i. 

—  Ehenum,  [268]. 

Chap.  XXXII.    Sequanis,  270. 

Chap.  XXXIII.  curae,  272.  —  ut  fecissent,  333.  —  quibus  rebus,  [269]*. 

Chap.  XXXVI.   qui  f aceret,  [328] . 

Chap.  XXXVII.   qui  .  .  .  essent,  322.  —  resisti,  234,  [235],  end. 

Chap.  XXXIX.   quam  diceret,  [322]5.  —  ut  .  .  .  posset,  [325]^. 


Chap.  XL.  cur  .  .  .  judicaret,  317,  472.  —  sibi  persuaderi,  234,  [235], 
end.     potuerint,  [312]. 

Chap.  XLI.    imperatoris,  [285]. 

Chap.  XLII.    equitibus,  [269]^.  —  si  quid,  [267].  —  facto,  [297]3.    . 

Chap.  XLIY.    si  remittatur,  331,  460. 

Chap.  XL VI.    omni  Gallia,  294. 

Chap.  XLVIL  uti  constitueret,  [325] 7.  —  quin  conicerent,  [326].  — 
civitate,  297. 

Chap.  L.   utrum  .  .  .  necne,  432,  433. 

Chap.  LII.   phalangas,  [74]^. 

'  BOOK   II. 
Chap.  I.   vererentur,  322.  —  novis  imperils,  [269]^. 
Chap.  III.   opinione,  [296]  (d).  —  exBelgis,  [284]*.  —  potuerint,  [312]. 
Chap.  V.   rci  publicae,  291. 

Chap.  VII.    subsidio,  272.  —  potiundi   oppidi,  349,   [297]^.  —  omnibus 
copiis,  304.  —  amplius,  266  or  [296]  (e). 
Chap.  X.   convenirent,  [325p. 
Chap.  XVII.   ex  .  .  .  Gallis,  [284]*. 
Chap.  XIX.  hostis,  [99]^. 
Chap.  XXI.   posset,  [326]2.  —  defuerit,  [312]. 
Chap.  XXVII.   quo  praefcrrent,  [325]3. 
Chap.  XXX.   contomptui,  272. 
Chap.  XXXIL   ne  quani,  [140]. 
Chap.  XXXIII.   pellibus,  297. 

BOOK   III. 
Chap.  V.   pugnaretur,  [309]  ■•^. 
Chap.  VI.   sui  colligendi,  [348J2. 
Chap.  VII.    mare,  [208]='. 
Chap.  VIII.   quam  acccperant,  478. 
Chap.  IX.    ut  acciderent,  [321]-2. 
Chap.  X.    retentorum  equitum,  347. 
Chap.  XI.   adeat,  [325]5. 
Chap.  XXVI.    prius  .  .  .  quam  .  .  .  posset,  [330]^. 

BOOK    IV. 
Chap.  I.   premebantur,  [309]'-. 
Chap.  II.   desiderent,  [322]^,  compare  [333]. 
Chap.  IV.   prius  quam  fieret,  [330]^ 
Chap.  V.   cousuetudinis,  [285]. 
Chap.  XII.   amplius  octingentos,  [296]  (e). 
Chap.  XIV.   -ne  .  .  .  an  .  .  .  an,  [314]*. 
Chap.  XVII.   deiciendi  operis,  [349]^. 
Chap.  XIX.   uti  convenirent,  [325]'. 

Chap.  XXI.  qui  poUiceantur,  325.  —  dare,  335.  —  magni,  [274].  — 
auderet,  [311]2. 

Chap.  XXIII.   convenirent,  [330]*.  —  ut  quae  haberet,  [328]. 

Chap.  XXIV.   copiis,  304.  —  generis,  [288], 

Chap.  XXVII.   ignoscere,  [338]. 

Chap.  XXX.   hoc,  297. 

Chap.  XXXII.   geruntur,  [309]  i.  —  ventitaret,  [247]^. 

Chap.  XXXIV.    quae  continerent,  [326]^. 

Chap.  XXXV.   tanto  spatio,  302. 


[For  Allen  &  Greenough's  Cicero.] 

PAEALLEL    KEPEEENOES    TO   BLACKBURN'S    "ESSENTIALS 
OP    LATIN    GEAMMAE." 


[Unbracketecl  references  are  to  the  head  matter.  The  corresponding  note  should 
always  be  read  also,  and  the  illustrations  studied. 

Bracketed  i-eferenccs  are  to  the  notes.  When  a  note  contains  more  than  one  para- 
graph, a  small  figure  at  the  right  is  used  to  show  the  paragraph  referred  to.] 


DEFENCE  OF  ROSCIUS. 

1.  Mirari  .  .  .  surrexerim,  etc.,  408-475 ;  for  the  order,  see  479-482. 
cum  sedeant,  [328].  sim,  [333].  defendere,  335.  ut  adsint,  [320]  5.  _ 
2.  istius,  440.  sim,  310.  aliis,  [209]  2.  me,  485.  Rosci,  07.  reciperem, 
325,  [311]  1.  fecisset,  327.-3.  dixero,  [331].  concedi,  234.  ignosci, 
[209]  3.  —  4.  petitum  sit,  310.  ut  dicerent,  [325]  \  ut  arbitrarentur,  320, 
[311].     ei  .  .  .  qui,  440.      debeam,   [320]  2.      causae,  209.      utne,  [325]^. 

—  5.  ereptum,  [340].  —  6.  rectum  [esse]  se  pugnare,  38,  337.  proscribe- 
rentur,  [330]  1.  —  7.  isti,  440.     quod  sciam,  [207].  —  8.  judicatote,  [315]  3. 

—  9.  Ameriam,  205.  —  10.  tris,  [99]  &.  Tiberim,  [99]  ^.  ne  teneam, 
[325]  ^.  —  12.  despexerit,  333.  ut  moliantur,  325.  quamvis  felix  sit, 
[321]2.  qui  habeat,  [320]  2.  —  13.  qui  solvisset,  [320]  2.  eicit,  [12]  (c). 
qui  fuisset,  [320]  2.     domum,  205.     auferebat,  [309]  3.     urbe  tota,  [299]. 

—  15.   nobilis,  [99]  5.    qui  peterent,  325.     vellem,  322.  —  17.   dome,  [293]. 

—  18.  ut  pugnarent,  [320]  ^.  de  parricidio  [284]  ^.  eum  jugulandum, 
[349]  2.  —  19.  pater  occisus,  347.  ut  optet,  [320]  5.  qui  dicat,  325.  — 
21.  si  postularet,  331,  312.  auditum  sit,  450.  —  22.  major,  [290]  (e). 
de  luxuria,  [284]  3.  _  30.   venisses,  [320].  —  32.   tibi,  209.     veniat,  [325]  5. 

—  33.  poterat,  449.  possis,  310.  —  41.  diem,e0.  —  42.  pernicii,  [58]2. — 
43.    ut    componeretur,    [320]  5.      retineretur,    310.  —  45.  verear,    [328]. 

—  48.  quod,  quia,  [328].  —  50.  quasi  nescias,  [327]  3.  —  54.  condemna- 
retis,    [311].  —  55.    an    vero,    434.  —  57.   hominibus,  209. 

IMPEACHMENT   OF  VERRES. 

3.  judicaveritis,  [331].  —  partim,  [101],  [248],  [207].  devitaverim, 
333.  —  4.    dictitat,  [247]  1.  —  5.    cadit,  [309]  2.  —  10.  constitueret,  [320]  5. 

—  14.  commemorare,  335.  —  24.  agere,  335.  —  29.  expediat,  [320]  2,  — 
31.  Nonae,  490.  —  44.  fuisse  desideraturos,  409.  —  56.   fuisse,  405. 


PLUNDER   OF   SYRACUSE. 
1.   hanc,  illo,  440.  —  12.   eat,  321. 

CRUCIFIXION  OF  A  ROMAN  CITIZEN. 

1.  dicam,  [309]  2.  quae  sint,  [326]  2.  tenereni,  [311].  —  2.  nescio 
qua,  [323]-.  — 6.  quemquam,  444.  —  10.  induatur,  154,  [267]  2. — 
12.    quod  velit,   [326]  2. 

THE   MANILIAN   LAW. 
3.   laetandum,  234,  [235],  end.     mihi,  270.  —  13.    coramendetis,  [320]  3. 

—  19.  memoria,  299.  amiserant,  [330].  —  22.  dum  conligunt,  [309]  1. — 
27.  haberetis,  320.  superarit,  [320]  2.  —  38.  existimetis,  317.  —  49.  quin 
conferatis,  [326]  1.  —  50.  erat  diligendus,  455.  —  53.  an,  434.  —  57.  ne 
legaretur,  325.  utrura  .  .  .  an,  432.  —  59.  cum  quaereret,  [330].  quo  .  .  . 
hoc,  [298]  2.  —  64.  parendum,  234,  [235],  end.  —  66.  idoneus,  etc.,  [326]  3. 
quasi  non  videanius,  [327]  ^.  —  70.   putem,  322.  —  71.  videar,  326. 

CATILINE  I. 

2.  oportebat,  [309]  2.  —  6.   fateatur,  [326]  2.  —  6.   recognoscas,  [325]  ^ 

—  7.  in  ante  diem,  [268]  2.  sui  conservandi,  [348]  2.  cum .  dicebas, 
[330]  1.  —8.  quam  te,  477.  —  8.  uUo,  444.  —9.  gentium,  [283].  —  10.  id 
temporis,  [283].  desiderant,  [309]  2.  —  H.  videbani,  [309]  3.  _  18.  mihi, 
[269]2.  —  22.  duint,  [226].  est  tanti,  [274].— 27.  mactari,  338.— 
31.  nescio  quo  pacto,  [323]*.  —  33.   arcebis,  [315]^. 

CATILINE   II. 

3.  accuset,  [326]  2.  —  4.  rideretis,  333.  eduxisset,  320.  mihi,  209.  — 
5.  mallem,  316.  eduxisset,  [325]  ^.  —  7.  ejecerit,  [331].  conceperit, 
[326]  2.     tota  Italia,  [299].  —  9.    possitis,  325.  —  11.   nescio  quod,  [323]  *. 

—  13.   ei,  [270].  —  14.   eiciebam,  [309]  3.      velint,  [326]  2.  _  18.   sis,  317. 

—  19.   non  vident,  430. 

CATILINE   III. 

7.   deferrem,   [322]  s.  _  8.    ut    uteretur,    [325]  ".  —  9.    defuturas,  468. 

—  15.  occideret,  [326] 3.  —  20.  conlocandum,  [349]  2.  —  22.  quo,  [298]  2. 
si  dicam,  [331]. 

CATILINE   IV. 

6.   jam  pridem  videbam,  [309]  2.  _  9.   mea,  [291].  —  12.    huic,  [269]. 

—  17.   futurum  fuit,  449,  455. 

ARCHIAS. 

4.  urbe,  [254]  2.  _  25.    civitate,  297.  —  31.    quae  comprobetur,  [326]  2. 


[For  Allen's  Latin  Composition.] 

PAEALLEL    EEPEEENOES    TO   BLAOKBUEN'S    "ESSENTIALS 
or    LATIN    QEAMMAE." 


[The  unbracketed  references  are  to  the  head  matter  in  coarse  print.  They  should 
be  carefully  memorized,  and  the  notes  and  illustrations  to  them  should  be  carefully 
studied  and  mastered. 

Bracketed  references  are  to  the  notes.  When  only  a  part  of  the  note  is  included  in 
the  reference,  the  paragraph  is  indicated  by  a  small  figure  at  the  right.  References  in 
the  foot-notes  are  Indicated  as  there  by  a,  b,  c,  etc.] 


1.  254,255,257. 

2.  262.     Notes  :  c,  adjectives  are  often  used  substantively  as  in  English ; 

f,  "inter  se";  y,  " remaining  Gauls " ;  A,  300;  i,  [308]^. 

3.  426-434.     Comp.  [314].     Notes  :  b,  431 ;  c,  420;  d,  432;  a,  273,  299. 

4.  435-445,  256,  [257]2.     Notes:  a,  "in  which  day";  c,  [298]2;  /,  quod  to 

agree  with  "  head." 

8.  262,  [268].     Notes  :  a,  [116] ;  b,  use  prep,  a;  g,  254. 

9.  269,234. 

10.  277,  280,  281,  289,  290,  291,  [297]^.     Note  :  a,  capitis,  [289]. 

11.  [285],  [288],  [290].     Notes:  c,  [288];  e,  [285]. 

12.  271.     For  the  dat.  with  adjs.  a  prep,  is  often  used  in  the  same  sense. 

13.  294,  296,  297,  298,  [290],  [300],  [303].     Notes :  a,  [296]  (c),  the  same  is 

true  of  adverbs  also;  b,  [296]  (e). 

14.  264,  267.     Note  :  g,  [267]2. 


15.  269,  270,  272.     Note;  a,  "to  [you]  entering." 

16.  295,  297,  300,  303,  305,  306,  [274].    Note:  b,  [300],  [303]. 

17.  265,  266,  273,  284,  293,  299,  301, 487,  [268].     Notes:  a,  [309]i;  b,  [254]2; 

c,  490;  i,  [273]  1. 

18.  213,  345,  348,  349.     Note  :  a,  270. 

19.  316,  317,  318-321,  [315].     Note:  a,  [296],  end. 

20.  311,  312. 

21.  327,  331,  448.     Notes:  a,  450;  d,  [332],  452. 

22.  328,  330.     Note  :  a,  [309]  K 

23.  325,  326,  351,  [346].     Note:  e,  [309]5. 

24.  337,  338.     The  tenses  of  the  infinitives  and  participles  denote  time, 

present,  past,  or  future,  relative  to  the  time  of  the  verb  on  which 
they  depend.     Note  :  i,  [340]  2. 


27.  323,  324,  469-472. 

28.  323.     Notes:  c,  139;  e,  [311]2. 

29.  [325]',  [326]5. 

30.  281,291. 

31.  [255]5,  [285]. 

33.  315,  318-321. 

34.  346. 

35.  270,  351,  352.     Note:  a,  make  the  relative  agree  with  Argei,  [256]. 

37.  [254]. 

38.  283,  284,  286,  288,  [285].     Notes:   e,  [288]  ;  h,  [325]^. 

39.  277,280,281,291. 

40.  [269].     Note  :  /,  coepi  takes  the  passive  form  when  followed  by  a 

passive  infinitive. 

44.  274,  294,  296,  298,  303,  [297]--2,  [297]^,  [300]. 

45.  266,301,490-493. 

46.  265,  266,  273,  284,  293,  299,  [297]*. 

47.  [255],  [257]2. 

Adjs.  are  often  used  substantively,  the  masc.  denoting  persons ; 
the  neut.,  things. 

Certain  adjs.  designate  a  part ;  e.g. :  sumvms  mons  =  top  of  the 
mountain ;   media  nox  =  midnight. 

An  adj.  limiting  the  subject  often  has  the  same  force  as  an  adv. 
limiting  the  verb. 

alius  .  .  .  alium  —  one  another;    alter  .  .  .  alterum  =  each  other. 
49.   441,  442. 
62.   Note:  c,  [274]. 
54.   327,  449-452,  [332]2. 
65.   346,  [316],  [321]-'. 

56.  329,  [321]2,  [327]^,  [330]8. 

57.  [309],  [330]. 

58.  [329],  [330]. 

60.  325. 

61.  [325]8,  [325]*,  [326]. 

62.  [326]2,  [326]3,  [328].     A  clause  of  characteristic  or  of  result  is  found 

after  quani,  than;    e.g.:  sollertior  est  qiiam  qui  (or  ut)  decipi  possit, 
he  is  too  shrewd  to  be  tricked. 


ye   1 2420 


